Trip Rite Inglés PDF

"Uncontrolled Copy"
"Uncontrolled Copy"
TripRite™ Installation and Maintenance Manual Preface
Preface
This manual is provided as a guide to personnel involved with the operation, maintenance and repair of this mining
shovel. We recommend that such personnel review and become familiar with the general procedures and informa-
tion contained within this manual. In addition, we recommend that this manual be kept readily available for refer-
ence when repairs or maintenance are necessary.
Due to the complexities of mining equipment and the environment in which it operates, situations may arise which
are not directly discussed in detail in this manual. When such a situation arises, past experience, availability of
equipment, and common sense play a large part in what steps are to be taken. In addition, a P&H MinePro Ser-
vices Representative is available to answer your questions and assist you upon request.
Copyright
Copyright © 2006 P&H Mining Equipment, Inc. All rights reserved. All materials contained herein are protected
by United States copyright law and international treaties, and may not be reproduced, distributed, transmitted,
displayed, published or broadcast without the prior written permission of P&H Mining Equipment, Inc. You may
not alter or remove any trademark, copyright or other notice from copies of the content. All rights in translations
of these materials shall remain exclusively with P&H Mining Equipment, Inc.
Copyright © 2006 P&H Mining Equipment, Inc. Peak Services

Preface.fm -i- Preface, Version 00 - 09/06
"Uncontrolled Copy"
Preface TripRite™ Installation and Maintenance Manual
Peak Services Copyright © 2006 P&H Mining Equipment, Inc.

Preface, Version 00 - 09/06 -ii- Preface.fm
"Uncontrolled Copy"
TripRite™ Installation and Maintenance Manual Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Copyright i
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
SECTION 1, Shovel Safety

1.1 General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
1.1.1 Safety Websites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
1.2 Safe Operating Practices for Users of P&H Electric Shovels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
1.2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
1.2.2 Qualifications for and Conduct of Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
1.2.3 Operation Guidelines and Suggestions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
1.2.4 Responsibilities of All Crew Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
1.2.5 Planning the Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
1.3 Safety For Electrical And Electronic Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
1.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
1.3.2 Maintenance Work Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
1.3.3 Electrical Safety Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10
1.3.4 Electrical Shock Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11
1.4 Electrostatic Discharge Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12
1.4.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12
1.4.2 ESD Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12
1.4.3 Basic Principles of Static Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13
1.4.4 Electrostatic-Safe Practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13
1.4.5 Electrostatic Voltages at Work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16
1.4.6 Sensitivity of Components to ESD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17
1.4.7 Hidden Effects of Electrostatic Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17
1.4.8 Causes of Electrostatic Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18
1.4.9 Damage Due to Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18
1.4.10 Damage Due to Induction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19
1.4.11 Damage Due to Polarization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19
1.5 Safety Hazard Indicators, Decals and Signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20
1.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20
1.5.2 Hazard Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20
1.5.3 Safety Hazard Decals and Signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21
1.5.4 Specific Hazard Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22
SECTION 2, Installation
2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
2.1.1 TripRite Upgrade Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
2.2 Mechanical Pre-checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
2.2.1 Latch Bar Engagement Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2

TripRiteTOC.fm -iii- Table of Contents, Version 00 - 09/06
"Uncontrolled Copy"
Table of Contents TripRite™ Installation and Maintenance Manual
Table of Contents (Continued)

2.2.2 Latch Bar Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
2.3 Removing Existing Dipper Trip Motor, Transmission and Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
2.4 Motor, Transmission and Drum Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
2.5 TripRite Drive Enclosure Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
2.5.1 Wiring and Sealtite Conduit Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14
2.6 Installing DriveMonitor Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21
SECTION 3, TripRite Drive

3.1 System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
3.1.1 Performance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
3.1.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
3.2 TripRite Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
3.2.1 Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
3.3 SBR (Sensor Board Resolver) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
3.3.1 Functional Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
3.3.2 Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
3.3.3 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
3.3.4 Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
3.3.5 Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
3.4 CBP (Communications Board Profibus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
3.4.1 Bus Access Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
3.4.2 Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
3.4.3 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18
3.4.4 Connecting the Profibus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
3.4.5 Bus Terminations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
3.4.6 CBP Diagnosis and Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
SECTION 4, Commissioning
4.1 General Commissioning Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
4.1.1 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
4.1.2 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
4.1.3 Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
4.2 Terms And Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
4.2.1 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
4.3 Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
4.3.1 Other Related Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
4.4 Schematic Diagram Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
4.4.1 Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
4.4.2 Referencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
4.4.3 Electrical Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
4.4.4 Ground Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
4.5 Commissioning Test Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
4.6 Six-Step Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9

Table of Contents, Version 00 - 09/06 -iv- TripRiteTOC.fm
"Uncontrolled Copy"
TripRite™ Installation and Maintenance Manual Table of Contents

4.6.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
4.7 Jumper Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
4.8 Lifted Lead Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
4.9 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
4.9.1 Pre-checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
4.9.2 System Power-up and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
4.9.3 Setting Hoist and Crowd Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.19
4.9.4 Operational Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.19
SECTION 5, Parameters and Fault Codes

5.0.1 Fault and Alarm Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
5.1 Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
5.1.1 Parameter Input via the PMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
5.1.2 Parameter Input via the OP1S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15
5.1.3 Parameter Reset To Factory Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.19
5.1.4 Upread of Parameters with the OP1S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.21
5.1.5 Parameterizing by Download. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.21
5.1.6 Function Diagram Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.23
5.2 Faults and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.45
5.2.1 Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.45
5.2.2 Alarm Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.56
5.2.3 Fatal Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.80
5.3 Firmware Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.81
5.4 TripRite Parameter Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.89
5.5 Drive Monitor Record Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.98
5.5.1 Opening Drive Monitor and Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.98
5.5.2 Analyzing Recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.110
5.6 Parameter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.116
5.6.1 Cross Reference Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.116
5.6.2 Explanation of Parameter Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.117
5.6.3 General Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.119
5.6.4 Motor and Encoder Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.130
5.6.5 Closed-Loop Control / Gating Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.152
5.6.6 Functions 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.185
5.6.7 Setpoint Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.195
5.6.8 Functions 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.205
5.6.9 Sequence Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.206
5.6.10 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.218
5.6.11 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.229
5.6.12 Diagnostics/Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.244
5.6.13 Special Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.252
5.6.14 Special Parameters OP1S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.261
5.6.15 Technology Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.264
5.6.16 Free Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.273

TripRiteTOC.fm -v- Table of Contents, Version 00 - 09/06
"Uncontrolled Copy"
Table of Contents TripRite™ Installation and Maintenance Manual

5.6.17 Technology Synchronism (Master Setpoint Correction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.350
5.6.18 Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.357
5.6.19 Technology Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.362
5.6.20 Technology Synchronism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.387
5.6.21 Technology Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.412
5.6.22 Printing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.432
5.6.23 Basic Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.441
5.6.24 Reserved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.452
5.6.25 Basic Unit Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.454
5.6.26 Reserved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.455
5.6.27 Release and Management Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.457
SECTION 6, Maintenance
6.1 TripRite Drive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
6.1.1 Replacing the Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
6.2 TripRite Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
6.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
6.2.2 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
6.2.3 Permanent Magnet Rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
6.2.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
6.2.5 Resolver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
6.2.6 Routine Motor Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7
6.2.7 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8
6.3 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10
6.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10
6.3.2 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .a

Table of Contents, Version 00 - 09/06 -vi- TripRiteTOC.fm
"Uncontrolled Copy"
TripRite™ Installation and Maintenance Manual List of Figures
List of Figures
Figure 1-1: Improper Operating Practices Cause Accidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Figure 1-2: Common Point Ground Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12
Figure 1-3: Wrist Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14
Figure 1-4: ESD Susceptibility Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15
Figure 1-5: Electrostatic Discharges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18
Figure 1-6: Damage Due to Induction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19
Figure 1-7: Damage Due to Polarization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19
Figure 1-8: Damage Due to Polarization - Continued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20
Figure 1-9: TripRite Safety Hazard Decal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22
Figure 2-1: Latch Bar Engagement Detaiil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Figure 2-2: Motor, Transmission and Drum Installation (Boom Mounted Dipper Trip System
Shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
Figure 2-3: TripRite Drive Enclosure Mounting - 4100A Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11
Figure 2-4: TripRite Drive Enclosure Mounting - 4100A Digital. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
Figure 2-5: TripRite Drive Enclosure Mounting - 2800XPB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13
Figure 2-6: TripRite Drive Enclosure Mounting - 2300XPB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14
Figure 2-7: Overall TripRite Block Diagram - Refer to Schematic Diagram R56357 and Figure 2-
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15
Figure 2-8: Resolver Cable and Motor Power Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
Figure 2-9: TripRite Drive Motor Connections, X2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
Figure 2-10: 24VDC Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18
Figure 2-11: Dipper Trip Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19
Figure 2-12: Profibus Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20

Figure 3-1: Typical TripRite Configuration - Also Refer to Schematic Diagram R56357 and Figure
3-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Figure 3-2: TripRite Drive Connection Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Figure 3-3: TripRite Drive Motor Connections, X2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
Figure 3-4: RS232 Jack for OP1S or Drive Monitor, X103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6
Figure 3-5: Terminal Strip, X101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7
Figure 3-6: 24VDC Output, X100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
Figure 3-7: External 24VDC Supply, X9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
Figure 3-8: Pre-charging Capacitor Unit, X7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
Figure 3-9: Dynamic Braking Resistor Connection, X6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
Figure 3-10: Mains Connection, X1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
Figure 3-11: Safe Off, X533 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
Figure 3-12: Schematic Diagram of a Resolver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
Figure 3-13: SBR Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
Figure 3-14: SBR Board Connector, X414 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15

TripRiteLOF.fm -vii- List of Figures, Version 00 - 09/06
"Uncontrolled Copy"
List of Figures TripRite™ Installation and Maintenance Manual
List of Figures (Continued)

Figure 3-15: CBP Communication Board (Profibus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Figure 3-16: CBP Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18

Figure 5-1: P732.1 (090H, CBP_Status) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Figure 5-2: P732.2 (092H, SPC3_Status) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Figure 5-3: P732.3 (094H, SPC3_Global_Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
Figure 5-4: PMU Parameterization Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12
Figure 5-5: PMU Operator Control Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14
Figure 5-6: OP1S Operator Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15
Figure 5-7: OP1S Point-to-Point Link with TripRite Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18
Figure 5-8: Selection of Fixed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18
Figure 5-9: Selection of Factory Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.19
Figure 5-10: Start of Factory Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.19
Figure 5-11: Sequence for Parameter Reset to Factory Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.20
Figure 5-12: Selecting and Starting the “Upread” Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.21
Figure 5-13: Example of Entering an ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.21
Figure 5-14: Selecting and Activating the “Download” Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22
Figure 5-15: Confirming the ID and Starting the “Download” Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22
Figure 5-16: Continue or Stop Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.23
Figure 5-17: Function Diagram (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.24
Figure 5-18: General Functions - Visualization and Normalization Parameters . . . . . . . . . . 5.25
Figure 5-19: First CB/TB Board (Low Slot Letter) - Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.26
Figure 5-20: First CB/TB Board (Low Slot Letter) - Transmitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27
Figure 5-21: Control Word 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.28
Figure 5-22: Control Word 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.29
Figure 5-23: Status Word 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.30
Figure 5-24: Status Word 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.31
Figure 5-25: Free Blocks - Simple Ramp Function Generator 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.32
Figure 5-26: Setpoint Processing - Setpoint Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.33
Figure 5-27: Setpoint Processing - Ramp Function Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.34
Figure 5-28: Speed Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.35
Figure 5-29: Torque Limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.36
Figure 5-30: Current Controller 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.37
Figure 5-31: Gating Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.38
Figure 5-32: Actual Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.39
Figure 5-33: Fault Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.40
Figure 5-34: Fault/Alarm Trigger Signals, Connector, Double Connector Converter . . . . . . 5.41
Figure 5-35: Free Blocks - Absolute Value Generators with Smoothing, Limiters . . . . . . . . 5.42
Figure 5-36: Free Blocks - Analog Signal Switches/Multiplexers/Demultiplexers . . . . . . . . . 5.43
Figure 5-37: Free Blocks - Minimum/Maximum Selection, Tracking/Storage Elements . . . . 5.44
Figure 5-38: Laptop and 24VDC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.81

List of Figures, Version 00 - 09/06 -viii- TripRiteLOF.fm
"Uncontrolled Copy"
TripRite™ Installation and Maintenance Manual List of Figures

Figure 5-39: Start - All Programs - Siemens - Drive Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.82
Figure 5-40: File Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.82
Figure 5-41: Opening the Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.83
Figure 5-42: Tools - Online Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.83
Figure 5-43: Warning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.83
Figure 5-44: Setting Baud Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.84
Figure 5-45: Parameters, Device Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.84
Figure 5-46: Device Identification Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.85
Figure 5-47: Double Click on BSLMCP.BAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.86
Figure 5-48: DOS Screen - Waiting for Power to Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.86
Figure 5-49: DOS Screen - Erasing and Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.87
Figure 5-50: Go Online with the TripRite Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.87
Figure 5-51: Parameters, Device Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.88
Figure 5-52: Device Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.88
Figure 5-53: Laptop and 24VDC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.89
Figure 5-55: File Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.90
Figure 5-61: Download Parameter File to Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.93
Figure 5-62: Select the File to be Downloaded to the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.93
Figure 5-63: Download Progress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.94
Figure 5-64: Download Successful . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.94
Figure 5-68: File Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.96
Figure 5-71: Connection with Device OK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.97
Figure 5-73: File Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.98
Figure 5-75: Opening the Recorder Function with the Trace Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.99
Figure 5-76: Opening the Recorder Function with the Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.100
Figure 5-77: Recorder Function Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.100
Figure 5-78: Record Settings Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.101
Figure 5-79: Parameter Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.102
Figure 5-80: Connector-Selection List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.103
Figure 5-81: Active Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.103
Figure 5-82: Record Settings Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.104

TripRiteLOF.fm -ix- List of Figures, Version 00 - 09/06
"Uncontrolled Copy"
List of Figures TripRite™ Installation and Maintenance Manual

Figure 5-83: Trigger Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.105
Figure 5-84: Save Trace Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.106
Figure 5-85: Open Trace Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.106
Figure 5-86: Saved Trace Setting from Milwaukee Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.107
Figure 5-87: Laptop Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.108
Figure 5-88: Recorder Function Screen - Waiting for Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.109
Figure 5-89: Save Trace File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.110
Figure 5-90: Open Trace File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.110
Figure 5-91: Recorded File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.111
Figure 5-92: Y Axis Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.112
Figure 5-93: Trace Settings Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.112
Figure 5-94: Measurement Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.113
Figure 5-95: Cursor Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.113
Figure 5-96: Minimum and Maximum of a Trace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.114
Figure 5-97: Zoom Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.114
Figure 5-98: Zoom Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.115
Figure 6-1: Motor Features (Typical). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
Figure 6-3: Encoder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
Figure 6-2: Positive Resolver Rotation is CW Facing the Resolver End of the Motor. . . . . . . 6.5
Figure 6-4: Rotor Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6
Figure 6-5: Dipper Trip Transmission (R53914) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10

List of Figures, Version 00 - 09/06 -x- TripRiteLOF.fm
"Uncontrolled Copy"
TripRite™ Installation and Maintenance Manual List of Tables
List of Tables
Table 1-1: Do’s and Don’ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
Table 1-2: Electrical Shock and Human Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11
Table 1-3: Electrostatic Voltages at Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16
Table 1-4: Component Sensitivity to ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17
Table 2-1: TripRite Upgrade Kit Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Table 2-2: Latch Bar Engagement Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Table 2-3: Existing Dipper Trip Motor, Transmission and Drum Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
Table 2-4: Motor, Transmission and Drum Installation (Typical). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7
Table 2-5: TripRite Drive Enclosure Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
Table 2-6: Motor Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17

Table 3-1: Transmitted/Received Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
Table 3-2: Motor Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
Table 3-3: Serial Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6
Table 3-4: Control Terminal Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7
Table 3-5: 24VDC Output, USS Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
Table 3-6: External 24VDC Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
Table 3-7: Connection for Pre-charging Capacitor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
Table 3-8: Dynamic Braking Resistor Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
Table 3-9: Mains Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
Table 3-10: DC Link Bus Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
Table 3-11: Terminal Assignment for the “Safe OFF” Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
Table 3-12: Pin Assignment at Connection X414 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
Table 3-13: X448 Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
Table 3-14: LED Display of the CBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
Table 3-15: Online Operation Without Useful Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
Table 3-16: CBP Fault Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
Table 3-17: Exceptional Operation Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
Table 3-18: USS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22
Table 4-1: Recommended Test Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Table 4-2: Wire Number Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Table 4-3: Electrical Inventory Number Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Table 4-4: Basic Electrical Inventory Prefix's . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Table 4-5: Ground Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Table 4-6: Jumper Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Table 4-7: Lifted Lead Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
Table 4-8: Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12

TripRiteLOT.fm -xi- List of Tables, Version 00 - 09/06
"Uncontrolled Copy"
List of Tables TripRite™ Installation and Maintenance Manual
List of Tables (Continued)

Table 4-9: System Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14
Table 4-10: Operational Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.19

Table 5-1: Alarm Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Table 5-2: Fault Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
Table 5-3: CBP Diagnostic Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
Table 5-4: Operator Control Elements on the PMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12
Table 5-5: Operator Control Elements of the OP1S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.16
Table 5-6: Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.45
Table 5-7: Alarm Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.56
Table 5-8: Fatal Error Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.80
Table 5-9: Parameter Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.116
Table 5-10: Explanation of Parameter Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.117
Table 5-11: General Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.119
Table 5-12: Motor and Encoder Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.130
Table 5-13: Closed-Loop Control / Gating Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.152
Table 5-14: Functions 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.185
Table 5-15: Setpoint Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.195
Table 5-16: Functions 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.205
Table 5-17: Sequence Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.206
Table 5-18: Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.218
Table 5-19: Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.229
Table 5-20: Diagnostics/Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.244
Table 5-21: Special Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.252
Table 5-22: Special Parameters OP1S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.261
Table 5-23: Technology Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.264
Table 5-24: Free Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.273
Table 5-25: Technology Synchronism (Master Setpoint Correction). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.350
Table 5-26: Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.357
Table 5-27: Technology Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.362
Table 5-28: Technology Synchronism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.387
Table 5-29: Technology Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.412
Table 5-30: Printing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.432
Table 5-31: Basic Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.441
Table 5-32: Reserved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.452
Table 5-33: Basic Unit Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.454
Table 5-34: Reserved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.455
Table 5-35: Release and Management Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.457
Table 6-1: Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8
Table 6-2: TripRite Transmission Lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11

List of Tables, Version 00 - 09/06 -xii- TripRiteLOT.fm
"Uncontrolled Copy"
TripRite® Installation and Maintenance Manual Shovel Safety
Section 1
Shovel Safety
1.1 General Information

Since the earliest days of mining, the job of digging coal and other useful materials out of the earth has been con-
sidered one of the world's most dangerous occupations. Public concern about the toll of deaths, injuries and
destruction in mine accidents has prompted passage of much-needed safety legislation and intensified the search
for safer methods and improved training practices and technology. Growing cooperation among industry, labor and
government also has contributed to making mining safer and more healthful, especially in recent years.
Safety and health in the mining industry has improved greatly since the early 20th Century. Total mining fatalities
reached the lowest level in history in 2001. Listed below are Safety Information Websites that can assist in prevent-
ing mining accidents and injuries:
1.1.1 Safety Websites
www.msha.gov. The U.S. Department of Labor’s Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA) helps to reduce
deaths, injuries, and illnesses in the nation's mines with a variety of activities and programs. The agency develops
and enforces safety and health rules applying to all U.S. mines, helps mine operators who have special compliance
problems, and makes available technical, educational and other types of assistance. MSHA works cooperatively
with industry, labor, and other Federal and state agencies toward improving safety and health conditions for all
miners. MSHA's responsibilities are spelled out in the Federal Mine Safety and Health Act of 1977.
www.osha.gov. The U.S. Department of Labor’s Occupational Safety and Health Administrations (OSHA) mission
is “to assure, so far as possible, every working man and woman in the nation safe and healthful working condi-
tions.” By authorizing enforcement of the standards developed under the Occupational Safety and Health Act of
1970; by assisting and encouraging the States in their efforts to assure safe and healthful working conditions; by
providing for research, information, education, and training in the field of occupational safety and health; and for
other purposes.
www.cdc.gov/niosh. The National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) is the Federal agency
responsible for conducting research and making recommendations for the prevention of work-related disease and
injury. The Institute is part of the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC). NIOSH is responsible for con-
ducting research on the full scope of occupational disease and injury ranging from lung disease in miners to carpal
tunnel syndrome in computer users.

Section 1, Safety.fm -1.1- Section 1, Version 00 - 10/06
"Uncontrolled Copy"
Shovel Safety TripRite® Installation and Maintenance Manual
1.2 Safe Operating Practices for Users of P&H Electric Shovels
NOTICE
A review of many safety sources including MSHA, NIOSH, OSHA, ANSI, and various individual
mine safety policies was conducted to develop these safe operating practices recommenda-
tions. The purpose of these recommendations is to assist and support our customer in their
safety efforts in preventing accidents.
1.2.1 Introduction
P&H shovels are carefully designed, manufactured, and tested. When used properly by qualified operators, they
will give safe, reliable service. There are P&H offices worldwide to answer any questions about P&H products or
their safe use. The World Sales and Service Headquarters for P&H Mining Equipment is:
P&H Mining Equipment, Inc.

4400 West National Avenue
P.O. Box 310
Milwaukee, WI 53201 USA
Telephone: (414) 671-4400
Because shovels are complex and contain massive pieces of equipment and have the ability to lift and move heavy
loads, they also have the potential for accidents if safe operating practices are not followed. This section is
intended to help prevent accidents which could result in injury, death, or property damage.
General safe practices for working machinery must be followed as well as safe operating practices. The following
P&H Mining Equipment, Inc. recommendations are provided to supplement customer/owner, local or national
safety codes, rules or procedures.
1.2.2 Qualifications for and Conduct of Operators
The following P&H Mining Equipment, Inc. recommendations are presented for the purpose of reducing the possi-
bility of personal injury, either to the operator, or to those who work on or in the area adjacent to the shovel. This
documentation is general in nature, and your shovel may not be equipped with all devices mentioned.
The operator of this shovel is urged to read this section carefully, and to avoid the hazardous operating conditions
described. All situations described in the following have, at one time or another, contributed to serious accidents.

Section 1, Version 00 - 10/06 -1.2- Section 1, Safety.fm
"Uncontrolled Copy"
Figure 1-1: Improper Operating Practices Cause Accidents
However, it is impossible to foresee all such conditions, and it must remain the responsibility of the mining com-
pany and the operator to anticipate and avoid any unsafe conditions not described in detail in this manual. It is
understood that safety rules within individual mining companies vary, and that, if a conflict exists, the rules of the
company take precedence over the suggestions contained herein.
1.2.2.1 Operators of P&H Electric Shovels
P&H Mining Equipment strongly recommends that only the following qualified personnel be permitted to operate a
shovel:
1. Designated qualified operators who have met the requirements of the operation tests and physical and mental
conditions.
2. Trainees under the direct supervision of a qualified operator.
3. Qualified maintenance and test personnel when required to do so in the performance of their duties.
4. Inspectors qualified to operate the shovel.
1.2.2.2 Operator Qualifications
P&H Mining Equipment strongly recommends that operators and operator trainees meet the following qualifica-
tions:
1. Operators of P&H electric mining shovels must be required by the employer to pass a written examination
which accurately measures practical knowledge of the shovel, and an evaluated demonstration of the proper
methods and techniques to be used in operating the shovel, facilitated by a P&H Factory Authorized Trainer.
2. An operator must have vision of at least 20/30 Snellen in one eye and 20/50 Snellen in the other, with or with-
out corrective lenses. Good depth perception is required especially where truck loading is critical or must be
accomplished at some distance from the operator.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
3. An operator must be able to distinguish colors, regardless of the position of the color, if color differentiation is
required for operation of the shovel.
4. An operator must have adequate hearing for the specific operation, with or without hearing aid.
5. An operator must have sufficient strength, endurance, agility, coordination, and speed of reaction to meet the
demands of shovel operation.
6. Evidence of physical defects or emotional instability that could render a hazard to the operator or others, or
which in the opinion of a qualified person could interfere with the operator’s performance may be cause for dis-
qualification. In such cases, specialized clinical or medical judgements and tests may be required.
7. Evidence that an operator is subject to seizures or loss of physical control is reason for disqualification. Spe-
cialized medical tests may be required to determine these conditions.
8. Evidence that an operator is under the influence of alcohol or drugs is cause for disqualification.
9. An operator who is taking medication prescribed by a medical doctor must provide written assurance from that
doctor that the medication will not affect the operator's ability to operate the shovel in a safe manner.
10. The operator must have a good attitude towards safety at all times.
1.2.2.3 Operator’s Conduct
SAFETY FIRST
Safety must always be the operator's primary concern. An operator must refuse to operate the
shovel when a known unsafe condition exists. Consult your supervisor when safety is in doubt.
1. The operator must read and understand the Operator's Manual and be familiar with all instructions and signs
on the shovel.
2. The operator must see that the shovel is in proper order before operating.
3. When physically or otherwise unfit, an operator must not engage in the operation of the shovel.
4. The operator must not engage in any practice that will divert attention while actually engaged in operating the
shovel.
5. The operator will ensure that people, other mining equipment, and material are kept out of the work area. Do
not operate the dipper over people. Never use the shovel dipper to lift or transport people.
6. The operator must give a warning signal prior to starting, operating, or traveling the shovel.
7. All controls must be tested by the operator before beginning a new shift. If any control does not operate prop-
erly, the operator must contact the appropriate maintenance department and have the controls repaired before
operating the shovel.
8. If adjustments or repairs are necessary, or any defects are known, the operator must promptly report the
defects to the appropriate maintenance department who will be responsible for the repair of the shovel. The
operator must also notify the next operator of any remaining uncorrected defects upon changing shifts.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
1.2.2.4 Operator’s Functional Checks
The operator must make a safety check before starting to work each shift to see that the shovel is in proper order.
Some things to check are:
NOTICE
Checklists for Pre-Start, Startup, Parkup, and Shutdown are contained later in this manual.
• Check for warning tags or lockout tags on the starting controls; do not operate the controls until the tag has
been removed by the person who placed it there, or by a qualified person. Consult your mine sites specific
lockout-tagout procedures.
• Check with mine maintenance and operations management to see that periodic maintenance and inspec-
tions have been performed and all necessary repairs made.
• Consult with mine management that scheduled inspection of load carrying members such as wire rope (dip-
per trip lines, hoist rope, suspension lines), boom, dipper handle and dipper has been conducted.
• Check that all equipment guards are in place and all inspection and cover plates are closed and locked.
• Look inside, outside and underneath the shovel to make sure everything is clear before starting or energiz-
ing the shovel.
• After starting the shovel, check all gauges and indicators for proper readings and operation.
• Test all controls for proper operation and controllability before shovel operation or travel, including a thor-
ough check of the brakes.
• Check audible warning devices and alarms used for backup warning for proper operation.
• During operation, be alert for unusual noises or vibrations; look and smell for unusual smoke or fumes.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
1.2.3 Operation Guidelines and Suggestions
Table 1-1 contains suggested Do’s and Don’ts associated with P&H Electric Shovel operation.
Do Not Do
Do Not - setup to far from the dig face and over reach. Do - setup as close to the dig face as possible for
faster cycles and better dipper fill factors.
Do Not - setup or dig in a setup with long swing Do - try to setup with short swing angles when
angles. possible.
Do Not - make sharp turns that plug the tracks with Do - try to make gradual turns when steering the
dirt and cause excessive stress on crawlers. shovel.
Do Not - lean on the swing while digging through the Do - keep swing in neutral while digging through
bank. the bank.
Do Not - use the material in the truck to stop swing Do - start plugging the swing soon enough to stop
motion. without hitting the load.
Do Not - sweep the pit floor with the dipper. Do - clean the pit floor using normal digging
motions.
Do Not - dig with corners of the dipper. Do - try to dig with the full width of the dipper cut-
ting edge.
Do Not - catch a bank collapse on a loaded dipper. Do - swing the dipper in the clear or trip open the
dipper door to avoid catching a major bank col-
lapse.
Do Not - strike the track pads or tail cable with the Do - be aware of the location of the track pads and
dipper. tail cable at all times.
Do Not - operate a shovel on a surface where it is not Do - create a stable base to work from, cut or fill
stable, (rocking up and down). to maintain stability.
Table 1-1: Do’s and Don’ts
1.2.3.1 Operating Suggestions
The following suggestions are provided to increase the efficiency of shovel operation, and decrease down time for
repairs.
1. Plan shovel and truck locations for the shortest swing.
2. Work at a digging face depth approximately the height of the boom point sheaves. Dig the upper portion of the
bank first, if it becomes necessary to work a bank higher than the boom point sheaves.
3. Move the shovel up in the cut while waiting for trucks, whenever possible.
4. Crowd no more than is necessary to fill the dipper. This will increase the average hoist speed and decrease
shovel power requirements.
5. As soon as the dipper is filled, retract it from the bank and start to swing.
6. Continually inspect the shovel for signs of wear or damage and improper or incomplete lubrication.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
CAUTION
Sweeping produces strains in the attachment which occur at an angle. The attachment
was not designed to withstand this type of strain.
7. Sweeping the ground sideways with the dipper is not recommended as a standard operating practice. A skillful
operator keeps a clean pit floor during a normal digging cycle.
8. Avoid striking the boom, crawler tracks, or tail cable with the dipper.
9. Keep dipper teeth sharp.
10. Never dig if a tooth is missing from the dipper. The tooth socket will wear rapidly.
11. Keep a supply of perishable spare parts, such as wire rope and dipper teeth, on or near the shovel to minimize
down time.
1.2.4 Responsibilities of All Crew Members
SAFETY FIRST
Any unsafe condition or practice must be reported to the job supervisor and shovel operator.
Everyone who works around shovels, including support people and maintenance personnel, must obey all safety
hazard signs and watch out for their own safety and the safety of others in the area. Crew members setting up
machines or handling maintenance and repairs are expected to know proper procedures including lockout and
tagout practices.
Watch for hazards during operations and immediately alert the shovel operator of potential safety hazards such as
the unexpected presence of people, other equipment in the area, unstable ground, bank conditions, or approach-
ing storms.
1.2.5 Planning the Job
Most accidents can be avoided by careful job planning. The person in charge must have a clear understanding of
the work to be done, consider dangers or hazards, develop a plan to do the job safely, and then explain the plan to
all concerned. Factors such as the following should be considered:
• How can the shovel tail cable be safely moved at the work site?
• Is there other equipment, power lines, or structures which must be moved or avoided during movement of
the shovel?
• Is the surface strong enough to support the shovel and load?
• How and where will the removed materials be unloaded?
• What steps will be taken to keep unnecessary people and equipment at a safe distance from the work area?

"Uncontrolled Copy"
These factors are not meant to be all encompassing, but only a starting point. Each job must be individually consid-
ered.
1.3 Safety For Electrical And Electronic Equipment
1.3.1 General
The safety instructions given in this manual cover those problems encountered during normal daily operation of the
shovel. Additional precautions may be necessary to cover unusual circumstances. Be constantly alert for any
potentially dangerous conditions and report them immediately to your foreman or supervisor.
Working safely is the most important thing you can do. The following is a list of precautions. Of course there are
more precautions, but these are some you should think about. The keyword here is THINK.
• Never work alone.
• Never receive an intentional shock.
• Only work on, operate, or adjust equipment if you are authorized.
• Don't work on energized equipment unless absolutely necessary.
• Keep loose tools, metal parts, and liquids from above electrical equipment.
• Never use steel wool or emery cloth on electric and electronic circuits.
• Never attempt to repair energized circuits except in an emergency.
• Never measure voltage in excess of 300 volts while holding the meter wire or probe.
• Use only one hand when operating circuit breakers or switches.
• Use proper tag-out/lockout procedures for regular and preventive maintenance.
• Be cautious when working in voids or unvented spaces.
• Beware the dangers of working in elevated areas.
• Keep protective closures, fuse panels, and circuit breaker boxes closed unless you are actually working on
them.
• Never bypass an interlock unless you are authorized to do so by competent authority, and then properly tag
the bypass.
1.3.2 Maintenance Work Precautions
Inspection, service and maintenance are essential elements in the proper operation and performance of shovels
and excavators. The following recommendations are provided to supplement past experience, knowledge and
common sense of servicemen concerning potential hazards associated with inspection, service and maintenance.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
1. Prior to undertaking any work on the equipment, the personnel performing the work shall notify the operator
about the nature and location of the job. Appropriate lockout and tagout procedures must be determined and
followed by all individuals involved to guard against potential hazards.
2. Before maintenance or service is attempted, the operator must park the machine in a location to avoid hazards
such as falling rocks and unstable ground. After parking the machine, the operator shall:
A. Set the dipper on the ground.
B. Set all brakes.
C. De-energize control functions.
D. Comply with lockout and tagout procedures
3. Injury, death, and damage can occur if the machine is started before servicing is finished. Never start or oper-
ate the equipment if lockouts or tagouts are on the controls. Prior to starting the machine, look under, within,
and around the equipment.
4. Specific inspection, service and maintenance instructions for P&H shovels or excavators are available from
product manuals and the P&H service network. Always read and follow instruction manuals and use the P&H
service network for assistance.
5. On hydraulic systems, release system pressure before attempting to make adjustments or repairs. Pressure in
hydraulic systems can be retained for long periods of time. If not properly released before maintenance people
attempt to work on the hydraulic system, this pressure can allow machinery to move or cause hot oil to shoot
out of the hose ends at high speed.
6. Maintenance and service can involve the handling of heavy parts or components, which can injure personnel.
Use lifting and handling equipment along with blocking to remove, support, and install heavy parts.
7. Ensure both ends of booms or cylinders are supported and the boom suspension lines completely slacked off
before moving pins. Never stand on, inside, under booms during erection or disassembly. Pin-connected
booms may fall if not properly supported when removing or installing pins.
8. When inspecting and retiring wire rope used on surface mining machines:
A. Mine management shall provide and appoint qualified personnel to inspect, prepare and retain written
reports on wire rope inspections.
B. An inspection procedure should be established by Mine Management for each wire rope application on their
mining shovels or excavators.
C. Unless instructed otherwise, the frequency of inspections shall be established based upon operating shifts,
days, weeks or months depending upon anticipated rope life and working conditions.
D. An average wire rope life shall be established based upon the number of operating cycles, volume of mate-
rial handled or weight of material handled. Replacement is determined from the this established rope life
analysis.
9. MSHA procedures require all wire rope be inspected daily to determine whether it should be replaced.
As a minimum, wire rope replacement should be performed when any of the following conditions exist:
A. Severe abrasion, scrubbing, peening, or kinking, or broken outer wires.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
B. Crushing, or other damage that distorts the rope's structure.
C. Severe reduction of rope diameter or an observable increase in rope lay.
D. Bird-caging or other distortion indicating uneven distribution of load between rope strands.
E. Evidence of severe corrosion, particularly in the vicinity of attachments.
F. Heat damage from any source.
G. A rapid increase in the number of broken wires.
10. Wire rope end connections must be installed properly and inspected daily.
A. Wire rope secured with a wedge socket should be installed so that the load line is in a straight-line pull with
the eye of the socket; and the loaded part of the rope is not kinked where it leaves the wedge. The rope end
should always protrude at least 6 to 9 inches beyond the socket. Attach a short piece of wire rope to the
rope end with two wire rope clips to prevent the rope end from slipping out of the wedge socket.
11. Electrically powered shovels or excavators operate using high voltage wiring, components and systems. This
voltage can kill or seriously injure people servicing, repairing, or working on the machines. Inspection, mainte-
nance or service of any electrical component must be done by qualified personnel. All people working on or
around the equipment should read and obey hazard signs and always use lockout and tagout procedures.
12. All guards, signs, warning devices and guarding devices must be in place and in working conditions before the
shovel or excavator is placed back in operation after inspection, service and maintenance.
13. Loose or missing hardware, bolts, or nuts should be properly tightened or replaced with the manufacturer's
specified hardware. Refer to P&H Service and Parts sources for replacement parts.
14. If there is not enough wire rope on the drum, the rope can be pulled off. Allow for at least two wraps of wire
rope on drums when replacing the rope.
15. Electrical junction boxes for electrical motors can contain high voltage electrical power from multiple sources.
Before performing service on electrical junction boxes, determine that all electrical power from all sources has
been disconnected and locked out. Test the components within the electrical junction box to verify the electri-
cal power is disconnected.
1.3.3 Electrical Safety Principles
When planning and performing work on electrical systems and equipment, keep these principles in mind:
A. Plan every job.
B. Think about what could go wrong.
C. Use the right tools for the job.
D. Use procedures, drawings and other documents as tools to do the job.
E. Isolate the equipment from energy sources.
F. Identify the electric shock and arc flash, as well as other hazards that may be present.
G. Minimize the hazard by guarding or approach limitations.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
H. Test every circuit, every conductor, every time before you touch.
I. Use personal protective equipment (PPE) as a last line of defense in case something goes wrong.
J. Ensure service personnel have the skills, knowledge, tools, and experience to do this work safely.
1.3.4 Electrical Shock Dynamics
When working on the shovel, service personnel must be aware of three important characteristics of possible expo-
sure to electrical shock. The three factors are:
A. PATH - of current into and out of the body.
B. AMOUNT - of current or energy flowing in the body.
C. DURATION OF EXPOSURE - degree of injury also depends on the duration and frequency of the current.
60Hz AC Current Response
0.5 - 3 mA Start to feel the energy, tingling sensa-

tion
3 - 10 mA Experience pain, muscle contraction
10 - 40 mA Grip paralysis threshold (brain says let

go, but physically cannot do so)
30 - 75 mA Respiratory systems shuts down
100 - 200 mA Experience heart fibrillation
200 - 500 mA Heart clamps tight
Over 1500 mA Tissue and organs burn
Table 1-2: Electrical Shock and Human Response
NOTICE
“SHOCK” injuries can resemble an “Iceberg” where most of the injuries are internal, with only
an entry and exit wound visible. Prompt attention is required by individuals specifically trained
to treat electrical injuries.
Accident victims can incur the following injuries from electrical shock:
A. Low-voltage contact wounds.
B. High-voltage contact wounds from entry and exit of electrical current.
C. Burns.
D. Respiratory difficulties (the tongue may swell and obstruct the airway; or vaporized metal or heated air may
have been inhaled).
E. Infectious complications.
F. Injury to bone through falls, heat necrosis (death of tissue), and muscle contraction.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
G. Injury to the heart such as ventricular fribillation, cardiac arrest, or stoppage.
H. Internal organ injuries.
I. Nerve and neurological damage.
1.4 Electrostatic Discharge Introduction
1.4.1 General Information
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage or impair electrical circuitry and occurs when electronic components are
handled improperly. Always follow ESD prevention procedures when removing or replacing components.
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) is a major cause of failures and malfunctions in today’s sophisticated electrical sys-
tems and components.
Some manufacturers of electronic systems may tell you that ESD is not a problem with their products. This is mis-
leading. All conscientious manufacturers take anti-static precautions when they design their products. However,
even the best anti-static designs cannot keep ESD from affecting sophisticated electronic systems, particularly
when they are disassembled.
Proper education and training combined with work-related procedures and precautions can guard against many of
the effects of ESD. This document explains the causes of ESD, and how you can guard against its effects.
1.4.2 ESD Terminology
Catastrophic Failure - An electronic device exposed to an ESD even no longer function. The ESD event may
have caused a metal melt, junction breakdown, or oxide failure. The device's circuitry is permanently damaged
causing the device fail.
Common Point Ground - Refer to Figure 1-2. A system or method for connecting two or more grounding conduc-
tors to the same electrical potential.
Figure 1-2: Common Point Ground Symbol
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) - The transfer of charge between bodies at different electrical potentials.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Latent Defect - A device exposed to an ESD event with partially degraded functionality with possible reduced
operating life expectancy. A product or system incorporating devices with latent defects may experience premature
failure after the user places them in service. Such failures are usually costly to repair and in some applications may
create personnel hazard.
Protected Areas - An ESD protective area consists of the materials, equipment, and procedures to control or min-
imize electrostatic charges (static voltage levels).
Static Electricity - An electrical charge caused by an imbalance of electrons on the surface of a material. This
imbalance of electrons produces an electric field that can be measured and that can influence other objects at a
distance.
1.4.3 Basic Principles of Static Control
At the Field Service level, the five basic principles of static control are:
• Define the level of control needed in your environment - Determine what is the sensitivity level of the parts
you are using and the products that you are manufacturing and shipping.
• Identify and define the electrostatic protected areas (EPA) - These are the areas in which you will be han-
dling sensitive parts and the areas in which you will need to bond or electrically connect all conductive and
dissipative materials, including personnel, to a known ground.
• Eliminate and Reduce Generation - Reducing as many static generating processes or materials, such as the
contact and separation of dissimilar materials and common plastics, as possible from the work environment.
• Dissipate and Neutralize - Safely dissipate or neutralize those electrostatic charges that do occur through
proper grounding and the use of conductive or dissipative materials.
1.4.4 Electrostatic-Safe Practices
To guard against electrostatic damage, you can:
• create a safe-static work area
• wear a wrist strap that grounds you during work
• handle sensitive components correctly
• controlling static on personnel and moving equipment
• grounding
1.4.4.1 Creating a Static-Safe Work Area
An important aspect of guarding against ESD is creating a static-safe work area. To create a static-safe work area:
• cover a work bench with a conductive surface that is grounded
• cover the floor of the work area with a conductive material that is grounded
• remove nonconducting materials from the work area as:

"Uncontrolled Copy"
• plastics
• nylon
• styrofoam
• cellophane
• ground yourself by touching a conductive surface before handling static-sensitive components
• be careful with loose parts of clothing such as sleeves, ties, and scarfs, which can easily carry a charge
• be careful not to touch the backplane connector or connector pins of the system
• be careful not to touch other circuit components in a module when you are configure or replace internal
components in a module
1.4.4.2 Wearing a Wrist Strap
The most important aspect of guarding against ESD is wearing a wrist strap that connects you from a ground in a
static-safe work area. A wrist strap usually consists of:
Figure 1-3: Wrist Strap
• Elastic wrist strap with fastener
• Molded ground lead with snap and banana plug
• Alligator clip - for connection with the ground lead and with earth ground
You should always wear and use a wrist strap in normal work activities around sensitive components:
• Put wrist strap on before beginning work
• Make sure the wrist strap fits snugly

"Uncontrolled Copy"
• Make sure the ground lead of the wrist strap is assembled properly and connected securely to ground each
time you use it
• Take off the wrist strap as the last task you perform before leaving the work area
1.4.4.3 Handling Sensitive Components Correctly
Always store and carry components and modules in static-shielding containers that guard against the effect of
electric fields.
Remove components and modules from static-shielding packages only at a static-safe work area. Modules are
only protected when they are completely in a static-shielding bag. Using the bag to hold the module does protect
the module.
You should use correct handling procedures even with modules that are not being returned for repair. This protects
the good components for rework.
1.4.4.4 Controlling Static on Personnel and Moving Equipment
People are one of the prime generators of static electricity. The simple act of walking around or repairing a board
can generate several thousand volts on the human body. If not properly controlled, this static charge can easily dis-
charge into a static sensitive device-a human body model (HBM) discharge.
Electronic Equipment and assemblies sensitive to ESD are identified by the symbol shown in Figure 1-4.
Figure 1-4: ESD Susceptibility Symbol
If the device under repair has the ESD symbol on it, then a wrist strap must be used to control static charge on per-
sonnel. When properly worn and connected to ground, a wrist strap keeps the person wearing it near ground
potential. Because the person and other grounded objects in the work area are at or near the same potential, there
can be no hazardous discharge between them. In addition, static charges are safely dissipated from the person to
ground and do not accumulate.
When handling ESD sensitive material use wrist straps, mats, chairs, garments, packaging, and other items that
provide ESD protection.
1.4.4.5 Grounding
Effective ESD grounds are of critical importance in any operation, and ESD grounding should be clearly defined
and regularly evaluated. A primary means of protecting of ESD susceptible (ESDS) items is to provide a ground
path to bring ESD protective materials and personnel to the same electrical potential. All conductors in the environ-

"Uncontrolled Copy"
ment, including personnel, must be bonded or electrically connected and attached to a known ground or contrived
ground, creating an equal potential balance between all items and personnel.
Electrostatic protection can be maintained at a potential above a zero voltage ground reference as long as all items
in the system are at the same potential. It is important to note that non-conductors in an Electrostatic Protected
Area (EPA) cannot lose their electrostatic charge by attachment to ground.
1.4.5 Electrostatic Voltages at Work
1.4.5.1 Common Voltages
You need to generate 3,500 volts to feel the effects of ESD, 4,500 volts to hear it, and 5,000 volts to see a spark.
The normal movements of someone around a work bench can generate 6,000 volts.
The charge that builds up on someone who walks across a nylon carpet in dry air can reach 35,000 volts. Poten-
tials as high as 56,000 volts have been measured when a roll of plain polyethylene is unwound. Potentials in more
common work situations range up to 18,000 volts.
A Can Generate this Voltage
Person walking on carpet on a:

• humid day • 2,000 volts
• dry day • 35,000 volts
Person walking on a vinyl floor on a:
• humid day • 400 volts
• dry day • 12,000 volts
Person in a padded chair up to 18,000 volts
Styrofoam coffee cup up to 5,000 volts
Plastic solder sipper up to 8,000 volts at the tip
Vinyl covered notebook up to 8,000 volts
Table 1-3: Electrostatic Voltages at Work

"Uncontrolled Copy"
1.4.6 Sensitivity of Components to ESD
Many electronic components are sensitive to electrostatic voltages as low as 30 volts and current as low 0.001
amps, far less than you can feel, hear, or see.
Device Type Electrostatic Voltage
To Degrade To Destroy
VMOS 30 1,800
MOSFET 100 200
GaAsFET 100 300
EPROM 100
JFET 140 7,000
OP AMP 190 2,500
COMOS 250 3,000
Schotty Diodes 300 2,500
Film Resistors 300 2,500

(thick,thin)
Bipolar Transistors 380 7,000
ECL (board level) 500 1,500
SCR 680 1,000
Schotty TTL 1,000 2,500
Table 1-4: Component Sensitivity to ESD
1.4.7 Hidden Effects of Electrostatic Damage
ESD immediately destroys sensitive devices in only 10% of most ESD incidents. It degrades performance in the
remaining 90%. Only 25% of the voltage required to destroy the component is needed to degrade its performance.
A device that is merely degraded in performance may pass all normal diagnostic tests, however, it may fail intermit-
tently as temperature, vibration, and load on the device vary. Ultimately, the device may fail prematurely days,
weeks, or even months after the ESD incident that degraded it.
If you have some minimal static control procedures, you may only experience a device failure rate of 0.5%. But, if
there are:
• 10 devices per board = 5% defective boards
• 10 boards per system = 40% defective systems
This points out the need to follow rigorous static control procedures at all times when handling and working with
static-sensitive devices and modules.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
1.4.8 Causes of Electrostatic Damage
Electrostatic damage is caused by the effects of an electric field that surrounds all charged objects. The electric
field can damage sensitive components by:
• discharge - the charge associated with the field is suddenly grounded and the movement is of the charge
creates current in the device.
• induction - the electric field moves in relation to the device and generates a current in the device.
• polarization - the electric field remains stationary and polarizes the device. Subsequent handling and
grounding first charges then discharges the device.
Electric fields are invisible, and exist around all charged materials. They can generate currents in conductors sim-
ply by moving near them. The size of the current depends on the strength of the field and the speed of movement.
Electric fields can polarize sensitive devices. Subsequent handling can cause charging and discharging of the
device.
1.4.9 Damage Due to Discharge
The surfaces of non-conductive materials develop equal and opposite charges when they come in contact, move
against each other, then separate quickly. An electric field surrounds a non-conductive material once it is charged.
We normally develop charge in our bodies and clothing as we move. When we walk on a carpet, our feet rub on
then separate from the carpet, which can give us a charge very quickly.
When we approach a conductor, like a door knob or one of today’s sensitive electronic devices, the air between our
body and the conductor initially acts as an insulator. At some point, the amount of charge we have built up exceeds
the insulating ability of the air, and a spark jumps to the conductor.
ES02652a01
Figure 1-5: Electrostatic Discharges
The spark introduces current in the conductor. These currents could destroy a sensitive device or degrade perfor-
mance.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
1.4.10 Damage Due to Induction
A conductor that moves in a magnetic field generates an electric current. This is the basic principle of a generator:
induction. The principle is the same if the magnetic field moves and the conductor is at rest. The electric field is
similar to the magnetic field in its ability to generate a current.
Walking across a carpet, building up charge, and approaching a sensitive device causes your electric field to move
across the conductors of the device. The stronger your electric field, and the faster your approach, the more likely
you are to induce damaging currents.
Charged Hand
Approaching
Induced
Current
Electric Field
ES02653a01
Figure 1-6: Damage Due to Induction
1.4.11 Damage Due to Polarization
If the electric field and a sensitive device remain stationary, but close to each other, a polarization effect may occur.
A good example of polarization is a styrofoam cup placed next to a chip. The cup is a nonconductor that is easily
charged by handling, or even simple movement in the air. Polarization causes the electrons on the chip, which are
negative, to be attracted to the cup, which is positively charged. At this point, the chip is not charged. It is polarized.
ES02654a01
Figure 1-7: Damage Due to Polarization

"Uncontrolled Copy"
If we pick up the chip, it becomes negatively charged as free electrons flow from hand to the chip. If we place the
chip on a grounded surface, it discharges. The discharge currents can degrade or destroy the chip.
ES2655a01
Figure 1-8: Damage Due to Polarization - Continued
1.5 Safety Hazard Indicators, Decals and Signs
1.5.1 General
Safety Hazard Indicators, Decals and Signs identify potential safety hazards and prevent accidents by displaying
standard symbols, headers and pictograms or custom graphics. Indicator, Decal and Sign, layouts, headers and
graphics conform to current ANSI guidelines. Commonly used for high voltage, personal protection, confined
space, and bilingual applications.
1.5.2 Hazard Indicators
DANGERS, WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTICES, and SAFETY FIRSTS are used throughout our manuals to
emphasize important and critical instructions. DANGERS, WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, and SAFETY FIRSTS will
precede the paragraph or item to which they apply. NOTICES will follow the paragraph or item to which they apply.
DANGERS, WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTICES and SAFETY FIRSTS are identified and defined as follows:
! DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury. This signal word will be limited to the most extreme situations.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
! WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
! CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
major injury.
CAUTION
A Caution without a Safety Alert Symbol (no Triangle and Exclamation Point) is used to
warn of hazards that result only in property damage.
NOTICE
Used to indicate a statement of company policy directly or indirectly related to the safety of per-
sonnel or protection of property. This signal word is not associated directly with a hazard or
hazardous situation and is not used in place of DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
SAFETY FIRST
Used to indicate general instructions relative to safe working practices, remind of proper safety
procedures, and indicate the location of safety equipment.
1.5.3 Safety Hazard Decals and Signs
Most Safety Hazard Decals and Signs use pictographs and text to show, both graphically and verbally, where
potential safety hazards exist around the electric mining shovel. These decals and signs do not represent every
possible hazard and are not intended to be a substitute for safe working practices and good judgement.
This subtopic provides examples of Safety Hazard Decals and Signs found on a typical electric mining shovel. Be
certain everyone working on, or near the shovel, understands and knows how to avoid the hazards they represent.
! CAUTION
Do not remove, cover, paint over, or deface Safety Hazard Decals or Signs.
If they become damaged or obscured, request replacement decals and signs from your local MinePro Office.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
1.5.3.1 Location
Safety Hazard Decals and Signs are located in various locations. Figure 1-9 identifies and describes the Safety
Hazard Decal associated with the TripRite System, only. For all other Safety Hazard Decals and Signs, refer to
your operator’s manual.
Safety Hazard Decal/Sign Description
Hazardous Voltage.
Will cause severe injury
or death.
Check for voltages
present.
Use lockout and tagout
procedures before servic-
ing.
Disconnect power to all
circuits.
Do not service unless
qualified and authorized.
ES02946a01
Figure 1-9: TripRite Safety Hazard Decal
1.5.4 Specific Hazard Indicators
Observe these Hazard Indicators when operating this shovel. Other Hazard Indicators may appear within specific
parts of this manual. They should be observed as well.
SAFETY FIRST
Safety must always be the operator's primary concern. An operator must refuse to operate the
shovel when a known unsafe condition exists. Consult your supervisor when safety is in doubt.
CAUTION
Sweeping produces strains in the attachment which occur at an angle. The attachment
was not designed to withstand this type of strain.
SAFETY FIRST
Any unsafe condition or practice must be reported to the job supervisor and shovel operator.
! CAUTION
Do not remove, cover, paint over, or deface Safety Hazard Decals or Signs.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
! DANGER
Death, severe bodily injury or significant material damage could result if these instruc-
tions are not followed.
CAUTION
In order to ensure an adequate supply of cooling air, a clearance of 100 mm (4 inches)
must be left at the top and bottom of the unit.
CAUTION
It is very critical that the resolver and motor leads are wired exactly as shown in the sup-
plied wiring diagrams. Crossing of resolver wires or motor power leads will result in
erratic control and may damage the motor or gearbox.
CAUTION
Never connect an ohmmeter to an energized circuit. Be sure that power is removed and
all current storage devices are discharged. Follow proper lockout tagout procedures.
! DANGER
Remove all electrical power from the shovel before performing any continuity tests. High
voltage, if present, will cause death and/or injury. Observe all minesite specific lockout-
tagout procedures.
! WARNING
Use meggers on high resistance measurements only. Never touch the test leads while
the handle is being cranked. Disconnect the item being checked from other circuitry, if
possible, before using the megger. De-energize and discharge the circuit completely
before and after meggering.
! DANGER
Remove all electrical power from the shovel before performing this inspection. High volt-
age, if present, will cause death and/or injury during the AC motor/heater insulation
resistance checks. Observe all lockout-tagout procedures.
! WARNING
Explosion Hazard - Do not install or remove memory card unless power has been
switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
! CAUTION
When permanently installing a memory card in an electrical enclosure, the memory card
retainer must be used to avoid accidental contact of high voltage leads to metal surfaces
on the card. Failure to use the retainer could result in physical injury or damage to the
terminal.
CAUTION
Without the memory card retainer installed, electrostatic discharge could reset or dam-
age the touch panel terminal.
CAUTION
Accidental removal of an ATA flash card from the card slot could result in damage to the
card.
! DANGER
Hazardous voltages exist within the TripRite cabinet. Use precautions to prevent electri-
cal shock when working on or near energized circuits.
CAUTION
Make sure the adapter is inserted properly in the programming equipment or damage
could result.
CAUTION
To avoid potential damage to the memory modules, handle them by the ends of the car-
rier or edges of the plastic housing. Skin oil and dirt can corrode metallic surfaces,
inhibiting electrical contact.
CAUTION
Do not expose memory modules to surfaces or areas that may typically hold an electro-
static charge. Electrostatic charges can alter or destroy memory.
! WARNING
TripRite Drives are operated at high voltages. The equipment must be disconnected
from the supply before performing any work on the unit. Follow all minesite specific
lockout tagout procedures.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
! DANGER
Hazardous voltages are still present in the unit up to 5 minutes after it has been powered
down due to the DC link capacitors. Wait 5 minutes after removing power before working
on the unit or on the DC link terminals.
! DANGER
The power terminals and control terminals can still be live even when the motor is sta-
tionary. If the DC link voltage is supplied centrally, the converters must be reliably iso-
lated from the DC link voltage!
! DANGER
When working on an opened unit, it should be observed that live components can be
touched.
! WARNING
The user is responsible that the unit is installed and connected-up according to recog-
nized regulations in that particular country as well as other regionally valid regulations.
Cable dimensioning, fusing, grounding, shutdown, isolation and overcurrent protection
should be particularly observed.
! CAUTION
The Safe OFF option does not generate electrical isolation between the motor terminals
and the power section.
! CAUTION
In the “Safe OFF” state, hazardous voltages are still present at the motor terminals.
! CAUTION
The Safe OFF option is not suitable for bringing a rotating motor to a quick halt as by de-
energizing the trigger signals, the motor is only braked by the connected load.
CAUTION
Parameter P366 was correctly set prior to delivery of the unit and only needs to be
changed in exceptional cases.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
! WARNING
TripRite Drive units are operated at high voltages. All work carried out on or with the
equipment must conform to local and international electrical codes.
! CAUTION
Maintenance and service should only be performed by qualified MinePro personnel. Use
only P&H recommended spare parts.
! CAUTION
The prescribed maintenance intervals and instructions for repair and replacement must
be complied with.
! DANGER
The power terminals and control terminals can still have hazardous voltage levels even
when the motor is stationary. Only work on a TripRite Drive with power applied when
absolutely necessary.
! DANGER
Never touch energized components within the TripRite drive. When required, follow all
minesite specific lockout-tagout procedures.
! CAUTION
Various components within the drive are Electrostatic sensitive. Follow all proper ESD
procedure when working on the TripRite Drive. Refer to Topic 1.4 for ESD information.
! WARNING
Before removing the old fan and fitting a new one, make sure that the TripRite Drive is
disconnected from the power supply. Follow all minesite specific lockout-tagout proce-
dures.
CAUTION
The overload protection derived from this parameter is only effective if sufficient cooling
of the motor is ensured.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
CAUTION
P74 must never be set lower than the peak rectifier value at maximum line voltage. Oth-
erwise the braking chopper remains continuously on, which can lead to overheating of
the braking resistor.
! CAUTION
The motor is live, and the rotor behaves accordingly. The shaft may turn. After the P but-
ton has been pressed, alarm “A078” appears. The converter must be switched on within
20 seconds.
CAUTION
If there is a change of soft wiring during the “Operation” drive status, the trigger condi-
tion must always be soft wired and be at 0, as otherwise unintentional parameter
changes may occur.
CAUTION
If the soft wiring is changed during the “Operation” drive status, the trigger condition
must always be soft wired and be at 0, as otherwise unintentional parameter changes
may occur.
CAUTION
If the EEPROM is continually written with different values, this will reduce the service life
of the component.
! CAUTION
The input of automatic records via parameters U525 ... U527 is intended for test pur-
poses only and must only be carried out by MinePro Service Technicians.
! CAUTION
Rare earth magnets generate extremely high mechanical forces. Handle the rotor with
great care. Avoid placing near iron or steel objects.
! WARNING
Frame operating temperatures may be high enough to cause burns. Keep all combusti-
ble materials away from the motor.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
CAUTION
Do not ground the shield at any point.
CAUTION
Do not pull on the wires of the cable or on the assembly. Pull the outside cable jacket
only.
! WARNING
Do not check motor temperature with your bare hand. High temperatures may cause
burns. Use a temperature measuring device.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
TripRite® Installation and Maintenance Manual Installation
Section 2
Installation
2.1 General
This section is intended for MinePro personnel assisting in converting a standard Dipper Trip System to the
TripRite. This topic should be used in conjunction with the electrical schematics, wiring diagrams, and installation
drawings provided by P&H Mining Equipment Engineering Department.
NOTICE
Safe TripRite drive operation requires that the equipment be mounted and commissioned by
qualified MinePro Services.
General installation and safety regulations for work on electrical power equipment must be observed as well as the
professional handling of tools and the use of personal protective equipment.
! DANGER
Death, severe bodily injury or significant material damage could result if these instruc-
tions are not followed.
2.1.1 TripRite Upgrade Kits
Refer to Table 2-1 for part numbers and descriptions of available TripRite Upgrade products. Order through your
local MinePro representative to ensure that the proper items are ordered for your shovel.

Section 2, Install.fm -2.1- Section 2, Version 00 - 10/06
"Uncontrolled Copy"
Installation TripRite® Installation and Maintenance Manual
Model Upgrade Kit Description

Part Number(s)
4100XPB R54487F1 TripRite Assembly (17:1 Transmission)
4100 & 4100A R56306F2 TripRite Mechanical Assembly (12:1 Transmission)
R53427F1 TripRite Control - Shovels w/SLC500 and ABB drives
R53427F2 TripRite Control - Shovels w/SLC500 and other than ABB drives
R56092F1 TripRite Control - Shovels w/o SLC500 (Relay controlled)
4100BOSS1 R53970F1 TripRite Mechanical Assembly (12:1 Transmission)
R52624D1 Motor w/Brake

R53914D2 Transmission (17:1)
4100TS R56306F1 TripRite Mechanical Assembly (17:1 Transmission)
2800XPA & XPB R55707F1 TripRite Mechanical Assembly (12:1 Transmission)
R56092F1 TripRite Control - Shovels w/o SLC500 (Relay controlled)
1) Also applicable to 4100A shovels that have been converted to planetary transmission with R38345F7
Table 2-1: TripRite Upgrade Kit Part Numbers
2.2 Mechanical Pre-checks

The following checks need to be performed and documented prior to installing the TripRite.
2.2.1 Latch Bar Engagement Depth
Refer to Figure 2-1. The latch bar (01) keeps the dipper door closed when the dipper is actively engaged in the
bank. It is mounted in such a way that when the operator wishes to open the dipper door, the door will come open
quickly and efficiently.
The latch lever (03) is held by the shims (02) in the latch box. The latch bar (01) rests on the latch lever. The other
end of the latch bar engages in the latch keeper (04). Ideal engagement is 19 to 25 mm (0.75 to 1 in.) or as directed
by operations personnel.

Section 2, Version 00 - 10/06 -2.2- Section 2, Install.fm
"Uncontrolled Copy"
LEGEND
01. Latch Bar
02
02. Shims
03. Latch Lever 01
04. Latch Keeper
05. 19 to 25 mm (0.75 to 1.0 in.) Engagement
03
01
04
ES4304a01
05
Figure 2-1: Latch Bar Engagement Detaiil
Table 2-2 describes the procedure for measuring Latch Bar engagement.
Check Box Procedure Step Actual Remarks
Step 1: Make a mark on the latch bar at the latch keeper

when the latch bar is engaged.
Step 2: Disengage the latch bar.
Step 3: Measure and record the distance between the mark

on the latch bar and the end of the latch bar. __________
Step 4: Reassemble the Latch Bar.
Table 2-2: Latch Bar Engagement Depth

"Uncontrolled Copy"
NOTICE
Adjust the latch bar (01) engagement by adding or removing shims (02) at the latch box. Adding
a shim will decrease engagement by approximately 12.7 mm (0.5 inch); removing a shim will
increase engagement by approximately 12.7 mm (0.5 inch).
CAUTION
Never remove the last shim, as the entire assembly will come apart.
2.2.2 Latch Bar Wear
Increasing productivity of the machines means it is only natural that some of those components on the dipper that
are “in the dirt” begin to see an equivalent increase in the amount of wear. Latch bars are subject to extreme load-
ing resulting from the high dipper fills and duty cycles now being achieved. This loading, along with other variables
such as pit floor conditions, fragmentation, and material abrasiveness all contribute to wear in the bar end, lever
pocket, and along the bar length at the wear pad locations. When repair is no longer effective, replacement is nec-
essary.
Replacement latch bars are made to the same engineering specifications as the original equipment. They are cast
from highly hardenable P&H manganese steel to handle the severe loads and abrasive conditions seen. Dipper
latch bars are easily replaceable and can help improve dipper operating efficiency immediately by insuring a posi-
tive door lock.
NOTICE
Refer to your parts manual for the latch bar part number for your dipper.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
2.3 Removing Existing Dipper Trip Motor, Transmission and Drum
! DANGER
Hazardous voltage will cause severe per-
sonal injury or death. Check for voltages
present. Use lockout and tagout proce-
dures before servicing. Disconnect power
to all circuits. Do not service unless quali-
fied and authorized.
Step 1: Remove the existing motor leads and resolver cable

at the dipper trip motor junction box.
NOTICE
Refer to the shop manual for the specific shovel
model for directions on how to release the spool
to unwind the cable.
Step 2: Remove the trip cable from the spool.

Leave the trip cable attached to the latch bar and carefully coil
the loose end on the platform. The cable will be reattached to
the new dipper trip motor spool.
NOTICE
Refer to the shop manual for the specific shovel
model for directions on how to remove the dip-
per trip motor, transmission and drum.
Step 3: Remove the existing dipper trip motor, transmission

and drum.
Table 2-3: Existing Dipper Trip Motor, Transmission and Drum Removal

"Uncontrolled Copy"
2.4 Motor, Transmission and Drum Installation
01
16
02
15
03 04 05
14
06
13
12
11 07
08
10
09
ES4307a01
LEGEND
01. Guard 09. Adapter Block (R54116D1)
02. Dipper Trip Bracket 10. Capscrew, Hard Washer and Nut (6)
03. O-ring 11. Capscrew and Hard Washer (8)
04. Motor (R52624D1) 12. Transmission Manual Disengage Cap
05. Motor Junction Box 13. Transmission (R53914D_)
06. Motor Brake and Encoder Cover 14. Nut (10)
07. Grade 5 Capscrew and Lockwasher (2) 15. Drum
08. Shims 16. Motor Brake Manual Release Knob
Figure 2-2: Motor, Transmission and Drum Installation (Boom Mounted Dipper Trip System Shown)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 1: Refer to Figure 2-2. Lightly lubricate the O-ring (03)

with oil and install the O-ring on the transmission (13).
Step 2: Apply anti-seize compound to the threads on the eight

hex head capscrews (11).
! WARNING
Failure to use an adequate lifting device or
using improper lifting techniques, could
cause the item being lifted to fall causing
serious personal injury or death. Be sure the
lifting device has a rated capacity exceeding
the weight of the item being lifted. The
transmission (13) weighs approximately 100
kg (220 lbs).
NOTICE
When properly aligned, one transmission oil fill
plug will be located at the top and the other 90
degrees from the top plug.
Step 3: Using a suitable lifting device, lift and align the trans-
mission (13) with the motor (04). Attach the transmis-
sion to the motor using the hex head capscrews and
hard washers (11). Torque the capscrews to 153 Nm
(113 ft-lbs).
Step 4: Apply anti-seize compound to the threads on the six hex

head capscrews (10).
! WARNING
the weight of the item being lifted. The dip-
per trip motor and transmission sub-assem-
bly weighs approximately 210 kg (460 lbs).
Step 5: Using a suitable lifting device, lift and align the motor
and transmission sub-assembly with the existing dipper
trip bracket (02). Attach the sub-assembly to the dipper
trip motor bracket using the six hex head capscrews,
hard washers, and hex nuts (10). Torque the capscrews
to 153 Nm (200 ft-lbs).
Table 2-4: Motor, Transmission and Drum Installation (Typical)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 6: Loosely attach the adapter block (09) and shims (08) on
the motor foot using only the rear most holes in the
motor foot and the supplied hex head capscrews and
lockwashers (07).
NOTICE
The shims (08) are used to remove clearance
between the motor rear mounting foot and the
adapter block.
NOTICE
If the adapter block (09) is already welded to the
dipper trip bracket (02), go to Step 8.
Step 7: Weld the adapter block (09) to the existing dipper trip
motor bracket (02).
Step 8: Torque the capscrews (10) to 42 Nm (31 ft-lbs) dry.
Step 9: Apply anti-seize compound to the threads on the trans-

mission (13) studs used for mounting the drum (15).
! WARNING
the weight of the item being lifted. The drum
(15) weighs approximately 70 kg (150 lbs).
Step 10: Reattach the existing drum (15) to the transmission

(13) using the ten hex nuts (14). Torque the nuts to
434 Nm (320 ft-lbs).
Step 11:
NOTICE
Do not install the trip cable onto the spool at this
time. This will be performed in Subtopic 4.9.4.
Table 2-4: Motor, Transmission and Drum Installation (Typical) (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 12: Manually disengage the brake by rotating the manual

release knob (16) in the direction shown on the brake
cover.
NOTICE
If the drum still does not rotate easily, remove
and invert the transmission manual disengage cap
(12).
Step 13: By hand, rotate the spool and verify that the spool,
transmission, and motor rotate freely.
Step 14: Engage the brake by rotating the manual release knob
back to the original position.
NOTICE
If the transmission manual disengage cap was rin-
verted to release the transmission, return the cap
to the original position.
Step 15: Reattach the existing drum guard () to the dipper trip
bracket and motor using socket head capscrews, hex
head capscrews, and lockwashers.
Table 2-4: Motor, Transmission and Drum Installation (Typical) (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
2.5 TripRite Drive Enclosure Mounting
NOTICE
If the shovel is already equipped with the new TripRite Drive Control Panel, disregard this sub-
section.
The mounting of the TripRite Drive Enclosure on earlier shovels will depend on the type of shovel being retrofitted.
The mounting location will be determined by P&H Mining Equipment Engineering Department. All mounting hard-
ware and drawings will be provided in the retrofit kit. Table 2-5 provides basic instructions for the mounting of the
TripRite Drive Enclosure.
! WARNING
Follow all minesite specific safety precautions regarding welding. Wear all standard
welding personal protective equipment.
! WARNING
Follow all minesite specific safety precau-
tions regarding welding. Wear all standard
welding safety equipment.
NOTICE
Refer to mounting drawings provided with the
retrofit kit.
Step 1: Weld the Uni-Strut to the wall and enclosure at the

location shown in the drawings.
NOTICE
If this area is obstructed, find a suitable loca-
tion in close proximity.
Step 2: Mount the enclosure to the Uni-Strut with the hard-
ware provided with the retrofit kit.
Table 2-5: TripRite Drive Enclosure Mounting
Figures 2-3, 2-4, 2-5, and 2-6 provide examples of various mounting locations.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
1" and ½"

Sealtite
through wall
30" High to motor.
ES03588a01
Figure 2-3: TripRite Drive Enclosure Mounting - 4100A Analog

"Uncontrolled Copy"
1" and ½"

Sealtite
30" High through wall
to motor.
ES03587a01
Figure 2-4: TripRite Drive Enclosure Mounting - 4100A Digital

"Uncontrolled Copy"
30" High
ES03590a01
Figure 2-5: TripRite Drive Enclosure Mounting - 2800XPB

"Uncontrolled Copy"
½" and 1"

Sealtite
through wall
ES03589a01 to motor.
30" High
Figure 2-6: TripRite Drive Enclosure Mounting - 2300XPB
2.5.1 Wiring and Sealtite Conduit Runs
The resolver provides the drive with speed and rotor position feedback which is critical to the control system. The
resolver cable must be installed in its own conduit with no other wires.
2.5.1.1 Sealtite Runs
Use the existing holes in the TripRite enclosure for the interconnecting sealtite runs. Holes will have to be cut in the
wall of the shovel for routing cables to the motor. Weld the ½” and 1” couplings in the holes. Sealtite fittings are pro-
vided for the joining to the couplings. Figure 2-7 shows the sealtite runs.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Controller
Dynamic
Braking
Profibus Resistors
Communication
1"
Sealtite
½"
Sealtite TB39115
3Ø
6
480VAC
24VDC
7 Line Reactor DS39106
Supply 8 (LR39106)
H G P P U1 V1 W1
9
10 +
–P
E
A1 -E2 +E1 TB39115 GND

GND
CR39113
GND
A
S1 1
Motor
Neutral
CR39113 2
Brake 3
X101 B 120VAC
4
5
CR39113 X103 C
Motor Heaters
CR39113
½"
Sealtite
24VDC COM 1"
Sealtite
+24VDC
ES04717a01
Resolver Cable
Figure 2-7: Overall TripRite Block Diagram - Refer to Schematic Diagram R56357 and Figure 2-11

"Uncontrolled Copy"
2.5.1.2 Resolver Cable
The resolver cable is supplied by Siemens with a Din 25-pin connector at one end and a metallic canon plug at the
opposite end. The canon plug is not used and must be removed by cutting it off the cable. By having it removed, it
will facilitate feeding the resolver cable through the Sealtite® flexible conduit. After feeding the resolver cable
through the conduit, connect the wire ends to the terminal strip in the motor junction box as shown in Figure 2-8.
After making the connections at the motor junction box, attach the 25-pin connector to the drive at X414.
NOTICE
Because the drive supplies power to the resolver, it is important to ensure that the motor end is
properly terminated prior to plugging in the 25-pin D-shell connector to the drive. Proper wiring
is imperative to the proper operation of the TripRite system. Refer to Figure 2-8.
U1 V1 W1 PE1 C G H D
X1 X6
X9
1
2
Resolver Cable
X414
X101
1
2
3
4 1
5 2
3
6 4
7 5
8 6
7
9 8
10 9
11
12
X2
PE2 U2 V2 W2 Motor J-Box
1 3 2 TB
BRN COS(-)
1
BLK COS(+)
2
YEL SIN(+)
T2 3
GRN SIN(-)
Dipper 4
T3
Trip 5
Motor BRN/RED EXC(+)
6
T1 BRN/BLU EXC(-)
7
GND RED THERM (+)
GRN 8
ORG THERM (-)
9
10
Resolver Cable (Run By Itself)
ES03591a01
Figure 2-8: Resolver Cable and Motor Power Cable Connection

"Uncontrolled Copy"
2.5.1.3 Motor Leads
CAUTION
Power leads are not interchangeable and must be wired per Figure 2-8.
NOTICE
The motor power cable shield should be terminated on both ends. Strip back the cable’s outer
plastic insulation to expose the shield and attach a cable clamp around the exposed shield.
Attach the cable clamp to ground. Refer to Figure 2-8.
On the TripRite drive end of the motor power cable, connect the wires to terminal block X2 (Figure 2-9) at the bot-
tom of the unit and as specified in Table 2-6. On the motor end, connect the motor power cable to the motor leads
inside of the motor junction box as specified in Table 2-6.
2- 7 8 9
-5!!=
Figure 2-9: TripRite Drive Motor Connections, X2
Drive Motor Junction Box

Terminal Terminal
PE Ground to Upper Frame
U2 T1
V2/T2 T2
W2/T3 T3
Table 2-6: Motor Connection
2.5.1.4 120VAC
The three conductor 120VAC cable should be routed to the load center and terminated on the circuit breaker, neu-
tral bus, and ground bus. Refer to Figure 2-11.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
2.5.1.5 Wiring
Refer to Figures 2-10, 2-11, and 2-12 for wiring changes required for the TripRite.
24VDC
to TripRite
Drive
ES03283a01
Figure 2-10: 24VDC Supply

"Uncontrolled Copy"
1" Sealtite
120VAC
Neutral 1" Sealtite Braking Resistors

GND Line
Reactors
3Ø
480VAC
+24VDC COM From
TripRite
½" Sealtite +24VDC Drive
(run with Profibus cable) X101
U1 V1 W1 PE1 C G H D
A1 -E2 +E1 Interface
TB39115 X1 X6 Module
+24VDC COM
6 X9
7 1 +24VDC COM
+24VDC
8 2 +24VDC CR39113
TB39115 GND
9 GND
10 GND
X414 Neutral Neutral
Resolver Cable 1
2
X101 3
1 120VAC
4
120VAC
+24VDC COM 2 5
+24VDC 3
CR39113 4 Shld
1 Profibus 9-Pin
5 2 B1 Connector and Cable
(+)B 3
6 4 Term
7 IGND 5 On
IV+ 6 Off
8
7
9 (-)A 8
10 9 A1
11
12
X2
½" Sealtite
PE2 U2 V2 W2 (run with incoming 24VDC)
1 3 2 To
Profibus
Scanner
Motor J-Box
TB
BRN COS(-)
1
BLK COS(+)
2
YEL SIN(+)
T2 3
GRN SIN(-)
Dipper 4
T3
Trip 5
Motor BRN/RED EXC(+)
6
T1 BRN/BLU EXC(-)
1" Sealtite 7
GND RED THERM (+)
(run with motor leads) GRN 8
ORG THERM (-)
9
CR39113 Motor Heaters
120VAC 10
From
TB39115 Neutral
CR39113 Motor Brake

120VAC
From
TB39115 Neutral
Resolver Cable (Run By Itself)
ES03585a01 ½" Sealtite
Figure 2-11: Dipper Trip Schematic Diagram

"Uncontrolled Copy"
To TripRite
ES03286a01
Drive
Figure 2-12: Profibus Adapter

"Uncontrolled Copy"
2.6 Installing DriveMonitor Software
NOTICE
Because the DriveMonitor software requires Administrator level rights to install on the com-
puter, the installation instructions are provided with the software CD.

"Uncontrolled Copy"

"Uncontrolled Copy"
TripRite® Installation and Maintenance Manual TripRite Drive
Section 3
TripRite Drive
3.1 System Description

The TripRite Drive represents an overall modular, fully digital component system.
The control functionality of the system is especially tailored to the demands of servo-drive engineering. The vector
current control enables fast current injection into the motor windings in conjunction with short sampling times. The
related highly dynamic build-up of the torque provides a good basis for higher-level closed-loop control circuits.
With the closed-loop current control, it is possible to operate both synchronous motors and induction motors. Vari-
ous types of encoders can be used for sensing the necessary speed and positional signals.
The system has a comprehensive basic functionality which can be expanded, if required, by extensive technology
and communication functions by the use of software and hardware options. This enables the units to be adapted to
the most diversified conditions of service.
3.1.1 Performance Features
The TripRite Drive has the following performance features:
• Output range of 11KW.
• Integrated DC link bus module and fusing.
• Integrated “Safe STOP” function (optional).
• Control functionality with servo-characteristics for synchronous and induction motors.
• Interfacing of various position encoders and tachometers.
• Integrated USS interface for the configuration of simple bus systems.
• Interfacing of various field buses.
• Integrated technology functions for positioning, synchronism and cam disk.
• Definition of the closed-loop control structures by means of freely assignable function blocks.
• User-friendly start-up and diagnostics procedures.
• Menu prompting.
• Graded operator control and visualization by means of an integrated simple standard operator control panel,
a user-friendly operator control panel or via PC.

Section 3, TripRite Drive.fm -3.1- Section 3, Version 00 - 10/06
"Uncontrolled Copy"
TripRite Drive TripRite® Installation and Maintenance Manual
3.1.2 Configuration
Refer to Figure 3-1, Schematic Diagram R56357 and Figure 3-10. In the TripRite System, the drive is directly con-
nected to the 3-phase power supply through an external main contactor, a line filter and a line reactor. Any regen-
erative energy is stored in the capacitor module or reduced in the dynamic braking resistor.
Controller
Dynamic
Braking
Profibus Resistors
Communication
1"
Sealtite
½"
Sealtite TB39115
3Ø
6
480VAC
24VDC
7 Line Reactor DS39106
Supply 8 (LR39106)
H G P P U1 V1 W1
9
10 +
–P
E
A1 -E2 +E1 TB39115 GND

GND
CR39113
GND
A
S1 1
Motor
Neutral
CR39113 2
Brake 3
X101 B 120VAC
4
5
CR39113 X103 C
Motor Heaters
CR39113
½"
Sealtite
24VDC COM 1"
Sealtite
+24VDC
ES04717a01
Resolver Cable
Figure 3-1: Typical TripRite Configuration

Section 3, Version 00 - 10/06 -3.2- Section 3, TripRite Drive.fm
"Uncontrolled Copy"
The system uses the shovel’s existing control hardware. The dipper trip switch is an analog input to the controller.
The controller communicates to the dipper trip drive through a Profibus. The controller reads information from the
drive for display purposes. It also writes control data to the drive. Some of the data transmitted/received through
the Profibus network is shown in Table 3-1.
Read From the Drive Written to the Drive
Status Word 1 Control Word 1
Fault Code Torque Limit
Motor Temperature Speed Limit
Motor Current
Bus Voltage
Motor Speed
Drive Temperature
Table 3-1: Transmitted/Received Data
The controller sends a start command to the drive when the shovel is started. If the system faults, a 30-second
delayed shutdown is initiated by the controller.
The drive is configured for operation in the speed mode. The controller provides a speed limit as well as a torque
limit. The Slack Take-up Torque is set through the Operator Touch Panel. While running in Slack Take-up Mode,
the controller sets the drives torque limit to this setting. When the dipper trip is activated by the operator, the con-
troller increases the torque limit to 100% of the motors capability. The drive increases output current at a pre-
defined rate. When the dipper door opens, the motor quickly reaches its speed limit and the motor current (torque)
is immediately reduced so that the speed limit is not exceeded. Therefore, the applied torque never exceeds the
level that is required to unlatch the dipper door.
The motor resolver provides speed and rotor position feedback to the drives closed loop control system.
3.2 TripRite Drive
3.2.1 Connections
! WARNING
TripRite Drives are operated at high voltages. The equipment must be disconnected
from the supply before performing any work on the unit. Follow all minesite specific
lockout tagout procedures.
! DANGER

"Uncontrolled Copy"
! DANGER
The power terminals and control terminals can still be live even when the motor is sta-
tionary. If the DC link voltage is supplied centrally, the converters must be reliably iso-
lated from the DC link voltage!
! DANGER
When working on an opened unit, it should be observed that live components can be
accidentally touched which will cause serious personal injury or death.
! WARNING
The user is responsible that the unit is installed and connected according to recognized
regulations in that particular country as well as other regionally valid regulations. Cable
dimensioning, fusing, grounding, shutdown, isolation and overcurrent protection should
be particularly observed.
11 12 13 14 LEGEND
01. Capacitor Unit
02. Motor Connections, X2
10 H G P P U1 V W1
03. Slot C, Resolver Feedback
Option Card.
09 04. RS232 Jack for OP1S or Drive
–P
E Monitor, X103
+
08 05. Slot B, Not Used
07 15 06. Terminal Strip, X101
07. Slot A, Profibus Option Card
08. Bus Terminating Resistor, S1
06 A 16 09. 24VDC Output, X100
S1 10. PMU, Parameterizing Unit
05 11. External 24VDC Supply, X9
12. Pre-charging Capacitor Unit, X7
13. Dynamic Braking Resistor Con-
04 X101 B nection, X6
14. Mains Connection, X1
03 15. DC Link Bus Module, X3
16. Safe Off, X533 (Optional)
02 X103 C
01
ES03278b01
Figure 3-2: TripRite Drive Connection Overview

"Uncontrolled Copy"
3.2.1.1 Motor Connections, X2 (02, Figure 3-3)
On the drive end of the motor power cable, the motor connections are made to a terminal block (02, Figure 3-2 and
Figure 3-3) at the bottom of the unit and as specified in Table 3-2. On the motor end of the motor power cable, the
connections are made to motor leads inside of the motor junction box as specified in Table 3-2.
2- 7 8 9
-5!!=
Figure 3-3: TripRite Drive Motor Connections, X2
Drive Motor Junction Box

Terminal Terminal
PE Ground to Upper Frame
U2 T1
V2/T2 T2
W2/T3 T3
Table 3-2: Motor Connection
3.2.1.2 Slot C, Resolver Feedback Option Card (03, Figure 3-2)
Refer to Topic 3.3.
3.2.1.3 RS232 Jack for OP1S or Drive Monitor, X103 (04, Figure 3-2)
A 9-pole SUB D socket is provided to connect either an OP1S or a PC with RS232 or RS485 serial interface to the
TripRite drive. Different connecting cables are used to connect the PC depending on the transmission protocol.
Refer to Figure 3-4 and Table 3-3. The 9-pole SUB D socket is internally coupled with the USS bus which enables
data exchange with other nodes linked through the USS bus.
NOTICE
This interface is also used for loading software.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
' #
$

-5!! =
Figure 3-4: RS232 Jack for OP1S or Drive Monitor, X103
Pin Designation Meaning Range
1 RS232 ID Changeover to RS232 protocol Low active
2 RS232 R×D Receive data via RS232 RS232
3 RS485 P Data via RS485 interface RS485
4 Boot Control signal for software update Low active
5 M5 AUX Reference potential to P5V 0V
6 P5V 5 V auxiliary voltage supply +5V, max. 200mA
7 RS232 T×D Transmit data via RS232 RS232
8 RS485 N Data via RS485 interface RS485
9 M_RS232/485 Digital ground (choked)
Table 3-3: Serial Interface
3.2.1.4 Terminal Strip, X101 (06, Figure 3-2)
Refer to Figure 3-5 and Table 3-4. The following connections are provided on the terminal strip:
• 4 combined digital inputs and outputs
• 2 additional digital inputs
• 1 analog input
• 1 analog output
• 24VDC auxiliary voltage supply (max. 60mA) for the inputs.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
-5!!!=
Figure 3-5: Terminal Strip, X101
Terminal Designation Meaning Range
1 P24 AUX Auxiliary voltage supply DC 24V / 60mA
2 M24 AUX Reference potential 0V
3 DIO1 Digital input/output 1 24V, 10mA / 20mA
7 DI5 Digital input 5 24V, 10mA
8 DI6 Digital input 6 24V, 10mA
9 AI+ Analog input + 11 bit + sign

differential input:
10 AI- Analog input - ± 10V / Ri = 40kW
11 AO Analog output 11 bit + sign

± 10V / 5mA
12 M AO Ground analog output
Table 3-4: Control Terminal Strip

"Uncontrolled Copy"
3.2.1.5 Slot A, Profibus Option Card (07, Figure 3-2)
Refer to Topic 3.4.
3.2.1.6 Bus Terminating Resistor, S1 (08, Figure 3-2)
The bus terminating resistor can, if required, be powered up by means of the switch S1 located next to the bus con-
nection. The bus termination is powered up when the switch is in the upper position.
Power-up is necessary if the unit is located at one end of the USS bus.
3.2.1.7 24VDC Output, X100 (09, Figure 3-2)
Refer to Figure 3-6 and Table 3-5. The unit is provided with a 24VDC output to which a maximum of two additional
converters can be connected.
One additional inverter can be connected to the 24VDC output if the unit has a case with a housing width of 45mm.
The USS bus connection is linked with the control electronics and the 9-pole SUB D socket of the serial interface.
Also see Subtopic 3.2.1.6.
!!
!"
!#
!$
-5!!"=
Figure 3-6: 24VDC Output, X100
33 +24 V (out) 24 V voltage output 24VDC – 28VDC
34 0V Reference potential 0V
35 RS485P (USS) USS bus connection RS485
36 RS485N (USS) USS bus connection RS485
Table 3-5: 24VDC Output, USS Bus
3.2.1.8 PMU, Parameterizing Unit (10, Figure 3-2)
Refer to Subtopic 5.1.1.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
3.2.1.9 External 24VDC Supply, X9 (11, Figure 3-2)
Refer to Figure 3-7 and Table 3-6. In order to enable the unit to be parameterized and monitored with the DC link
discharged (e.g. line interruption), an external 24VDC supply is necessary. The two-pole connection required for
this is situated at the top of the unit.
With the DC link charged, the voltage is supplied by an internal switchmode power supply.

-5!!#=
Figure 3-7: External 24VDC Supply, X9
2 +24VDC External 24 V supply 18VDC to 30VDC
1 0VDC Reference potential 18VDC to 30VDC
Table 3-6: External 24VDC Supply
3.2.1.10 Pre-charging Capacitor Unit, X7 (12, Figure 3-2)
Refer to Figure 3-8 and Table 3-7. The connection for pre-charging the capacitor module is on the top of the unit.
+ + , ,
-5!!$=
Figure 3-8: Pre-charging Capacitor Unit, X7
Terminal Meaning
C’ Pre-charging of capacitor module
C’ Pre-charging of capacitor module
D’ Pre-charging of capacitor module
D’ Pre-charging of capacitor module
Table 3-7: Connection for Pre-charging Capacitor Module

"Uncontrolled Copy"
3.2.1.11 Dynamic Braking Resistor Connection, X6 (13, Figure 3-2)
Refer to Figure 3-9 and Table 3-8. The connection for the external Dynamic Braking Resistors is to a terminal block
on the top of the unit on the left next to the mains connection.
2- 0 /
-5!!%=
Figure 3-9: Dynamic Braking Resistor Connection, X6
Terminal Meaning
PE Protective conductor connection
H Braking resistor connection
G Braking resistor connection
Table 3-8: Dynamic Braking Resistor Connections
3.2.1.12 Mains Connection, X1 (14, Figure 3-2)
Refer to Figure 3-10 and Table 3-9. The main input connections are made to a terminal block on top of the unit.
2- 7 8 9
-5!!&=
Figure 3-10: Mains Connection, X1

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Terminal Meaning Range
PE Protective conductor connection 3Ø 380VAC to 480VAC
U1 / L1 Phase U1 / L1 3Ø 380VAC to 480VAC
V1 / L2 Phase V1 / L2 3Ø 380VAC to 480VAC
W1 / L3 Phase W1 / L3 3Ø 380VAC to 480VAC
Table 3-9: Mains Connection
3.2.1.13 DC Link Bus Module, X3 (15, Figure 3-2)
Refer to Table 3-10. The DC link bus module serves as the electrical connection of the individual units on the DC
link side. It is of significance if additional inverters also have to be fed.
Bar Designation Meaning Range
3 PE3 Protective conductor connection
2 D / L- DC link voltage - 510VDC to 650VDC
1 C / L+ DC link voltage + 510VDC to 650VDC
Table 3-10: DC Link Bus Module
3.2.1.14 Safe Off, X533 (Optional) (16, Figure 3-2)
Refer to Figure 3-11 and Table 3-11. With the Safe OFF option, the power supply for the transmission of pulses
into the power section can be interrupted through a safety relay. This ensures that the unit will definitely not gener-
ate a rotating field in the connected motor.
Even if the control electronics generates trigger commands, the power section cannot move the motor.
This enables mechanical work to be performed on the drive or on coupled machine parts with energized line volt-
age and without electrical isolation of the motor to the unit.
! CAUTION
The Safe OFF option does not generate electrical isolation between the motor terminals
and the power section.
! CAUTION
In the “Safe OFF” state, hazardous voltages are still present at the motor terminals.
! CAUTION
The Safe OFF option is not suitable for bringing a rotating motor to a quick halt as by de-
energizing the trigger signals, the motor is only braked by the connected load.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
The Safe OFF option comprises the safety relay and the connecting terminals for relay triggering and a check-back
contact.
!
"
-5!!'=
Figure 3-11: Safe Off, X533 (Optional)
1 K1. 11 NC contact Imax = 1A
2 K1. 12 NC contact 24VDC
3 K1. a Control terminal ---
4 P24 24VDC voltage 24VDC
Table 3-11: Terminal Assignment for the “Safe OFF” Option
3.3 SBR (Sensor Board Resolver)

The SBR (03, Figure 3-2) enables a resolver to be connected to the TripRite Drive.
3.3.1 Functional Principle
The position of an exciter coil in the rotor in relation to two stator coils is evaluated in the resolver.
A high frequency carrier signal (5KHz to 10KHz) is injected into the rotor winding of the resolver via a rotary trans-
former. The high frequency current flowing in the rotor induces a high frequency voltage into the two stator coils
arranged at right angles to each other. The amplitude of this voltage depends on the present position of the rotor
winding or of the rotor. The envelope curve of the voltage induced into the stator coils is a sine or cosine curve.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Due to the right angle arrangement of the stator coils, one coil will supply the sine value and the other coil the
cosine value of the present rotor position. Both signals are sensed via A/D transformers. Refer to Figure 3-12.
# $
" LEGEND
01. Cosine Track
02. Cosine Pick Off
03. Rotor Winding
04. Sine Pick Off
! 05. Sine Track
06. Excitation (5KHz to 10KHz)
07. Rotary Transformer
%

-5!! "=
Figure 3-12: Schematic Diagram of a Resolver
The unit software calculates the position angle α from these two signals via trigonometry functions.
The change of the position angle α between the two sampling times provides the current speed of the motor.
3.3.2 Adjustment
Via the PLL control loop, the SBR board is capable of setting the phase position of the exciter signal such that the
sine or cosine signal induced in the stator windings of the resolver is always sensed at maximum.
At the same time, the amplitude of the exciter signal is adjusted to the maximum resolution of the internal A/D
transformer. This enables the position of the angle of the stator winding to be sensed with the maximum possible
accuracy.
3.3.3 Mounting
NOTICE
The SBR board must be installed in Slot C. It does not operate in any other slot.
! DANGER
Due to the DC link capacitors, hazardous voltages are still present in the converter up to
5 minutes after it has been disconnected from the power supply. Before opening the
converter, wait until the capacitors have completely discharged.
Step 1: Disconnect the drive from the power supply and power down the unit.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 2: Remove the 24VDC voltage supply for the electronics.
Step 3: Remove all connecting cables.
Step 4: Loosen the 2 fixing screws on the front of the unit at the top. There is no need to remove the screws com-
pletely, since cutouts are provided in the housing to permit the front to come away after the screws have
been loosened.
Step 5: Carefully swing the upper front section forwards (approximately 30°) away from the housing.
Step 6: At the power section, open the locking lever of the ribbon cable that connects up with the control electron-
ics.
Step 7: Take off the front of the unit by moving it forwards.
Step 8: Remove the cover of the selected slot on the front panel.
Step 9: To do so, you must carefully cut through the four connecting points of the cover on the front panel with a
thin knife.
Step 10: Undo the two optional board screws by about one turn each.
Step 11: Loosen the connection between the system connector and the board so as to prevent any mechanical
tension arising when the screws are fully unscrewed.
Step 12: Take out the optional board screws and remove the board.
Step 13: Insert the optional board from the behind the broken-out slot cover until the position of the 64-pole system
connector on the electronic board corresponds with the position of the socket.
Step 14: Insert the option board into the 64-pole system connector on the electronic board.
Step 15: Screw the optional board tight at the fastening points in the front section of the optional board with the two
screws.
ES03309a01
Figure 3-13: SBR Installation

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 16: Keep the front of the unit tilted about approximately 30° forwards and insert the cutout of the lower guide
plate - approaching from below - into the strip on the power section.
Step 17: Insert the connection cable plug into the power section socket and close the locking lever.
Step 18: Carefully return the front of the unit into the housing. Make sure that the guide plates on the right-hand
side of the front (viewed from the front) enter the housing cutouts.
Step 19: Screw the front of the unit securely to the power section with the two fixing screws.
Step 20: Re-connect all previously removed connecting cables.
Step 21: Check all connecting cables and the shield to make sure they sit properly and are in the correct position.
Step 22: To designate the optional board, insert the relevant designation plate into the envisaged position on the
front of the unit.
Step 23: After powering up the voltage, you can log on the optional boards in the software of the unit and com-
mence start-up.
3.3.4 Connecting
The SBR board is provided with the following connections for the signal cables:
• X414 Encoder connection via a 25-pole SUB D Connector.
Connect the shielded signal cables to the appropriate connection and place the shield on the shield plate.
Connect the resolver to the SBR board by means of the shielded encoder cable. Use the pre-assembled cable for
this purpose.
Connection is via a 25-pole SUB D connector on the front side of the SBR board. Refer to Figure 3-14.
!
#
"

-5!! #=
Figure 3-14: SBR Board Connector, X414

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Pin Significance Range
3 Resolver output voltage sin+
4 Resolver output voltage sin-
5 Internal shield for 3 and 4
6 Resolver output voltage cos+
7 Resolver output voltage cos-
9 Resolver excitation + Adjustable 0-7Vss, 5KHz to

10KHz sine
11 Ground for resolver excitation
13 Motor temperature sensing PTC/KTY
25 Motor temperature sensing PTC/KTY
Housing External shield
Table 3-12: Pin Assignment at Connection X414
3.3.5 Start-up
After installation of the SBR board is complete, an automatic self test is carried out when the TripRite Drive is pow-
ered up.
3.4 CBP (Communications Board Profibus)

The CBP Communications Board (Communications Board Profibus) is for linking TripRite Advance Dipper Trip
drive to higher-level automation systems via Profibus-DP.
Profibus is an international, open field bus standard with a wide scope of application in production and process
automation. Neutrality and openness are guaranteed by international standards EN 50170 and IEC 61158.
The Profibus-DP enables very fast, time-critical transfer of data on the field level. With the Profibus, a distinction is
made between masters and slaves.
Masters determine data traffic on the bus and are also designated in the literature as active nodes. There are two
classes of master:
1. E DP-Master Class 1 (DPM1). These are central stations which exchange information with the slaves in
defined communications cycles.
2. E DP-Master Class 2 (DPM2). Units of this type are programming units, planning units or control and monitor-
ing units which are used for configuring, starting up or monitoring systems in operation.
Slaves can only acknowledge the messages they receive or transfer messages to a master when the latter
requests a slave to do so. Slaves are also designated as passive nodes.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
3.4.1 Bus Access Process
The Profibus works according to the token-passing procedure, i.e. the masters become token holders for a defined
time window in a logical ring. Within this time window, the master can communicate with other masters. Alterna-
tively, it can communicate with slaves by using a lower-level master-slave procedure.
The Profibus-DP mainly uses the master-slave method and data is usually exchanged with the drives cyclically.
This enables very rapid data exchange between the higher-level systems and the drives. Access to the drives is
always made according to the master-slaves method. The drives are always the slaves and each slave is clearly
defined by its address.
3.4.2 Technical Data
The CBP has three LED’s (green, yellow, red) for providing information on the current operating status. Voltage is
supplied from the basic unit through the system's plug-in connector.
The CBP has a 9-pole SUB D socket (X448) which is provided for connecting to the Profibus system in accordance
with the Profibus standard. All connections of this RS485 interface are short circuit proof and floating.
The CBP supports baud rates of 9.6 Kbaud to 12 Mbaud and is also suitable for connecting fiber-optic cable by
means of optical link plugs (OLP’s).
!

"
#
$
%

-5!!&=
LEGEND
01. Fastening Screw 05. LED (Yellow)
02. System Connector 06. LED (Red)
03. Fastening Screw 07. 9-Pole Sub-D Connection
04. LED (Green) X448
Figure 3-15: CBP Communication Board (Profibus)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
3.4.3 Mounting
NOTICE
You can mount the CBP optional board in any slot. Bear in mind, however, that an encoder
board always needs slot C. P&H Mining Equipment preferred slot is slot A.
ES03309a01
Figure 3-16: CBP Installation
! DANGER
Due to the DC link capacitors, hazardous voltages are still present in the converter up to
5 minutes after it has been disconnected from the power supply. Before opening the
converter, wait until the capacitors have completely discharged.
Step 1: Disconnect the drive from the power supply and power down the unit.
Step 2: Remove the 24VDC voltage supply for the electronics.
Step 3: Remove all connecting cables.
Step 4: Loosen the 2 fixing screws on the front of the unit at the top. There is no need to remove the screws com-
pletely, since cutouts are provided in the housing to permit the front to come away after the screws have
been loosened.
Step 5: Carefully swing the upper front section forwards (approximately 30°) away from the housing.
Step 6: At the power section, open the locking lever of the ribbon cable that connects up with the control electron-
ics.
Step 7: Take off the front of the unit by moving it forwards.
Step 8: Remove the cover of the selected slot on the front panel.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 9: To do so, you must carefully cut through the four connecting points of the cover on the front panel with a
thin knife.
Step 10: Undo the two optional board screws by about one turn each.
Step 11: Loosen the connection between the system connector and the board so as to prevent any mechanical
tension arising when the screws are fully unscrewed.
Step 12: Take out the optional board screws and remove the board.
Step 13: Insert the optional board from behind the broken-out slot cover until the position of the 64-pole system
connector on the electronic board corresponds with the position of the socket.
Step 14: Insert the option board into the 64-pole system connector on the electronic board.
Step 15: Screw the optional board tight at the fastening points in the front section of the optional board with the two
screws.
Step 16: Keep the front of the unit tilted about approximately 30 ° forwards and insert the cutout of the lower guide
plate - approaching from below - into the strip on the power section.
Step 17: Insert the connection cable plug into the power section socket and close the locking lever.
Step 18: Carefully return the front of the unit into the housing. Make sure that the guide plates on the right-hand
side of the front (viewed from the front) enter the housing cutouts.
Step 19: Screw the front of the unit securely to the power section with the two fixing screws.
Step 20: Re-connect all previously removed connecting cables.
Step 21: Check all connecting cables and the shield to make sure they sit properly and are in the correct position.
Step 22: To designate the optional board, insert the relevant designation plate into the envisaged position on the
front of the unit.
Step 23: After powering up the voltage, you can log on the optional boards in the software of the unit and com-
mence start-up.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
3.4.4 Connecting the Profibus
The CBP has a 9-pin Sub-D socket (X448) which is provided for connecting the CBP to the PROFIBUS system.
The connections are short-circuit proof and floating. Pin assignments for the X448 are shown in Table 3-13.
Pin Number Designation Significance Area
1 SHIELD Ground connection
2 - Not connected
3 R×D/T×D-P Receive/transmit data P (B/B´) RS485
4 CNTR-P Control signal TTL
5 DGND Profibus data reference potential (C/C´)
6 VP Power supply Plus 5 V ± 10%
7 - Not connected
8 R×D/T×D-N Receive/transmit data N (A/A´) RS485
9 - Not connected
Table 3-13: X448 Pin Assignments
3.4.5 Bus Terminations
NOTICE
A bus segment must always be terminated at both ends with a matching resistor. This is not the
case, for example, if the last slave with bus connector is not live. Because the bus connector
obtains its voltage from the station, the matching resistor has no effect. Make sure that the sta-
tions at which the matching resistor is connected is always supplied with voltage.
Each bus segment must be fitted with a resistor network, the bus termination, at each end. If the recommended
bus connectors can be used, the bus termination can be connected or disconnected by means of switches.
3.4.6 CBP Diagnosis and Troubleshooting
The three LED displays are located on the front of the CBP. These are as follows:
• CBP Operating (Red)
• Data Exchange with the Basic Unit (Yellow)
• Transfer of Useful Data via the Profibus (Green)
Diagnostic LED’s provide rapid information on the status of the CBP at any particular instant. More detailed diag-
nostic information can be read out directly from the diagnostics memory of the CBP by means of a diagnostic
parameter.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
NOTICE
During normal operation, all three LED’s light up synchronously and for the same length of time
(flashing). The stationary status of an LED (on or off) indicates an unusual operating status
(parameterization phase or fault).
LED Status Diagnostic Information
Red Flashing CBP operating; voltage supply on.
Yellow Flashing Fault-free data exchange with the basic unit.
Green Flashing Fault-free cyclical useful data traffic with a master, class 1, via
Profibus.
Table 3-14: LED Display of the CBP
Red Flashing No cyclical useful data traffic with a master, class 1, via Profi-
Yellow Flashing bus –DP due to EMC interference, bus connector pulled out,
polarity reversal of connections, node number not supplied
Green Off with useful data by the master.
Acyclical useful data traffic with a master, class 2 does not
affect the green LED.
Table 3-15: Online Operation Without Useful Data
Red Off/On Voltage supply for CBP cut off; replace CBP or basic unit.
Yellow Off/On Data exchange with the basic unit not possible; replace CBP or
basic unit.
Green Off/On No cyclical useful data traffic with a master, class 1, via Profi-
bus is possible; Profibus cable not connected or defective.
Table 3-16: CBP Fault Display
Red Flashing CBP is waiting for the basic unit to begin initialization.
Yellow Off
Green On
Red On CBP is waiting for the basic unit to complete initialization.

Yellow Off
Green Flashing
Table 3-17: Exceptional Operation Condition

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Red Flashing Checksum error in flash EPROM of the CBP (Download firmware
Yellow On again or replace CBP).
Green Off
Red Flashing Error in RAM test of the CBP.

Yellow On Replace CBP (external RAM, DPRAM or SPC3-RAM defective).
Green On
Red Flashing Only CBP2.

Yellow Off DP slave software detects serious fault.
Green Off Note fault number in r732.8 and inform MinePro Services.
Table 3-17: Exceptional Operation Condition
Red Off Only CBP2

Yellow Off USS protocol has been set.
Green Flashing
Table 3-18: USS

"Uncontrolled Copy"
TripRite® Installation and Maintenance Manual Commissioning
Section 4
Commissioning
4.1 General Commissioning Information
4.1.1 Purpose
The commissioning procedure provides the organization and structure for collecting and communicating informa-
tion that is needed to perform an analysis of the TripRite™ System. The purpose of this manual is to provide the
Field Service technician with guidance to:
1. Accurately assess the material and operational condition of the TripRite System.
2. Determine the skill level of TripRite System operators and service technicians.
3. Exchange failure analysis information, analyze trends and recognize patterns that affect the condition of the
TripRite System. The result of a good analysis will be a TripRite System which runs better and costs less to
maintain.
4. Careful adherence to this manual by the MinePro Service Technician will ensure consistency in the data col-
lection effort. This allows the assortment of different agencies and personnel with TripRite System responsibil-
ities to function as a team, thereby improving product line assistance.
4.1.2 Scope
This manual describes the procedures to be utilized for the following;
1. Commissioning a newly erected machine.
2. When conducting an electrical inspection of the TripRite System.
3. Performing an electrical tune-up or recommissioning. It provides specific examples of what the field service
technicians should be observing.
4.1.3 Applicability
The monitoring and analytical techniques of this manual are applicable to all TripRite Systems. Any questions or
conflicting procedures should be directed to the local MinePro Services Office.

Section 4, Commissioning.fm -4.1- Section 4, Version 00 - 10/06
"Uncontrolled Copy"
Commissioning TripRite® Installation and Maintenance Manual
4.2 Terms And Definitions
4.2.1 Terminology
Certain terms are frequently used in P&H Mining Equipment manuals and for troubleshooting. For better under-
standing, several mechanical and electrical terms are defined below:
Attachment. An alternate designation for front end equipment. In the case of this mining shovel, it includes the dip-
per handle, boom, dipper and crowd machinery.
Bail. A yoke or spreader hinged to sides of shovel dipper, on which a hoist rope equalizer is mounted. Hoist ropes
pass through the equalizer for hoisting the dipper.
Bridge. A configuration of diodes or SCR’s for converting AC voltage to DC voltage.
Carbody. The base upon which the upper and crawler side frames are mounted.
Converter. A device that converts information from one form to another. In this case, a system of one or more
bridges for converting AC to DC.
Crowd. Outward movement of dipper handle in relation to dipper handle axis (shipper shaft pinions) on boom.
di/dt. The rate of change of current with respect to time.
dv/dt. The rate of change of voltage with respect to time.
Energy. The capacity to do work.
Feedback. A portion of a system output that is returned to the system input.
Filter. A circuit that offers little opposition to some frequencies while blocking other frequencies.
Hoist. Process of lifting dipper.
Indicator Panel. A section of the control cabinet that contains fault lights. These lights indicate which fault has shut
the excavator down.
Inversion (or Regeneration). The conversion of the mining shovel's mechanical and potential energy to electrical
energy. The rate at which this is done is the power return to the network.
Left Side. Left side of mining shovel is to operator's left when he/she is seated at controls and is facing forward
with attachment over front of lower frame.
Lower. The portion of the mining shovel on which the upper is mounted. It includes the carbody, crawlers, swing
gear, roller circle and center gudgeon.
Lower Machine Front. End of lower opposite the end on which propel machinery is mounted.
Lower Machine Rear. End of lower on which propel machinery is mounted.
Machinery Deck. Part of upper frame on which hoist and swing transmissions and major electrical cabinets are
mounted.

Section 4, Version 00 - 10/06 -4.2- Section 4, Commissioning.fm
"Uncontrolled Copy"
Meter Module. A section of the control cabinet where the test selector and three meters are located. The test
selector switch puts the shovel in either the RUN, ARMATURE TEST, FIELD TEST, CONTROL TEST, or AUXIL-
IARIES TEST Mode. The meters monitor armature currents, armature voltages, field current, and control voltages.
Motion Characteristic. The speed versus torque relationship that is designed for optimum motion efficiency and
mechanical and electrical life.
Operator's Console. A stand in the operator's cab that contains the START and STOP push buttons, the brake
RELEASE and SET push buttons, the CROWD and PROPEL push buttons, etc.
Phasing (or Timing). The DC voltage from the converter depends on the phase relationship between the control
pulses and the AC converter voltage. Phasing is the shifting of this phase relationship for a differential converter
output.
Power. The rate at which energy is converted from one form to another.
Power Factor. The ratio of power to apparent power. Apparent power is the KVA drawn by a system.
Reactive Power. The VA required to energize an inductive or capacitive load.
Regulate. To control.
Reversing Bridge. A connection of two bridges where the anodes of one bridge are common with the cathodes of
the other for producing both DC current directions.
Resonance. When input signals at a certain frequency cause extremely large oscillations.
Semi-converter. A bridge that contains three SCR’s and three diodes. It can convert 3ý AC voltage to a regulated
DC voltage but it cannot invert DC voltage to AC.
Side Frame. Frame that attaches to carbody and mounts crawler belts and crawler roller assemblies.
Swing. Function of rotating upper with respect to the lower, either to the right or left.
Thyristor or SCR (Silicon Controlled Rectifier). The most common type of thyristor. A semiconductor device
that blocks voltage of either polarity until an appropriate signal is applied to the gate when it conducts in the forward
direction. Once the SCR conducts, the gate has no influence on its operation. Conduction stops when the current
drops below a certain level.
Torque. A force that tends to produce rotation.
Transducer. A device that is used to measure DC current. It is not current direction sensitive.
Trigger Pulse (or Firing Pulse). The pulse that goes to the gate and cathode of an SCR to start conduction.
Upper. The portion of the mining shovel which is mounted on the lower. It includes the revolving frame, machinery
cab, operator's coop, and all machinery mounted within machinery cab.
Upper Machine Front. The front of the upper is the attachment end.
Upper Machine Rear. The rear end of the upper is where the counter-weight is located.
Varistor. This is a voltage transient suppressor.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
4.3 Test Equipment

Test Equipment must be checked prior to performing any testing or troubleshooting procedures. Test equipment
should be verified as calibrated for the tasks being performed. The following is a list of the types of test equipment
that may be used in testing or troubleshooting:
• Digital Multimeter.
• Oscilloscope.
• Multi-Channel Chart Recorder.
• Clamp-on Ammeter.
• Megger.
• Laptop PC.
Shop tests and start-up tests require additional equipment to aid in performing the necessary tests and to provide
the necessary test information:
• Laptop PC with ABB Control Builder communications hardware and software is required to communicate
with the Drive Control Modules and AC800 Controller.
• The Touch Panel and Control Module can be used to simplify control of the individual motions during test-
ing.
• A large 200Ω, 6000W resistor. This is reconfigured to 12.5Ω and is required to limit the armature current
during the start-up of each converter.
• For testing the Reactive Power Compensation (RPC), a capacitor unit is required as a test load.
• A voltage divider should be used to aid in making high voltage measurements on the RPC.
4.3.1 Other Related Test Equipment
The following test equipment should be available for testing or troubleshooting:
• Test leads, probes and clips.
• Cannon connector pins.
• Cables.
• Auxiliary push buttons and switches.
• Screwdrivers.
• Combination wrench set.
• Any other items that are pertinent to testing or troubleshooting.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Refer to Table 3-1 for recommended and alternate types and manufactures of test equipment.
Instrument Recommend Alternate
Digital Multimeter Fluke Model 23 Fluke Model 87

Part No. 89Z514D12 Part No. 1089Z275
Clamp-on Ammeter Fluke Model i1010 (Range = 1 to Columbia Electric Type AX w/5
600A AC / 1 to 1000A DC) Current Ranges
Part No. 89Z514D15 Part No. R89Z367
Megger James D. Biddle, Catalog 21158

(Hand Crank) w/Case Part No. 89Z496
Oscilloscope Textronix Model THS 710 Any previously recommended

(Handheld, Dual Trace, Digital Storage, Battery Powered, Soft Scope is acceptable.
Scope w/ 120V/60Hz Adapter) Case Part No. 89Z515D15
(120V/50Hz AC Adapter) (240V Part No. 89Z515D30
available) Part No. 89Z515D26
(Hard Carrying Case) Part No. 89Z515D17
(×10 Probe 1kv)
Isolation Transformer 115VAC P/115VAC S 50/60 Hz,

250VA
Part No. 75Z820D1
Chart Recorder Hioki Model 8807 Astro-Med, DASH 2 two channel

[Order each part separately] w/ data capture. Astro-Med
DASH2MT, Part No: 89Z835D3
Recorder [120/240V - 50/60Hz] Part No. R10945D1
Chart Paper, P/N 89Z835D4 (Z-
(Carrying Case - Soft) Part No. R10945D2 fold)
(AC Adapter 90-250V, 50/60Hz) Part No. R10945D3
(Battery Pack, Rechargeable) Part No. R10945D4
(Recording Paper 10 rolls) Part No. R10945D5
Startup Limiting Resister 200Ω, 6000 Watt

Part No. 80Z984D1
RPC Capacitor Test Unit Part No. 89Z508D1
Reference Push button Unit Part No. R40602D1
Voltage Divider Part No. R1192F1 Part No. 89Z510D1
Handheld Drive Programmer ABB CDP-312

Part No. R42375D27
SCR Thyristor Tester Part No. 89z511d1
Table 4-1: Recommended Test Equipment List
NOTICE
Contact your MinePro Services Representative for the required comptuer and software needed
to work on your particular system

"Uncontrolled Copy"
4.4 Schematic Diagram Guidelines

The information provided below is a guide for Technicians to use when troubleshooting with schematics to the
module/component level. These are the same guidelines used by the P&H Mining Equipment Engineers.
4.4.1 Wire Numbers
Wire numbers are normally five digits. The first two digits reflect the sheet number of the schematic diagram. The
next two digits reflect the line number from that schematic sheet. The last digit reflects the sequential number of the
wire, starting with the number 1, from left to right, in the line. For example, wire number 03241 refers to:
03 Sheet Number 3
24 Line Number 24
1 1st new wire from left
Table 4-2: Wire Number Example
One of the exceptions is the ground wire. Since there can be many different types of ground in our system we dif-
ferentiate them using wire numbers: 01GND, 02GND (UP TO 06GND), 01021 & 01021C.
4.4.2 Referencing
On a schematic diagram, a wire, contact, relay or any other electrical component or signal is shown continued from
one sheet to another using cross-references. This is done using the sheet number and line number within paren-
thesis. For example, (23-17) means the mating signal, component, etc., can be found on sheet 23 at line 17. A
cross-reference with an underline (23-17) is used to indicate an electrical component that is considered a normally
closed device, that will open when activated.
4.4.3 Electrical Inventory
All of the replaceable electrical components have an electrical inventory number. This number is shown underlined
on the schematic diagram next to its component. The first character (prefix) of the inventory number reflects the
electrical cabinet (or location on the shovel) as shown in Table 3-4. The next two characters reflect the panel num-
ber within the cabinet. The next character is the row of components on the panel, starting with row “A”. The next
character is the number of the component in that row, starting with number 1, from left to right.
For example, E05H2J indicates the following:
E Control Cabinet
05 Panel in the Control Cabinet
H Row on the panel
2 Second position in the row
J Has several replaceable parts, A-J
Table 4-3: Electrical Inventory Number Example
If the component can be broken down further (perhaps the component contains a replaceable fuse) another char-
acter would be added. The letter “A” is used for the first replaceable component and continues through the alpha-
bet until all the replaceable components have been identified.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
4.4.3.1 Basic Electrical Inventory Prefix's
Prefix Location
A Auxiliary Cabinet
B Boom
C Operator’s Cab
E Control Cabinet
F RPC Cabinet
H High Voltage Cabinet
K Converter Cabinet
L Lower
M Motor Control Center Cabinet
P Ground Fault/Suppression Cabinet
T Transfer Contactor Cabinet
U Upper
Table 4-4: Basic Electrical Inventory Prefix's
4.4.4 Ground Identification
Numerous grounds are located throughout the shovel. The information in Table 3-5 is a quick reference for ground
identification.
Number Symbol Name/Description
01GND 1 Ground to Lower Frame
02GND 2 Ground to Upper Frame
03GND 3 Connect to Ground in Auxiliary Cabinet
04GND 4 Ground to Upper Frame at Control Cabinet Ground Bus Bar
05GND 5 Connect to Ground in Panel Board

** Only used in Australia **
06GND 6 Light Grounded in Console

** This ground is located in Operator’s Cab **
07GND 7 Connect to Ground in Control Cabinet
01021C NONE Control Cabinet Bus Bar Ground
NONE Grounded to High Voltage Cabinet Chassis
Table 4-5: Ground Identification

"Uncontrolled Copy"
NOTICE
It is important to note the difference between a neutral and ground. A neutral is an electrical
point which has a net electrical charge of 0. A ground is an electrical connection between equip-
ment or component and earth.
NOTICE
Schematic diagrams should always be used and checked prior to performing any ground check
procedures.
4.5 Commissioning Test Procedures

These test procedures are to be conducted during the commissioning of a new TripRite System. They provide a
starting point for troubleshooting.
NOTICE
The order of procedures in the Commissioning Sections are meant to be followed from begin-
ning to end. This plan was incorporated to assist any level of MinePro Technician in success-
fully completing the commissioning process.
The following outline is a guide to the TripRite Advance Dipper Trip commissioning procedures:
1. Pre-checks
• Visual Inspection - Subtopic 4.1.1
2. System Power-up and Operation
• System Power-up - Subtopic 4.2.1
• Setting Hoist and Crowd Limits - Subtopic 4.2.2
• Operational Tests - Subtopic 4.2.3

"Uncontrolled Copy"
4.6 Six-Step Troubleshooting Procedure
4.6.1 General Information
You may have the job of maintaining or helping to maintain some electrical or electronic unit, subsystem, or sys-
tem. Some of these jobs may be complex, but even a complex job can be broken down into simple steps. Basically,
any repair of electric or electronic equipment should be done in the following order:
1. Symptom recognition. This is the action of recognizing some disorder or malfunction in electronic equipment.
2. Symptom elaboration. Obtaining a more detailed description of the trouble symptom is the purpose of this
step.
3. Listing probable faulty functions. This step is applicable to equipment that contains more than one func-
tional area or unit. From the information you have gathered, where could the trouble logically be located?
4. Localizing the faulty function. In this step you determine which of the functional units of the multiunit equip-
ment is actually at fault.
5. Localizing trouble to the circuit. You will do extensive testing in this step to isolate the trouble to a specific
circuit.
6. Failure analysis. This step is multi-part. Here you determine which part is faulty, repair/replace the part, deter-
mine what caused the failure, return the equipment to its proper operating status, and record the necessary
information in a record keeping book for other maintenance personnel in the future. While not a part of this
step, the technician should reorder any parts used in repair of the faulty equipment.
Sometimes you may run into difficulty in finding (or troubleshooting) the problem. Some hints that may help in your
efforts are:
• Observe the equipment's operation for any and all faults
• Check for any defective components with your eyes and nose
• Analyze the cause of the failure for a possible underlying problem

"Uncontrolled Copy"
4.7 Jumper Log

Table 3-8 is to used as a guide for removing and reinstalling jumpers within cabinet assemblies. This form should
be posted on all cabinet doors as a reminder of where and when jumpers are used during corrective/preventive
maintenance and troubleshooting.
From: To: Jumper Installed Removed
Terminal No. Terminal No. Color (DATE/TIME/ (DATE/TIME/
INITIALS) INITIALS)
Table 4-6: Jumper Log

"Uncontrolled Copy"
4.8 Lifted Lead Log

Table 3-9 is to used as a guide for lifting and reconnecting leads within cabinet assemblies. This form should be
posted on all cabinet doors as a reminder of where and when leads are lifted during corrective/preventive mainte-
nance and troubleshooting.
Lifted From: Wire Number Wire Color Lifted Reconnected
Terminal Num- (DATE/TIME/INITIALS) (DATE/TIME/INITIALS)
ber
Table 4-7: Lifted Lead Log

"Uncontrolled Copy"
4.9 Commissioning
4.9.1 Pre-checks
NOTICE
The Commissioning Section is written as a complete procedure. The MinePro Service Techni-
cian should follow the commissioning procedures from the beginning to the end in that order.
4.9.1.1 Visual Inspection
Refer to Table 4-1. Use the following checklist to perform a visual inspection of all the TripRite installed compo-
nents.
Check Area to Inspect Action Remarks
Box
TripRite Electrical 1. Verify that all components are properly mounted and
Enclosures secured.
2. Verify that all wiring is terminated unless it is documented
on the lifted lead log. Refer to Table 3-27.
3. Verify that all electrical connections are tight.
4. Verify that all wiring is bundled and secured.
5. Check that all electrical components are properly identi-
fied as per the schematic diagrams.
6. Verify that wireways are complete and properly installed.
7. Verify that the enclosure is free of moisture, dust, debris,
and construction materials. Check particularly for metallic
items that could cause short circuits.
8. Check that all wires are properly labeled.
9. Check that electrical terminations have been made with
loops for ease of removal and reconnection.
10.Verify that all doors and latches work properly.
11.Check that cabinet gaskets or seals are installed.
12.Check that any conduit connections are properly made
with appropriate sealing devices.
13.Check that any cooling fan filters are properly installed.
14.Verify that all plug type connectors are installed and
locked in position.
15.Check that all safety decals are properly installed and
clearly visible.
Table 4-8: Visual Inspection

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Check Area to Inspect Action Remarks

Box
Dipper Trip Motor 1. Verify that the electrical installation is complete.
2. Verify proper installation of motor and resolver wire con-
nections.
CAUTION
It is very critical that the resolver and
motor connections are wired EXACTLY as
shown in the supplied wiring diagrams.
Crossing of resolver or motor power
wires will result in erratic control and
may damage the motor or gearbox.
Dipper Trip Resistor 1. Verify that all electrical connections are tight.
2. Verify that all electrical components are properly identi-
fied as per the schematic diagrams.
Profibus Scanner 1. Verify that all wiring is terminated unless it is documented
on the lifted lead log. Refer to Table 3-27.
2. Verify that all electrical connections are tight.
3. Verify that all wiring is bundled and secured.
4. Verify that Profibus terminating resistor switches are as
shown on the electrical schematics. Refer to Figures 3-10,
and 3-11.
Table 4-8: Visual Inspection (Continued)
4.9.2 System Power-up and Operation
This topic provides detailed instructions for powering up and verifying correct operation of the TripRite System.
4.9.2.1 System Power-up
This subtopic provides information to correctly power-up the TripRite System.
! DANGER
CAUTION
Verify that the Trip Cable has not been installed on the spool.
Test Equipment Required (Refer to Table 3-19)
Miscellaneous Items Required

"Uncontrolled Copy"
• Shovel-specific TripRite retrofit schematic diagrams.
• Shovel-specific TripRite retrofit cable installation drawings.
Refer to Table 4-2 for the system power up procedure.
Check Procedure Step Expected Actual Remarks

Box
Step 1: Open the TripRite drive enclosure and defeat the
interlock switch. Leave the door open for the
remainder of this procedure.
Step 2: Verify the following circuit breakers are closed.
• ASCB, Auxiliary Supply Circuit Breaker. closed
• DTD, Dipper Trip Drive Circuit Breaker. closed
• 24VSCB, 24VDC Power Circuit Breaker. closed
• RSB, Relay Supply Breaker. closed
• RSCB, Relay Supply Circuit Breaker. closed
• IO2CB, Power Circuit 2 I/O Circuit Breaker. closed
Step 3: Place the Test Selector Switch in the RUN position.
FIELD
ARM TEST CONTROL
TEST TEST
RUN AUX
TEST
ES02509a01
Seven
! DANGER Segment _________
Hazardous voltages exist within the Display
TripRite cabinet. Use precautions to pre- Illumi-
vent electrical shock when working on or nated.
near energized circuits.
Step 4: Verify the presence of 24VDC at the TripRite Drive.

The red seven segment display should be illumi-
nated.
Step 5: Using the Digital Multimeter, measure and record
the 3Ø at the input of the TripRite Drive.
Table 4-9: System Power Up

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Box
U1 to V1
_________
V1 to W1
_________
U1 to W1
_________
Step 6: Verify proper Profibus communication.
Confirm that the COMM LED and SYS LED on the

PLC Profibus Scanner Module are both illuminated
green in color.
• COMM LED Solid

Green _________
• SYS LED Solid

Green _________
Confirm that the 3 LED’s located on the TripRite
Drive CBP Board are flashing.
• Red LED Flashing

Red _________
• Yellow LED Flashing

Yellow _________
• Green LED Flashing

Green _________
Table 4-9: System Power Up (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Box
Step 7: On the Operators Touch Panel, open the TripRite
Screen as follows:
On the Shovel Main Screen, touch the Shovel Setup

button.
From the Shovel Setup Screen, touch the User

Login Setup button.

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Box
From the User Login Screen, login to the mainte-
nance mode, if necessary. Then, touch the Next
Screen button until the TripRite button is shown.
Then, touch the TripRite button to open the Shovel

TripRite Setup Screen.

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Box
Step 8: On the TripRite Setup Screen, confirm Profibus
communication. The Drive System Word 1 should
display Running.
Step 9: On the Drive Status Display on the TripRite Setup

Screen, verify that the Dipper Trip Motor and Drive
Temperatures are being displayed.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
4.9.3 Setting Hoist and Crowd Limits
NOTICE
Refer to the Setting Hoist and Crowd Limits topic in the Operator’s Manual for your particular
machine to perform this required procedure.
4.9.4 Operational Test
This subtopic describes the operational tests to be performed on the TripRite System.
4.9.4.1 Procedure
! DANGER
CAUTION
Verify that the Trip Cable has not been installed on the spool.
Test Equipment Required (Refer to Table 3-19)
• Laptop PC.
Miscellaneous Items Required
• Two MinePro Service Technicians.
• Shovel Operator.
• Shovel-specific TripRite retrofit schematic diagrams.
• Shovel-specific TripRite retrofit cable installation drawings.

Box
Step 1: Start the shovel.
Step 2: Verify the dipper is on the ground and that all

brakes are set.
Table 4-10: Operational Tests

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Box
Step 3: Have the second MinePro Service Technician sta-
tioned at the TripRite Dipper Trip Motor.
Step 4: Place a hand on the motor brake.
Step 5: Shutdown the shovel. In the Operator’s cab, press

the Stop Push button.
Step 6: The MinePro Service Technician should be able to Brake Sets

feel the TripRite Dipper Trip Motor Brake set. _________
Brake
NOTICE releases _________
There is a five second delay from the time you five sec-
start the shovel to the time the brake onds after
releases. shovel
start.
Step 8: The MinePro Service Technician should be able to
feel the TripRite Dipper Trip Motor Brake release.
Step 9: Verify the proper rotation of the motor.
NOTICE
If rotation is in the wrong direction, verify that
all wiring to the motor is correct. Refer to
parameter P595* in Section 5.
Table 4-10: Operational Tests (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Box
Step 10: On the TripRite Setup Screen, change the Slack Slack
Take-up Torque as follows: Take-up _________
Torque
Touch the Arrow to the right of the Slack Take-up Setting
Torque display to increase torque in 5-point incre-
ments until the spool starts to rotate.
Once the spool begins to rotate, increase the Slack

Take-up Torque by an increment of 5.
Then press the Set Torque button to set the new

torque value. “Setting New Slack Take Up Torque”
will display in the screen information block.

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Box
Step 11: On the Shovel TripRite Setup screen, verify that the Speed
Speed (RPM) is limited to approximately 440 RPM (RPM) _________
for Models 2300 and 2800, or 660 RPM for Model
4100. Record the value.
NOTICE
The actual RPM will vary depending on shovel
model. If control is erratic verify all wiring to
the TripRite motor.
Step 12: Shutdown the shovel. In the Operator’s cab, press
the Stop Push button.
Step 13: Attach the Trip Cable to the spool. The spool will
have one of two different cable attachments.
1. The first is a ferrule becket socket.
2. The second is a bracket for a cable wedge.
Either cable attachment can be used.

Step 14: On the TripRite Dipper Trip Motor, remove the
cover from the brake.
Step 15: Manually disengage the brake by rotating the Man-

ual Release Knob (16, Figure 3-2) in the direction
shown on the brake.
Step 16: By hand, rotate the spool until at least 5 wraps of
the Trip Cable are on the spool.
Step 17: Engage the brake by rotating the Manual Release

Knob (16, Figure 3-2) back to its original position.
NOTICE
If no brake, disregard this step.
Step 19: Allow the Slack Take-up of the TripRite System to

take up the remaining slack of the Trip Cable.
Step 20: Release the Hoist and Crowd Brakes.
Step 21: Raise the dipper to the horizontal position.

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Box
Step 22: While crowding and retracting at full speed, adjust Slack
the Slack Take-up Torque so that the maximum Take-up _________
cable droop does not exceed 12 inches. Record the Torque
final setting. Final Set-
ting
NOTICE
The Slack Take-up Torque final value should
be approximately 30 or 3% of maximum
torque.
Step 23: Operationally test the dipper trip by tripping the
dipper with increasing load several times.
Step 24: Trip the dipper with an empty dipper at lease 5-10
times.
Step 25: Trip the dipper with a half full dipper at lease 5-10
times.
Step 26: Trip the dipper with a completely full dipper at lease
5-10 times.
Step 27: Monitor the system during normal operation for

false trips or no trips for approximately 1 hour.
If either occur, verify Slack Take-up Torque and

mechanical system integrity.

"Uncontrolled Copy"

"Uncontrolled Copy"
TripRite® Installation and Maintenance Manual Parameters and Fault Codes
Section 5
Parameters and Fault Codes
5.0.1 Fault and Alarm Display
If faults occur during communication between the Profibus and the CBP, corresponding fault or alarm messages
are displayed on the PMU or on the OP of the basic unit.
Alarm Number Meaning
A 081 The ID byte combinations sent by the DP master in the configuration telegram do
not correspond with the permitted ID byte combinations (see table 8.2-12)
Consequence:
No connection established with the PROFIBUS-DP master; new configuration is
necessary.
A 082 No valid PPO type can be established from the configuration telegram from the DP
master.
Consequence:
No connection established with the PROFIBUS-DP master, new configuration is nec-
essary.
A 083 No net data or invalid net data (e.g. complete control word STW1=0) are being
received by the DP master.
Consequence:
The process data are not being transferred to the DPR. If parameter P722 (P695) is
not equal to zero, this will result in fault message F 082 being tripped (see chapter
“Process data monitoring”.
A 084 Telegram traffic between DP master and CBP has been interrupted (e.g. cable
break, bus connector disconnected or DP master switched off).
Consequence:
If parameter P722 (P695) is not equal to zero, this will result in fault message F
082 being tripped (see chapter “Process data monitoring”).
A 086 Failure of heartbeat counter recognized by basic unit.

Consequence:
Interruption of communication to the automation system.
A 087 DP slave software detects serious fault. Fault number in diagnostic parameter
r732.8.
Consequence:
Communication no longer possible. Secondary fault F082.
Table 5-1: Alarm Display

Section 5, Codes.fm -5.1- Section 5, Version 00 - 10/06
"Uncontrolled Copy"
Parameters and Fault Codes TripRite® Installation and Maintenance Manual
Alarm Number Meaning
A 088 Only CBP2

At least one configured cross-traffic encoder is not yet active or has failed. For
details, see CBP2 diagnostic parameters.
Consequence:
If a encoder is still not active, the relevant setpoints are set to null as a substitute.
If a cross-traffic encoder fails, transmission of the setpoints to the basic unit may
be interrupted, depending on the setting in P715. Secondary fault F082.
Table 5-1: Alarm Display (Continued)
Fault Number Meaning
F080 Fault in the dual-port RAM.

Remedy:
CBP probably defective, i.e. replace CBP.
F081 Fault in the heartbeat counter. The heartbeat counter is no longer being incre-
Fault value (r949) = 0 mented by the CBP due to an internal fault. The CBP is not plugged in correctly or is
defective.
Remedy:
Check the connection. If necessary, replace CBP.
F082 Telegram failure in the dual-port-RAM (DPR). The telegram failure monitoring time
Fault value (r949) = 1 set by means of parameter P722 (P695) has expired.
The bus has been interrupted or all net data are transferred with 0 (see also A083)
Remedy:
Check bus cable connecting plug. In the DP master, assign values not equal to zero
to control word STW1.
Table 5-2: Fault Display

Section 5, Version 00 - 10/06 -5.2- Section 5, Codes.fm
"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.0.1.1 Evaluating CBP Diagnostic Parameters
In order to support start-up and for service purposes, the CBP stores diagnostic information in a diagnostics buffer.
The diagnostic information can be read out with the indexed parameter r732.i (CB/TB diagnosis).
Parameter Meaning
P732.1 CBP_Status
P732.2 SPC3_Status
P732.3 SPC3_Global_Controls
P732.4 (Low) Counter: telegrams received without faults (only DP standard)
P732.4 (High) Reserved
P732.5 (Low) Counter “TIMEOUT”
P732.6 (Low) Counter “CLEAR DATA”
P732.7 (Low) Counter: Heartbeat-counter fault
P732.8 (Low) Number of bytes for special diagnosis
P732.9 (Low) Mirroring slot Identifier 2
P732.9 (High) Mirroring slot Identifier 3
P732.10 (Low) Mirroring P918 (CB bus address), only low part
P732.11 (Low) Counter re-configuration by CU
P732.11 (High) Counter initialization
P732.12 (Low) Fault detection DPS manager fault (8 bits)
P732.13 (Low) Determined PPO type (8 bits)
P732.14 Mirroring “DWORD-Specifier-ref”
P732.15 Mirroring “DWORD-Specifier-act”
P732.16 (Low) Counter DPV1:DS_WRITE, positive acknowledgement
P732.17 (Low) Counter DPV1: DS_WRITE, negative acknowledgement
Table 5-3: CBP Diagnostic Buffer

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Parameter Meaning
P732.18 (Low) Counter DPV1:DS_READ, positive acknowledgement
P732.19 (Low) Counter DPV1:DS_READ, negative acknowledgement
P732.20 (Low) Counter DP/T: GET DB99, positive acknowledgement
P732.20 (High) Counter DP/T: PUT DB99, positive acknowledgement
P732.23 (Low) Counter DP/T-service negative acknowledgement
P732.23 (High) Counter DP/T: application relation, positive acknowledgement
P732.24 Reserved
P732.25 Gen-Date: day, month
P732.26 Gen-Date: year
P732.27 Software version
P732.28 Software version
P732.29 Software version: flash EPROM checksum
Reserved
P732.31 Reserved
P732.33 CBP_Status
P732.34 SPC3_Status
P732.35 SPC3_Global_Controls
P732.61 Software-Version: Flash-EPROM-Checksum
Reserved
P732.64 Reserved
Table 5-3: CBP Diagnostic Buffer (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.0.1.2 Meaning of Information in CBP Diagnostic Channel
P732.1 (090H, CBP_Status)
# " ! ' & % $ # " !

-5!!=
Figure 5-1: P732.1 (090H, CBP_Status)
Bit 0. CBP Init: CBP is presently being initialized or is waiting for initialization from the BASE BOARD (normal
operation: not set).
Bit 1. CBP Online: CBP selected via board mounting position 2" (DPRAM Offset Address 0x54) or via board
mounting position 3" (DPRAM Offset Address 0x55) by the BASE BOARD (normal operation: set).
Bit 2. CBP Offline: CBP selected neither via board mounting position 2" (DPRAM Offset Address 0x54) nor via
board mounting position 3" (DPRAM Offset Address 0x55) by the BASE BOARD (normal operation: not set).
Bit 3. Value range exceeded “CB bus address” (P918) (BASE BOARD). (normal operation: not set).
Bit 4. Diagnostic mode activated [CB parameter 1 (P711 / P696) <> 0]. (normal operation: not set).
Bit 8. Incorrect identification byte transferred (incorrect configuration telegram from the PROFIBUS DP master).
(normal operation: not set).
Bit 9. Incorrect PPO type (incorrect configuration telegram from the PROFIBUS DP master). (normal operation:
not set).
Bit 10. Correct configuration received from the PROFIBUS DP master (normal operation: set).
Bit 12. Fatal error detected by the DPS manager SW (normal operation: not set).
Bit 13. Program in endless loop in main c (is only escaped from if a reset is made).
Bit 15. Program in communications online loop (is only escaped from if reinitialization is carried out by the BASE
BOARD).
P732.2 (092H, SPC3_Status)
# " ! ' & % $ # " !

-5!!=
Figure 5-2: P732.2 (092H, SPC3_Status)
Bit 0. Offline/Passive Idle.
0 = SPC3 is offline (normal operation).
1 = SPC3 is in passive-idle.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Bit 1. Reserved.
Bit 2. Diag-Flag.
0 = Diagnostics buffer collected by the master.
1 = Diagnostics buffer not collected by master.
Bit 3. RAM Access Violation, memory accessed > 1.5kByte.
0 = No address violation (normal operation).
1 = With addresses >1536 bytes, retreat made from respective address 1024 and access is made under this new
address.
Bits 4,5. DP-State 1…0.
00 = Status “Wait_Prm”.
01 = Status “Wait_Cfg”.
10 = Status “DATA_EX”.
11 = Not possible.
Bits 6,7. WD-State 1…0.
00 = Status “Baud_Search”.
01 = Status “Baud_Control”.
10 = Status “DP_Control”.
11 = Not possible from PROFIBUS DP master.
Bits 8,9,10,11. Baud rate 3…0.
0000 = 12 mbaud.
0001 = 6 mbaud.
0010 = 3 mbaud.
0011 = 1.5 mbaud.
0100 = 500 kbaud.
0101 = 187.5 kbaud.
0110 = 93.75 kbaud.
0111 = 45.45 kbaud.
1000 = 19.2 kbaud.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
1001 = 9.6 kbaud.
Rest = Not possible.
Bits 12,13, 14,15. SPC3-Release 3…0.
0000= Release 0.
Rest = Not possible.
P732.3 (094H, SPC3_Global_Controls)
# " ! ' & % $ # " !

-5!!=
Figure 5-3: P732.3 (094H, SPC3_Global_Controls)
Bit 0. Reserved.
Bit 1. 1 = Clear_Data telegram received.
Bit 2. 1 = Unfreeze telegram received.
Bit 3. 1 = Freeze telegram received.
Bit 4. 1 = Unsync telegram received.
Bit 5. 1 = Sync telegram received.
Bits 6,7. Reserved.
P732.4 (Low-Byte), 096H
Counter for telegrams received error-free (only DP standard) Counter for received DP net telegrams.
P732.5 (Low-Byte), 098H
Counter Timeout. . Counter is incremented if the “TIMEOUT” signal is identified. This occurs if, for example, the
bus connector is pulled out when response-monitoring has been activated (at the DP master).
P732.6 (Low-Byte), 09AH
Counter CLEAR DATA. Is incremented if the “CLEAR DATA” is identified (see also P732.3). Occurs, for example,
if the IM308B is set in “STOP”.
P732.7 (Low-Byte), 09CH
Counter Heartbeat-Counter Error. Is incremented if the heartbeat-counter is not changed by the BASE- /TECH-
BOARD within approximately 800ms.
P732.8 (Low-Byte), 09EH

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Number of bytes during special diagnosis. Number of bytes entered after P732.9 during special diagnosis
selected by means of CB parameter 1.
732.9 (Low-Byte), 0A0H
Mirroring slot Identifier 2. Read out of the DPRAM during run up: Offset Address 054H, with VC,FC and SC, cor-
responds to parameter P090.
732.9 (High-Byte), 0A1H
Mirroring slot Identifier 3. Read out of the DPRAM during run up: Offset Address 055H, with VC,FC and SC, cor-
responds to parameter P091.
P732.10 (Low-Byte), 0A2H
Mirroring P918. Read out of the DPRAM during run up: “CB Bus address” (only Lowbyte).
Counter Re-configuration by CU. Re-configuration requested by BASE BOARD in online mode.
732.11 (High-Byte), 0A5H
Counter Initialization. Is incremented during run through of the initialization routine.
P732.12 (Low Byte), 0A6H
DPS Manager Error. Error detection in the event of a fatal DPS manager error.
PPO type. PPO type detected from configuration telegram.
P732.13 (High-Byte), 0A9H
Reserved.
P732.14, 0AAH u. 0ABH
Mirroring “DWORD-Specifier-ref”. Read out of the DPRAM during run up: updated cyclically.
P732.15, 0ACH u. 0ADH
Mirroring “DWORD-Specifier-act”. Read out of the DPRAM during run up: updated cyclically
732.16 (Low-Byte), 0AEH
Counter DS_WRITE acknowledgement negatively.
P732.16 (High-Byte), 0AFH
Reserved.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
732.17 (Low-Byte), 0B0H
Counter DS_WRITE acknowledged positively.
P732.17 (High-Byte), 0B1H
Reserved.
732.18 (Low-Byte), 0B2H
Counter DS_READ acknowledged negatively.
Reserved.
Reserved.
P732.19 (Low-Byte), 0B4H
Counter DS_READ acknowledged positively.
Reserved.
P732.20 (Low-Byte), 0B6H
Counter GET DB99 acknowledged positively.
Counter PUT DB99 acknowledged positively.
732.21 (Low-Byte), 0B8H
732.22 (Low-Byte), 0BAH
P732.22 (High-Byte), 0BBH

"Uncontrolled Copy"
732.23 (Low-Byte), 0BCH
Counter DPT-Service acknowledged negatively.
P732.23 (High-Byte), 0BDH
Counter Application Positively Acknowledged. Increment during set-up DPT service application relation.
P732.24 (Low-Byte), 0BEH
Reserved.
P732.24 (High-Byte), 0BFH
Reserved.
P732.25 0C0H and 0C1H
Creation date. Day and month when CBP firmware created (Display: 0304 = 03.04.).
P732.26 0C2H and 0C3H
Creation data. Year when CBP firmware created (Display = Year).
P732.27 0C4H and 0C5H
Software-Version. Software version V X.YZ (Display X).
P732.28 0C6H and 0C7H
Software-Version. Software version V X.YZ (Display YZ).
P732.29 0C8H and 0C9H
Flash-EPROM Checksum. Is read out of the flash EPROM during run-up.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.1 Parameterization
The functions stored in the TripRite Drive are adapted to your specific application by means of parameters. Every
parameter is clearly identified by its parameter name and its parameter number. In addition to the parameter name
and number, many parameters also have a parameter index. These indices enable several values to be stored for
a parameter under one parameter number.
Parameter numbers consist of a letter and a three-digit number. The upper-case letters P, U, H and L represent the
parameters which can be changed, and the lower-case letters r, n, d and c represent the visualization parameters
which cannot be changed.
Parameters can be input as follows:
• Using the PMU (Parameterizing Unit) which is permanently mounted on the front of the units.
• Using the optional OP1S Operator Control Panel.
• Using a PC and the service program.
The parameters stored in the units can only be changed under certain conditions. The following preconditions must
be satisfied before they can be changed:
• The parameter must be a changeable parameter. (Designated by upper-case letters in the parameter num-
ber).
• Parameter access must be granted. (P053 = 6 for parameterizing using the PMU or the OP1S).
• The unit must be in a status which permits parameters to be changed. (Carry out initial parameterization
only in powered-down status).
• The lock and key mechanism must not be activated (Deactivation by parameter reset to factory setting).
5.1.1 Parameter Input via the PMU
The PMU Parameterizing Unit enables parameterization, operator control and visualization of the converters and
inverters directly on the unit itself. It is an integral part of the basic units. It has a four-digit seven-segment display
and several keys. Refer to Figure 5-4.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
02
03 LEGEND
01. Toggle Key
02. Seven Segment
Display
03. Raise Key
04. Lower Key
01 04
P
ES03320a01
Figure 5-4: PMU Parameterization Unit
Key Significance Function
Toggle key For switching between parameter

number, parameter index and
P parameter value in the sequence

indicated (command becomes
effective when the key is
released).
If fault display is active: Acknowl-
edge the fault.
Raise key For increasing the displayed value:

• Short press = single-step
increase
• Long press = rapid increase
Lower key For lowering the displayed value:

• Short press = single-step
decrease
• Long press = rapid decrease
Table 5-4: Operator Control Elements on the PMU

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Hold toggle key and press raise If parameter number level is

key active: For jumping back and forth
P + between the last selected parame-

ter number and the operating dis-
play (r000).
If fault display is active: For
switching over to parameter num-
ber level.
If parameter value level is active:
For shifting the displayed value
one digit to the right if parameter
value cannot be displayed with 4
figures (left-hand figure flashes if
there are any further invisible fig-
ures to the left).
Hold toggle key and press lower If parameter number level is

key active: For jumping directly to the
P + operating display (r000).

If parameter value level is active:
For shifting the displayed value
one digit to the left if parameter
value cannot be displayed with 4
figures (right-hand figure flashes if
there are any further invisible fig-
ures to the right).
Table 5-4: Operator Control Elements on the PMU (Continued)
5.1.1.1 Toggle Key
Because the PMU only has a four-digit seven-segment display, the 3 descriptive elements of a parameter cannot
be displayed at the same time. These include:
• Parameter number,
• Parameter index (if the parameter is indexed) and
• Parameter value
For this reason, you have to switch between the individual descriptive elements by depressing the toggle key. After
the desired level has been selected, adjustment can be made using the raise key or the lower key.
With the toggle key, you can change over:
• from the parameter number to the parameter index.
• from the parameter index to the parameter value.
• from the parameter value to the parameter number.
If the parameter is not indexed, you can jump directly from the parameter number to the parameter value.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
If you change the value of a parameter, this change generally becomes effective immediately. It is only in the case
of acknowledgement parameters, marked in the parameter list by an asterisk (*), that the change does not become
effective until you change over from the parameter value to the parameter number.
Parameter changes made using the PMU are always safely stored in the EEPROM (protected in case of power fail-
ure) once the toggle key has been depressed.
Example
The example in Figure 5-5, shows the individual operator control steps to be carried out on the PMU for a parame-
ter reset to factory setting.

Figure 5-5: PMU Operator Control Steps

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.1.2 Parameter Input via the OP1S
Refer to Figure 5-6. The Operator Control Panel (OP1S) is an optional input/output device which can be used for
parameterizing and starting up the units. Plaintext displays greatly facilitate parameterization.
The OP1S has a non-volatile memory and can permanently store complete sets of parameters. It can therefore be
used for archiving sets of parameters. The parameter sets must be read out (upread) from the unit first. Stored
parameter sets can also be transferred (downloaded) to other units.
The OP1S and the unit to be operated communicate with each other via a serial interface (RS485) using the USS
protocol. During communication, the OP1S assumes the function of the master whereas the connected unit func-
tions as a slave.
The OP1S can be operated at baud rates of 9.6KBaud and 19.2KBaud, and is capable of communicating with up to
32 slaves (addresses 0 to 31). It can therefore be used both in a point-to-point link (e.g. during initial parameteriza-
tion) and within a bus configuration. Refer to Figure 5-7.
The plain-text displays can be shown in one of five different languages (German, English, Spanish, French, Italian).
The language is chosen by selecting the relevant parameter for the slave in question.
LEGEND
01. Sign Key
02. Jog Key
03. Off Key
04. On Key
05. LED Green
06. LED Red
07. LCD
08. Reversing Key
09. Raise Key
10. Toggle Key
11. Lower Key
12. Number Keys
13. Reset Key
Figure 5-6: OP1S Operator Control Panel

"Uncontrolled Copy"
ON key For energizing the drive (enabling motor activation).

The function must be enabled by means of parame-
terization.
OFF key For de-energizing the drive by means of OFF1, OFF2

or OFF3, depending on parameterization. This func-
tion must be enabled by means of parameterization.
Jog key For jogging with jogging setpoint 1 (only effective

when the unit is in the “ready to start” state). This
function must be enabled by means of parameteriza-
Jog tion.
Reversing key For reversing the direction of rotation of the drive.

The function must be enabled by means of parame-
terization.
Toggle key For selecting menu levels and switching between

parameter number, parameter index and parameter
2 value in the sequence indicated. The current level is

displayed by the position of the cursor on the LCD
display (the command comes into effect when the
key is released).
For conducting a numerical input.
NOTICE
If you change the value of a parame-
ter, the change does not become effec-
tive until the toggle key (P) is pressed.
NOTICE
Parameter changes made using the
OP1S are always stored safely in the
EEPROM (protected in case of power
failure) once the toggle key (P) has
been pressed.
Table 5-5: Operator Control Elements of the OP1S

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Reset key For leaving menu levels.

If fault display is active, this is for acknowledging the
4AIAJ fault. This function must be enabled by means of
parameterization.
Raise key For increasing the displayed value:

• Short press = single-step increase.
• Long press = rapid increase.
If motorized potentiometer is active, this is for rais-
ing the setpoint. This function must be enabled by
means of parameterization.
Lower key For lowering the displayed value:

• Short press = single-step decrease.
• Long press = rapid decrease.
If motorized potentiometer is active, this is for low-
ering the setpoint. This function must be enabled by
means of parameterization.
Sign key For changing the sign so that negative values can be
entered.
+/-
Number keys Numerical input.
to
'
Table 5-5: Operator Control Elements of the OP1S (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
H G P P U1 V W1
E
–P
5 5 +
9 9
4 4
8 8
3 3
7 7
2 2
6 6 A
1 1 S1
X101 B
X103 C
ES03323b01
Figure 5-7: OP1S Point-to-Point Link with TripRite Drive
Some parameters may also be displayed without a parameter number, e.g. during quick parameterization or if
“Fixed setting” is selected. In this case, parameterization is carried out via various sub-menus.
Figure 5-8, Figure 5-9, and Figure 5-10 show an example of how to proceed for a parameter reset.
NOTICE
It is not possible to start the parameter reset in the “Run” status.
P P
0.0 A 0 V 00 MotionControl Menu Selection Menu Selection

#
0.00 min-1 **Menu selection *User Param. *User Param.
0.00 min-1 OP: Upread Param Menu.. Param Menu..
Ready OP: Download Fixed Set... #Fixed Set...
ES03326a01
Figure 5-8: Selection of Fixed Setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P P
Fixed Setting Fixed Setting Factory Setting Factory Setting

*Select FactSet *Select FactSet FactSet. #FactSet.
FactSet. #FactSet. *No FactSet *No FactSet
ES03327a01
Figure 5-9: Selection of Factory Setting
P wait
Factory Setting Menu Selection

#FactSet. *User Param..
*No FactSet Param. Menu..
busy............ FixedSet...
ES03328a01
Figure 5-10: Start of Factory Setting
5.1.3 Parameter Reset To Factory Setting
The factory setting is the defined initial state of all parameters of a unit. The units are delivered to P&H Mining
Equipment with these settings. The TripRite Drive is setup at P&H Mining Equipment to our specifications.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Restoring the initial state resets the parameters to the factory setting, thus canceling all parameter changes made
by P&H Mining Equipment prior to being installed on the shovel.
P053 = 6
P060 = 2
P366 = ?
P970 = 0
ES03329a01
Figure 5-11: Sequence for Parameter Reset to Factory Setting
5.1.3.1 P053 = 6
Grant parameter access.
• 6: Parameter changes permitted via PMU and serial interface SCom1 (OP1S and PC).
5.1.3.2 P060 = 2
Menu selection “Fixed settings”.
CAUTION
Parameter P366 was correctly set prior to delivery of the unit and only needs to be
changed in exceptional cases.
5.1.3.3 P366 = ?
Select desired factory setting.
• 0: Standard.
5.1.3.4 P970 = 0
Start parameter reset.
• 0: Parameter reset.
• 1: No parameter change.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.1.4 Upread of Parameters with the OP1S
Refer to Figure 5-12. With the “OP: Upread” function, the parameters of the connected slave can be upread and
stored in the flash memory inside the OP1S. Starting from the basic menu, the “OP: Upread” function is selected
with “Lower” or “Raise” and started with “P”. If the available memory is insufficient, the procedure is interrupted with
an appropriate error message. During upread, the OP1S indicates the parameter currently being read. In addition,
the slave number is shown at the top on the right-hand side.
MotionControl Motion Control 00

*Menu selection Upread
#OP: Upread Pxxx
OP: Download
ES04119a01
Figure 5-12: Selecting and Starting the “Upread” Function
With “Reset”, the procedure can be interrupted at any time. If the upread procedure has been completed in full, the
user is requested to enter an ID with a maximum of 12 characters for the stored parameter set. This identification
can, for example, consist of the date and two differentiating numbers. It is entered with the numerical keypad. With
“Lower” a number which has been entered can be deleted.
1 9 0 9 1
MotionControl 00 MotionControl 00 MotionControl 00 MotionControl 00 MotionControl 00 MotionControl 00

Upread Upread Upread Upread Upread Upread
and so on...
Enter ID Enter ID Enter ID Enter ID Enter ID Enter ID
_ 1- 19- 190- 1909- 19091-
ES04110a01
Figure 5-13: Example of Entering an ID
When “P” is pressed, the message “Upread OK” appears and the display changes to the basic menu.
5.1.5 Parameterizing by Download
The OP1S operator control panel is capable of upreading parameter sets from the units and storing them. These
parameter sets can then be transferred to other units by download. Downloading with the OP1S is thus the pre-
ferred method of parameterizing replacement units in a service case.
During downloading with the OP1S, it is assumed that the units are in the as-delivered state. The parameters for
the power section definition are thus not transferred (see section “Detailed parameterization, power section defini-
tion”). If a PIN has been entered to release optional technology functions, this is also not overwritten during down-
loading.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
With the “OP: Download” function, a parameter set stored in the OP1S can be written into the connected slave.
Starting from the basic menu, the “OP: Download” function is selected with “Lower” or “Raise” and activated with
“P”. Refer to Figure 5-14.
MotionControl Download
*Menu selection *1909199701
OP: Upread MASTERDRIVES MC
#OP: Download PLUS
ES03330a01
Figure 5-14: Selecting and Activating the “Download” Function
Now one of the parameter sets stored in the OP1S has to be selected using the “Lower” or “Raise” keys (displayed
in the second line). The selected ID is confirmed with the “P” key. Now the slave ID can be displayed with “Lower”
or “Raise”. The slave ID contains various characteristic features of the unit such as rated output, order number,
software version, etc.
The “Download” procedure is then started with the “P” key. During download, the OP1S displays the parameter
currently being written. Refer to Figure 5-15.

Figure 5-15: Confirming the ID and Starting the “Download” Procedure
With “Reset”, the procedure can be stopped at any time. If downloading has been fully completed, the message
“Download OK” appears and the display returns to the basic menu.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
After the data set to be downloaded has been selected, if the identification of the stored data set does not agree
with the identification of the connected unit, an error message appears for approximately 2 seconds. The operator
is then asked if downloading is to be discontinued. Refer to Figure 5-16.
$ $
% &

!
"#

'''%

Figure 5-16: Continue or Stop Download
• Yes: Downloading is discontinued.
• No: Downloading is carried out.
5.1.6 Function Diagram Modules
Function diagram modules (function diagrams) are shown after the flow chart for parameter modules stored in the
unit software. On the first few pages are the:
• setpoint and command sources, on the following pages are the
• analog outputs and the display parameters and the
• open-loop and closed-loop control types.
It is therefore possible to put together the function diagrams to exactly suit the selected combination of setpoint/
command source and open/closed-loop control type. This will give you an overview of the functionality parameter-
ized in the units and of the necessary assignment of the terminals.
The function parameters and visualization parameters specified in the function diagrams are automatically adopted
in the user menu and can be visualized or changed there.
The parameter numbers of the user menu are entered in P360.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Setpoint and command source

Termi nal strip and -X101/1 P24
analog input
-X101/2 M24
-X101/3 1 = Operation
-X101/4 0 = Fault
-X101/5 0 = Alarm
-X101/6 1 = Inverter relesae
-X101/7 1-Edge = Acknowledge
-X101/8 1 = ON 0 = OFF1
Differential input AnaIn Scale

+/- 10 V P630 AnaIn Smooth
AnaIn Offset P634
AI+ -10 V ... + 10V P631
-X101/9 corresponds to
A -100 % ... +100 %
AI- D
-X101/10
Control type:
Speed
control
r003 Output Volts
r004 Output Amps
Ref- r006 DC Bus Volts
speed Norm.
P353
n-Reg. Gain1 n-Reg. Time
Disp Speed Conn P235.1 P240.1 FSetp
r041.1 n(max, FWD speed)
(= speed Torq(Lim1)
setpoint) P452.1 P263.1
Current
control Motor
3~
n(max, REV speed) FSetp
P453.1 Torq (Lim2)
Accel Decel P264.1
Time P462.1 Time P464.1
Motor
Analog output AnaOut Scale AnaOut Smooth encoder
+/- 10 V AnaOut Offset P643.1 P642.1
P644.1
-X101/11 AA Disp Speed Conn
A y x
D y[V]= 100x % P643.1 r041.2
-X101/12 (=speed actual value )
Type of encoder:
Resolver
6
SBR
sin + -X414/3
sin - -X414/4
cos+ -X414/6
cos- -X414/7
Excitation -X414/9
MExcitationg -X414/11
Shield connection
ES03334a01
Figure 5-17: Function Diagram (Example)


E# 777$ ; 5 *0 *
Section 5, Codes.fm
%./ )2 0. * ) 4
EE#
5 %$

E

E 777$, ; ,
*0 *
%./ )2 0. * ) 9
! "
E
,
% 4 ,
%
# !$
Copyright © 2006 P&H Mining Equipment, Inc.

TripRite® Installation and Maintenance Manual
# %? : ) ' *0 * 0 ' /

/ "

-- %? 5 4+ <& 1' $ $$$ +
4+ +& 1' $$$ +
4+ +& 1' ,"
2 $$$ + =
4+4$ 4& 1' %* $$$ 9
4+4$& *( ' *
1' * "
$ $ #### "
$ $####
4+ <& 1' ! "
$$$ + :
-5.25-
1' ! + >
%

% 4++& /1'%* $$$ 9
& & 6 /2 ) ) ./
& '($ ) * &
C C =C 9 =7 =7 B @
+& ( & ,7*%$
'
& ,
4& 8
3 $
-& %./0 /) & * '($ 2
"Uncontrolled Copy"
#& 1*2 ' ./( +& (

& /(( ' / 3 & . * ! "
@ =7 A4 =7 B @
& & 6*9, @ 4+
+& ,, -& . *'$
& ,, 4
F%4+#4
-& 5 * : &
& . * $ / /
' / $($ *C "
C
* ' / *
7 *
0
* '
*$
$ ?/
' / * + *C /
0 (*
Figure 5-18: General Functions - Visualization and Normalization Parameters

* "
2 B+$
4$ !/ *
2 ) /(* / D (D
B +$
Section 5, Version 00 - 10/06

Peak Services
Peak Services
.

23 *
& 23
&

( ( <' " === 7!

. %# 3
& &
)
-%4 . -/.
*
& -/ &

3
&
4))&
3
&

2 3
& 3
& # . *
&
::;:;:;:;
::;:;:;:;

:;
:;

5 -
3
&

23 2 3
& 3
&
8* 22 .3
&
6)& -
3
&
9, 2 3
& 3
&
. 8* 22 .3
&
7 3
& 7

9,
7 27 3
& 7 7 3
& 7
8* 227 .3
& 7
3
&
9, 3
&
8* 2 3
&
22 .3
&

3
&
! 9,
06'7
2 3
& 3
&
" # 8* 22 .3
&
$
.+ 3
&
9,
( ! 2 3
& 3
&
%&&
8* 22 .3
&
( 3
& (
9,
'( ! ( 2( 3
& ( ( 3
& (
8*
-5.26-
22( .3
& (
' 3
& '
?@

% ( 9,
>>>> >>>> >>>> >>> ' 2' 3
& ' ' 3
& '
8*
22' .3
& '
$ *, ( " 9,
?@

% 8* 2 3
&
>>>> >>>> >>> >>>> 227 .3
&
9,
8* 2 3
&
227 .3
&
"Uncontrolled Copy"
%)) *

# 9, 2 3
&
+ 8* 227 .3
&
+ ) *,
)- .
/!
,& .
0! 9, 2 3
&
* )& #
, *, , *

8*
Figure 5-19: First CB/TB Board (Low Slot Letter) - Receiving

227 .3
&
$# ,
. *
& , , 7 9, 27 3
& 7
/

) , )
& /& 8* 2277 .3
& 7

,
1
*
&

&
, /

,
. *
& 9, 2 3
&
8* 227 .3
&
?@ "
&1
" ,+
&1 1 1 7 9, 2 3
&
)&
)- .
/!

Section 5, Codes.fm
+'. : ; <<<
# ))$
"#
1" 5
'. 1"

Section 5, Codes.fm
0
//
/0
$"'*
# +,-

"
) #

"#"
!
"#" #
!#"#$

0
//
/0

% !#"#$ "
) # #'")


!

$
#
7!"

$ &'#

("$'#

-5.27-
"
) ##
*1 # 2
34 #5 ") $1'*
#
# $ # # $ %
#

6 #5 #"
4 " " 1 #

78")'2

#"
4 "
"Uncontrolled Copy"
" *1 #

9
'. #5 5 5 "# 4
Figure 5-20: First CB/TB Board (Low Slot Letter) - Transmitting

"

#"
4 " " *1 #


Peak Services
Peak Services
n959.25 = 4
Display of r550 on the PMU

Control word 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
r550
Control word 1
Start Command from PLC Bit No. Meaning K0030
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0=OFF1,Shutdown via ramp-function generator, followed

Src1 OFF2(coast) P555.B (1/20) Src ON/OFF1 P554.B (0/0) Bit 0 by pulse disable to sequence control 1)
B B 1=ON, operating conditions (edge-controlled)
Src2 OFF2(coast) P556.B (1/1) 0=OFF2,Pulse disable, motor coasts down
Bit 1 to sequence control 1)
B 1=Operating condition
Src3 OFF2(coast) P557.B (1/1) & 0=OFF3, Quick stop

Bit 2 to sequence control 1)
B 1=Operating condition
Src InvRelease P561.B (1/1)
1=Inverter enable , pulse enable
"Safe STOP" check-back 3) B Bit 3 to sequence control 1)
0=Pulse disable
Src RampGen Rel P562.B (1/1)
Src1 OFF3(QStop) P558.B (1/1) 1=Ramp-function-generator enable
B Bit 4 to sequence control 1)
B 0=Set ramp-function generator to 0
Src RampGen Stop P563.B (1/1)
Src2 OFF3(QStop) P559.B (1/1) 1=Start ramp-function generator
B Bit 5 to setpoint processing (part 2)
B 0=Stop ramp-function generator
& Src Setp Release P564.B (1/1)
Src3 OFF3(QStop) P560.B (1/1) 1=Setpoint enable
B 0=Setpoint disable
B0094 Fault acknowl. 2)
Src1 Fault Reset P565.B(2107) Fault Reset PLC
Bit 7 0 1 Edge fault acknowledgement to sequence control 1)
B
-5.28-
Src Jog Bit0 P568.B (0/0)
Src2 Fault Reset P566.B (0/0)
B Bit 8 1=Inching bit 0 to sequence control 1)
B
Src Jog Bit1 P569.B (0/0)
Src3 Fault Reset P567.B (0/18) 1 B Bit 9 1=Inching bit 1 to sequence control 1)
Figure 5-21: Control Word 1

B
Note: This bit must be set in the first PcD word of the
Pulse generator 1=Control requested telegram received from the serial interfaces so that the
from PMU Bit 10
0=No control requested converter will accept the process data as valid (compare
USS, Profibus etc.
"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src FWD Speed P571.B (1/1)

1=Clockwise phase sequence enable
1) The sequence control system is the 0=Clockwise phase sequence disable
internal control system (software) for Src REV speed P572.B (1/1)
implementing the drive status (r001). 1=Counter-clockwise phase sequence enable
0=Counter-clockwise phase sequence disable
2) The signal remains high on acknowledgement for
T10 (= 204.8 ms with 5 kHz pulse frequency). Src MOP UP P573.B (0/0)
B Bit 13 1=Raise mot. potentiometer to mot. potentiometer
Pre-assignment of the BICO parameters:
1. Binector valid for BICO data set 1 Src MOP Down P574.B (0/0)
2. Binector valid for BICO data set 2 B Bit 14 1=Lower mot. potentiometer to mot. potentiometer
3) Only evaluated in the Src No ExtFault1 P575.B (1/1)
"Ready for switching on" state (r001 = 9) with 0=External fault 1 (F035), to sequence control 1)
B Bit 15
compact and chassis devices. 1=No external fault to fault processing
ES03337a01

Section 5, Codes.fm
06+ - 213 +< 4 !
4 213
4 213 1 7 ' # - 0=

Section 5, Codes.fm
1 7

)4 8

%' 0 4 ( 5 $ %'

%' 04 ( 5 $
%'

$ ;- * #+ -
#+ (/$
+ + - ( $4
$ ;- # -
3) ( > $
% 0 4 ( 5 $


$ ;- ?# ?
+ +4
% 04 ( 5 $

%# 0
4 ( 5 $

! " #
$ * $
!%#
-5.29-
' 04 ( 5 $
!" &
!' & ) 6 "
6 04 (5$
!"
!
Figure 5-22: Control Word 2

) "% 0 4 (5$
!" (%
$ $ * $
!) +
5 04 ( 5 $
"Uncontrolled Copy"
! ( $

! (* $
) " 7 04 (5$
!" + (, $ * $
!) + +
) " 7 04 (5$
!" + (, $ * $
!) + +
213 ' 0 ( $

! 213 9 4:
! 213
1 04 ( 5 $

!) -..& / + 0 * $
!1-.. +
"


Peak Services
Peak Services
n959.27 = 4
To PLC Status Word 1

r552 Display of r552 on the PMU
Status Word 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Bit No. Meaning K0032
1=Ready to switch on 1 B0101 Not Rdy for ON

from sequence control 1) Bit 0

0=Not ready to switch on B0100 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Rdy for ON
1=Ready for operation (DC link loaded, pulses disabled) 1 B0103 Not Rdy for Oper
0=Not ready for operation B0102 Rdy for Oper
1=Run (voltage at output terminals) 1 B0105 Not operating
from sequence control 1) Bit 2 1) The sequence control system is the
0=Pulses disabled B0104 Operation internal control system (software) for
1=Fault active (pulses disabled) B0107 No fault implementing the drive status (r001).
from sequence control 1) Bit 3 1
0=No fault B0106 Fault
0=OFF2 active 1 B0109 OFF2
1=No OFF2 B0108 No OFF2
0=OFF3 active 1 B0111 OFF3
1=No OFF3 B0110 No OFF3
1=Switch-on inhibit 1 B0113 Not Blocked
0=No switch-on inhibit (possible to switch on) B0112 Blocked
1=Warning active 1 B0115 No Warning
from alarm processing Bit 7
0=No warning
-5.30-
B0114 Warning
1=No setpoint/actual value deviation detected 1 B0117 Deviation
from messages Bit 8
0=Setpoint/actual value deviation B0116 No Deviation
from sequence control 1) Bit 9 1=PcD control requested (always 1)
Figure 5-23: Status Word 1

1=Comparison value reached 1 B0121 CompV not OK
from messages Bit 10
0=Comparison value not reached B0120 CompV OK
"Uncontrolled Copy"
1=Low voltage fault 1 B0123 No Low Voltage

from fault processing Bit 11
0=No low voltage fault B0122 Low Voltage
1=Request to energize main contactor 1 B0125 N.Energ.MCon
0=Request not to energize main contactor B0124 Energize MCon
from setpoint processing 1=Ramp-function generator active 1 B0127 RampGen n.act.
Bit 13
(part 2) 0=Ramp-function generator not active B0126 RampGen active
1=Positive speed setpoint 1 B0129 Speed Setp REV
from messages Bit 14
0=Negative speed setpoint B0128 Speed Setp FWD
Bit 15 Reserve
ES03348a01

Section 5, Codes.fm
4
1% 2 6" / 9

Section 5, Codes.fm
1% 2
#4 3
& 5% * +$ 44 *

+$

* 7 5% &
& (8*
&"& % ( *4
& & !"
# !"
# " !" *
& 5% * $ % # $ % $ $
# % $ %

%
& 5% * $ # $ % 6" /

# % $ %
& 5% * $ & # $ 2
# & $ 2
& & " ' & () * # !2 6
# & ! 2 6
& % " ' &"% %
# 7&" 6
# &"% %
-5.31-
7&" 6
& & " ' &"% & # 7&"26
# &"% & 7&"2 6
& & " &"% & # 7&"2
Figure 5-24: Status Word 2

# & &"% & 7&"2
& % " &"% % # 7&"
# & &"% % 7&"
"Uncontrolled Copy"

& % " "% %+,- %

,-
# & "% %+,- % ,-
& 5% * " . ( )' %* ' "
" . '

& 5% * /0 / 44

/0 /
$1

Peak Services
Peak Services
U953.55 = ___(20)
Upper limit
U818.01 {25 s}
-(231-1) ... (231-1)

Scaled Torque Reference Command from PLC 0
Torque Limit 1
Input simple U815.01 1
Ramp generator (See Torque Limitation
ramp generator y at upper limit Function Diagram)
B850
U815 0 1 K851
.01
16 bit input K (0) x
.02 x LU y
32 bit input KK (0)
=0 0
B851 KK852
Ramp generator at lower limit
U818.02
U817.01 Lower limit
[LU/sec] 0 t -(231-1) ... (231-1)
Setting speed
1/2
0 ... (231-1) U817.02 1
[LU/sec]
LU/s
Selection of
-5.32-
+
setting speed &
U816
.01
B (0) Note for users:
t The block can be used, for example, for continuously
and hence smoothly changing the transmission ratio of
Changeover ramp- the gear function.
–
function generator (0) &
Motor-operated .02
potentiometer (1) B (0) SET SET_VAL
.03
MOP + B (0)
"Uncontrolled Copy"
.04 The ramp generator output takes over the value set at
MOP B (0)
KK815.3 for as long as "Set" is at B816.5 = 1.
Y is always kept within the value range between the
.05 lower and upper limits. If during "Enable motor
Set B (0)
potentiometer" both signals MOP+ and MOP- are 1
Source setting value simultaneously, output y remains unchanged.
simple ramp generator
Figure 5-25: Free Blocks - Simple Ramp Function Generator 1

U818.03 U815.3
Setting value [LU] KK853 KK (853)
-(231-1) ... +(231-1)
ES03338a01

Section 5, Codes.fm
Section 5, Codes.fm
Inching bit 0 from sequence control Release clockwise phase sequence of control word 1
n959.42 = 2
Scaled Speed Limit from PLC
Inching bit 1 from sequence control Release counter-clockwise phase sequence of control word 1
16383 = 100% Main setpoint
(P353) r446
Scale Main Setp n(set, speed sel)

-300.0 ... 300.0 % r461
P444.F (100.0)
Src MainSetp n(set, sum1) n(set, spd sel)
P443.B (0) KK0070 0% 00 KK0071
KK 00

01 To Setpoint Processing 2
+ 01
+ Speed Setpoint
-1 10
10 No SpdDir Sel
11
11 B0200
Scale Add Setp1 <1>

-300.0 ... 300.0 %
P434.F (100.0)
Src AddSetpoint1
P433.B (0)
-5.33-
KK
<1>
The first selected jog setpoint is always valid.
A subsequently selected jog setpoint is not valid until the previously selected setpoint is deselected.
In order to select jog setpoint 3, both inching bits must be set at the same time.
Jog Setp 1
"Uncontrolled Copy"
-200.0 ... 200.0 %

P448.F (0.0)
Jog Setp 2
Figure 5-26: Setpoint Processing - Setpoint Selection

-200.0 ... 200.0 %
P449.F (0.0)
ES03339a01
Jog Setp 3
-200.0 ... 200.0 %
P450.F (0.0)

Peak Services
Peak Services
n(set,RGen-I) Scale Torq(PRE)
Release setpoint 0.0 ... 200000.0 %

n959.43 = 2
KK0072
of control word 1 P471.F (100.0)
Drive status Accel Time Decel Time SmoothRGenOut Torque(PRE)

OPERATION
& 0.00 ... 600.00 s 0.00 ... 600.00 s 0.000 ... 60.000 s K0077 n(max,FWDSpeed) Limitr FWD act.
P462.F (0.50) P464.F (0.50) P469.F (0.000)
0.0 ... 200.0 % B0203
=0 =0 P452.F (100.0)
dn/dt (RgenOut) [ 100 % ]
ms
KK0076
Limitr REV act.
n(set, RGenOut) n(set,sum2) y B0204
From 310.8 KK0073 KK0074
0
0% n(set,limitr)
x 0
r472
n(set, spd sel) +
1 B0201 Accel active + n(set,limitr)
from setpoint 1
processing 1 KK0075
Make correction to B0202 Decel active
ramp func. gen. Speed Setpoint
Position controller output to Speed Controller
HLRgen active to P453.F (-100.0) FD 360.1
status word 1 -200.0 ... 0.0 % (see Speed Controller
n(max,REVSpeed) Function Diagram)
Ramp generator release of sequence control
-5.34-
1 = Release
1
0 = Set ramp generator output to 0
RampGen stop from control word 1

Enable RGen bypass
Limitr FWS act. from position control
Limitr REV act.

SrcEnRGenByp &
Actual speed value (KK0091) P772 (1)
No inching of
Scale Add Setp 2 B
sequence control
"Uncontrolled Copy"
-300.0 ... 300.0 % Enable position control

P439.F (100.0) Enable speed control
from HLG bypass
Src Add Setp 2 0 From process Jog bit 1 B0205
0% &
P438.B (0) control Jog bit 0
KK
1 Setpoint enable
Figure 5-27: Setpoint Processing - Ramp Function Generator

ES03340a01
Ramp-function generator bypass

Section 5, Codes.fm
Src n-Reg Adapt
Scale Droop P232.B (0) Kp-Adaption n959.52 = 1
Release of droop x
0.0 ... 100.0 % K n-Reg.Kp(act)
from control word 2 U953.41 = ___(1) y In V1.20, speed control
Section 5, Codes.fm
P246.F (0.0) r237
n-RegGain2 is calculated in sampling
Src Droop 0% 0 0.0 ... 1000.0 y time 2.
n(Droop)
P236.F (10.0) <1>
P245.B (0) -1 KK0157 <1> n-Reg Gain1 The P gain of the speed controller is set at
K 0.0 ... 1000.0
1 P235 if gain adaptation is not used.
P235.F (10.0) x
Speed Setpoint from
Ramp Function <4>
Generator Smooth n(set) Speed control characteristic:
P233.F (0.0) P234.F (100.0)
0.0 ... 100.0 ms P235 = Prop Gain P238 (0 = PI controller);
0.0 ... 200.0 % 0.0 ... 200.0 %
P221.F (0.0) [min-1] P240 = Z Gain für P238 = 1 (reference model) see section
n-Reg Adapt1 n-Reg Adapt2
n (Setp Smooth) 1000 = Disabled 7.3.7
Src n(set) r229 U953.43 = ___(1) Master/slave drive of control word 2 [190.5] n-Reg. Tn
Track I-component on slave drive so that 0 ... 1000 ms
P220.B (75)
Torq(set,n-Reg.) = Torq(set,lim) P240.F (50)
Src1 n(set/act)

KK
P224.B (0) U953.45 = ___(1)

<4>
KK n-Reg (I-port)
Kp Tn K0155
Smooth n(act) Src2 n(set/act) <3> Src n(Deviation) at P238 = (0)
0.0 ... 100.0 ms n (set,smooth) P225.B (150) + n(Deviation) P228.B (152) n-Reg (P-port)
[in % of P353]
P223 (0.0) [min-1]
KK0150 KK KK0152 KK K0154
Actual Speed n (ActV Smooth) +
Src n(act) 40ms r230 Src3 n(set/act) M(set, n-Reg)
<2> – –
P222 (91) n(act,smooth) P226.B (151) at P238 = 1 (see <4>) K0153
KK KK0151 KK Torque Reference
SrcSetV n-Reg.I
-5.35-
[in % of P353] (see Torque Limitation
Src4 n(set/act) P241.B (0)
Function Diagram)
P227.B (0) K
KK
Src set n-Reg.I
<2> <3> P242.B (0)
For normalization of speed, see [20] Reference speed P353 must be chosen so B
Figure 5-28: Speed Controller

that the total of setpoints P224 and P225 M(set,n-Reg.)
is always < 195 %. Src n-Reg.I STOP r255
P243.B (0)
"Uncontrolled Copy"
DT1 Function T1 B
0.0 ... 10.0 ms
P249.F (0.0) n(DT1 Func)inv Limitation is active from torque limitation.
-1 KK0160 Limit I-component and total output to current torque limit.
Src DT1 Function Stop I-component, if total output at limit
P248.B (0) n(DT1 Func)
KK KK0159 n-Reg release from control word 2
ES03341a01
U953.44 = ___(1)
Note:
P250.F (0.0) If interconnection is effected against the
0.0 ... 1000.0 ms In U953.41 ... 45 only the values
1 or 20 can be entered. sequence, there is a dead time of T1 in
DT1 Function Td the speed control loop
(e. g. KK0152 -> P252, KK1058 -> P228)

Peak Services
Peak Services
n-Reg Gain (act)
1.1 x Maximum speed
1.1 x Maximum speed positive direction of rotation <1>
negative direction of rotation maximum 205 % of reference Max Current
maximum -205 % of reference speed (ab V1.41) speed (ab V1.41) 0.0 ... 1000.0 A
P128 (~)
Ramped Torque Limit
Src Torq(Limit 1) Src I(max)

y1 n959.53 = 1
FSetpTorq(Lim1) T(limit1,set) P265.B (170) P275.B (2) I(max,set) 100 %
-200.0 ... 200.0 % K0170 K K r129 [A] In V1.20, speed control is
P263.F (100.0) n(act) calculated in sampling time 2.
x
Src Torq(Limit 2) Imax(perm)
I²t calculation from encoder
FSetpTorq(Lim2) T(limit2,set) P266.B (171) MIN K0175
evaluation slot C
-200.0 ... 200.0 % K0171 K -100 %
P264.F (-100.0) y2 [in % of P350]
n(act) Imax(Drv) Isq(max,abs)
Speed limiting
from actual-value x (depends on the K0176
controller
conditioning slot C pulse frequency P340)
y2 y1
n-LimitrReg act
B0230
Isd(set,active)
Torq(limit1,act) from current control
K0172
Torque Reference from Speed Controller Torq(limit2,act) Factor: clockwise/

K0173 anti-clockwise
Src Torque(add) Src T(Add3)
P262.B (0) P267.B (0) Src I(sq,add) No OFF3 from
Magnetizing of [in % of P350]
K K current control P271.B (0) sequence control
K Isq(set,act)
-5.36-
9.2A = 56 ft. lbs. K0168
Src Torq (set) y y
P260.B (153) Src I(sq,set) 0
0
y
+ + Isq(set) P270.B (166) +
K x
x x
K0166 K Current Setpoint
y 1
Src Torq(conseq) + + x + (see Current Controller 1
1
P261.B (0) [in % of P350] -1 Isq(set,limitr) Function Diagram)
Figure 5-29: Torque Limitation

K Torq(set,limit) K0167
[in % of P354] K0165
Master/slave drive Isq (set,act)
AmpLimitr act.
from control word 2 r272 [A]
Torq (set, Lim) B0233
Set as Master Speed Control
"Uncontrolled Copy"
r269 [Nm]
ES03342a01 n-Reg in Limitr

Torq(Lim2)act. Torq(Lim1)act. B0234
Current controller in limitation
B0232 B0231 from current controller
<1> in the case of TripRite Advanced Dipper Trip max. 3 I ConvNom

1 Limitation active
to speed controller

Section 5, Codes.fm
Ki-
Reference variable for fluxes Is only calculated for P290 Current controller n959.54 = 0
Psi(...): rated magnetizing FieldWKFreq Select Flux Reg (Sel V/f,I-Reg) = 0 Dynamic I-Reg Amps Reg Gain
0.0 ... 100.0 %
0.0 ... 400.0 Hz 0/1 (=current control) [420.3] 0 ... 2 0.0 ... 200.0 %
P285 (0.0)
Section 5, Codes.fm
P293 (~) P294 (0) P296 (1) P282 (80.0)
Src Flux (set)

Vdc link from actual
FSetp Flux (set) P292 (180) Flux reference Field weakening values Current control Isq(Deviation)
20.0 ... 200.0 % K0180 K control B0251 Isd(set,act) K0185
P291 (100.0) K0183 Decoupling
and
Pre-control Alpha
Flux (act) from flux model
flux control (see Gating Unit)
Vector rotation
to torque
limitation
Current Setpoint Isq(set,act) Beta
From Torque Limitation

(see Gating Unit)
Isq(set,active)
K0168
Isd(act)
K0182 U(set,abs.)
Iα
from actual values K0189
Transformation Isq(act)
K0184
Iß to torque limitation
from actual values
I-Reg in Limitr
-5.37-
Pulse release B0250
Transformation angle from flux model from sequence control Motor #pole pairs P109
zP
Position test angle

r286
in mech. degrees
Figure 5-30: Current Controller 1

Theta(I-Reg)
K0186
"Uncontrolled Copy"
Psi(act)
Flux model K0181
to flux control
M(act) Calculated Flux
K0241 K0241 is calculated in 4T0
Magnetization
to torque limitation
M(act)
kT-Estimator, n(slip)
r007 [%]
from actual values Tr-Adaption K0188
Transformation angle
ES03343a01
to transformation

Peak Services
Peak Services
Pulse Frequency
5.0 ... 8.0 kHz

n959.56 = 0
P340 (5.0)
[100% = full block modulation]
ModDepth (abs)
Sel V/f, I-Reg.
0/1 K0222
P290 (0)
Switch-on Time1
K0223
A(alpha) from current control 0 to PWM unit
Gating unit
A(alpha) from V/f control
1 Asynchronous Switch-on Time2

space vector
-5.38-
K0224
modulation
A(beta) from current control 0
to PWM unit
Figure 5-31: Gating Unit

A(beta) from V/f control
1
Switch-on Time3
K0225
"Uncontrolled Copy"
to PWM unit
Pulse release
from sequence
control

Section 5, Codes.fm
!"!#$

%& '

Section 5, Codes.fm

4

,

,


%& '
-5.39-
Figure 5-32: Actual Values
:;"!$
. (12344
### .
5677 7
"Uncontrolled Copy"
( ' 9 4
-!
( ' 8 4
-!
( ) *
*
( - .
,,
+
) ( - .
$
/
0

Peak Services
Peak Services
High byte = Current fault number r947.01 <1> n959.65 = 4
K0250
Low byte = Curren alarm number <2>
To PLC
"Operating"
status from Fault masking Fault time in days r782.01 Fault time in days r782.04 Fault time in days r782.07
sequence control 0 ... 255 Fault time in hours .02 Fault time in hours .05 Fault time in hours .08
P830 (0) Fault time in seconds .03 Fault time in seconds .06 Fault time in seconds .09

FNo. r947.01 FValue r949.01 FNo. r947.09 FValue r949.09 FNo. r947.17 FValue r949.17
1s
Fault trigger signal
.02 .02 .10 .10 .18 .18
from sequence control
.03 .03 .11 .11 .19 .19
.04 .04 .12 .12 .20 .20
& .05 .05 .13 .13 .21 .21
.06 .06 .14 .14 .22 .22
Days Hours Seconds
r825.01 r825.02 r825.03 .07 .07 .15 .15 .23 .23
Operating .08 .08 .16 .16 .24 .24
hours
counter Current fault 1st acknowledged fault 2nd acknowledged fault
Fault time in days r782.10 Fault time in days r782.13 Fault time in days r782.16
Fault time in hours .11 Fault time in hours .14 Fault time in hours .17
Fault time in seconds .12 Fault time in seconds .15 Fault time in seconds .18
FNo. r947.25 FValue r949.25 FNo. r947.33 FValue r949.33 FNo. r947.41 FValue r949.41
.26 .26 .34 .34 .42 .42
P952=0
.27 .27 .35 .35 .43 .43
Causes deletion .28 .28 .36 .36 .44 .44
-5.40-
of the diagnosis memory .29 .29 .37 .37 .45 .45
.30 .30 .38 .38 .46 .46
.31 .31 .39 .39 .47 .47
.32 .32 .40 .40 .48 .48
Figure 5-33: Fault Memory

OFF1 on fault
0 ... 255 3rd acknowledged fault 4th acknowledged fault 5th acknowledged fault
P834 (0)
Fault time in days r782.19 Fault time in days r782.22
"Uncontrolled Copy"
Fault time in hours .20 Fault time in hours .23

Fault time in seconds .21 Fault time in seconds .24
FNo. r947.49 FValue r949.49 FNo. r947.57 FValue r949.57
.50 .50 .58 .58
.51 .51 .59 .59
.52 .52 .60 .60
.53 .53 .61 .61 <1> K0250 = 0000 if there is no fault
.54 .54 .62 .62 and no alarm
ES03345a01 .55 .55 .63 .63 <2> If several alarms are present at the same
.56 .56 .64 .64 time, the alarm with the lowest number is
indicated in K0250
6th acknowledged fault 7th acknowledged fault

Section 5, Codes.fm
4 Fault Message Trigger Signals (2 µs) 4 Alarm Message Trigger Signals (2 µs) 3 Connector/Double Connector Converters (9 µs)
Section 5, Codes.fm
U952.59 = __ (20) U952.63 = __ (20)
U061 (0) U065 (0)
B 1 = "Fault F148" B 1 = "Alarm A061"
U952.60 = __ (20) U952.64 = __ (20) U950.56 = __ (20)

U062 (0) U066 (0) U070 (0)
B 1 = "Fault F149" B 1 = "Alarm A062" K .01 Hi Word KK0420
K .02 Lo Word
K .03 Hi Word KK0421
K .04 Lo Word
U952.61 = __ (20) U952.65 = __ (20) .05 Hi Word
U063 (0) U067 (0) K KK0422
.06 Lo Word

B 1 = "Fault F150" B 1 = "Alarm A063" K
U952.62 = __ (20) U952.66 = __ (20)

U064 (0) U068 (0)
B 1 = "Fault F151" B 1 = "Alarm A064"
-5.41-
Voltage Monitoring of Electronics Power Supply 3 Double Connector/Connector Converters (11 µs)
"Uncontrolled Copy"
n959.01 = 3
U952.88 = __ (20)
U071 (0)
100 ms POWER ON .01 Hi Word
KK K0423
POWER ON Lo Word K0424
B0400
KK .02 Hi Word K0425
10 ms
Lo Word K0426
POWER OFF POWER OFF
KK .03 Hi Word K0427
Lo Word K0428
Figure 5-34: Fault/Alarm Trigger Signals, Connector, Double Connector Converter

ES03346a01

Peak Services
Peak Services
&-'. /&'. 0&0 ( (0, 1 23 '0 (0, 1 23

*

# !



+,

#

" $ %&'

) (

*

# !

#

4 &

"

-5.42-

'0 (0, 1 23

*
"Uncontrolled Copy"
&-'. /&'. 0&0 ( (0, 1 23

# !

#

"

Figure 5-35: Free Blocks - Absolute Value Generators with Smoothing, Limiters

Section 5, Codes.fm

Section 5, Codes.fm
" ! "& ! ' (( ! "# ! "& ! ' (( ! " "& # ' (( !
! !
. . .
! !
.
"# ! "#/ ! !/ !
! ! ! ! .
) ) ! ,
! )! ! )! . !!!

) ) +0
12.%1

12.%1 '
" ! "& & ' (( ! "# ! "& # ' (( ! !
. . "# ! ,
!
)) !
"& ! "# ! !
! ! ! ! ))
) ) !/
! )! ! )! ))
) ) !
)) /
! ))! /&
))
!

))
"#! ! "& ' (( ! !#

))
. !
)) # +"4
"# !
! !
)
! )! / $ 9 6 9 # /
)

$ %
-5.43-
"# ! "& ! ' (( ! " ! "& ## ' (( ! " "& ! ' (( !
! !
. . .
! !
* + ,- .
"## ! #! "/ ! !/ !
! ! ! ! .
)) )) ! ,
! ))! ! ))! & . !!!

)) )) ! ! +0
.

12.%1
12.%1 '
1,!/ &!
"# ! "& ! # ' (( ! " ! "& ! ' (( ! !
"Uncontrolled Copy"
. . ,
"& ! +531
"#& ! " ! ! ))! /
! ! ! ! ))
)) )) ))! /
! ))! # ! ))! /! +531 ' !6
)) )) ))! //
* #
/ ))! /
0
"! ! "& ! ' (( ! 7 8!8 ))! /
+531 ' 6 ))! /
. * #
))! /#
" ! 89:8 7
! ! 31+"4 # ))! /
))
Figure 5-36: Free Blocks - Analog Signal Switches/Multiplexers/Demultiplexers

! ))!
))


Peak Services
Peak Services
.#) 4* *%$# 2"6 78 94: $%=#! > 4$!* * **$4 2"6 7- 94:
'-
-

@B
@B

, -

@ 0**A* @ 0**A*

"* .6* "* .6*
8
, CD , CD
.5
, , < <
'

.#) 0 1 1 ,
* ! 2 3 !*$* $& 2 3
CD CD

? 8
?
E2F $# *E ##$? E2F $# *E ##$?
4$!* 4$!*

?
< 8
?
<
E2F $# *E E2F $# *E
4$!* , 4$!* ,
-5.44-
.##) 4* *%$# 2"6 78 94: ! 4#! 4$!*4 2"6 7 94:
''

;*6 +< ()* *0

"Uncontrolled Copy"
!

"#$%& '
()* ,
./ -
+##$ ,'
, ,

.##) 0 1 1 ,
* ! 2 3 *44 $& 2 3

,
Figure 5-37: Free Blocks - Minimum/Maximum Selection, Tracking/Storage Elements

Section 5, Codes.fm
"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.2 Faults and Alarms

For each fault, the following Parameter information is available:
• r947 Fault number
• r949 Fault value
• r951 Fault list
• P952 Number of faults
• r782 Fault time
If a fault message is not reset before the electronic supply voltage is switched off, then the fault message will be
present again when the electronic supply is switched back on. The TripRite Drive cannot be operated without
resetting the fault message. The only exception to this rule is:
• Automatic restart has been selected.
5.2.1 Fault Codes
Fault Number Cause What to do:

Description
F001 The monitoring time of the main contac- • Check main contactor check-
Main contactor check- tor check-back (P600) has expired. back.
back • Clear main contactor check-back
(P591.B = 0).
• Increase monitoring time (P600).
F002 The monitoring time of pre-charging has • Check voltage connection (AC or
Pre-charging fault expired, i.e. the DC link voltage has not DC).
reached the setpoint within 3 seconds. • Compare value in P070 and unit
MLFB.
F006 Due to excessive DC link voltage, shut- • Check the line voltage (AC-AC) or
DC link overvoltage down has occurred (shutdown threshold the input direct voltage (DC-AC).
is approximately 820 V) Compare value with P071 (Line
Volts).
• Check the Dynamic Braking
Resistors. Should be 20Ω.
F008 The lower limit value of 76% of the DC • Check the line voltage (AC-AC) or
DC link undervoltage link voltage has been reached. the input direct voltage (DC-AC).
Compare value with P071 (Line
Volts).
• Check input rectifier (AC-AC).
• Check DC link.
Table 5-6: Fault Codes

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
F011 Overcurrent shutdown has occurred. The • Check the converter output for
Overcurrent shutdown threshold has been exceeded. short-circuit or earth fault.
The phase in which an overcurrent has • Check the load for an overload
occurred is indicated in a bit-coded man- condition.
ner in the fault value (see P949). • Check whether motor and con-
Phase U--> Bit 0 = 1--> fault value = 1 verter are correctly matched.
Phase V--> Bit 1 = 1--> fault value = 2 • Check whether the dynamic
Phase W--> Bit 2 = 1--> fault value = 1 requirements are too high.
NOTE: If an overcurrent occurs simulta-

neously in several phases, the total of
the fault values of the phases concerned
is the resulting fault value.
F015 Motor is blocked/overloaded (current • Reduce the load.

Motor blocked control), or has stalled (v/f characteris- • Release the brake.
tic):
• Increase current limits.
• Static load is too high. • Increase P805 Blocking Time.
• The fault is not generated until • Increase the response threshold
after the time entered in P805. for. the permissible deviation
• Binector B0156 is set, in status P792.
word 2 r553 Bit 28. • Increase torque limits or torque
• Whether the drive is blocked or setpoint.
not can be detected at P792 v/f characteristic only:
(Perm Deviation) and P794. P806
• Reduce rate of acceleration.
enables detection to be limited to
“at standstill” (P806 = 1, only for • Check characteristic setting.
current control) or to be com-
pletely de-activated (P806 = 2).
In the case of current control, the
precondition for this fault is that
the torque limits (B0234) have
been reached.
• In the case of slave drive, detec-
tion is deactivated.
• In the case of v/f control, the
I(max) controller must be active.
F017 SAFE OFF operating or failure of the 24 - Jumper applied for SAFE OFF?
SAFE OFF V power supply during operation. - SAFE OFF check-back connected?
- Check 24 V supply.
Table 5-6: Fault Codes (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
F020 The motor temperature limit value has • Temperature threshold adjustable
Excess temperature been exceeded. in P381.
of motor r949 = 1 Motor temperature limit value • P131 = 0 -> fault de-activated
exceeded. • Check the motor (load, ventila-
r949 = 2 Short-circuit in the motor tem- tion etc.).
perature sensor cable or sensor defec- • The current motor temperature
tive. can be read in r009 (Motor Tem-
r949 = 4 Wire break of motor tempera- perature).
ture sensor cable or sensor defective. • Check the sensor for cable break,
short-circuit.
• Check that the sensor is con-
nected to the drive via resolver
cable.
F021 Parameterized limit value of the I2t Check: Thermal time constant of motor
Motor I2t monitoring for the motor (P384.002) P383 Mot ThermT-Const or motor I2t
has been exceeded. load limit P384.002.
The I2t monitoring for the motor is auto-
matically activated if P383 >=100s
(=factory setting) and P381 > 220°C is
set.
Monitoring can be switched off by set-
ting a value <100s in P383.
F023 The limit value of the inverter tempera- • Measure the air intake and ambi-
Excess temperature ture has been exceeded. ent temperature.
of inverter • Observe the derating curves at q
> 50°C.
• Check whether the fan is running.
• Check that the air entry and dis-
charge openings are not
restricted.
F025 UCE upper switch. • Check the converter outputs for

UCE upper switch/ earth fault.
UCE Phase L1 • Check the switch for “Safe OFF”.
F026 UCE lower switch. • Check the converter outputs for
UCE lower switch/UCE earth fault.
Phase L2 • Check the switch for “Safe OFF”.
F027 Pulse resistance fault. • Check the converter outputs for
Pulse resistor fault / earth fault.
UCE Phase L3 • Check the switch for “Safe OFF”.
• Check Dynamic Braking Resistor.
Should be 20Ω.

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
F029 A fault has occurred in the measured • Fault in measured value sensing.
Meas. value sensing value sensing system. • Fault in power section (valve can-
- (r949 = 1) Offset adjustment in phase not block).
L1 is not possible • Fault in CU.
- (r949 = 2) Offset adjustment in phase
L3 is not possible
- (r949 = 3) Offset adjustment in phase
L1 and L3 is not possible
- (r949 = 65) Autom. Adjustments of
the analog inputs is not possible
F035 Parameterizable external fault input 1 • Check whether there is an exter-

External fault 1 has been activated. nal fault.
• Check whether the cable to the
corresponding digital output is
interrupted.
• P575 (SRC No ExtFault1).
F036 Parameterizable external fault input 2 • Check whether there is an exter-

External fault 2 has been activated. nal fault.
• Check whether the cable to the
corresponding digital output is
interrupted.
• P576 (Src No ExtFault2).
F038 A voltage failure has occurred during a • Re-enter the parameter. The
Voltage OFF during parameter task. number of the parameter con-
parameter storage cerned is indicated in fault value
r949.
F040 Incorrect operating status. • Replace the unit.

Internal fault of
sequence control
F041 A fault has occurred during the storage • Replace the unit.
EEPROM fault of values in the EEPROM.
F042 The available calculating time of the • Reduce pulse frequency.

Time slot overflow time slot has been exceeded. • Calculate individual blocks in a
slower sampling time.
F043 The link to the internal signal processor • Reduce pulse frequency (perhaps
DSP link is interrupted. caused by calculating time over-
flow).
• If fault re-occurs, replace the
board/unit.

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
F044 A fault has occurred in the soft-wiring of Fault value r949:

BICO manager fault binectors and connectors. >1000: Fault during connector soft-wir-
ing.
>2000: Fault during binector soft-wir-
ing.
• Voltage OFF and ON.
• Factory setting and new parame-
terization.
• Exchange the board.
1028:Link memory is full. The link area
between the two processors is full. No
further connectors can be transferred.
• Reduction of the linked connec-
tions between the two proces-
sors. Interface between the two
processors is position control/set-
point conditioning i.e.softwires
from and to the setpoint condi-
tioning, position controller, speed
controller, torque interface and
current controller which are not
necessary should be dissolved to
reduce the link (value 0).
F045 A hardware fault has occurred during • Replace CU board.

HW fault on optional access to an optional board. • Replace the unit.
boards • Check the connection between
the sub-rack and the optional
boards.
• Replace optional boards.
F046 A fault has occurred during the transfer • If fault re-occurs, replace the
Parameter coupling of parameters to the DSP. board/unit.
fault

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
F051 • Signal amplitude of resolver or Resolver/encoder fault value r949:

Encoder fault encoder is below the tolerance
threshold.
10th and 1st position:
• In the case of multi-turn encoders
(SSI/Endat) connection fault of 9 = Resolver signal missing.
the serial protocol. 28 = Voltage supply Encoder fault.
• Short-circuit in encoder connec-
tion?
• Encoder faulty?
• Encoder incorrectly connected
up?
29 = Encoder signal is missing.
• Check encoder cable (faulty/torn
off)?
• Is the shield of the encoder cable
connected?
• Encoder faulty?
• Replace SBR/SBM
• Replace unit or basic board
• Is the correct cable being used in
each case for the encoder/multi-
turn encoder? Encoders and
multi-turn encoders require dif-
ferent encoder cables.
Multi-turn (SSI/EnDat):
Fault value r949:
30: Protocol fault CRC/Parity Check.
31: Timeout Protocol (EnDat).
32: Neutral level fault.
33: Initialization of timeout.
• Check parameterization (P149).
• Check encoder cable (faulty / torn
off?
• Encoder cable shield connected?
• Encoder faulty?
• Replace SBR/SBM
• Replace unit or basic board.
34: Address wrong (only EnDat)
Writing or reading of parameters not
successful, check address and MRS code
(P149)
40-48: Encoder alarms (only EnDat)
Check voltage supply to encoder, bat-
tery change on battery-backed-up sys-
tems, encoder faulty?
49: Alarm bit set.
Parameterization (P149), Encoder
alarm.

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
F051 50-59: Alarms EnDat encoder.

Encoder fault (Contin- Fault value + 100 designates the corre-
ued) sponding faults of the external encoder.
F053 After changes have been made to No remedy.

Parameter fault in fol- parameters, a fault has occurred during
low-up task the calculation of dependent parame-
ters.
F054 A fault has occurred during initialization Fault value r949:

Encoder board initial- of the encoder board. 1: Board code is incorrect
ization fault 2: TSY not compatible
3: SBP not compatible
4: SBR not compatible
5: SBM not compatible
6: SBM initialization timeout
7: Board double
20: TSY board double

21: SBR board double
23: SB board three-fold
24: SBP board three-fold
30: SBR board slot incorrect

31: SBM board slot incorrect
32: SBP board slot incorrect
40: SBR board not present

41: SBM board not present
42: SBP board not present
50: Three encoder boards
60: internal fault
F056 Communication has been disturbed. • Check the fiber-optic cable ring.
Comm telegram fail- • Check whether an SLB in the ring
ure is without voltage.
• Check whether an SLB in the ring
is faulty.
• Check P741 (SLB TlgOFF).
F058 A fault has occurred during the process- No remedy.
Parameter fault ing of a parameter task.
Parameter task

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
F059 A fault has occurred in the initialization The number of the inconsistent parame-
Parameter fault after phase during the calculation of a param- ter is indicated in fault value r949. Cor-
factory setting/initial eter. rect this parameter (ALL indices) and
switch voltage off and on again. Several
parameters may be affected, i.e. repeat
process.
F060 Is set if parameter P070 is at zero when Enter correct MLFB after acknowledging
MLFB is missing dur- INITIAL LOADING is exited. the fault (power section, initial loading).
ing initial loading
F061 A parameter which has been entered The number of the inconsistent parame-
Incorrect parameter- during drive setting is in the non-per- ter is indicated in fault value r949 (e.g.
ization missible range. motor encoder = pulse encoder in the
case of brushless DC motors) -> correct
this parameter.
F063 The synchronization or positioning tech- • Deactivate synchronization or

PIN is missing nology functions have been activated positioning.
without an authorization being present • Enter the PIN (U2977).
(PIN)
F065 No telegram has been received at an Fault value r949:

SCom telegram fail- SCom interface (SCom/USS protocol) 1 = Interface 1 (SCom1).
ure within the telegram failure time.
2 = Interface 2 (SCom2).
Check the connection of PMU -X300 or
X103 / 27,28.
Check the connection of X103 or X100 /
35,36.
Check “SCom/SCB TlgOff” P704.01
(SCom1) or P704.02 (SCom2).

SCB initialization fault of the SCB board. 1: Board code incorrect.
2: SCB board not compatible.
5: Error in configuration data.
6: Initialization timeout.
7: SCB board double.
10: Channel error.

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description

EB initialization fault of the EB board. 2: 1st EB1 not compatible.
3: 2nd EB1 not compatible.
4: 1st EB2 not compatible.
5: 2nd EB2 not compatible.
21: Three EB1 boards.

22: Three EB2 boards.
110: Fault on 1st EB1.
120: Fault on 2nd EB1.
210: Fault on 1st EB2.
220: Fault on 2nd EB2.
F080 Fault during initialization of the board at Fault value r949:

TB/CB initialization the DPR interface. 1: Board code incorrect
fault 2: TB/CB board not compatible
3: CB board not compatible
5: Error in configuration data
6: Initialization timeout
7: TB/CB board double
10: Channel error
Check the T300/CB board for correct
contacting and check the CB initializa-
tion parameter:
• - P918.01 CB Bus Address.
• - P711.01 to P721.01 CB parame-
ters 1 to 11.
F081 Heartbeat-counter of the optional board Fault value r949:

OptBrdHeartbeat- is no longer being processed. 0: TB/CB heartbeat-counter
Counter 1: SCB heartbeat-counter
2: Additional CB heartbeat-counter
• Acknowledge the fault (whereby
automatic reset is carried out).
• If the fault re-occurs, replace the
board concerned (see fault
value).
• Replace ADB.
• Check the connection between
the sub-rack and the optional
boards (LBA) and replace, if nec-
essary.

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
F082 No new process data have been received Fault value r949:
TB/CB telegram fail- by the TB or the CB within the telegram 1 = TB/CB
ure failure time.
2 = additional CB
• Check the connection to TB/CB.
• Check P722 (CB/TB TlgOFF).
• Replace CB or TB.
Add. CB initialization of the CB board. 1: Board code incorrect
fault 2: TB/CB board not compatible
3: CB board not compatible
5: Error in configuration data
6: Initialization timeout
7: TB/CB board double
10: Channel error
Check the T300 / CB board for correct
contacting and check the CB initializa-
tion parameters:
• P918.02 CB Bus Address.
• P711.02 to P721.02 CB Parame-
ters 1 to 11.
F087 A fault has occurred during initialization • Replace CU

Comm initialization of the SLB board. • Replace SLB
fault
F114 The converter has automatically stopped Re-start with P115 function selection =
MId OFF the automatic measurement due to the 2 “Motor identification at standstill”.The
time limit up to power-up having been ON command must be given within 20
exceeded or due to an OFF command sec. after the alarm message A078 =
during the measurement, and has reset standstill measurement has appeared.
the function selection in P115. Cancel the OFF command and re-start
measurement.
F117 See Technology Board documentation. See Technology Board documentation.

Technology board
fault
F148 An active signal is present at binector Examine cause of fault, refer to Figure
Fault 1 Function U061 (1). 5-34.
blocks
blocks

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
F150 An active signal (1) is present at binec- Examine cause of fault, refer to Figure
Fault 3 Function tor U063. 5-34.
blocks
blocks
F255 A fault has occurred in the EEPROM. Switch off the unit and switch it on
Fault in EEPROM again. If the fault re-occurs, replace the
CU.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.2.2 Alarm Codes
The alarm message is periodically displayed on the PMU by A = alarm/ alarm message and a 3-digit number. An
alarm cannot be acknowledged. It is automatically deleted once the cause has been eliminated. Several alarms
can be present. The alarms are then displayed one after the other.
When the converter is operated with the OP1S operator control panel, the alarm is indicated in the lowest operating
display line. The red LED additionally flashes (refer to the OP1S operating instructions).
Alarm Number Cause What to do:

Description
A001 The computing time work load is too • Reduce pulse frequency
Time slot overflow high. • Calculate individual function
blocks in slower time slots
(parameter U950 ff.)
A002 Start of the Communication ring is not • Check the fiber-optic cable ring
Comm start alarm functioning. for interruptions
• Check whether there is an SLB
without voltage in the ring
• Check whether there is a faulty
SLB in the ring
A003 Although synchronization has been acti- (SLB):

Drive not synchro- vated, the drive is not synchronous.
• Check r748 i002 and i003 =
nous Possible causes are: counters for CRC faults and time-
• Poor communication connection out faults
(frequent telegram failures). • Check the fiber-optic cable con-
• Slow bus cycle times (in the case nection
of high bus cycle times or syn- • Check P751 on the dispatcher
chronization of slow time slots, (connector 260 must be soft-
synchronizing can last for 1-2 wired); Check P753 on the trans-
minutes in the worst case). ceiver (corresponding connector
• Incorrect wiring of the time K70xx must be soft-wired).
counter (only if P754 > P746 /
T0).
A014 The DC link voltage is not equal to 0 • Set P372 to 0.

Simulation active when the simulation mode is selected • Reduce DC link voltage (discon-
alarm (P372 = 1). nect the converter from the sup-
ply)
A015 Parameterizable external alarm input 1 Check:

External alarm 1 has been activated.
• whether the cable to the corre-
sponding digital input has been
interrupted.
• parameter P588 Src No Ext
Warn1
Table 5-7: Alarm Codes

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
A016 Parameterizable external alarm input 2 Check:

External alarm 2 has been activated.
• whether the cable to the corre-
sponding digital input has been
interrupted.
• parameter P588 Src No Ext
Warn2
A017 SAFE OFF is detected in the READY See F017 for causes/counter-measures.
SAFE OFF alarm states.
active
A018 Signal amplitude See F051 for causes/counter-measures.

Encoder adjustment Resolver/encoder in the critical range.
A019 Connection fault of the serial protocol on Serial protocol is defective on multi-turn
Encoder data serial multi-turn encoders (SSI/Endat). encoders. See F051 for causes/counter-
protocol measures.
A022 The threshold for tripping an alarm has • Measure intake air and ambient
Inverter temperature been exceeded. temperature.
• Observe derating curves at q >
50°C.
• Check whether the fan is operat-
ing
• Check whether the air entry and
discharge openings are restricted.
A023 The parameterizable threshold (P380) Check the motor (load, ventilation,
Motor temperature for tripping an alarm has been etc.). Read off the current temperature
exceeded. in r009 Motor Temperature.
A024 If the current load state is maintained, a • Reduce converter load

I2t converter thermal overload of the converter • Check r010 (Drive Utilization)
occurs.
The converter will lower the max. cur-
rent limit (P129).
A029 The parameterized limit value for the I2t Motor load cycle is exceeded!
I2t motor monitoring of the motor has been Check the parameters:
exceeded.
• P382 Motor Cooling
• P383 Mot Tmp T1
• P384 Mot Load Limits
A033 The positive or negative maximum • Increase relevant maximum
Overspeed speed has been exceeded. speed
• Reduce regenerative load (see FD
480)
Table 5-7: Alarm Codes (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
A034 Bit 8 in r552 status word 1 of the set- Check:

Setpoint/actual value point channel. The difference between
• whether an excessive torque
deviation frequency setpoint/actual value is
requirement is present.
greater than the parameterized value
and the control monitoring time has • whether the motor has been
elapsed. dimensioned too small.
Increase values P792 Perm Deviation
Frq/ set/actual DevSpeed and P794
Deviation Time
A036 The brake checkback indicates the Check brake checkback (see FD 470).
Brake checkback “Brake still closed” state.
“Brake still closed”
A037 The brake checkback indicates the Check brake checkback (see FD 470).
Brake checkback “Brake still open” state.
“Brake still open”
A042 Motor is stalled or blocked. Check:

Motor stall/lock The alarm cannot be influenced by P805 • whether the drive is locked.
“PullOut/BlckTime”, but by P794 “Devia- • whether the drive has stalled.
tion Time”
A061 An active signal is present at binector Check cause of alarm (see FD 710)
Alarm 1 U065 (1).
Function blocks
Alarm 2 U066 (1).
Function blocks
Alarm 3 U067 (1).
Function blocks
Alarm 4 U068 (1).
Function blocks
A075 The measured values of the leakage If individual measured values signifi-
measurement or of rotor resistance cantly deviate from the average values,
deviate significantly. they are automatically not taken into
account for the calculation (for RI) or
the value of the automatic parameter-
ization remains (for Ls).
It is only necessary to check the results
for their plausibility in the case of drives
with high requirements on torque or
speed accuracy.

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
A078 The standstill measurement is executed If the standstill measurement can be

Stands. Meas when the converter is powered up. The executed without any danger:
motor can align itself several times in a
• Power up the converter.
certain direction with this measurement.
A081 See user manual for CB board.

CB alarm

CB alarm

CB alarm

CB alarm

CB alarm

CB alarm

CB alarm

CB alarm

CB alarm Alarm of the 2nd CB board corresponds
to A81 of the 1st CB board.






"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description


A129 Machine data 1 (position encoder type/ You must assign a valid value to
Axis does not exist - axis type) is 0 (axis does not exist). machine data 1 in order to operate the
machine data 1 = 0 Effect: axis.
Operation of the axis is inhibited and the

position controller is deactivated.
A130 The “in operation” [IOP] checkback sig- Activate control signals [OFF1], [OFF2],
Operating conditions nal was missing when a traversing com- [OFF3] and “enable controller” [ENC].
do not exist mand was initiated. The following causes
• If checkback signals [OFF2] and/
inhibit the “in operation” checkback sig-
or [OFF3] are missing, check the
nal (status bit No.2, refer to Figure 5-
supply of control word 1. Refer to
23):
Figure 5-21.
• Control signals [OFF1], [OFF2], • Analyze the queued fault number
[OFF3] and/or “enable controller” [FAULT_NO], remedy the fault,
[ENC] are not activated. and then cancel the fault using
• Checkback signals [OFF2] and/or the acknowledge fault [ACK_F]
[OFF3] are not activated. control signal.
• A fault [FAULT] is active. To activate the “in operation” [IOP] sta-
Effect: tus again, you must deactivate [OFF1]
and then activate it again.
The traversing command is inhibited.
A131 Control signal [OFF1] was deactivated Check the activation of control signal
OFF1 missing while a traversing command was being [OFF1] from the user program.
executed.
Effect:
The drive is brought to a standstill via a
ramp (machine data 43: deceleration
time during faults). There is a subse-
quent pulse disable.
A132 • Control signal [OFF2] was deacti- • Check the activation of control
OFF2 missing vated while a traversing com- signal [OFF2] from the user pro-
mand was being executed. gram.
• Checkback signal [OFF2] was • If checkback signal [OFF2] is
deactivated while a traversing missing, check the supply of con-
command was being executed. trol word 1. Refer to Figure 5-21.
Effect: To activate the “in operation” [IOP] sta-
The pulse disable is initiated immedi- tus again, you must deactivate [OFF1]
ately. If the motor is not braked, it and then activate it again.
coasts down.

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
A133 • Control signal [OFF3] was deacti- • Check the activation of control
OFF3 missing vated while a traversing com- signal [OFF3] from the user pro-
mand was being executed. gram.
• Checkback signal [OFF3] was • If checkback signal [OFF3] is
deactivated while a traversing missing, check the supply of con-
command was being executed. trol word 1. Refer to Figure 5-21.
Effect: To activate the “in operation” [IOP] sta-
The motor decelerates at the current tus again, you must deactivate [OFF1]
limit. There is a subsequent pulse dis- and then activate it again.
able.
A134 The “enable controller” [ENC] control Check the activation of the “enable con-
Enable Controller ENC signal was deactivated while a travers- troller” [ENC] control signal from the
missing ing command was being executed (con- user program.
trol bit No.3 “Inverter Enable”, refer to
Figure 5-21).
Effect:
The pulse disable is initiated immedi-
ately. If the motor is not braked, it
coasts down.
A135 Actual position value not o.k. from posi- • Check interconnection of B0070
Actual position value tion sensing (B0070 / B0071) and B0071,
not o.k. • check position encoder and evalu-
ation board,
• check encoder cable.
A136 Machine data 1 (position encoder type/ If machine data 1 has been changed,
Machine data 1 axis type) was changed. the “reset technology” [RST] control sig-
changed - RESET nec- Effect: nal must be activated. Alternatively
essary. switch the power supply off and on again
The activation of traversing commands
is inhibited.
A137 The same axis assignment (machine A unique axis assignment must be
Axis assignment data 2) was entered for several axes entered for all axes on an M7-FM. For
incorrect (M7 only, not significant for the F01 example, it is not allowed to define two
technology option). X axes.
Effect:
The activation of traversing commands
is inhibited.

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
A138 The NC block contains an axis number • Axis type 1 or 2:The block is not
Axis assignment of which is defined as a roll feed axis but allowed to contain an axis num-
roll feed incorrect the axis type is defined as an incremen- ber which is defined as a roll feed
tal or absolute position encoder (M7 only).
(machine data 1 = 1 or 2). (M7 only, not • Axis type 3:The axis number of
significant for the F01 technology the roll feed must be specified in
option). every NC block.
The NC block for a roll feed axis type
(machine data 1 = 3) contains:
• No axis number (X, Y, Z...)
• An incorrect axis number
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or
aborted.
A140 The following error limit for standstill • Check and correct the machine
Following error in was exceeded at standstill: data.
standstill • Following error monitoring - at • Optimize the speed/current con-
standstill (machine data 14) was troller,
entered incorrectly. • Rectify mechanical problem.
• The value entered for “in position
- exact stop window” (machine
data 17) is greater than the value
in “following error monitoring - at
standstill” (machine data 14).
• The axis was pushed out of posi-
tion mechanically.
Effect:
The position control system is deacti-
vated and the axis decelerates via
“deceleration time during errors”
(machine data 43).

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
A141 The following error limit for motion was • Check and correct the machine
Following error in exceeded during a traversing move- data.
motion ment: • Optimize the position controller or
• Following error monitoring - in the speed controller.
motion (machine data 15) was • Check the mechanical system.
entered incorrectly.
• The mechanical system cannot
follow the commands of the posi-
tion controller.
• Incorrect optimization of the posi-
tion controller or speed controller.
• The mechanical system is slug-
gish or blocked.
Effect:
vated and the drive decelerates via
“deceleration time during faults”
(machine data 43).
A142 The “in position - exact stop window” • Check and correct the machine
In position - timer was not reached within the time speci- data.
monitoring fied in position timer monitoring”: • Optimize the position controller or
• In position - exact stop window speed controller.
(machine data 17) too small • Check the mechanical system.
• In position - timer monitoring
(machine data 16) too short
• Position controller or speed con-
troller not optimized
• Mechanical causes
Effect:
vated.
A145 The “digital input” with the “disable The “digital input” for “disable actual
Actual-value disable actual value” function was actuated value” can only be actuated when the
not allowed - axis while the roll feed was running. axis is stationary.
standstill Effect:
The axis movement is stopped via the
deceleration ramp, the “disable actual
value” function is not executed.

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
A146 A positioning movement was aborted. Move the axis in front of the target posi-
Direction of move- When attempting to resume the move- tion in setup mode before continuing.
ment not allowed ment at the point of interruption, the roll
feed would have had to travel in the
opposite direction to reach the pro-
grammed target position. This is inhib-
ited by the setting of machine data 37
“response after abort”.
There are various possible reasons for
the axis crossing the target position
when a positioning movement is
aborted:
• Motor coast-down
• The axis was moved intentionally,
e.g. in setup mode.
Effect:
The axis movement is inhibited.
A148 The current deceleration value is 0, e.g. This fault should not normally occur. It
Deceleration = 0 because of a RAM storage error or an is used as an emergency stop feature for
error in the technology firmware. the technology software.
Effect: Replace the hardware (M7; MCT).
vated and the drive is decelerated via
the “deceleration time during errors”
(machine data 43).
A149 Internal error in the technology soft- This fault should not normally occur. It
Distance to go nega- ware. is used as an emergency stop feature for
tive Effect: the technology software.

vated and the drive is decelerated via
the “deceleration time during errors”
(machine data 43).

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
A150 The selected NC program contains a The same slave axis cannot be used
Slave axis already slave axis which is already being used simultaneously by several NC programs.
allocated to other by another master axis (M7 only, not
master axis significant for the F01 technology
option).
Example:
NC program 1, started in axis X, con-
tains NC blocks for axes X and Y. NC
program 2 is started in axis Z and con-
tains NC blocks for axes Z and Y. This
program is denied with warning 150,
because axis Y is already being used by
program 1.
Effect:
aborted.
A151 The slave axis required by the master The slave axis must be switched to
Slave axis operating axis is not in “slave” mode (M7 only, not “slave” mode.
mode not allowed significant for the F01 technology
option).
Effect:
aborted, the axis is brought to a stand-
still via the deceleration ramp.
A152 The “slave” mode was deselected in the The slave axis must remain switched to
Slave axis operating slave axis during the traversing move- “slave” mode.
mode changed ment (M7 only, not significant for the
F01 technology option).
Effect:
A153 A warning is active in the slave axis The NC program will only run if all of the
Error in slave axis required by the master axis (M7 only, axes it needs are error-free. To clear
not significant for the F01 technology this warning, you must first clear all the
option). warnings in the slave axis.
Effect:

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
A154 The “follow-up mode” [FUM] control sig- Deactivate follow-up mode in the slave
Follow-up mode in nal is active in the slave axis required by axis.
slave axis active the master axis. A slave axis which is
switched to follow-up mode cannot be
operated by the master axis (M7 only,
not significant for the F01 technology
option).
Effect:
A155 The “reset” [RST] control signal is active Cancel the “reset” [RST] control signal
Reset in slave axis in the slave axis required by the master in the slave axis.
active axis. A slave axis with an active reset
cannot be used by the master axis (M7
only, not significant for the F01 technol-
ogy option.
Effect:
A156 An NC program was started in which a Axes defined as roll feed axes can only
Axis type (MD1) of slave axis is defined as a roll feed axis be used in dedicated NC programs.
slave axis not allowed type (M7 only, not significant for the F01
technology option).
The warning is output in the master axis
and indicates an illegal axis type in the
slave axis.
Effect:
A160 The value entered in level 1 or level 2 Define a permissible velocity level for
Setup speed = 0 for the [F_S] velocity level in setup level 1 and/or level 2. The permissible
mode is zero. value range is between 0.01 [1000*LU/
Effect: min] and “traversing velocity - maxi-
mum” (machine data 23).
A161 The velocity value entered for “reference Enter a permissible value for the
Reference approach point - approach velocity” (machine data approach velocity. The permissible value
velocity = 0 7) is zero. range is between 0.01 [1000*LU/min]
Effect: and “traversing velocity - maximum”
(machine data 23).

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
A162 The velocity value entered for “reference Enter a permissible value for the refer-
Reference point - point - reducing velocity” (machine data ence point -reducing velocity. The per-
reducing velocity = 0 6) is zero. missible value range is between 0.01
Effect: and 1000 [1000*LU/min].
The axis movement is inhibited or

stopped.
A165 The MDI block number [MDI_NO] speci- Define an MDI block number [MDI_NO]
MDI block number fied in the control signals is greater than between 0 and 10.
not allowed 11.
Effect:
A166 The “start” [STA] control signal was acti- Use the correct sequence: data transfer
No position has been vated in MDI mode without initially followed by axis start.
programmed in MDI transferring a positional value to the
mode selected MDI block.
Effect:
A167 The “start” [STA] control signal was acti- Use the correct sequence: data transfer
No velocity has been vated in MDI mode without initially followed by axis start.
programmed in MDI transferring a velocity value to the
mode selected MDI block.
Effect:
A168 G91 (incremental dimensions) was The MDI on-the-fly function only allows
G91 not allowed with defined in the MDI block as the 1st G G90 (absolute dimensions) as the 1st G
MDI on the fly function for the MDI on-the-fly function. function.
Effect:
stopped via the deceleration ramp.
A169 • Control signal “reset technology” Ensure that the control signals are acti-
Start conditions for [RST] activated vated correctly.
flying MDI do not • Control signal “follow-up mode”
exist [FUM] activated
Effect:
The “MDI on-the-fly” function is not exe-
cuted.
A170 An NC block was started in single-block Transfer the block.

Single block mode mode although a block has not yet been
block does not exist transferred.
Effect:
NC block execution is inhibited.

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
A172 The program number specified in • Transfer the program to the tech-
Program with this [PROG_NO] for automatic mode is not nology.
number does not stored in the memory of the technology. • Select the correct program num-
exist Effect: ber.
NC program execution is inhibited.
A173 The program number specified in The permissible range for program num-
Program number not [PROG_NO] for automatic mode is not bers is between 1 and 200.
allowed allowed.
Effect:
A174 The program number [PROG_NO] was The program number must not be
Program number changed while the program was running. changed while the program is running.
changed during tra- Effect:
versing NC program execution is aborted and
the axis or axes are brought to a stand-
A175 The decoded NC block is not terminated Correct the block.

No block end pro- with the following block identifier “0”. The last block in the sequence must con-
grammed You can use the “output actual values - tain the following block identifier “0”.
decoder error location” task to read out
the program number and block number
where the block decoder detected an
error.
Effect:
aborted. Moving axes are stopped via
the deceleration ramp.
A177 The program number for the main pro- Specify an existing main program num-
Prog. number of block gram (level 0), which was transferred ber.
search forward. does with the block search function, does not
not exist exist.
Effect:

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
A178 • The program number for the main For the block search function, the
Program number of program (level 0), which was selected program number [PROG_NO]
block search forward transferred with block search, is must be specified as the program num-
not allowed different from the selected pro- ber for the main program.
gram number.
• No breakpoint is known for the
“automatic block search” func-
tion (a program abort has not yet
occurred).
• A different program number is
stored as the breakpoint for the
“automatic block search” func-
tion.
Effect:
A179 The subprogram number specified with For the block search function, an exist-
Prog.No.of block srch block search for level 1 or level 2 does ing program number must be specified
fwd level 1/2 does not not exist. as the subprogram number for level 1 or
exist Effect: level 2.
A180 The subprogram number transferred For the block search function, the sub-
Prog.no. of block with block search for level 1 is not the program number specified in the NC
search forward level 1 same as the subprogram number in the block must be specified as the subpro-
<> cmd. NC block. gram number for level 1.
Effect:
A181 The subprogram number transferred For the block search function, the sub-
Prog.no. of block with block search for level 2 is not the program number specified in the NC
search forward level 2 same as the subprogram number in the block must be specified as the subpro-
<> cmd. NC block. gram number for level 2.
Effect:
A183 The block number for the main program For the block search function, an exist-
Block no. of block (level 0), which was transferred with ing block number must be specified as
search fwd l. 0 does block search, does not exist in the main the block number for the main program.
not exist program. Program the digital input for the desired
Effect: function.
A184 The block number for the main program For the block search function, a block
Block no. of block (level 0), which was transferred with number with a subprogram call must be
search forward is no block search, does not contain a subpro- specified as the block number for the
UP call gram call for subprogram level 1. main program (level 0) if a block search
Effect: is to be performed in subprogram level
1.

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
A185 The block number for subprogram level For the block search function, a block
Block no. of block 1, which was transferred with block number which exists in this subprogram
search forward does search, does not exist in the subpro- must be specified as the block number
not exist gram. for subprogram level 1.
Effect:
Block no of block 1, which was transferred with block number with a subprogram call must be
search fwd level 1 is search, does not contain a subprogram specified as the block number for sub-
no UP call call for subprogram level 2. program level 1 if a block search is to be
Effect: performed in subprogram level 2.
Block no. of block 2, which was transferred with block number which exists in this subprogram
search forward does search, does not exist in the subpro- must be specified as the block number
not exist gram. for subprogram level 2.
Effect:
A188 The remaining loop count transferred For the block search function, it is only
Remaining no of loops with block search for subprogram level 1 allowed to specify a remaining loop
block search fwd not or 2 is greater than the programmed count between 0 and the programmed
allowed loop count. loop count-1.
Effect:
A190 The NC block which was read in contains Program the digital input for the desired
Digital input not pro- the “in-process measurement” or “set function.
grammed actual value on-the-fly” function,
although a digital input has not been
programmed for this function (machine
data 45).
Effect:
A191 Although the “external block change” • Correct the program.

Digital input not actu- function was programmed, the digital • Check the actuation of the digital
ated input was not actuated in order to trig- input.
ger the external block change.
Effect:
The NC program is interrupted, the axis
is brought to a standstill via the deceler-
ation ramp.

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
A195 • Negative software limit switch • Check the machine data and the
Negative over-travel position approached NC program.
reached • “Software limit switches - nega- • Check the encoder actual value.
tive” (machine data 12) entered
incorrectly
• The programmed position is less
than the negative software limit
switch.
• “Reference point - coordinate”
(machine data 3) is less than the
negative software limit switch.
• Incorrect encoder actual value
Effect:
deceleration ramp.
A196 • Positive software limit switch • Check the machine data and the
Positive over-travel position approached NC programs.
reached • “Software limit switches - posi- • Check the encoder actual value.
tive” (machine data 13) entered
incorrectly¨
• The programmed position is
greater than the positive software
limit switch
• “Reference point - coordinate”
(machine data 3) is greater than
the positive software limit switch
• Incorrect encoder actual value
Effect:
deceleration ramp.
A200 No position has been programmed in the The axis number and the positional
No position has been NC block for the roll feed version, value must be specified in every NC
programmed in Auto- although the axis number of the roll feed block for the roll feed version.
matic mode is specified.
Effect:
A201 The decoded NC block needs a path or When using linear interpolation with
No velocity has been axis velocity. path velocity (G01), a path velocity
programmed in Auto- Effect: must be defined with F. When using
matic mode chaining with axis velocity (G77), the
NC program execution is inhibited or axis velocities must be defined with FX,
aborted, the axis is brought to a stand- FY, etc. When using roll feed with axis
still via the deceleration ramp. velocity (G01), the velocity must be
defined with F.

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
A202 An axis which does not exist was Correct the NC block.
Axis unknown detected in the decoded NC block. A log-
ical name (X, Y, Z, A, B, C) must be
assigned to each axis with machine data
2 (axis assignment). Only these logical
axis names can be used in the NC block.
These errors cannot normally occur,
since the logical axis names are verified
when the NC blocks are entered.
Exception: Machine data 2 (axis assign-
ment) is changed afterwards.
The NC program number and NC block
number in which the NC block decoder
detected the error can be read out with
the “output actual values – decoder
error location” task.
Effect:
A203 The NC block which was read in contains • MDI mode: Only G90 (absolute
1st G-function not an illegal 1st G function. dimensions) or G91 (incremental
allowed The NC program number and NC block dimensions) can be entered as
number in which the NC block decoder the 1st G function. Only G91 is
detected the error can be read out with allowed for the roll feed version.
the “output actual values - decoder error • Automatic/single-block mode:
location” task. Define a legal 1st G function
Effect: according to the table (see the
Programming Guide).
A204 The NC block which was read in contains • MDI mode: Only G30 to G39
2nd G-function not an illegal 2nd G function. (acceleration override) can be
allowed The NC program number and NC block entered as the 2nd G function.
number in which the NC block decoder • Automatic/single-block mode:
detected the error can be read out with Define a legal 2nd G function
the “output actual values - decoder error according to the table (see the
location” task. Programming Guide).
Effect:

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
A205 The NC block which was read in contains • MDI mode: No 3rd G function is
3rd G-function not an illegal 3rd G function. allowed.
allowed The NC program number and NC block • Automatic/single-block mode:
number in which the NC block decoder Define a legal 3rd G function
detected the error can be read out with according to the table (see the
the “output actual values - decoder error Programming Guide).
location” task.
Effect:
A206 The NC block which was read in contains -MDI mode: No 4th G function is
4th G-function not an illegal 4th G function. allowed.
allowed The NC program number and NC block -Automatic/single-block mode: Define a
number in which the NC block decoder legal 4th G function according to the
detected the error can be read out with table (see the Programming Guide).
the “output actual values - decoder error
location” task.
Effect:
A208 A D number greater than 20 was found Correct the NC block.

D-number is not in the decoded NC block.
allowed The NC program number and NC block
location” task.
Effect:
A210 The decoded NC block contains an inter- Correct the NC block. Only 2D interpola-
Interpolation of 3 polation of 3 or more axes. tion is allowed.
axes not allowed The NC program number and NC block
location” task.
Effect:

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
A211 G function G68 (shortest path for rotary Correct the NC block.Function G68 can
Shortest distance G68 axis) was detected in the decoded NC only be programmed in association with
and G91 not allowed block, although G91 (incremental G90 (absolute dimensions).
dimensions) is active.
Example:
N10 G91 G68 X20.000
location” task.
Effect:
A212 A different axis was programmed in the Correct the NC program.The axis used in
Special function and NC block following a special function (M7 the NC block with the special function
axis combination not only). must also be programmed in the next
allowed Example: NC block.
N10 G50 X100 F1000

N15 G90 Y200 incorrect
N15 G90 X200 correct
location” task.
Effect:
A213 The decoded NC block contains several Correct the NC block.

Multiple D-number D numbers.
not allowed Example:
N1 G41 D3 D5.
location” task.
Effect:

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description

Multiple acceleration mutually exclusive G functions from the
behavior not allowed acceleration override group (G30 to
G39).
Example:
N1 G34 G35
location” task.
Effect:

Multiple special func- mutually exclusive G functions from the
tions not allowed special function group (G87, G88, G89,
G50, G51).
Example:
N1 G88 G50
location” task.
Effect:

Multiple block transi- mutually exclusive G functions from the
tion not allowed block transition group (G60, G64, G66,
G67).
Example:
N1 G64 G66 X1.000 FX100.00 The NC
program number and NC block number
in which the NC block decoder detected
the error can be read out with the “out-
put actual values - decoder error loca-
tion” task.
Effect:

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
A217 The decoded NC block contains the Correct the NC block.

Multiple axis pro- same axis more than once.
gramming not Example:
allowed N1 G90 G01 X100.000 X200.000
F100.00
location” task.
Effect:

Multiple path condi- mutually exclusive G functions from the
tion not allowed preparatory function group (G00/G01/
G76/G77).
Example:
N1 G01 (linear interpolation) G77
(chaining) X10 F100.
location” task.
Effect:

Multiple dimensions mutually exclusive G functions from the
specification not dimensional notation group (G90/G91).
allowed Example:
N1 G90 G91.
location” task.
Effect:

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description

Multiple zero offset mutually exclusive G functions from the
selection not allowed zero offset group (G53 to G59).
Example:
N1 G54 G58
location” task.
Effect:

Multiple tool offset mutually exclusive G functions from the
selection not allowed tool offset selection group (G43/G44).
Example:
N1 G43 G44 D2
location” task.
Effect:
A223 The decoded NC block contains a sub- Correct the NC block.

Subprogram number program call, however the NC program
does not exist which was called does not exist in the
memory of the technology.
Effect:

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
A224 The permissible nesting depth of sub- Correct the NC block.

Subprogram nesting programs was exceeded. Recursive call- The permissible nesting depth for sub-
depth not allowed ing of programs is 2 subprogram levels.
subprograms.
location” task.
Effect:
A225 The decoded NC block contains simulta- Correct the NC block.

Status of collision neous selection and de-selection of colli-
monitoring select. not sion monitoring (G96/G97).
allowed Example:
N1 G96 G97 X100
location” task.
Effect:
A227 The look-ahead function of the decoder Correct the NC program.

Negative over-travel has detected that the negative software Check the machine data.
violated limit switch will be crossed. See also
error message “A195: Negative over-
travel reached”.
location” task.
Effect:

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Description
A228 The look-ahead function of the decoder Correct the NC program.

Positive over-travel has detected that the positive software Check the machine data.
violated limit switch will be crossed. See also
error message “A196: Positive over-
travel reached”.
location” task.
Effect:
A241 The table assignment has been changed Load the table again.
Table assignment from 1 table to 2 tables or vice-versa. A table can only be loaded again if it is
changed Effect: not selected. The warning is cleared
NC tables cannot be processed. automatically when the table has been
successfully loaded.
A242 Table 1 was not loaded correctly or has Load table 1 again.
Table 1 invalid been reset. Table 1 can only be loaded again if it is
Effect: not selected. The warning is cleared
Table 1 cannot be processed. automatically when table 1 has been
A243 Table 2 was not loaded correctly or has Load table 2 again.
Table 2 invalid been reset. Table 2 can only be loaded again if it is
Effect: not selected. The warning is cleared
Table 2 cannot be processed. automatically when table 2 has been

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.2.3 Fatal Errors
Fatal errors are serious hardware or software errors which no longer permit normal operation of the unit. They only
appear on the PMU in the form “FF<No>”. The software is re-booted by actuating any key on the PMU.
Fatal Error Number Cause What to do:

Description
FF01 A time slot overflow which cannot be • -Reduce pulse frequency (P340)
Time slot overflow remedied has been detected in the high- • -Replace CU
priority time slots.
FF04 A fault has occurred during the test of • Replace CU

RAM the RAM.
FF05 A fault has occurred during the test of • Replace CU

EPROM fault the EPROM.
FF13 A version conflict between the firmware • -Replace firmware

Wrong firmware ver- and the hardware has occurred. • -Replace CU
sion
Table 5-8: Fatal Error Codes

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.3 Firmware Upgrade

The correct firmware version for the TripRite Drive is Version 1.6. If the current firmware version of the TripRite
Drive is an earlier version than this, use the following procedure to upgrade the firmware version to Version 1.6.
To upgrade the firmware use with the following procedure:
Step 1: Connect 24VDC to the TripRite Drive External 24VDC Supply X9 Jack.
Verify that the TripRite Drive powers up.
Step 2: Connect a Laptop PC to the TripRite Drive X103 RS232 Jack using the special TripRite Drive Interface
Cable. Verify that the switch on the end that connect to the TripRite Drive is in the Off position. Refer to
Figure 5-38.
24VDC
X9
H G P P U1 V W1
E
–P
+
A
S1
X101 B
PN
R5
324
5D
1
X103 C
ES04105a01
Figure 5-38: Laptop and 24VDC Connections

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 3: Open Drive Monitor software on the Laptop PC. From the Laptop PC Desktop click on Start, All Pro-
grams, Siemens, Drive Monitor. Refer to Figure 5-39.
Figure 5-39: Start - All Programs - Siemens - Drive Monitor
Step 4: Log on to Remote PVCS and download the current Parameters for the TripRite Drive from the correct
shovel folder.
You will receive a Zip file named Standard TripRite Drive Parameters.zip.
Unzip the downloaded file into the same folder you downloaded it into.
Step 5: From the Drive Monitor menu bar select File, Open. Refer to Figure 5-40.
Figure 5-40: File Open

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 6: The Open window will appear. Browse to the folder that you unzipped the parameter file to and open the
.dnl file. Refer to Figure 5-41.
Figure 5-41: Opening the Parameter File
NOTICE
The parameter file will always have a .dnl extension. In the example in Step 6, tripritev03.dnl
is being used.
Step 7: Using the PMU Parameterization Unit, located on the front panel of the TripRite Drive, navigate to P701
and verify that it is set for 9600 baud. Refer to Subtopic 5.1.1 and Subtopic 5.6.11.
P701 = 001 = 6
Step 8: From the Drive Monitor menu bar select Tools, Online Settings. Refer to Figure 5-42.
Figure 5-42: Tools - Online Settings
A warning screen will open informing you that setting will take effect when Drive Monitor is restarted.
Refer to Figure 5-43.
Figure 5-43: Warning Screen

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 9: From the Drive ES USSParam screen that opens, click on the interface tab and verify that the baud rate
for COM 1 is set to 9600. Refer to Figure 5-44.
If the Baud rate is not set to 9600, click on the down arrow and select 9600. Click on OK. Close Drive
Monitor and start it back up again to set the Baud Rate to 9600. Proceed to Step 10.
If the Baud Rate is set to 9600, click on OK and proceed to Step 10.
Figure 5-44: Setting Baud Rate
Step 10: From the Drive Monitor Menu, click on Parameters, Device Identification. Refer to Figure 5-45.
Figure 5-45: Parameters, Device Identification

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 11: The Device Identification window opens. Refer to Figure 5-46. Verify that the Identified Device version
matches the Configured Device version.
If the versions match, there is no need to upgrade the Firmware.
If the versions do not match, as shown in Figure 5-46, the Firmware needs to be upgraded to the correct
version. Continue on to Step 12.
Figure 5-46: Device Identification Window
Step 12: Log on to Remote PVCS and download the Firmware upgrade for the TripRite Drive from the correct
shovel folder.
You will receive a Zip file named Mcp_v161.exe.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 13: From the unzipped files, double click on BSLMCP.BAT. Refer to Figure 5-47.
Figure 5-47: Double Click on BSLMCP.BAT
Step 14: This will open the DOS Screen on the Laptop PC. Refer to Figure 5-48.
Figure 5-48: DOS Screen - Waiting for Power to Cycle
Step 15: Cycle power, 24VDC, to the TripRite Drive.
Step 16: Place the special TripRite Drive Interface Cable switch, used to connect the Laptop PC to the TripRite
Drive, to the On position.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 17: Verify that the flash memory of the TripRite Drive begins to erase and then to re-program. The DOS
screen will begin to scroll with text. Refer to Figure 5-49. The entire process will take approximately 4 min-
utes.
Figure 5-49: DOS Screen - Erasing and Programming
Step 18: When the programming is complete, place the special TripRite Drive Interface Cable switch, used to con-
nect the Laptop PC to the TripRite Drive, to the Off position.
Step 19: Verify that the new firmware was downloaded properly. Go online with the TripRite Drive.
Use the Drive Monitor menu bar to select View, Online (RAM). Refer to Figure 5-50.
Figure 5-50: Go Online with the TripRite Drive

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 20: From the Drive Monitor Menu, click on Parameters, Device Identification. Refer to Figure 5-51.
Figure 5-51: Parameters, Device Identification
Step 21: The Device Identification window opens. Refer to Figure 5-52. Verify that the Identified Device version
matches the Configured Device version.
Figure 5-52: Device Identification

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.4 TripRite Parameter Installation

To install the program to the TripRite Drive, proceed with the following procedure:
Step 1: Connect 24VDC to the TripRite Drive External 24VDC Supply X9 Jack.
Verify that the TripRite Drive powers up.
Figure 5-53.
24VDC
X9
H G P P U1 V W1
E
–P
+
A
S1
X101 B
PN
R5
324
5D
1
X103 C
ES04105a01
Figure 5-53: Laptop and 24VDC Connections

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 3: Open Drive Monitor on the Laptop PC. From the Laptop PC Desktop click on Start, All Programs, Sie-
mens, Drive Monitor. Refer to Figure 5-54.
Step 4: Log on to Remote PVCS and download the current Parameters for the TripRite Drive from the correct
shovel folder.
You will receive a Zip file named Standard TripRite Drive Parameters.zip.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 6: The Open window will appear. Browse to the folder that you unzipped the parameter file to and open the
.dnl file. Refer to Figure 5-56.
NOTICE
The parameter file will always have a .dnl extension. In the example in Step 6, tripritev03.dnl
is being used.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 8: From the Drive ES USSParam screen that opens, click on the interface tab and verify that the baud rate
for COM 1 is set to 9600. Refer to Figure 5-59.
If the Baud rate is not set to 9600, click on the down arrow and select 9600. Click on OK. Close Drive
Monitor and start it back up again to set the Baud Rate to 9600. Proceed to Step 9.
If the Baud Rate is set to 9600, click on OK and proceed to Step 9.
Step 9: Go online with the TripRite Drive. Use the Drive Monitor menu bar to select View, Online (RAM). Refer to
Figure 5-60.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 10: From the Drive Monitor Drive Navigator screen, click on the icon for Downloading the Parameter File to
the Drive. Refer to Figure 5-61.
Figure 5-61: Download Parameter File to Drive
Step 11: From the Open window that appears, browse to and select the file downloaded from Remote PVCS in
Step 4 and click on Open. Refer to Figure 5-62.
Figure 5-62: Select the File to be Downloaded to the Drive

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 12: Clicking on the Open button starts the download of the file to the TripRite Drive. Monitor the download for
0 errors. Refer to Figure 5-63. The download process will take approximately 4-6 minutes. When com-
pleted, a downloaded successful screen will appear. Refer to Figure 5-64.
Figure 5-63: Download Progress
Figure 5-64: Download Successful
Step 13: Using the TripRite Drive front panel PMU Parameterizing Unit, refer to Subtopic 5.1.1, select Parameter
701 and change the setting to 8. Refer to Subtopic 5.6.11.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 15: From the Drive ES USSParam screen that opens, click on the interface tab and change the baud rate for
COM 1 to 19200. Click on OK. Refer to Figure 5-67.
Step 16: Close Drive Monitor and start it back up again to set the Baud Rate to 19200.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 18: The Open window will appear. Browse to the folder that you downloaded to the drive and open the .dnl
file. Refer to Figure 5-69.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 19: Go online with the TripRite Drive. Use the Drive Monitor menu bar to select View, Online (RAM). Refer to
Figure 5-70.
Step 20: Verify that the Laptop controller is communicating with the TripRite Drive at 38400 Baud Rate. Refer to
Figure 5-71.
Figure 5-71: Connection with Device OK
Step 21: Exit Drive Monitor.
Step 22: Refer to Subtopic 5.1.4 to update the OP1S EEPROM by doing an upread.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.5 Drive Monitor Record Function

The following procedure provides detailed instructions for using the Drive Monitor Record Function.
5.5.1 Opening Drive Monitor and Recording
Step 1: In order to access the Drive Monitor Record Function, open Drive Monitor on the Laptop PC. Refer to Fig-
ure 5-72.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 3: The Open window will appear. Browse to and open a Project File. The Project file will have a .dnl exten-
sion. Refer to Figure 5-74.
NOTICE
The project file will always have a .dnl extension. In this example, tripritev03.dnl is being used.
Step 4: To open the Recorder Function, click the Trace Button on the tool bar, refer to Figure 5-75, or select Diag-
nostics, Trace Function, refer to Figure 5-76, in the menu bar.
This opens the Recorder Function Screen. Refer to Figure 5-77.
Figure 5-75: Opening the Recorder Function with the Trace Button

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Figure 5-76: Opening the Recorder Function with the Menu Bar
Figure 5-77: Recorder Function Screen

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 5: In the bottom left hand corner of the Recorder Function Screen, click on Setting to open the Record Set-
tings window. Refer to Figure 5-78.
Figure 5-78: Record Settings Window

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 6: In the Record Settings Window, there are eight windows to select parameters for monitoring. Refer to Fig-
ure 5-79. Select the parameters that you want to monitor by clicking on the button to the left of the grayed
out windows. This opens the Connector-Selection List window. Refer to Figure 5-80.
Figure 5-79: Parameter Selection

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Figure 5-80: Connector-Selection List
Step 7: From the Connector-Selection List, select the parameter you want to monitor. Clicking on the OK button
after selecting a parameter will automatically activate that channel for monitoring. Refer to Figure 5-81.
To monitor a parameter that has already been selected but is grayed out, click on the white box to the
right of the parameter. A check mark will appear in the box and the parameter text will change to a normal
appearance. Refer to Figure 5-81.
Figure 5-81: Active Parameter

"Uncontrolled Copy"
NOTICE
In order for a parameter to be monitored by Drive Monitor, the parameter must be selected.
Data on channels that are not selected will not be recorded and/or displayed in the Record
Function.
The Record Setting section of the Record Settings window, refer to Figure 5-82, displays the Record
Interval and Pretrigger information.
The Record Interval speed is calculated by the following formula:
A* 4/P340
Where: P340 = Pulse Frequency (set to 5KHz, default)
For Example: 1.6ms/sample rate = 2*4/5KHz
Figure 5-82: Record Settings Section
The Pretrigger specifies the range. The setting ranges from 0% (trigger on extreme left, no pretrigger) to
100% (trigger on extreme right, maximum pretrigger).

"Uncontrolled Copy"
The Trigger Settings section of the Record Settings window, refer to Figure 5-83, displays the channel to
be used for triggering, Trigger Condition, and Trigger Value.
Figure 5-83: Trigger Settings
Under Trigger condition, set one the of the five possible conditions, Less Than, Equal To, Greater Than,
Unequal To, or Fault. The Fault Trigger condition is independent of the trigger channel and threshold
value.
If 'Trigger on bit' is activated, the corresponding bit can be specified. The trigger condition is then perma-
nently set to 'equal to' and, in this case, the trigger threshold specifies the logical state that is to be trig-
gered.
For Example: Trigger on bit12= HIGH (=1 Dez) (Dez = Decimal (German))
For WORD (16-bit) channels, the maximum trigger threshold is 16384dec (40000hex = 100%).
For double WORD channels, the maximum trigger threshold is 1073741824dec (40000000hex = 100%).

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Record Settings can be saved to create templates for taking later recordings by clicking on Save File.
Refer to Figure 5-84. The settings will be saved as *.trs files.
Figure 5-84: Save Trace Settings
If you have saved template files the Load function will allow the reloading of the settings that you have
previously used/configured. To Load a file click on the Load File button. Refer to Figure 5-85.
Figure 5-85: Open Trace Settings

"Uncontrolled Copy"
NOTICE
Milwaukee engineering has created a .trs file in PVCS as a guide for recordings from the field.
Refer to Figure 5-86. This file is included on the TripRite CD issued by the Milwaukee Engineer-
ing Department.
Figure 5-86: Saved Trace Setting from Milwaukee Engineering
Step 8: When the channels are configured Click on the OK button.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Figure 5-87.
H G P P U1 V W1
E
–P
+
A
S1
X101 B
PN
R5
324
5D
1
X103 C
ES04105b01
Figure 5-87: Laptop Connections

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 10: Verify that the drive is in Online condition. From the Recorder Function Screen, arm the recorder for
recording when triggering conditions are met, by pressing the Start button. Refer to Figure 5-88.
Figure 5-88: Recorder Function Screen - Waiting for Trigger

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 11: Once a recording is taken it can be saved on the PC. On the Recorder Function Screen, click on the Disc
(Save) icon to save the recording. Refer to Figure 5-89. The saved recording will have a .trc extension.
The typical size for a recording file is 21Kb.
Figure 5-89: Save Trace File
5.5.2 Analyzing Recordings
Step 1: Perform Step 1 through Step 4 in Subtopic 5.5.1.
Step 2: To open a saved Trace File, on the Record Function Screen, click on the File Open icon. From the Open
Trace File window locate the .trc file you want to open and select OK. Refer to Figure 5-90.
Figure 5-90: Open Trace File

"Uncontrolled Copy"
When viewing a recorded file,Figure 5-91, you can perform the following:
Figure 5-91: Recorded File
• Check the channel setting that the recording was taken with by clicking on the Settings button.
• Visualize one or more recorded channels (graphs) by selecting them on the right hand top of the recorder
window.
• View the file name under which the recording was saved.
It is possible to display the recordings as:
• Display in data points: The curve is scaled in data points.
• Display in percent: The curve is scaled in percent. In this case, 16384 (4000Hex)= 100% for 16-bit curves
and 1073741824 (40000000Hex) = 100% for double word curves.
• Any scaling: The Y axis is scaled according to a freely definable factor and units, for example, 10mV per
sampled value.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
To toggle between types of display, right click with the mouse along the Y axis (1). The menu shown in
Figure 5-92 will appear.
Figure 5-92: Y Axis Menu
To change the outlook of the graph field you can right click with the mouse anywhere over the graph area
and select what to be displayed. Refer to Figure 5-93.
Figure 5-93: Trace Settings Window
Clicking on the Save Now button saves the current settings as the default settings. These settings will be
loaded when the program is next started.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Two cursors are available for taking measurements while viewing a waveform. If they are not visible, drag
them away from the left edge of the window. The mouse pointer changes to a double arrow when the
mouse is positioned over a cursor. Refer to Figure 5-94.
Figure 5-94: Measurement Cursors
The active cursor is always bolder than the inactive cursor. You can see the momentary cursor position in
amplitude and time (@ symbol), and the difference between the two cursors (dv = amplitude difference, dt
= time difference) in the display boxes on the top right edge of the window. Refer to Figure 5-95. The unit
corresponding to the set scaling is used.
Figure 5-95: Cursor Display
In the example in Figure 5-94 and Figure 5-95, the active cursor (right hand) is at 248ms from the trigger-
ing point and it is at 22.09% of the signal captured on channel 4 (Output Amps). This is highlighted in the
channel list on the right hand side of the recorder screen.
NOTICE
The zero line, or dotted vertical line in the center of the display, is the same color as the
selected channels graph.
• dt - Is the time difference between the two cursors (744ms).

"Uncontrolled Copy"
• dv - Is the amplitude difference between the two cursors (21.95%).
The minimum and maximum of a trace are displayed when you move the mouse to the corresponding
curve designator on the right of the trace window. Refer to Figure 5-96.
Figure 5-96: Minimum and Maximum of a Trace
By moving the boundaries of the ZoomBar, brackets underneath the X scale, select the visible portion of
the time axis. Once the zoom area is defined, you can drag it to left or right with the mouse to visualize dif-
ferent portions of the recording. Refer to Figure 5-97.
Figure 5-97: Zoom Function

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Right clicking on the zoom bar opens the Zoom Menu. Refer to Figure. From the Zoom Menu you can
choose the following zooming options:
Figure 5-98: Zoom Menu
• Zoom All - display the whole recording in one window.
• Zoom Cursor - display the area between the two cursors in one window.
• Zoom Last View - displays the previous window.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.6 Parameter List
5.6.1 Cross Reference Chart
Parameter Topic Table Parameter Topic Table
General Parameters 5-11 Free Function Blocks 5-24
Motor and Encoder Data 5-12 Technology: Synchronism (Mas- 5-25

ter Setpoint Correction)
Closed-Loop Control / Gating Unit 5-13 Trace 5-26
Functions 1 5-14 Technology: Positioning (F01) 5-27
Setpoint Channel 5-15 Technology: Synchronism (F01) 5-28
Functions 2 5-16 Technology: Positioning (F01) 5-29
Sequence Control 5-17 Printing Functions 5-30
Terminals 5-18 Basic Positioning 5-31
Communications 5-19 Reserved 5-32
Diagnostics / Monitoring 5-20 Basic Unit Management 5-33
Special Parameters 5-21 Reserved 5-34
Special Parameters OP1S 5-22 Release and Management Param- 5-35

eters
Technology Parameters 5-23
Table 5-9: Parameter Cross Reference

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.6.2 Explanation of Parameter Tables
Parameter Description Data Read/Write
* Parameter Confirmation (1) Description of Parameter Factory: (4a) Menus:

Name (2) Index 1: (4b) - Parameter menu (11)
Parameter Number (3) Min: (5) + Communication
Max: (6) + Motor data
Unit: (7) Changeable in: (12)
Indices: (8) -ready
BDS (9) -run
Type: (10)
1. * means confirmation parameter: not active until after confirmation (press P key)
• r xxx Visualization Parameter - Parameter number <1000.

• P xxx Setting Parameter - Parameter number < 1000.
• d xxx Visualization Parameter - Parameter number ¡Ý 1000 and < 2000 for T100,T300,T400 (not
in this list).
• H xxx Setting Parameter - Parameter number ¡Ý 1000 and < 2000 for T100,T300,T400 (not in this
list).
• n xxx Visualization Parameter - Parameter number ¡Ý 2000 and < 3000.
• U xxx Setting Parameter - Parameter number ¡Ý 2000 and < 3000.
• c xxx Visualization Parameter - Parameter number ¡Ý 3000 for T400 (not in this list).
• L xxx Setting Parameter - Parameter number ¡Ý 3000 for T400 (not in this list).
The thousands digit of the parameter number is coded by means of letters so that it can also be shown on
the PMU.
2. Parameter name in plaintext (e. g. for operator panel OP1S).
3. Parameter number with place for thousands (relevant for automation and serial interfaces).
4. 1st value of the factor setting in the case of non-indexed parameters. 2nd value of the factory setting of
the 1st index in the case of indexed parameters. The complete list of factory settings of the first 4 indices
is at the end of the parameter list.
5. Minimum value which can be set. Is only given in the case of setting parameters. The value can be limited
due to converter-dependent variables.
6. Maximum value which can be set. Is only given in the case of setting parameters. The value can be lim-
ited due to converter-dependent variables.
7. Unit of the parameter value. In the case of percentages, these refer to the pertinent reference values
(P350 to P354).
8. Number of indices in the case of indexed parameters.
9. If the parameter is contained in a function data set (FDS) or BICO data set (BDS), this is indicated here.
Table 5-10: Explanation of Parameter Tables

"Uncontrolled Copy"
10.Parameter type
O2 - 16-bit value without sign.
I2 - 16-bit value with sign.
I4 - 32-bit value with sign.
L2 - Nibble-coded variable.
V2 - Bit-coded variable.
.B - Binector parameter.
.K - Connector parameter (16-bit).
.KK - Double-connector parameter (32-bit).

11.Indicates the menus in which the parameter can be read. Menu selected by means of P60.
12.The parameter can be changed in the following converter statuses:
Status To be seen in r001=
Power-section definition 0 Change with P060 = 8 into “Power-section

definition” status necessary
Board definition 4 Change with P060 = 4 into “Board defini-

tion” status necessary
Drive setting 5 Change with P060 = 5 into “Drive setting”

status necessary
Ready 9
Run 14
Download 21 Change with P060 = 6 into “Download”

status necessary
Return to the “Ready” status with P060 = 1
Table 5-10: Explanation of Parameter Tables (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.6.3 General Parameters
r001 Dec.controller.: 0 Menus:

Drive Status Unit: - Parameter menu +
1 Indices: - General parame-
ters
Type: O2
Fixed settings
Quick parameter-
ization
Board configuration
Drive setting
Download
Upread/free access
Power section defi-
nition
r002 Visualization parameter for the speed actual- Dec.controller.: 0 Menus:

n (act) value. Unit: 1/min Parameter menu +
2 Indices: - General parame-
ters
Type: I2
Upread/free access
r004 Visualization parameter for the output current Dec.controller.: 1 Menus:

Output Amps of the converter or inverter. The r.m.s. value of Unit: A Parameter menu +
the fundamental component is shown. When the General parame-
4 output frequency is 0 Hz, the DC current flowing Indices: -
ters
at the moment amounts to 1.41 times the value Type: O2
displayed. Upread/free access
r006 Visualization parameter for current DC link bus Dec.controller.: 0 Menus:

DC Bus Volts voltage. For inverters, the displayed value cor- Unit: V Parameter menu +
responds to the current input DC voltage. General parame-
6 Indices: -
ters
Type: I2
Upread/free access
r007 Visualization parameter for torque referred to Dec.controller.: 1 Menus:

Motor Torque the reference torque (P354). Unit:% Parameter menu +
7 Precondition: P290 = 0 (field-oriented current Indices: - General parame-
control) ters
Type: I2
Upread/free access
Table 5-11: General Parameters

"Uncontrolled Copy"
r008 Visualization parameter for thermal motor utili- Dec.controller.: 0 Menus:

Motor Utilizat. zation (calculated value). Unit:% Parameter menu
8 Precondition: P383 >= 100 s and no tempera- Indices: - Upread/free access
ture sensor selected.
Type: O2
CAUTION
The overload protection derived
from this parameter is only effec-
tive if sufficient cooling of the
motor is ensured.
r009 Visualization parameter for current motor tem- Dec.controller.: 0 Menus:
Motor Tem- perature. To ensure correct display, the motor Unit: °C Parameter menu +
perat. temperature must be measured with the sensor General parame-
selected in P131. If a PTC sensor (P131=2) is Indices: -
9 ters
selected, the switching state of the PTC is dis- Type: I2
played (0: temperature OK; 1: over-tempera- Upread/free access
ture) instead of the temperature itself.
r010 Visualization parameter for current thermal uti- Dec.controller.: 0 Menus:

Drive Utilizat. lization of the converter or inverter. The utiliza- Unit:% Parameter menu +
tion is determined by an i2t calculation in General parame-
10 relation to the output current. A value of 100% Indices: -
ters
is achieved with the rated current during contin- Type: O2
uous operation. Upread/free access
If 100% utilization is exceeded, a warning is
tripped (A024) and the output current is
reduced to 91% of the rated current.
r012 Visualization parameter for the BICO data set Dec.controller.: 0 Menus:
Active BICO currently active. Unit: - Parameter menu +
DSet 1 = Data set 1 Indices: - General parame-
12 2 = Data set 2 ters
Type: O2
A BICO data set is selected with control word bit Upread/free access
30. The relevant BICO parameter for linking the
control word bit is P590.
r013 Visualization parameter for the function data set Dec.controller.: 0 Menus:
Active FuncD- currently active Unit: - Parameter menu +
Set 1 = Data set 1 Indices: - General parame-
13 2 = Data set 2 ters
Type: O2
3 = Data set 3 Upread/free access
4 = Data set 4
A function data set is selected with control word
bits 16 and 17. The relevant BICO parameters
for linking the control word bits are P576 and
P577.
Table 5-11: General Parameters (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P026* Service parameter, only for MinePro Service index1: 0 Menus:

CouplCh fix personnel Min: 0 Parameter menu
26 Coupling between DSP<->C167 Max: 8046 Board configuration
Important: Pilot version - changes probable Unit: - Drive setting
For experts only; no parameters for general Indices: 40 Upread/free access
use!
Type: O2 Power section defi-
This parameter is used for manually assigning a nition
connector (PWE) to a coupling channel (index).
PWE = 0 signifies that the coupling channel is Changeable in:
assigned automatically (on wiring a connector). Power section defi-
If, in the case of double-word connectors, only nition
one coupling channel is assigned, then the high
Board configuration
word is linked. If the same double-word connec-
tor is assigned twice in the same coupling block Drive setting
(one block corresponds to a sequence of 8
channels, e.g. Index 01 to 08, Index 09 to 16,
Index 17 to 24, etc.), the double word is fully
coupled.
An entry is refused if the channel or connector is
already in use (through automatic coupling
assignment). See P027 in this connection.
Indices: Index=Channel number
Channel 01-24: Coupling to T2 (= 4T0)
r027 Service parameter, only for MinePro Service Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Assignmt- personnel Unit: - Parameter menu
CoupCh The visualization parameter shows the assign- Indices: 43 Board configuration
27 ments made to coupling channels C167<->DSP.
The parameter value indicates the connector Type: O2 Drive setting
number. Upread/free access
Parameter values: Power section defi-
0: Coupling channel free nition
9999: Coupling channel occupied (by internal
datum)
Indices: Index=channel number
Channels 01-24: Coupling to T2(= 4TO)
Index 41 to Index 43 show the number of free
coupling channels (DSP<->C167 of time slots
T2 to T4.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P030* BICO parameter for selecting binectors which index1: 0 Menus:

Src Disp Binec are to be shown in visualization parameter Unit: - Parameter menu +
r031. The binector numbers entered in the General parame-
30 respective index are displayed in the same Indices: 5
ters
index of parameter r031. Type: L2,B
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
r031 Visualization parameter for displaying the binec- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Display Binec- tors given in P030. The binectors displayed in Unit: - Parameter menu +
tor the respective index have been selected in the General parame-
same index of parameter P030. Indices: 5
31 ters
Type: O2
Upread/free access
P032* BICO parameter for selecting connectors which index1: 0 Menus:

Src Disp Conn are to be displayed in visualization parameter Unit: - Parameter menu +
r033 in [%]. The connector numbers shown in General parame-
32 the respective index are displayed in the same Indices: 5
ters
index of parameter r033. Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
r033 Visualization parameter for displaying the con- Dec.Plc.: 3 Menus:

Display Conn nectors given in P032. The connectors displayed Unit:% Parameter menu +
in the respective index have been selected in General parame-
33 the same index of parameter P032. A connector Indices: 5
ters
value of 4000 H or 4000 0000 H is shown at Type: I4
100%. Upread/free access

SrcDisp- contain a voltage and are to be displayed in Unit: - Parameter menu +
VoltsConn visualization parameter r035 in [V]. The con- General parame-
nector numbers entered in the respective index Indices: 5
34 ters
are displayed in the same index of parameter Type: L2,K
r035. Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
r035 Visualization parameter for displaying connec- Dec.Plc.: 1 Menus:

Disp Volts tors given in P034 in [V]. The connectors dis- Unit: V Parameter menu +
Conn played in the respective index have been General parame-
selected in the same index of parameter P034. Indices: 5
35 ters
The normalization is specified in P351. The fol- Type: I4
lowing method of calculation must be used: Upread/free access
r035 = P351 xConnector Value in [%]/100%.

"Uncontrolled Copy"

SrcDispAmp- contain a current and are to be displayed in Unit: - Parameter menu +
sConn visualization parameter r037 in [A]. The con- General parame-
36 ters
are displayed in the same index of parameter Type: L2,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
r037 Visualization parameter for the display of con- Dec.Plc.: 2 Menus:

Disp Amps nectors given in P036 in [A]. The connectors Unit: A Parameter menu +
Conn displayed in the respective index have been General parame-
37 ters
The normalization is specified in P350. The fol- Type: I4
lowing method of calculation must be used: Upread/free access
r037 = P350 xConnector Value in [%]/100%.

Src DispTorq- contain a torque and are to be displayed in visu- Unit: - Parameter menu +
Conn alization parameter r039 in [Nm]. The connec- General parame-
tor numbers entered in the respective index are Indices: 5
38 ters
displayed in the same index of parameter r039. Type: L2,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

Disp Torq nectors given in P038 in [Nm]. The connectors Unit: Nm Parameter menu +
39 ters
The normalization is specified in P354. Type: I4
Upread/free access
The following method of calculation must be
used: r039 = P354 x Connector Value in [%]/
100%

SrcDisp Spd- contain a speed and are to be displayed in visu- Unit: - Parameter menu +
Conn alization parameter r041 in [1/min]. The con- General parame-
40 ters
are displayed in the same index of parameter Type: L2,K,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Disp Speed nectors given in P040 in [1/min]. The connec- Unit: 1/min Parameter menu +
Conn tors displayed in the respective index have been General parame-
41 ters
Upread/free access
used: r041 = P353 xConnector Value in [%]/
100%.

SrcDispFreq- contain a frequency and are to be displayed in Unit: - Parameter menu +
Conn visualization parameter r043 in [Hz]. The con- General parame-
42 ters
are displayed in the same index of parameter Type: L2,K,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

Disp Freq nectors given in P042 in [Hz]. The connectors Unit: Hz Parameter menu +
43 ters
Upread/free access
used: r043 = P352 x Connector Value in [%]/
100%.

SrcDisp Dec- are to displayed in visualization parameter r045 Unit: - Parameter menu +
Conn as an integral decimal number preceded by a General parame-
plus or minus sign. The connector numbers Indices: 5
44 ters
entered in the respective index are displayed in Type: L2,K,K
the same index of parameter r045. Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

Disp DecConn nectors given in P044 as an integral whole deci- Unit: - Parameter menu +
mal number. The connectors displayed in the General parame-
45 respective index have been selected in the same Indices: 5
ters
index of parameter P044. Type: I4
Upread/free access

"Uncontrolled Copy"

SrcDisp Hex- are to be displayed in visualization parameter Unit: - Parameter menu +
Conn r047as an integral value (hexadecimal). The General parame-
connector numbers entered in the respective Indices: 5
46 ters
index are displayed in the same index of param- Type: L2,K,K
eter r047. Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

Disp Hex Conn nectors given in P046 as a hexadecimal num- Unit: - Parameter menu +
ber. General parame-
47 Indices: 10
If word connectors have been selected in P046, ters
then: Type: L2
Upread/free access
• Indices 1 to 5 = Value of the connector
• Indices 6 to 10 = 0
If double word connectors have been selected in
P046, then:
• Indices 1 to 5 = Upper 16 bits of the con-
nector
• Indices 6 to 10 = Corresponding lower 16
bits of the connector
Example:
KK0091 = 1234 5678
P046.1= 91
r047.1 = 1234
r047.6 = 5678
P048* Function parameter for selecting parameter Init: 2 Menus:

PMU OperDisp whose value is to be indicated in the operating Min: 0 Parameter menu +
display of the PMU. General parame-
48 Max: 3999
ters
Unit: -
Upread/free access
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Type: O2
Drive setting
Ready
P049* Function parameter for selecting parameters index1: 4 Menus:

OP OperDisp whose values are to be shown in the operating Min: 0 Parameter menu +
display of the optional OP1S user-friendly oper- General parame-
49 ator control panel. Max: 3999
ters
• Index 1: 1st line left Unit: -
Upread/free access
• Index 2: 1st line right Indices: 5
Changeable in:
• Index 3: 2nd line (actual value), only Type: O2
Drive setting
visualization parameters
• Index 4: 3rd line (setpoint) Ready
• Index 5: 4th line

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P050* Function parameter for setting the language in Init: 0 Menus:

Language which texts are to be displayed on the optional Min: 0 Parameter menu +
OP1S user-friendly operator control panel. General parame-
50 Max: 4
0 = German ters
Unit: -
1 = English Upread/free access
Indices: -
2 = Spanish Changeable in:
Type: O2
3 = French Drive setting
4 = Italian Ready
NOTICE
This parameter is not reset during
factory setting.
P053* Function parameter for releasing interfaces for Init: 7 Menus:
Parameter parameterization. Min: 0 All menus
Access • 0 Hex = None Max: 65535 Changeable in:
53 • 1 Hex = Cbx communication board
Unit: - All states
• 2 Hex = PMU operator control panel
Indices: -
• 4 Hex = Serial interface (SCom/SCom1),
also OP1S and PC Type: V2
• 8 Hex = SCB serial input/output modules
• 10 Hex = Txxx technology board
• 20 Hex = Serial interface 2 (SCom2)
• 40 Hex = Second CB board
Each interface has a code number. When the
number or the sum of different numbers
assigned to the interfaces is/are entered, the
interface(s) is/are released for use as a parame-
terizing interface.
Example:
The factory-setting value 6 is the sum of 2 and
4. This means that parameterization is allowed
via the PMU and serial interface 1 and thus for
the OP1S as well.
The parameter can always be written from any
interface. This also applies if this interface has
not been released for parameterization pur-
poses.
During factory setting via CBx, SCB, TXXX,
SCom2 or a second CB board, this parameter is
not reset.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
r054 This visualization parameter returns the origin Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Requester of the read request. It can therefore be scanned Unit: - User parameters-
to find out which interface is being used. Parameter menu +
54 Indices: -
The values correspond to those of P53. General parame-
Type: L2 ters
Fixed settings
Quick parameter-
ization
Board configuration
Drive setting
Download
Upread/free access
Power section defi-
nition
P060* Function parameter for selecting the current Init: 1 Menus:

Menu Select menu. Min: 0 All menus
60 • 0 = User parameter (selection of the visi- Max: 8 Changeable in:
ble parameters in P360)
Unit: - All states
• 1 = Parameter menu
• 2 = Fixed settings (for factory settings) Indices: -
• 3 = Quick parameterization (changes to Type: O2
“Drive Setting” state)
• 4 = Board configuration (changes to
“Board Configuration” state)
• 5 = Drive setting (changes to “Drive Set-
ting” state)
• 6 = Download (changes to “Download”
state)
• 7 = Upread/Free access
• 8 = Power section definition (changes to
“Power section definition” state)
If it is not possible to change to another state
due to the currently valid state, the correspond-
ing menu cannot be selected either.
Example:
“Operating” state, change to “Download” not
possible. “Ready for switching on” state, change
to “Download” not possible.
With parameters P358 Key and P359 Lock,
menus can be locked with the exception of the
menus “User parameters” and “Fixed settings”.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
r069 Visualization parameter for displaying the soft- Dec.Plc.: 1 Menus:

SW Version ware versions of the basic board as well as the Unit: - Parameter menu +
optional boards in slots A to G General parame-
69 Indices: 4
• Index 1: Software version of basic board ters
Type: O2
• Index 2: Software version of optional Fixed settings
board Slot A Quick parameter-
• Index 3: Software version of optional ization
board Slot B
Board configuration
• Index 4: Software version of optional
board Slot C Drive setting
• Index 5: Software version of optional Download
board Slot D Upread/free access
Power section defi-
board Slot E
nition
board Slot F
board Slot G
The slots D-G are not available in the TripRite
Drive. For optional boards which contain no
software, (e.g. SBR, SLB), the parameter value
in the respective index is always 0.0.
P070* Function parameter for entering the order num- Init: 0 Menus:
Order No. bers of converter or inverter modules. These Min: 0 Parameter menu +
6SE70. numbers tell the control board which power sec- General parame-
tion it works with. Max: 20
70 ters
For parameter values, see Chapter “Power sec- Unit: -
Upread/free access
tion definition” of the Compendium. Indices: -
Power section defi-
Type: O2 nition
Changeable in:
Power section defi-
nition
P071* Function parameter for entering the supply volt- Init: 400 Menus:
Line Volts age of the converter or inverter. Min: 90 Parameter menu +
71 Converter (AC/AC): r.m.s. value of the line Max: 1320 General parame-
alternating voltage. ters
Unit: V
Inverter (DC/AC): level of the input direct volt- Quick parameter-
age = rated DC link voltage For inverters, this Indices: - ization
parameter is for calculating the rated DC link Type: O2 Drive setting
voltage (1.35 × Un). The calculated rated DC
link voltage or the set parameter value give the Upread/free access
thresholds for pre-charging and under-voltage Power section defi-
detection. nition
For induction motors, this parameter is for cal- Changeable in:
culating the field-weakening frequency.
Power section defi-
nition
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P072* Parameter for displaying the rated current of Init: 6,1 Menus:
Rtd Drive the converter or inverter. The rated current is Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
Amps the current which can be output continuously. It General parame-
must be identical with the information on the Max: 6450,0
72 ters
rating plate. Unit: A
Upread/free access
Remember that the given rated current applies Indices: -
for a pulse frequency of 3 kHz (2.5kHz). There- Power section defi-
Type: O2 nition
fore in the case of chassis units of MASTER-
DRIVES MC (minimum pulse frequency 5kHz) Changeable in:
the actual rated current is usually below this
Power section defi-
value.
nition
P073* Parameter for displaying the rated power output Init: 2,2 Menus:
Rtd Drive of the converter or inverter. Min: 0,3 Parameter menu +
Power Max: 6400,0 General parame-
73 ters
Unit: kW
Upread/free access
Indices: -
Power section defi-
Type: O2 nition
Changeable in:
Power section defi-
nition
P074* Function parameter for input of the braking Init: 750 Menus:
Chopper- chopper starting threshold. Effective only in the Min: 590 Parameter menu +
Threshold case of TripRite converters (AC/AC). General parame-
Max: 750
74 A minimum value is set for P74 depending on ters
P71 Conv.SupplyV. Unit: V
Drive setting
Indices: -
Upread/free access
CAUTION Type: O2
Power section defi-
P74 must never be set lower than nition
the peak rectifier value at maxi- Changeable in:
mum line voltage. Otherwise the
Power section defi-
braking chopper remains contin-
nition
uously on, which can lead to
overheating of the braking resis- Drive setting
tor. Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.6.4 Motor and Encoder Data
r088 Torque constant kT0 = kT_rated value + correction by the Dec.Plc.: 2 Menus:
kT Rated observer. Unit: Nm/A Parameter
Value This measured value can be entered in P98 as kT0_rated Indices: - menu
88 value to improve torque accuracy even with the observer Upread/free
deactivated. Type: O2
access
r089 Actual value of the torque constant n which is currently being Dec.Plc.: 2 Menus:
kT Actual taken into account. Unit: Nm/A Parameter
Value This value takes account of the current motor temperature. Indices: - menu
89 Type: O2 Upread/free
access
P090 Index 01: not used index1: 0,0 Menus:

kT Depen- Index 02: Min: 0,0 Parameter
dance Temperature dependence of the magnetic material. The Max: 20,0 menu +
90 adaption functions only when the actual motor temperature Control/gat-
Unit:% ing unit +
is measured with a temperature sensor. The factory setting
of 12%/100K is a usual value for neodymiron- boron mag- Indices: 2 Current con-
nets. trol
Type: O2
P90.02 Drive setting
kT = r088 * (1- -------------* (T-140°C)) Upread/free

access
100 K
Change-
able in:
Drive setting
P091 kT adaption index1: 20,0 Menus:

kT Adaption Index 1: Application threshold from which adaption is active Min: 0,0 Parameter
91 as a percentage of the rated speed (P108) Max: 100,0 menu
Index 2: Maximum deviation of the adapted kT value of the Unit:% Drive setting
rated value (P98). The estimator is switched off at 0%. Upread/free
Indices: 2
The maximum value amounts to 30%. access
Type: O2
Change-
able in:
Drive setting
P092 Gain of the equalizing controller of the rotor time constant Init: 0,00 Menus:
TrAdaption adaptation. With P92=0.00% the adaptation is switched off. Min: 0,00 Parameter
Gain Max: 200,00 menu
92 Unit:% Drive setting
Indices: - Upread/free
access
Type: O2
Change-
able in:
Drive setting
Drive setting
Table 5-12: Motor and Encoder Data

"Uncontrolled Copy"
r093 Actual value of the rotor time constant Tr referred to P124. Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
Tr Actual Unit:% Parameter
Value Indices: - menu
93 Type: O2 Drive setting
Upread/free
access
P094 For future use. Init: 0 Menus:

TempPRE Tr Min: 0 Parameter
94 Max: 65535 menu
Unit:% Upread/free
access
Indices: -
Change-
Type: O2 able in:
Drive setting
P095* Function parameter for selecting the connected motor. Init: 1 Menus:
Select Mot • 0 = No motor connected Min: 0 Parameter
Type • 1 = Synchronous servomotor 1FK6/1FT6 Max: 4 menu +
95 Motor/
• 2 = Induction servomotor 1PH7/1PL6/1PH4 Unit: - encoder +
• 3 = Synchronous servomotor general
Indices: - Motor data
• 4 = Induction motor general
Type: O2 Quick
If servomotors are used and 1 or 2 is entered, the connected
parameter-
motor can be directly selected in P096 and P097. The stored
ization
motor data are then taken automatically from an internal
list. If other motors are used (entry of 3 or 4), the motor Drive setting
data must be entered separately. Upread/free
In the case of P095 = 3 or 4, automatic parameterization access
(P115 = 1) should be called after all the data have been Change-
entered and before the start of automatic motor identifica- able in:
tion.
Drive setting
The motor designation 1PA6 has been changed to 1PH7
(without changing the motor data).
P096* Function parameter for selecting a 1FK6/1FT6 synchronous Init: 0 Menus:

Select1FK6/ servomotor from the internal list of motors. Min: 0 Parameter
1FT6 Max: 180 menu +
96 Motor/
Unit: - encoder +
Type: O2 Quick
parameter-
ization
Drive setting
Upread/free
access
Change-
able in:
Drive setting
Table 5-12: Motor and Encoder Data (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P097* Function parameter for selecting a 1PH7 (=1PA6), 1PL6 and Init: 0 Menus:
Select 1PH7 1PH4 induction motor from the internal list of motors. Min: 0 Parameter
97 Max: 90 menu +
Motor/
Unit: - encoder +
Type: O2 Quick
parameter-
ization
Drive setting
Upread/free
access
Change-
able in:
Drive setting
P098* Torque constant at standstill and maximum motor tempera- Init: 1,40 Menus:
Torque con- ture (140 ºC) M0 / I0. Designation [Nm/A]. Min: 0,10 Parameter
stant The value is slightly higher than the rated torque / rated cur- Max: 655,00 menu +
98 rent because there are no friction and iron losses at stand- Motor/
still. When the kT-estimator is activated, an estimated value Unit: Nm/A encoder +
for this torque constant can be read in parameter r88. Indices: - Motor data
Please keep in mind that the value range is restricted to 0.8 Type: O2 Drive setting
* (M_rated/I_rated) <= P098 <= 1.5 * (M_rated/I_rated). Upread/free
Therefore, the values for the motor rated current P102 and access
the motor rated torque P113 must already have been
entered before you make any changes to P098. Change-
able in:
Drive setting
P101* Function parameter for entering the rated motor voltage for Init: 400 Menus:
Mot Rtd Volts a connected induction motor. The rating-plate value is to be Min: 100 Parameter
entered for the current type of connection (star or delta). menu +
101 Max: 1000
Motor/
Unit: V encoder +
Type: O2 Drive setting
Upread/free
access
Change-
able in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P102* Function parameter for entering the rated motor current of Init: 0,00 Menus:
Motor Rtd the connected synchronous or induction motor. The rating Min: 0,00 Parameter
Amps plate value is to be entered for the current type of connec- menu +
tion (star or delta). Max: 600,00
102 Motor/
Unit: A encoder +
Type: I4 Drive setting
Upread/free
access
Change-
able in:
Drive setting
P103* Function parameter for entering the motor no-load current Init: 0,00 Menus:
Mot No Load for the connected induction/synchronous motor. Min: 0,00 Parameter
Amps For the connected induction motor a motor no-load current Max: 600,00 menu +
103 smaller than the rated motor current (P102) is to be entered. Motor/
Unit: A encoder +
For the connected synchronous motor the motor no-load cur-
rent value 0 A is to be entered. Indices: - Motor data
Upread/free
access
Change-
able in:
Drive setting
P104* Function parameter for entering the power factor for the Init: 0,800 Menus:
MotPwrFac- connected induction motor. The rating-plate value is to be Min: 0,500 Parameter
tor entered. menu +
Max: 0,999
104 Motor/
Unit: - encoder +
Upread/free
access
Change-
able in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P107* Function parameter for entering the rated motor frequency Init: 50,0 Menus:
Mot Rtd Freq for the connected induction motor. The rating-plate value is Min: 10,0 Parameter
to be entered. menu +
107 Max: 400,0
Motor/
Unit: Hz encoder +
Upread/free
access
Change-
able in:
Drive setting
P108* Function parameter for entering the rated motor speed for Init: 3000 Menus:
Mot Rtd the connected induction motor. The rating-plate value is to Min: 0 Parameter
Speed be entered. menu +
Max: 12000
108 Motor/
Unit: 1/min encoder +
Upread/free
access
Change-
able in:
Drive setting
P109* Function parameter for entering the number of pole pairs for Init: 2 Menus:
Motor #Pole- the connected synchronous or induction motor. Min: 1 Parameter
Pairs Max: 110 menu +
109 Motor/
Unit: - encoder +
Upread/free
access
Change-
able in:
Drive setting
P111 Function parameter for entering the support points of the index1: Menus:
Ls = f(Isd) function Ls=f(isd). The support points are expressed in p. u. 110,0 Parameter
of the stator inductance at 40% of the rated motor current Min: 0,1 menu
111 (P102). The support points are subdivided in 10%, 20%,...,
100% of the rated motor current. Max: 6553,5 Drive setting
Only for induction motors. Unit:% Upread/free
Indices: 10 access
Type: O2 Change-
able in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P113 Function parameter for entering the rated motor torque for Init: 3,00 Menus:
Mot Rtd the connected synchronous motor. The rating-plate value is Min: 0,00 Parameter
Torque to be entered. menu +
Max:
113 Entering this is absolutely necessary for synchronous 6535,00 Motor/
machine control. With the induction machine, the value is encoder +
only necessary for the calculation of the reference torque/ Unit: Nm Motor data
rated torque ratio. If the rated torque for an induction Indices: - Drive setting
machine is not known, the same values should be entered in
Type: I4 Upread/free
P113 and P354 (reference torque). For example, the values
of the factory setting can be left in both parameters. access
Change-
able in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P115* Function parameter for selecting various start-up sections Init: 0 Menus:
Calc Mot- and special functions. Min: 0 Parameter
Model Parameter values: Max: 8 menu
115 • 0 = No calculation Unit: - Drive setting
• 1 = Start of the calculation of derived motor data Indices: - Upread/free
Additional motor data needed for vectorial current access
control can be calculated from the rating-plate data. Type: O2
Change-
As a result, these no longer have to be entered sepa- able in:
rately. The following parameters are set by the calcu-
lation: Drive setting
P103 motor no-load current Drive setting
P120 main field inductance
P121 stator resistor
P122 total leakage reactance
P123 stator reactance
P124 rotor time constant
P293 field-weakening frequency
P294 select flux reg
2 = Selection of motor identification at standstill: With the
next ON-command the automatic motor identification is
started. Parameterization of closed- loop control from the
measured motor data. The following parameters are set by
the identification:
• P111 Ls = f(Isd)
• P119 ratio Lq/Ld
• P120 main field inductance
• P121 stator resistor
• P122 total leakage reactance
• P123 stator reactance
In the case of current-controlled operation (P290=0), auto-
matic motor identification should always be performed on
start-up. In the case of P095=3 or 4, automatic parameter-
ization (P115=1) should be called after entry of all motor
data and before the start of automatic motor identification.
! CAUTION
The motor is live, and the rotor behaves
accordingly. The shaft may turn. After the P
button has been pressed, alarm “A078”
appears. The converter must be switched
on within 20 seconds.
8=Position test for synchronous motors: In this status after
power up, a stator current is impressed with U(-), V and
W(+), the absolute value of which is input via Isq (P270,
P271). If the motor is free to move slightly, a misorientation
of the motor encoder can be read on r286 (also see P549).
Further values for future use!

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P119* Function parameter for entering the ratio of the mutual Init: 0,880 Menus:
Ratio Lq/Ld inductance transversal to the rotor-axis (Lq) to the mutual Min: 0,200 Parameter
inductance along the rotor-axis (Ld) of a connected synchro- menu +
119 nous motor. Max: 5,000
Motor/
The parameter value is calculated during the automatic Unit: - encoder +
motor data identification of derived motor data (P115). Indices: - Motor data
Upread/free
access
Change-
able in:
Drive setting
P120* Function parameter for entering the main field inductance (in Init: 0,0 Menus:
Main Field mH) of a connected synchronous motor. The value to be Min: 0,0 Parameter
Induc entered is 1.5 times the inductance of a winding phase in the menu +
star equivalent circuit. Max: 2000,0
120 Motor/
Unit: - encoder +
Upread/free
access
Change-
able in:
Drive setting
P121* Function parameter for entering the stator resistance of a Init: 0 Menus:
Stator Resist connected synchronous or induction motor. The value to be Min: 0 Parameter
entered corresponds to the ohmic resistance of a winding menu +
121 phase at 20°C. Max: 50000
Motor/
Unit: mOhm encoder +
Upread/free
access
Change-
able in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P122* Function parameter for entering the total leakage reactance Init: 0 Menus:
Tot Leak of a connected induction motor. The value to be entered cor- Min: 0 Parameter
React responds to the total leakage reactance of a winding phase. menu +
The parameter value is calculated during the automatic cal- Max: 65535
122 Motor/
culation of derived motor data (P115). Unit: mOhm encoder +
Upread/free
access
Change-
able in:
Drive setting
P123* Function parameter for entering the stator reactance of a Init: 0,00 Menus:
Stator React connected induction motor. The value to be entered corre- Min: 0,00 Parameter
sponds to the stator reactance of a winding phase at 40% of menu +
123 the rated motor current. The parameter value is calculated Max: 655,00
Motor/
during the automatic calculation of derived motor data Unit: Ohm encoder +
(P115). Motor data
Indices: -
Upread/free
access
Change-
able in:
Drive setting
P124* Function parameter for entering the rotor time constant of a Init: 0 Menus:
Rotor Time- connected induction motor. The parameter value is calcu- Min: 0 Parameter
Const lated during the automatic calculation of derived motor data menu +
(P115). Max: 10000
124 Motor/
Unit: ms encoder +
Upread/free
access
Change-
able in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P127 Parameter is not used. Init: 70,0 Menus:

R(Rot)Corr'n Min: 12,5 Parameter
Tmp Max: 400,0 menu +
127 Control/gat-
Unit:% ing unit +
Indices: - Current con-
trol
Type: O2
Upread/free
access
Change-
able in:
Drive setting
P128* Function parameter for entering the maximum current Init: 6,3 Menus:
Max Current (r.m.s. value of the fundamental component). The output Min: 0,0 Parameter
current is limited to the value entered. The limitation of the menu +
128 output current serves to protect the connected motor. Max: 1000,0
Motor/
The maximum current that can be input is limited by con- Unit: A encoder +
verter current parameter P072. Any derating that may be Indices: - Motor data
necessary because of increased pulse frequency is not taken Drive setting
Type: O2
into account until r129.
Upread/free
access
Change-
able in:
Drive setting
Drive setting
r129 Visualization parameter for displaying the actually effective Dec.Plc.: 1 Menus:
I(max,set) maximum current (r.m.s. value of the fundamental compo- Unit: A Parameter
nent). If utilization of the converter or inverter exceeds menu +
129 100% (i2t calculation) or if the maximum current limit has Indices: -
Motor/
been reduced, the displayed value deviates from the value Type: I2 encoder +
set in P128. The maximum current can be reduced, for Motor data
example, by operation at a pulse frequency (P340) > 3kHz.
Drive setting
Upread/free
access

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P130* Function parameter for selecting the motor encoder. Init: 0 Menus:
Select • 0 = Automatic detection Min: 0 Parameter
MotEncod • 1 = 2-pole resolver (SBR) Max: 7 menu +
130 Motor/
• 2 = Resolver with number of pole-pairs of motor Unit: - encoder +
(SBR)
• 3 = Encoder (sine-cosine encoder) (SBM)
Type: O2 Quick
• 4 = Multi-turn encoder (SSI encoder, EQN encoder)
parameter-
(SBM)
ization
• 5 = Pulse encoder in Slot C (SBP)
Drive setting
• 6 = Pulse encoder not in Slot C (SBP)
• 7 = Encoder without C/D track (SBM)* Upread/free
* The absolute start position will not be set by the encoder access
without C/D track. This encoder has to be used only with Change-
induction motors. If the reference pulse is connected the able in:
position will be adjusted by a ramp function. Drive setting
Induction motors 1PA6, 1PL6, 1PH4 and 1PH7 with encoder:
these motors are generally delivered with an ERN1381
encoder without CD tracks. From firmware version V1.30 and
higher, the encoder type P130 = 7 has been introduced (==
encoder without CD tracks). If P130 = 3 (encoder with CD
tracks e.g. ERN1387) is selected instead, fault F051 fault
value 29 is generated (from V1.32: 25).
P131* Selection of temperature sensor with which the motor tem- Init: 1 Menus:
Select perature has to be monitored. Min: 0 Parameter
TmpSensor Setting values: Max: 3 menu +
131 Motor/
• 0 = No sensor Unit: - encoder +
• 1 = KTY84 (standard for ROTEC motors) Indices: - Motor data
• 2 = PTC (Over-temperature will be noticed at > 2000
Ohm)
• 3 = PT100 (evaluation only possible for SBP) Upread/free
access
Change-
able in:
Drive setting
P132* Function parameter for entering the angle offset of the motor Init: 0,00 Menus:
Angle Offset encoder. For synchronous motors the position of the encoder Min: -180,00 Parameter
in relation to the rotor must be known. In order to be able to menu +
132 operate synchronous servo motors with an encoder adjust- Max: 180,00
Motor/
ment which deviates from the setting for Unit: ° (alt) encoder +
Synchronous servo motors, the phase displacement angle Indices: - Encoder data
must be entered. The offset must be entered in angular Drive setting
Type: I2
degrees. The correction acts on K186 (theta I controller)
only. Upread/free
access
The actual position variable KK0090 shows a mechanical
rotor position without regarding the adjusted angle offset in Change-
P132. able in:
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
r133 Visualization parameter for displaying the non-linearized val- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
Sine/Cos Res ues of a connected resolver. The non-linearized values are Unit: - Parameter
formed after A/D conversion of the two measurement sig- menu +
133 nals. Indices: 2
Motor/
A value of about 31000 corresponds to the usual output of Type: I2 encoder +
the resolver with about 1.85V_rms at the output windings. Encoder data
In this case the excitation amounts to about 3.9V_rns. Upread/free
Index 1 = Sine track access
Index 2 = Cosine track
P134* Parameter for configuration of resolver evaluation Init: 1 Menus:

Con- • xxx0 = Pulse encoder simulation SBR2: 512 pulses Unit: - Parameter
fig.Resolver per revolution, one zero pulse (1) Indices: - menu +
134 • xxx1 = Pulse encoder simulation SBR2: 1024 pulses Motor/
Type: L2 encoder +
per revolution, one zero pulse.
A multi-pole resolver delivers several sine/cosine periods per Encoder data
revolution, thus multiplying the number of pulses and also Drive setting
the number of zero pulses by the number of pole pairs of the Upread/free
resolver. access
Change-
able in:
Drive setting
P135* Function parameter for selecting the external encoder Init: 0 Menus:
SelEx- • 0 = automatic detection Min: 0 Parameter
tEncDSP • 3 = Encoder (sine/cosine encoder) (SBM2) Max: 7 menu +
135 Motor/
• 4 = Multi-turn encoder (SSI encoder, EQN encoder) Unit: - encoder +
(SBM2)
Indices: - Encoder data
Type: O2 Quick
parameter-
ization
Drive setting
Upread/free
access
Change-
able in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P136* Function parameter for entering the number of pulses of the Init: 11 Menus:
Encoder encoder. The squared value which corresponds to the num- Min: 0 Parameter
Pulse # ber of pulses of the encoder is to be entered. menu +
Max: 15
136 Special setting 0: Number of pulses in P144 Motor/
Unit: - encoder +
Special setting 1: Without function! (Number of pulses in
P144 and actual value is inverted. (See description of P144.) Indices: - Encoder data
Pulse Number 4 - Parameter 2 Type: O2 Drive setting
Pulse Number 8 - Parameter 3 Upread/free

access
Pulse Number 16 - Parameter 4
Change-
Pulse Number 32 - Parameter 5 able in:
Pulse Number 64 - Parameter 6 Drive setting
Pulse Number 2048 - Parameter 11 (preset value)
Special setting:
Pulse Number 2048 - Parameter 15 without evaluation of the
zero pulse!
P137* Function parameter for entering the encoder pulse number Init: 2048 Menus:
Pulse ExtEn- for the external encoder (only with SBM2 board). Min: 60 Parameter
cod The maximum permissible entry value for the pulse number Max: 60000 menu +
137 is 16000. Motor/
Unit: - encoder +
Indices: - Encoder data
Upread/free
access
Change-
able in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P139* Function parameter for configuration of the setpoint encoder

ConfSetpEnc on an SBP. The setpoint encoder can either process one digi-
tal setpoint from two independent rectangular-shaped fre-
139 quency signals or, alternatively, form one setpoint from an
external pulse encoder signal and a rectangular-shaped fre-
quency signal.
• xxx0 = channel 1 / encoder input HTL unipolar
• xxx1 = channel 1 / encoder input TTL unipolar
• xxx2 = channel 1 / encoder input HTL differential
input
• xxx3 = channel 1 / encoder input TTL/RS422 differen-
tial input
• xx0x = channel 2 HTL unipolar

• xx1x = channel 2 TTL unipolar
• xx2x = channel 2 HTL differential input
• xx3x = channel 2 TTL/RS422 differential input
• x0xx = encoder with 5 V voltage supply

• x1xx = encoder with 15 V voltage supply
• 0xxx = setpoint encoder deactivated

• 1xxx = Frequency counter mode (frequency evalua-
tion)
• 2xxx = Encoder signal evaluation mode
P140* Function parameter for the pulse number of the setpoint

SetpEnc encoder.
Pulse# The parameter has to be set to the number of pulses of the
140 setpoint encoder connected to an SBP board.
If the first frequency channel of the setpoint encoder is in the
“encoder signal evaluation” mode (P139=2xxx), the parame-
ter value is used for normalizing the setpoint generation
(together with the motor ref. frequency).
P141* Function parameter for the reference frequency of the set-

SetpEncFreq point encoder.
141 The parameter value determines which input frequency

results in an output of 100% on the setpoint encoder.
If the setpoint encoder is the “frequency counter” mode
(P139=1xxx), the parameter values are used to normalize
the output values.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P142* Function parameter for activating the monitoring and posi- index1: 1011 Menus:
EncoderMoni tion correction functions of the encoder on the SBM2. Unit: - Parameter
tSBM2 Resolver Indices: 4 menu +
142 Index 1: Resolver Motor/
Type: L2 encoder +
xxx0 = Position correction deactivated with zero pulse (1) Encoder data
xxx1 = Position correction activated with zero pulse: after Drive setting
the zero pulse has occurred, the pulse counter is synchro-
nized step-by step with the zero position. Upread/free
access
Xx0x = Zero pulse monitoring deactivated (1)
Change-
xx1x = Zero pulse monitoring activated: there must be one able in:
zero pulse each revolution, otherwise error F051, error value
27 (parameter 949) is triggered. Drive setting
X0xx = Amplitude monitoring A/B track deactivated (0)

x1xx = Amplitude monitoring A/B track activated: When one
track is at zero passage, the other must have the correct
level
0xxx = A^2+B^2 Amplitude monitoring deactivated (1)
1xxx = A^2+B^2 Amplitude monitoring activated: resolver
signal must lie within the specified value range of 0.1Vss to
1.2Vss, otherwise error F051, error value 29 (parameter
949) is triggered.
External resolver
Index 2: External Resolver
xxx0 = Position correction with zero pulse monitoring deac-
tivated (1)
xxx1 = Position correction with zero pulse activated: after
the zero pulse has occurred, the pulse counter is corrected
step-by step.
Xx0x = Spare (0)
xx1x = Spare
x0xx = Amplitude monitoring A/B track deactivated (0)
x1xx = Amplitude monitoring A/B track activated: The oper-
ating voltage must attain the value set in P145.2.
Index 3: Resolver
xxx0 = The starting position is not checked (1)
xxx1 = The serial protocol must deliver the same starting
position 6 times
Index 4: External resolver
xxx0 = The starting position is not checked (1)
xxx1 = The serial protocol must deliver the same starting
position 6 times

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P143 An upper limit for the position difference of the SSI protocol index1: 0 Menus:
Max Delta permissible between two samples can be set in this parame- Min: 0 Parameter
Pos ter. The value to be set depends on the resolution and speed menu
of the resolver and on the time slot in which the protocol is Max: 65535
143 evaluated. At a value of 0, the monitoring is switched off. Unit: - Upread/free
access
Index 1: Spare Indices: 2
Change-
Index 2: External resolver Type: O2 able in:
Drive setting
P144* Input of the encoder pulse number for the motor encoder. Init: 2048 Menus:
Pulse#MotEn This parameter is active only if P136=0. Min: 60 Parameter
c P136 Max: 16000 menu +
144 0 Use of pulse number parameter for motor control Motor/
Unit: - encoder +
1 Without function! Indices: - Encoder data
Reserved for the use of inverse actual value for motor con- Type: O2 Drive setting
trol ONLY during installation of the encoder at the output via
a rigid coupling = > Upread/free
access
This arrangement serves to increase the stiffness upon large
load inertia and resulting torsion. Change-
able in:
Drive setting
P145* Setting for the voltage supply of an encoder if an SBM2 index1: 5 Menus:
Volts Enc board is used. Min: 5 Parameter
SBM2 Index 1: Voltage supply for motor encoder Max: 25 menu +
145 Index 2: Voltage supply for machine encoder Motor/
Unit: - encoder +
Irrespective of the parameterization, the maximum voltage Indices: 2 Encoder data
for TripRite units is 24VDC.
The value is entered in Volts.
Upread/free
access
Change-
able in:
Drive setting
P146* Setting of zero point offset on multi-turn absolute-value index1: 0 Menus:

ZeroPt Dis- encoders. Min: - Parameter
place The zero point offset is entered in revolutions on the motor 2147483647 menu +
146 encoder and in increments on the external encoder. Motor/
Max: encoder +
Index 1: Offset for motor encoder (in revolutions)
2147483647 Encoder data
Index 2: Offset for external encoder (in increments)
Unit: - Drive setting
Indices: 2 Upread/free
access
Type: I4
Change-
able in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P147* Function parameter for entering the type of encoder. Setting index1: 1 Menus:
SelectMulti- is performed in the “Drive settings” menu and it configures Min: 0 Parameter
turn the interface to a multi-turn encoder. menu +
Max: 7
147 Index 1 Selection of the multi-turn encoder as motor Motor/
encoder. Unit: - encoder +
Index 2 Selection of the multi-turn encoder as external Indices: 2 Encoder data
encoder. Type: O2 Drive setting
This parameter carries out all the necessary settings for Upread/free
standard encoders and overwrites the parameters P148 and access
P149. On every change of P147, parameters P148 and P149 Change-
are pre-assigned with the settings for the type of encoder able in:
selected.
Drive setting
0 No standard encoder = Parameterization in P148 and P149
by the user
1 EQN1325 => Messrs. Heidenhain
2 EQN1313 => Messrs. Heidenhain
3 SSI 25bit => Messrs. FRABA/Stegmann/TR/TWK etc.
4 SSI 21bit => Messrs. FRABA/Stegmann/TR etc.
5 SSI 13bit => Messrs. FRABA/Stegmann/TR/TWK etc.
6 EnDat (Messrs. Heidenhain), data are read out of the
encoder, e.g. LC181 linear scale.
7 EQI1325 (Messrs. Heidenhain)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P148* Function parameter for entering the resolution of the multi- index1: 11 Menus:
Pulse#Multi- turn encoder. The resolution is indicated in bits. Min: 0 Parameter
turn • Index 01: Motor encoder resolution/rev. Max: 500 menu +
148 • Index 02: Motor encoder number of revolutions Motor/
Unit: - encoder +
• Index 03: External encoder resolution /rev. or of lin-
Indices: 6 Encoder data
ear axis
• Index 04: External encoder number of revolutions Type: O2 Drive setting
• Index 05: Resolution ratio opt. signal period ser. pro- Upread/free
tocol (linear scale of motor encoder) (spare), not yet access
supported in V1.40. Change-
• Index 06: Resolution ratio opt. signal period resolu- able in:
tion of ser. protocol (linear scale of external encoder), Drive setting
not supported in V1.40.
Indices 1…4:
A = Resolution in bits on SSI encoder, number of pulses on
incremental encoders, Revolutions on multi-turn encoders
B = Parameter value, presetting
A1-B0
A2-B1
A4-B2
A8-B3
A 16 - B 4
A 32 - B 5
A 64 - B 6
A 128 - B 7
A 256 - B 8
A 512 - B 9
A 1024 - B 10
A 2048 - B 11 (Single-turn motor encoder)
A 4096 - B 12 (Multi-turn motor and external encoder)
A 8192 - B 13 (Single-turn external encoder)
A 16384 - B 14
A 32768 - B 15
A 64536 - B 16 (max. value for rotary encoder)
A 2147483648 - B 31
A 4294968296 - B 32 (max. value for linear scale)
Indices 5 to 6 (for linear scales only, not yet supported in
V1.40)!
Scaling ratio between resolution of sine/cosine tracks and
resolution (length of one increment) of the serial protocol
(see data sheet of the encoder concerned).
Example: linear scale LC 181 (Heidenhain): Signal period
opt. tracks 16µm Resolution ser. protocol 0.1µm => division
ratio P148.6 = 160

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P149* Function parameter for describing the serial protocol of code

Conf Protocol encoders
149 Settings of motor encoder

Index 01: General baud rate, SSI/EnDat) (101)
xxx0 = SSI encoder
xxx1 = EnDat encoder
xx0x = Baud rate 100kHz up to 150m / encoder data sheet
xx1x = Baud rate 500kHz up to 100m
xx2x = Baud rate 1MHz up to 50m
xx3x = Baud rate 2MHz up to 10m
x0xx = Encoder without incremental tracks
x1xx = Motor encoder with incremental tracks monitoring of
pulse counter by serial protocol
0xxx = Rotary encoder
Index 02/08:
xxzz = zz = Number of protocol bits (EnDat)
x0xx = Read position value (EnDat)
x3xx = Write parameter (EnDat)
x4xx = Read parameter (EnDat)
xAxx = Self-start-up EnDat
xBxx = Write zero point offset - encoder EEPROM (EnDat)
Adopts the parameter in encoder EEPROM
Index 03/09:
xxxz = z = Number of non-significant leading zero bits (SSI)
xx0x = Digital data (SSI)
xx1x = Gray-coded data (SSI)
x0xx = No alarm bit (SSI)
xzxx = Position of alarm bit after last data bit (SSI)
0xxx = No parity bit (SSI)
1xxx = Parity bit (SSI)
Index 04: MRS Code (Memory area, EnDat encoder only)
zzzz = MRS code (memory area selection) (EnDat)
AF = Memory area for customer parameters
xx = After EnDat specification/encoder data sheet
Index 05: Parameter address (EnDat encoder only)
zzzz = Parameter address (EnDat)
O…F = memory area for customer parameter
xxxx = After EnDat specification/encoder data sheet
Index 06: Parameter value (EnDat encoder only)
zzzz = Parameter value (EnDat) Parameter value after MRS
code and address

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P149* Index 07: Settings of external encoders (000)

(Continued) xxx0 = SSI encoder
xxx1 = EnDat encoder
xx0x = Baud rate 100kHz to 150m / encoder Data sheet
xx1x = Baud rate 500kHz to 100m
xx2x = Baud rate 1MHz to 50m
xx3x = Baud rate 2MHz to 10m
x0xx = Encoder without incremental tracks
x1xx = Evaluation of incremental tracks
0xxx = Rotary encoder
1xxx = Linear measure
Index 08: Protocol setup EnDat (0)
xxzz = zz = Number of protocol bits (EnDat)
x0xx = Read position value (EnDat)
x3xx = Read parameter (EnDat)
x4xx = Write parameter (EnDat)
xAxx = Self-start-up EnDat
xBxx = Write zero point offset - encoder EEPROM (EnDat)
Adopts the parameter in encoder EEPROM
Index 09: Protocol setup SSI (10)
xxxz = z = Number of non-significant leading zero bits (SSI)
xx0x = Binary data (SSI)
xx1x = Gray-coded data (SSI)
x0xx = No alarm bit (SSI)
xzxx = Position of alarm bit after last data bit (SSI)
0xxx = No parity bit (SSI)
1xxx = Parity bit (SSI)
Index 10: MRS code (memory area, only EnDat encoder)
(0)
zzzz = MRS code (memory area selection) (EnDat)
AF = Memory area for customer parameters
xx = After EnDat specification/encoder data sheet
Index 11: Parameter address (only EnDat encoder) (0)
zzzz = Parameter address (EnDat)
0…F = Memory area for customer parameter
xxxx = After EnDat specification/encoder data sheet
Index 12: Parameter value (only EnDat encoder) (0)
zzzz = Parameter value (EnDat) Parameter value after MRS
code and address

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P150* Function parameter for configuring the SBP pulse encoder index1: 0 Menus:
SBP Config board. Unit: - Parameter
150 • Index 01: Motor encoder (SBP in slot C) Indices: 2 menu +
• Index 02: Machine encoder Motor/
Type: L2 encoder +
Encoder data
• xxx0 = A/B tracks HTL unipolar
Drive setting
• xxx1 = A/B tracks TTL unipolar
Upread/free
• xxx2 = A/B tracks HTL differential input
access
• xxx3 = A/B tracks TTL/RS422 differential input
Change-
able in:
• xx0x = Zero track HTL unipolar
Drive setting
• xx1x = Zero track TTL unipolar
• xx2x = Zero track HTL differential input
• xx3x = Zero track TTL/RS422 differential input
• x0xx = Encoder mit 5 V voltage supply

• x1xx = Encoder mit 15 V voltage supply
P151* Function parameter for entering the number of pulses of the index1: 1024 Menus:
Pulse # pulse encoder. Min: 60 Parameter
151 • Index 01: Motor encoder (SBP in Slot C) Max: 20000 menu +
• Index 02: Machine encoder Motor/
Unit: - encoder +
Indices: 2 Encoder data
Upread/free
access
Change-
able in:
Drive setting
P152* Function parameter for entering the weighting factor for the index1: 1 Menus:
extEnAVWF( actual position of the external encoder. With the help of the Min: 0 Parameter
befDP) actual-value weighting factor, the actual position measured menu +
can be converted to another reference system. Max: 999
152 Control/gat-
The parameter value entered is an integral value represent- Unit: - ing unit +
ing the component of the actual-value weighting factor. The Indices: 2 Position con-
real weighting-factor of the actual value is obtained by add- trol
Type: O2
ing P152 to (P153 / 100000000). Drive setting
Example: Upread/free
P152 = 5, P153 = 10000000 from which follows: Actual- access
value weighting factor = 5.1 Change-
able in:
Drive setting
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P153* Function parameter for entering the evaluation factor for the index1: 0 Menus:
extEnAVWF( position actual value for the external encoder. With the aid of Min: 0 Parameter
aftDP) the actual-value evaluation factor, the measured position menu +
actual value can be converted to another reference system. Max:
153 Control/gat-
The entered parameter value represents the broken compo- 99999999 ing unit +
nent of the actual-value evaluation factor. The actual evalua- Position con-
Unit: -
tion factor is calculated from the total of P152+(P153 / trol
100000000). Indices: 2
Drive setting
The broken component is entered as 8 digits. This results in Type: O4
an accuracy of 8 positions after the decimal point for the Upread/free
actual-value evaluation factor. access
Example: Change-
able in:
P152 = 5, P153=00000321 results in: actual-value evalua-
tion factor=5.00000321 Drive setting
Drive setting
P154* Function parameter for determining the fine resolution of the Init: 0 Menus:
FineResEx- external encoder. Min: 0 Parameter
tEnc The number of bits which are to contain the fine-resolution Max: 30 menu
154 information are input. The position actual-value is expanded Drive setting
from the right by this information. Unit: -
For this, the incoming rough position is pushed to the left by access
the number of bits, and the fine-resolution bits are assumed Type: O2
according to the position actual-value. Change-
able in:
If an encoder or multi-turn encoder with incremental tracks
(e.g. EQN1325) is used as an external encoder in conjunc- Drive setting
tion with an SMB2 as an evaluation board, fine resolution is Drive setting
available. If another encoder or evaluation board is used, the
value zero is generally assumed as the fine-resolution por-
tion of the position.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.6.5 Closed-Loop Control / Gating Unit
P155* BICO parameter for selecting the connector index1: 0 Menus:

SrcPosSetV- from which the position setting value is to be Unit: - Parameter menu +
MEncod read in. Control/gating unit
Indices: 2
155 + Position control
Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
P156* BICO parameter for selecting the binector from index1: 0 Menus:
SrcSetPos- which the command for setting the actual posi- Unit: - Parameter menu +
MEncod tion is to be read in. Control/gating unit
Indices: 2
Type: L2,B
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting

SrcPosCorrV- from which the corrected position value is to be Unit: - Parameter menu +
MEnc read in. Control/gating unit
Indices: 2
Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
P158* BICO parameter for selecting the binectors from index1: 0 Menus:
SrcCorrPos- which the commands for correcting the actual Unit: - Parameter menu +
MEnc position are to be read in. Control/gating unit
Indices: 4
158 Index 1: Addition of the corrected value + Position control
Type: L2,B
Index 2: Subtraction of the corrected value Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting

SrcRefSetV- from which the actual position is to be read in Unit: - Parameter menu +
MEnc during the Reference Point Detection operating Control/gating unit
mode. Indices: 2
Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Table 5-13: Closed-Loop Control / Gating Unit

"Uncontrolled Copy"
SrcRelRefMEn- which the command for releasing the Refer- Unit: - Parameter menu +
cod ence-Point Detection operating mode is to be Control/gating unit
read in. Indices: 2
Type: L2,B
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
SrcRelMV- which the command for releasing the mea- Unit: - Parameter menu +
lMemMEnc sured-value memory is to be read in. Control/gating unit
Indices: 2
Type: L2,B
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
r163 Visualization parameter for displaying the mea- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

MeasValStore sured value memory for the external machine Unit: - Parameter menu +
encoder. Control/gating unit
163 Indices: -
+ Position control
Type: I4
Upread/free access
Table 5-13: Closed-Loop Control / Gating Unit (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P166* Function parameter for configuring the operat- index1: 0 Menus:

ConfPosSens- ing modes “Position detection” and “Reference Unit: - Parameter menu +
MEnc point detection” for the external encoder. Control/gating unit
Indices: 2
166 • xxx0 = Position detection not enabled + Position control
Type: L2
• xxx1 = Position detection enabled An Upread/free access
external encoder must be present for Changeable in:
enabling external position detection.
• xx0x = Reference point detection not Drive setting
enabled
• xx1x = Reference point detection, first
fine pulse on the right of the rough pulse
• xx2x = Reference point detection, first
fine pulse on the left of the rough pulse
• xx3x = Reference point detection only
fine pulse
• x0xx = Clockwise rotation of encoder
• x1xx = Anti-clockwise rotation of the
encoder (reversing)
Changeover from the “Position detection” oper-
ating mode to the “Reference point detection”
operating mode is made by the command
“Enable reference point detection” (P159)
• 0xxx = Position-feedback scaling factor
as decimal fraction in parameter P0152
(to the left of the decimal point) anf
P0152 (to the right of the decimal point).
• 1xxx = Position-feedback scaling factor
as fraction with numerator P0181.1 and
denominator P0181.2
Index 2:
• xxx0 = No account taken of the zero
point offset of an encoder (KK0088)
• xxx1 = Addition of the zero point offset of
an encoder to an SBM2 for actual value
(corresponds to referencing on the fly)

SrcPosOffset- from which the offset for correcting the actual Unit: - Parameter menu +
MEnc position generated by the position detection is Control/gating unit
to be read in. Indices: 2
Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
r168 Visualization parameter for displaying the posi- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Pos tion actual-value calculated by the position Unit: - Parameter menu +
(act,MachEn) detection of the machine encoder. Control/gating unit
Indices: -
Type: I4
Upread/free access

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P169* Function parameter for entering the weighting Init: 1 Menus:

extEnAVWF(be factor for the actual position of the external Min: 0 Parameter menu +
fDP) encoder. With the help of the actual-value Control/gating unit
weighting factor, the actual position measured Max: 999
can be converted to another reference system. Unit: -
Drive setting
The parameter value entered is an integral Indices: -
value representing the component of the actual- Upread/free access
Type: O2
value weighting factor. The real weighting-fac- Changeable in:
tor of the actual value is obtained by adding
Drive setting
P152 to (P153 / 100000000).
Drive setting
Example:
P152 = 5, P153 = 10000000 from which fol-
lows: Actual-value weighting factor = 5.1
P170* Function parameter for entering the weighting Init: 0 Menus:

extEnAVWF(af factor for the actual position. With the help of Min: 0 Parameter menu +
tDP) the actual-value weighting factor, the actual Control/gating unit
position measured can be converted to another Max:
reference system. The parameter value entered 99999999
represents the fractional component of the Drive setting
Unit: -
actual-value weighting factor. The real weight- Upread/free access
ing factor of the actual value is obtained by add- Indices: -
Changeable in:
ing P169 to (P170/100000000). The fractional Type: O4
component is entered to 8 decimal points. The Drive setting
actual-value weighting factor is thus accurate to Drive setting
8 decimal places.
Example:
Position-feedback scaling factor: 5.00321
Input P169 = 5, P170 = 00321000
Input P169 = 2, P170 = 00000123
Input P169 = 0, P170 = 50000000
NOTICE
The following zeroes (P170) must
be input.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P171* Function parameter for defining the position Init: 12 Menus:

Pos Resolution resolution. This parameter defines the resolu- Min: 9 Parameter menu +
tion with which the position measured at the Control/gating unit
171 motor encoder is provided for further process- Max: 30
+ Position control
ing. The number of increments is set which is to Unit: -
correspond to one mechanical revolution. The Upread/free access
Indices: -
squared value is to be entered as the parameter Changeable in:
value. Type: O2
Drive setting
Inc./Rev. 512 - Parameter value 9
Inc./Rev. 4096 - Parameter value 12 (preset
value)
Example:
P171=12 After one mechanical revolution, the
conditioned actual position value is 00001000H.
P172* BICO parameter for selecting the connector Init: 0 Menus:

Src Pos SetV from which the position setting value is to be Unit: - Parameter menu +
read in. Control/gating unit
172 Indices: -
+ Position control
Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
P173* BICO parameter for selecting the binector from Init: 302 Menus:
Src Set Posi- which the command for setting the actual posi- Unit: - Parameter menu +
tion tion is to be read in. Control/gating unit
Indices: -
Type: L2,B
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting

Src PosCorr’nV from which the corrected position value is to be Unit: - Parameter menu +
174 Indices: -
+ Position control
Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src Pos Corr’n which the commands for correcting the actual Unit: - Parameter menu +
position are to be read in. Control/gating unit
175 Indices: 2
Index 1: Addition of the corrected value + Position control
Type: L2,B
Index 2: Subtraction of the corrected value Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting

Src Ref SetV from which the actual position is to be read in Unit: - Parameter menu +
during the Reference Point Detection operating Control/gating unit
176 mode. Indices: -
+ Position control
Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src Release which the command for releasing the Refer- Unit: - Parameter menu +
Ref ence-Point Detection operating mode is to be Control/gating unit
read in. Indices: -
Type: L2,B
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src Rough which the rough pulse is to be read in during the Unit: - Parameter menu +
Pulse Reference-Point Detection operating mode. Control/gating unit
Indices: -
Type: L2,B
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
SrcRelMVal- which the command for releasing the mea- Unit: - Parameter menu +
Volts sured-value memory is to be read in. Control/gating unit
Indices: -
Type: L2,B
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P180* The parameter defines the actual value weight- index1: 1 Menus:
AVWF.Num/ ing factor as a fraction with numerator and Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Denom denominator. This makes sense with rotational Control/gating unit
axes whenever the position-feedback scaling Max:
factor, consisting of digits before and after the 2147483647
decimal point cannot be displayed with 8 deci- Drive setting
Unit: -
mal places. Upread/free access
Indices: 2
Parameter P183 is used for selecting between Changeable in:
input of the position-feedback scaling factor in Type: I4
Drive setting
decimal form with digits before and after the
decimal point and input of a fraction with Drive setting
numerator and denominator.
Index 1: Numerator
Index 2: Denominator
P181* The parameter defines the actual value weight- index1: 1 Menus:
extEnAVWF.N ing factor (AVWF) of the external encoder as Min: 0 Parameter menu +
umDe fraction with numerator and denominator. This Motor/encoder +
makes sense with rotational axes whenever the Max:
181 Encoder data +
position-feedback scaling factor, consisting of 2147483647 Control/gating unit
digits before and after the decimal point cannot + Position control
Unit: -
be displayed with 8 decimal places.
Indices: 2 Drive setting
Parameter P166 is used for selecting between
input of the actual value weighting factor for the Type: I4 Upread/free access
external encoder in decimal form with digits Changeable in:
before and after the decimal point and input of a
Drive setting
fraction with numerator and denominator.
Drive setting
Index 1: Numerator
Index 2: Denominator
P182* This parameter defines the source connector for Init: 90 Menus:
Src Angle Pos the position actual value detection for the motor Unit: - Parameter menu +
encoder in slot C. The connector can be con- Control/gating unit
182 nected both to the rotor position (KK90) and to Indices: -
+ Position control
the angle of the machine encoder (KK104). Type: L2,K,K
Drive setting
If the motor encoder is a multi-pole resolver
and it is also to be used for referencing with a Upread/free access
proximity switch and zero pulse, KK96 has to be Changeable in:
connected up to position sensing (P182) instead
Drive setting
of KK90. The multi-pole resolver supplies quasi
Zp zero pulses per mechanical revolution. The
number of pole pairs also has to be taken into
account in the denominator of the IBF factor
(P180.2) - see P109 or the Compendium - in
order to compensate for the higher resolution of
KK96.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P183* Function parameter for configuring the Position index1: 11 Menus:

Conf Pos Detection and Reference-Point Detection oper- Unit: - Parameter menu +
Sensing ating modes. Control/gating unit
Indices: 2
183 Index 1: + Position control
Type: L2
xxx0 = disables the position detection Upread/free access
xxx1 = enables the position detection for Changeable in:
resolver or encoder Drive setting
xxx2 = enables the position detection for multi-
turn encoder
xx0x = Reference-Point Detection not released
xx1x = Reference-Point Detection to the right
of the rough pulse
xx2x = Reference-Point Detection to the left of
the rough pulse
The changeover from the Position Detection
mode to the Reference-Point Detection mode is
made by means of the command “Release Ref-
erence-Point Detection” (P177).
X1xx = Inversion of the counting direction for
position detection. Parameterization is only nec-
essary for the following special case: position
detection is by means of an external encoder
(sin/cos encoder or multi-turn encoder). Posi-
tion evaluation is to be by means of the fast
position detection for the motor encoder
(P182=104, P135=3/4). If the direction of rota-
tion of motor and encoder is different in this
configuration, the x1xx parameter value must
be set.
0xxx = position-feedback scaling factor as dec-
imal fraction in parameter P0169 (places before
the decimal point) and P0170 (places after the
decimal point)
1xxx = position-feedback scaling factor as frac-
tion with numerator P0180.1 and denominator
P0180.2.
Index 2:
xxx0 = No account is taken of the zero point
offset of an encoder (KK0089)
xxx1 = Addition of the zero point offset of an
encoder to an SBM2 for actual position value
(corresponds to referencing on the fly)
P183* xx0x = Reference point detection: The position

(Continued) is set to the value of source P176.
xx1x = Reference point detection: The position
is measured and output at KK124.

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Src Pos Offset from which the offset for correcting the actual Unit: - Parameter menu +
position generated by the position detection is Control/gating unit
184 to be read in. Indices: -
+ Position control
Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
r185 Visualization parameter for displaying the actual Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Pos (act Mot) position determined by the position detection. Unit: - Parameter menu +
185 Index 1: Actual position value Indices: 2 Control/gating unit
Index 2: Actual position value with offset + Position control
Type: I4
Upread/free access
r186 Index 1: measurement Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

MeasValStore Index 2: measurement with offset Unit: - Parameter menu +
186 Indices: 2 Control/gating unit
+ Position control
Type: I4
Upread/free access
P187* Parameter for entering the time slot in which Init: 2 Menus:
TimeSlot Pos- the connector soft-wired in Src Position Setpoint Min: 2 - Parameter menu
Setp P190 is generated. + Free blocks
Max: 10
187 (Analogous to U060 Sample&Hold element Upread/free access
Parameter for entering the slower time slot) Unit: -
Indices: - Changeable in:
P188* This parameter enables an offset between the Init: 0,000 Menus:
Offset Rotor- mechanical rotor position and the rotor position Min: -200,000 Parameter menu
Pos used for position sensing to be set. The offset is
used during referencing if the rotor zero position Max: 199,999 Upread/free access
188 falls together with the negative edge of the Unit: - Changeable in:
rough pulse.
Indices: - Drive setting
Type: I4 Ready
r189 The parameter outputs the measured rotor Dec.Plc.: 3 Menus:

RotorPosBe- position at the negative flank of the rough Unit: - Parameter menu +
roEdge pulse. Control/gating unit
Indices: -
Type: I4
Upread/free access
Src Pos Setp from which the setpoint for the position control- Unit: - Parameter menu +
ler is to be read in. Control/gating unit
190 Indices: 2
+ Position control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P191* Function parameter for entering the smoothing index1: 0,0 Menus:
Smooth Pos time constant for the position setpoint. Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
Set Max: 1000,0 Control/gating unit
Unit: ms
Upread/free access
Indices: 4,FDS
Changeable in:
Type: O2
Drive setting
Ready

Src SetV Pos- from which the setting value for position-set- Unit: - Parameter menu +
Set point smoothing is to be read in. Control/gating unit
Indices: 2
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src Set PosSet which the command for setting position-setpoint Unit: - Parameter menu +
smoothing is to be read in. Control/gating unit
193 Indices: 2
+ Position control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src Pos ActV from which the actual value for the position con- Unit: - Parameter menu +
troller is to be read in. Control/gating unit
194 Indices: 2
+ Position control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Smooth Pos time constant for the actual position. Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
Act Max: 1000,0 Control/gating unit
Unit: ms
Upread/free access
Indices: 4
Changeable in:
,FDS
Drive setting
Type: O2
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Src SetV Pos- from which the setting value for smoothing of Unit: - Parameter menu +
Act the actual position is to be read in. Control/gating unit
Indices: 2,BDS
Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src Set PosAct which the command for setting smoothing of Unit: - Parameter menu +
the actual position is to be read in. Control/gating unit
197 Indices: 2
+ Position control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
r198 Visualization parameter for displaying the devi- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

PosActSetp ation (actual/setpoint difference) of the position Unit: - Parameter menu +
Diff controller. Control/gating unit
Indices: -
Type: I4
Upread/free access
Smooth Pos time constant for the deviation (actual/setpoint Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
Diff difference) of the position controller. Control/gating unit
Max: 1000,0
Unit: ms
Upread/free access
Indices: 4
Changeable in:
,FDS
Drive setting
Type: O2
Ready
r200 Visualization parameter for displaying the posi- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Pos Setp Pos- tion setpoint directly at the input of the position Unit: - Parameter menu +
Reg controller. Control/gating unit
Indices: -
Type: I4
Upread/free access

Pos ActV Pos- position directly at the input of the position con- Unit: - Parameter menu +
Reg troller. Control/gating unit
Indices: -
Type: I4
Upread/free access

"Uncontrolled Copy"
SrcPosRegLim from which the output limitation of the position Unit: - Parameter menu +
controller is to be read in. Control/gating unit
202 Indices: 2
+ Position control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting

Src PosRe- from which the input signal for gain adaptation Unit: - Parameter menu +
gAdapt of the position controller is to be read in. Control/gating unit
Indices: 2
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting
P204 Function parameter for entering the Kv factor index1: 0,100 Menus:
Pos Reg Kv for the position controller in [mm/min]/[µm]. Min: 0,000 Parameter menu +
204 Max: 20,000 Control/gating unit
+ Position control
Unit: -
Upread/free access
Indices: 4
Changeable in:
,FDS
Drive setting
Type: O2
Ready
P205* Rated speed for position control. At this param- Init: 12288 Menus:
V rat eter the speed resulting at 100% speed actual- Min: 1 Parameter menu +
value of the motor has to be indicated. The unit Control/gating unit
205 is 1000(LE/min), preferably (mm/min). Max:
+ Position control
The factory setting value refers to a motor with 2000000000
Upread/free access
3000 (RPM) and an actual value weighting fac- Unit: -
tor of 1.0. Changeable in:
Indices: -
Drive setting
Type: O4
P206* Function parameter for entering the reset time index1: 0 Menus:
Pos Reg Time of the position controller. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
206 0 = Position controller works as a P controller Max: 10000 Control/gating unit
>0 = Position controller works as a PI controller + Position control
Unit: ms
Upread/free access
Indices: 4
Changeable in:
,FDS
Drive setting
Type: O2
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P207* Function parameter for entering the position index1: 100,0 Menus:
PosRegLimit- controller limits. The absolute amount to which Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
Fix the output of the position controller is to be lim- Control/gating unit
ited. The limitation is effective both in a positive Max: 199,9
and a negative direction. Unit:%
Upread/free access
Indices: 4
Changeable in:
,FDS
Drive setting
Type: O2
Ready
r208 Actually active KP factor of the position control- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

PosReg- ler with the influencing variables Kv factor, Kv Unit: - Parameter menu +
Gain(act) adaption, AVWF and rated speed. With this fac- Control/gating unit
tor the deviation of the position control is multi- Indices: -
plied. The KP factor additionally includes Type: I4
conversion of the normalization to the internal% Upread/free access
representation.
KP = (AVWF * Kv)/Vrat *4000 0000h (corre-
sponds to 100%)
AVWF = Actual value weighting factor (in ger-
man: IBF)
Kv = Gain of position control loop
Vrat = rated speed
P209* Parameter for selecting the connector which index1: 312 Menus:
Src PRE Pos- supplies the speed pre-control value. This usu- Unit: - Parameter menu +
Reg ally comes from the technology, synchronous Control/gating unit
operation or positioning. Indices: 2
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src 1 Rel Pos- which the 1st command for releasing the posi- Unit: - Parameter menu +
Reg tion controller is to be read in. Control/gating unit
Indices: 2
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src2 Rel Pos- which the2nd command for releasing the posi- Unit: - Parameter menu +
Reg tion controller is to be read in. Control/gating unit
Indices: 2
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src Ctrl Setp from which the motor speed for the Control Unit: - Parameter menu +
operating mode of the position controller is to Control/gating unit
212 be read in. Indices: 2
+ Position control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src Release which the command for releasing the Control Unit: - Parameter menu +
Ctrl operating mode for the position controller is to Control/gating unit
be read in. Indices: 2
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
r214 Visualization parameter for displaying the speed Dec.Plc.: 3 Menus:

Pos Reg Out- setpoint at the position controller output. Unit:% Parameter menu +
put Indices: - Control/gating unit
Type: I4
Upread/free access

Src n(set) from which the setpoint for the speed controller Unit: - Parameter menu +
is to be read in. Control/gating unit
220 Indices: 2
+ Speed control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting
P221 Function parameter for entering the smoothing index1: 0,0 Menus:
Smooth n(set) time constant for the speed setpoint. Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
+ Speed control
Unit: ms
Upread/free access
Indices: 4
Changeable in:
,FDS
Drive setting
Type: O2
Ready
P222* Input connector for the actual speed. BICO Init: 91 Menus:
Src n(act) parameter for selecting the connector from Unit: - Parameter menu +
which the actual value for the speed controller is Control/gating unit
222 to be read in. Indices: -
+ Speed control
Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P223 Function parameter for entering the smoothing Init: 0,0 Menus:
Smooth n(act) time constant for the actual speed. Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
+ Speed control
Unit: ms
Upread/free access
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Type: O2
Drive setting
Ready

Src 1 n(set/ from which the 1st signal for calculating the dif- Unit: - Parameter menu +
act) ference (actual/setpoint difference) for the Control/gating unit
speed controller is to be read in. The connected Indices: 2
224 + Speed control
signal is treated as a setpoint and added to the ,BDS
other signals. Preferably, additional setpoints, Upread/free access
Type: L2,K,K
pre-control values or the droop (KK0157) are Changeable in:
connected.
Drive setting
Src2 n(set/ from which the 2nd signal for calculating the dif- Unit: - Parameter menu +
225 + Speed control
signal is treated as a setpoint and added to the ,BDS
other signals. Upread/free access
Type: L2,K,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src3 n(set/ from which the 3rd signal for calculating the dif- Unit: - Parameter menu +
226 + Speed control
signal is treated as an actual value and sub- ,BDS
tracted from the other signals. Upread/free access
Type: L2,K,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting

Src4 n(set/ from which the 4th signal for calculating the dif- Unit: - Parameter menu +
227 + Speed control
signal is treated as an actual value and sub- ,BDS
tracted from the other signals. Upread/free access
Type: L2,K,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src n(Devia- from which the deviation (actual/setpoint differ- Unit: - Parameter menu +
tion) ence) for the speed controller is to be read in. Control/gating unit
Indices: 2
228 + Speed control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting
r229 Visualization parameter for displaying the Dec.Plc.: 2 Menus:

n (Setp smoothed speed setpoint. Unit: 1/min Parameter menu +
Smooth) Indices: - Control/gating unit
229 + Speed control
Type: I4
Upread/free access

n (ActV smoothed speed actual value. Unit: 1/min Parameter menu +
Smooth) Indices: - Control/gating unit
230 + Speed control
Type: I4
Upread/free access
P231 This filter option is switched off for a parameter index1: 0 Menus:
n(act)_filter value of 0. Min: 0 Parameter menu
231 A second-order Bessel low-pass filter is Max: 500 Upread/free access
switched into the actual speed value channel for
values greater than 0. Unit: - Changeable in:
The parameter value is the base frequency of Indices: 2 Drive setting
the low-pass. (Frequency in Hz). Type: O2 Ready

Src n-Reg from which the input signal for gain adaptation Unit: - Parameter menu +
Adapt of the speed controller is to be read in. Control/gating unit
Indices: 2
232 + Speed control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting
P233* Function parameter for entering the 1st charac- index1: 0,0 Menus:
n-Reg Adapt 1 teristic curve point for gain adaptation of the Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
speed controller. Control/gating unit
233 Max: 200,0
+ Speed control
Unit:%
Upread/free access
Indices: 4
Changeable in:
,FDS
Drive setting
Type: O2
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P234* Function parameter for entering the 2nd charac- index1: 100,0 Menus:
n-Reg Adapt 2 teristic curve point for GAIN adaptation of the Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
speed controller. Control/gating unit
234 Max: 200,0
+ Speed control
Unit:%
Upread/free access
Indices: 4
Changeable in:
,FDS
Drive setting
Type: O2
Ready
P235* Function parameter for entering the 1st gain index1: 10,0 Menus:
n-Reg Gain1 value for gain adaptation of the speed control- Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
ler. Starting from the factory setting, this value Control/gating unit
can be used to reset the gain of the speed con- Max: 1000,0
+ Speed control
troller. Unit: -
Upread/free access
Indices: 4
Changeable in:
,FDS
Drive setting
Type: O2
Ready
235 Function parameter for entering the 2nd gain index1: 10,0 Menus:
P236* value for gain adaptation of the speed control- Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
ler. Control/gating unit
n-RegGain2 Max: 1000,0
+ Speed control
236 Unit: -
Upread/free access
Indices: 4
Changeable in:
,FDS
Drive setting
Type: O2
Ready
r237 Visualization parameter for displaying the cur- Dec.Plc.: 1 Menus:

n-Reg rent proportional gain in the speed controller. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Gain(act) Indices: - Control/gating unit
237 + Speed control
Type: I2
Upread/free access

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P238* Selection of characteristic for the speed control- Init: 0 Menus:

n-Reg Charac- ler. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
ter P238 = 0: PI controller (standard) Max: 7 Control/gating unit
238 The speed controller is optimized according to + Speed control
Unit: -
the familiar rules, e.g. symmetrical optimum. Upread/free access
Indices: -
During optimization, e.g. after symmetrical Changeable in:
optimum for a good response to disturbances, Type: O2
Drive setting
there is an overshoot in the control perfor-
mance. This overshoot in control performance
should be reduced by a corresponding setpoint
smoothing (e.g. P221) or with the aid of the ref-
erence model (P238 = 1).
P238 = 1: PIR controller (reference model for
the I component)
With the aid of the PIR controller characteristic
(reference model) the control performance of
the speed controller can be improved (reduction
of overshoot). Precondition is the setting
according to PI controller conditions (see above
P238 = 0). In addition, for the PIR controller
(P238=1), the time constant of the reference
model (P239) shall be adjusted to such an
extent that, for example, in the case of a set-
point jump only the slightest overshoot perfor-
mance will occur.
P239* Smoothing for the I component at the PIR speed index1: 2,0 Menus:
Smoothing I controller characteristic. Min: 0,5 Parameter menu +
Comp If the equipment conditions permit, proceed in Max: 20,0 Control/gating unit
239 the following manner: Set TN (P240) to value 0 + Speed control
(make a note of the original value!) and trace Unit: ms
Upread/free access
K0155 at a setpoint jump; the time constant Indices: 4
(P239) has to be adjusted in such a manner that Changeable in:
,FDS
the area above and below the zero line of K0155 Drive setting
is approximately equal; TN (P240) then has to Type: O2
Ready
be reset to the original value.
P240* Function parameter for entering the reset time index1: 50 Menus:
n-Reg Time of the speed controller. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
240 Max: 1000 Control/gating unit
+ Speed control
Unit: ms
Upread/free access
Indices: 4
Changeable in:
,FDS
Drive setting
Type: O2
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Src SetV n- from which the set value for the I component of Unit: - Parameter menu +
Reg1 the speed controller is to be read in. Control/gating unit
Indices: 2
241 + Speed control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src Set n- which the command for setting the I component Unit: - Parameter menu +
Reg1 of the speed controller is to be read in. The set Control/gating unit
value is adopted when the edge of the signal Indices: 2
242 + Speed control
rises. ,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src n-Reg1 which the command for halting the I component Unit: - Parameter menu +
STOP of the speed controller is to be read in. When Control/gating unit
the value of the signal connected to the binector Indices: 2
243 + Speed control
is a logical “1”, the I component of the speed ,BDS
controller is halted. From then onwards, the Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
speed controller only works as a P controller. Changeable in:
Drive setting
P244* Source for speed measurement of the external Init: 0 Menus:

Q.Speed ext. encoder. Connector KK90 or KK104 can be used Unit: - Parameter menu
here.
244 Indices: - Upread/free access
Type: L2,K,K Changeable in:
Drive setting

Src Droop from which the input signal for the droop is to Unit: - Parameter menu +
be read in. Preferably, the I component of the Control/gating unit
245 speed controller (K0155) is connected here. Indices: 2
+ Speed control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting
P246* Function parameter for scaling the droop. index1: 0,0 Menus:
Scale Droop Parameter values greater than 0 lead to lower- Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
ing of the speed setpoint when load is applied to Control/gating unit
246 the drive and thus to a deviation of the speed Max: 100,0
+ Speed control
from the main setpoint. Unit:%
Upread/free access
Indices: 4
Changeable in:
,FDS
Drive setting
Type: O2
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Src DT1 Func- from which the input signal of the DT1 function Unit: - Parameter menu +
tion is to be read in. Control/gating unit
Indices: 2
248 + Speed control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting
DT1 Function time T1 of the DT1 function. Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
T1 Max: 10,0 Control/gating unit
249 + Speed control
Unit: ms
Upread/free access
Indices: 4
Changeable in:
,FDS
Drive setting
Type: O2
Ready
P250* Function parameter for entering the differential index1: 0,0 Menus:
DT1 Function time Td of the DT1 function. Min: 0,0 Parameter menu
Td Max: 1000,0 Upread/free access
250 Unit: ms Changeable in:
Indices: 4,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready
P251* Function parameter for entering the gain of the Init: 100,0 Menus:
Band-Stop band-stop filter. Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
Gain Max: 150,0 Control/gating unit
251 + Speed control
Unit:%
Upread/free access
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Type: O2
Drive setting

Src Band-Stop from which the input signal for the band-stop Unit: - Parameter menu +
filter is to be read in. A band-stop filter can be Control/gating unit
252 used specifically to prevent excitation of Indices: -
+ Speed control
mechanical or electrical resonances. Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P253* Quality of the band-stop filter index1: 0,0 Menus:

Qty Band-Stop Function parameter for entering the quality of Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
253 the band-stop filter. The quality of the band- Max: 3,0 Control/gating unit
stop filter indicates how well those parts of the + Speed control
signal which are within the range of the reso- Unit: -
Upread/free access
nant frequency are filtered out. Indices: 3
Changeable in:
P254/P253 yields the width of the frequency Type: O2
range at -3dB weakening, where: Drive setting
• Lower limit frequency = P254 * [Root Ready
(1+ 1/(2*P253)^2) - 1/(2*P253)]
• Upper limit frequency = P254 * [Root
(1+ 1/(2*P253)^2) + 1/(2*P253)]
If a quality of 0.0 is input, the pertinent band-
stop filter is switched off, i.e. it lets all frequen-
cies through.
P254* At filter characteristic 1 (P256=1): index1: 50,0 Menus:

Filter Fre- Resonant frequency of the band-stop filter. Min: 1,0 Parameter menu +
quency Harmonics of exactly this frequency are com- Max: 500,0 Control/gating unit
254 pletely eliminated by the band-stop filter. + Speed control
Unit: Hz
The extent to which neighboring frequencies are Upread/free access
Indices: 3
weakened depends on the quality/selectivity of Changeable in:
band-stop filter P253. Type: O2
Drive setting
At filter characteristic 2 (P256=2):
Ready
Key frequency (-3dB) of the low-pass filter. At
this frequency the amplitude is weakened to
70% (=3dB).

Torq(set,n- torque setpoint at the output of the speed con- Unit: Nm Parameter menu +
Reg) troller. Control/gating unit
Indices: -
255 + Speed control
Type: I2
Upread/free access
P256* The parameter defines the filter characteristic. index1: 1 Menus:

Filter Charac- • Value = 0: Enabled Min: 0 Parameter menu +
ter • Value = 1: Band-stop Max: 7 Control/gating unit
256 • Value = 2: Low pass + Speed control
Unit: -
Further values for future use! Upread/free access
Indices: 3
Changeable in:
Type: O2
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P257* Further essential quantities of the filter can be index1: 0,000 Menus:
Filter Adjust1 preset via this parameter depending on the fil- Min: 0,000 Parameter menu +
ter characteristic.
Filter characteristic 1 (band-stop): + Speed control
Unit:%
The remaining amplitude at filter frequency can Upread/free access
be preset via this parameter. In view of the Indices: 3
Changeable in:
phase response, it can be worthwhile not to Type: I4
suppress this amplitude completely. Drive setting
Filter characteristic 2 (low-pass): Ready
Without function
P258* Further essential quantities of the filter can be index1: Menus:

Filter Adjust2 preset via this parameter depending on the fil- 100,000 Parameter menu +
ter characteristic. Control/gating unit
258 Min: 0,000
For future use! + Speed control
Max: 200,000
Upread/free access
Unit:%
Changeable in:
Indices: 3
Drive setting
Type: I4
Ready
Src Torq (set) from which the torque setpoint is to be read in Unit: - Parameter menu +
during “Master drive” operating mode. Control/gating unit
260 Indices: 2
+ Speed control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting

Src Torq(con- from which the torque setpoint is to be read in Unit: - Parameter menu +
seq) during “Slave drive” operating mode. Control/gating unit
Indices: 2
261 + Speed control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting

Src from which the additional setpoint for the Unit: - Parameter menu +
Torque(add) torque is to be read in. The additional setpoint is Control/gating unit
added to the setpoint of the torque both in Indices: 2
262 + Speed control
“Master drive” and “Slave drive” operating ,BDS
mode. Upread/free access
Type: L2,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P263* Function parameters for entering the fixed set- index1: 100,0 Menus:
FSetp- point for the upper torque limit. The parameter Min: -200,0 Parameter menu +
Torq(Lim1) value entered relates to the reference torque Control/gating unit
entered in P354. Max: 200,0
263 + Speed control
Unit:%
Upread/free access
Indices: 4
Changeable in:
,FDS
Drive setting
Type: I2
Ready
P264* Function parameter for entering the fixed set- index1: - Menus:
FSetp- point for the lower torque limit. The parameter 100,0 Parameter menu +
Torq(Lim2) value entered relates to the reference torque Control/gating unit
entered in P354. Min: -200,0
264 + Speed control
Max: 200,0
Upread/free access
Unit:%
Changeable in:
Indices: 4
Drive setting
,FDS
Ready
Type: I2
Src from which the upper limit for the torque is to Unit: - Parameter menu +
Torq(Limit1) be read in. Control/gating unit
Indices: 2
265 + Speed control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src from which the lower limit for the torque is to be Unit: - Parameter menu +
Torq(Limit2) read in. Control/gating unit
Indices: 2
266 + Speed control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting

Src from which the supplementary setpoint for the Unit: - Parameter menu
Torque(add3) torque is to be read in.
Indices: 2 Upread/free access
267 The supplementary setpoint is added to the lim-
ited setpoint of the torque, i.e the addition takes ,BDS Changeable in:
place behind the limitation of the torque. Type: L2,K Drive setting

Torq (set, torque setpoint after limitation. Unit: Nm Parameter menu +
Lim) Indices: - Control/gating unit
269 + Speed control
Type: I2
Upread/free access

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src I(sq,set) from which the setpoint of the torque-forming Unit: - Parameter menu +
current component is to be read in. Control/gating unit
270 Indices: 2
+ Speed control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting

Src I(sq,add) from which the additional setpoint for the Unit: - Parameter menu +
torque-forming current component is to be read Control/gating unit
271 in.The additional setpoint is added to the set- Indices: 2
+ Speed control
point. ,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting
r272 Visualization parameter for displaying the set- Dec.Plc.: 1 Menus:

Isq point of the torque-forming current component Unit: A Parameter menu +
(set,active) Isq. Control/gating unit
Indices: -
272 + Current control
Type: I2
Upread/free access

Src I(max) from which an external setpoint for the maxi- Unit: - Parameter menu +
mum current is to be read in. Control/gating unit
275 Indices: 2
+ Speed control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting
P282 Gain of the current controller. Init: 80,0 Menus:

Amps Reg Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
Gain Max: 200,0 Control/gating unit
Unit:%
Upread/free access
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Type: O2
Drive setting
P285 Integral component of the current controller. Init: 0,0 Menus:

Ki CurrReg Only for special cases. Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
+ Current control
Unit:%
Upread/free access
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Type: O2
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
r286 Monitoring parameter for the position test. Dec.Plc.: 2 Menus:

PosTestAngle The angle is represented in angular degrees to Unit: - Parameter menu
286 two decimal places. Indices: - Upread/free access
Wrong orientation of the motor encoder can be Type: I4
detected when the rotor is aligned with
impressed current in position test mode.
Correction is made by rotating the encoder or
by a suitable entry in P132.
P290* Function parameter for selecting the active type Init: 0 Menus:
Sel V/f, I-Reg of current control. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
290 • 0 = Vectorial current control Max: 1 Control/gating unit
• 1 = V/f characteristic + Current control +
Unit: - V/f open-loop con-
The respective non-activated control mode is
not calculated by the firmware. Indices: - trol
The control mode “V/f characteristic” is NOT Type: O2 Drive setting

designed to be used with brushless DC motors Upread/free access
(1FT6 / 1FK6)! Changeable in:
In the case of current-controlled operation Drive setting
(P290=0) automatic motor identification should
always be carried out upon start-up.
Please keep in mind that in the case of opera-
tion with v/f characteristic (P290=1) without an
encoder, P799 (Source
OFF actual value) must be set to 200 for the
correct function of the OFF1 command. In order
to avoid the alarm “Target - Actual Deviation”,
P791 (Source actual value) should also be set to
200.
P291* Function parameter for entering the fixed set- Init: 100,0 Menus:
FSetp Flux point for the flux of the connected induction Min: 20,0 Parameter menu +
(set) motor. The parameter value entered relates to Control/gating unit
the rated flux of the parameterized motor. Max: 200,0
Unit:%
Upread/free access
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Type: O2
Drive setting
Ready
Src Flux (set) from which the flux setpoint for the connected Unit: - Parameter menu +
induction motor is to read in. Control/gating unit
292 Indices: -
+ Current control
Type: L2,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P293* Function parameter for entering the field weak- Init: 0,0 Menus:
FieldWKFreq ening frequency. From the set parameter value Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
upwards, a connected induction motor with a Control/gating unit
293 weakened field is to be operated. Depending on Max: 400,0
+ Current control
the actual voltage conditions, the field weaken- Unit: Hz
ing frequency actually produced can be lower. Drive setting
Indices: -
The parameter value is calculated during auto- Upread/free access
Type: O2
matic calculation of the derived motor data Changeable in:
(P115).
Drive setting
P294* Function parameter for selecting the flux speci- Init: 0 Menus:
Select Flux fication when an induction motor is used. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Reg • 0 = Controlled (closed-loop), flux control- Max: 1 Control/gating unit
294 ler active + Current control
Unit: -
• 1 = Controlled (open-loop), flux control- Drive setting
ler not active Indices: -
Upread/free access
Type: O2
Changeable in:
Drive setting
P296* Function parameter for selecting the dynamics Init: 1 Menus:

Dynamic I-Reg of the current controller. The number of sam- Min: 0 Parameter menu +
pling steps is prescribed after which a setpoint Control/gating unit
296 step-change is to be fully corrected. Max: 2
+ Current control
• 0 = 2 sampling steps, highest dynamic Unit: -
Drive setting
response Indices: -
Upread/free access
• 1 = 3 sampling steps, medium dynamic Type: O2
response Changeable in:
• 2 = 4 sampling steps, lowest dynamic Drive setting
response
P297 Function parameter for setting the flux control- Init: 0,00 Menus:
Flux Reg. Gain ler gain. Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
297 Only effective for induction motors. Max: 16,00 Control/gating unit
For future use. Not currently implemented! + Speed control
Unit: -
Upread/free access
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Type: O2
Drive setting
Ready

Src n(set,V/f) from which the torque setpoint during operation Unit: - Parameter menu +
with v/f control is to be read in. Control/gating unit
320 Indices: 2
+ V/f open-loop
,BDS control
Type: L2,K,K Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Src n(add,V(f) from which the additional setpoint for the speed Unit: - Parameter menu +
during operation with v/f control is to be read Control/gating unit
321 in. The additional setpoint is added to the speed Indices: 2
+ V/f open-loop
setpoint. By means of the additional setpoint, a ,BDS control
speed control can be superimposed on the V/f
control and the load-dependent slip of a con-
nected induction motor can be compensated. Changeable in:
Drive setting
P322 Function parameter for entering the additional Init: 2,0 Menus:
FSetp boost for the V/f characteristic curve at 0Hz. Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
AddBoost The parameter value entered relates to the ref- Max: 100,0 Control/gating unit
322 erence voltage entered in P351. + V/f open-loop
Unit:% control
Indices: - Upread/free access
Type: O2 Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Src Add Boost from which the setpoint for the additional boost Unit: - Parameter menu +
during operation with the V/f characteristic Control/gating unit
323 curve is to be entered. The setpoint read in is Indices: -
+ V/f open-loop
added to the voltage boost entered in P325 if Type: L2,K control
the additional boost is released.
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src Rel which the command for applying the additional Unit: - Parameter menu +
AddBoost boost during operation with V/f control is to be Control/gating unit
read in. The additional boost can, e.g., be Indices: -
324 + V/f open-loop
applied during heavy starting. Type: L2,B control
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P325* Function parameter for entering the voltage by Init: 2,00 Menus:
FSetp Boost which the V/f characteristic curve is to be Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
boosted at 0 Hz. When the additional boost is Control/gating unit
325 applied, the value of the additional boost is Max: 100,00
+ V/f open-loop
added to the set value. Unit: V control
Type: O2 Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Drive Setting
Ready
P326* Function parameter for entering the frequency index1: 1,0 Menus:
Freq Curve 1 back-up points for V/f characteristic curve 1. Min: 1,0 Parameter menu +
The values must be arranged in ascending Control/gating unit
326 order. Two successive values must differ by at Max: 400,0
+ V/f open-loop
least 1 Hz. Unit: Hz control
Example: Indices: 4 Drive setting
• Index 1: 5 Hz Type: O2 Upread/free access
• Index 2: 10 Hz
Changeable in:
• Index 3: 50 Hz
Drive setting
• Index 4: 70 Hz
The values must correspond to the assigned Drive setting
voltage values in the same index of parameter
P327.
P327 Function parameter for entering the voltage index1: 2,0 Menus:
Volts Curve 1 back-up points for V/f characteristic curve 1. Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
The values must correspond to the assigned fre- Control/gating unit
327 quency values in the same index of parameter Max: 1000,0
+ V/f open-loop
P326. Unit: V control
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P328* Function parameter for entering the frequency index1: 1,0 Menus:
Freq Curve 2 back-up points for V/f characteristic curve 2. Min: 1,0 Parameter menu +
The values must be arranged in ascending Control/gating unit
328 order. Two successive values must differ by at Max: 400,0
+ V/f open-loop
least 1 Hz. Unit: Hz control
Example: Indices: 4 Drive setting
• Index 1: 5 Hz Type: O2 Upread/free access
• Index 2: 10 Hz
Changeable in:
• Index 3: 50 Hz
Drive setting
• Index 4: 70 Hz
The values must correspond to the assigned Drive setting
voltage values in the same index of parameter
P329.
P329 Function parameter for entering the voltage index1: 2,0 Menus:
Volts Curve 2 back-up points for V/f characteristic curve 2. Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
The values must correspond to the assigned fre- Control/gating unit
329 quency values in parameter P328. Max: 1000,0
+ V/f open-loop
Unit: V control
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Drive setting
Ready
Src Select which the command for changing between V/f Unit: - Parameter menu +
Curve characteristic curves 1 and 2 is to be read in. Control/gating unit
The signals are assigned as follows: Indices: -
330 + V/f open-loop
• Signal logical 0: V/f characteristic curve 1 Type: L2,B control
active Upread/free access
• Signal logical 1: V/f characteristic curve 2
Changeable in:
active
Drive setting
P331* Function parameter for entering the gain factor Init: 0,005 Menus:
Imax Reg Gain for the current-limitation controller. The cur- Min: 0,001 Parameter menu +
rent-limitation controller prevents a connected Control/gating unit
331 motor from being continually operated with Max: 0,500
+ V/f open-loop
over-current during V/f control. Unit: - control
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P332* Function parameter for entering the reset time Init: 1000 Menus:
Imax Reg for the current-limitation controller. The cur- Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Time rent-limitation controller prevents a connected Control/gating unit
motor from being continually operated with Max: 32000
332 + V/f open-loop
overcurrent during V/f control. Unit: ms control
Drive setting
Ready
P333* Function parameter for selecting the type of Init: 1 Menus:

Imax Reg intervention for the current-limitation controller. Min: 0 Parameter menu
Mode • 0 = Reduction of voltage Max: 1 Upread/free access
333 • 1 = Reduction of frequency and voltage Unit: - Changeable in:
Type: O2

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P340* Function parameter for entering the pulse fre- Init: 5,0 Menus:
Pulse Fre- quency. The pulse frequency indicates how Min: 5,0 Parameter menu +
quency often the valves in the power section operate.In Gating unit
addition, the smallest possible sampling time Max: 10,0
340 (time slot) T0 is defined by the pulse frequency. Unit: kHz Drive setting
The length of time slot T0 is given by the recip- Upread/free access
Indices: -
rocal of the set pulse frequency (T0 = 1/P340).
A high pulse frequency therefore means a short
sampling time and thus a high dynamic Drive setting
response but, at the same time, high utilization
of calculating time and greater heat losses in
the converter (switching losses). A low pulse
frequency means a lower dynamic response but
more free calculating time and smaller heat
losses. If the performance of the basic unit is
fully utilized (pulse frequency P340 = 7.5 kHz),
the onboard-technology (F01) cannot be used.
If a SIMOLINK board (SLB) is connected, the
pulse frequency is automatically set to low. In
order to ensure that synchronization to the
SIMOLINK cycle-time determined by the dis-
patcher or automation master can take place,
the pulse frequency must be set according to
the following rule: P340 = k x 4/cycle time
where k = 1, 2, 3,...
In some cases, a pulse frequency of 5kHz can
lead to derating of the converter rated current
as compared with the value entered in P072.
The maximum pulse frequency that can be set
for standard applications is 7.5 kHz. The valid
maximum current with due account taken of the
pulse frequency can be read in r129.
The pulse frequency should not be set to values
larger than 7.5 kHz (for 60MHz - DSP) or 6 kHz
(for 40MHz - DSP). If higher values are set,
indices 12 to 19 have to be checked on visual-
ization parameter r829. The indicated free cal-
culating time of the DSP time slots always has
to be greater than zero. If the calculating time is
exceeded, this is also displayed by fault F043
(DSP coupling).
Remedy: Reduce the pulse frequency.
P341 The dead time compensation can also be auto- index1: 5,0 Menus:
f-Changeover matically activated or de-activated irrespective Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
of the stator frequency. Gating unit
341 Max: 6553,5
• Index 1 determines the center frequency Upread/free access
Unit: Hz
• Index 2 determines the hysteresis Changeable in:
Function is not implemented at present! Indices: 2

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P347 Function parameter for the correction of the Init: 7,0 Menus:
ON VoltsCom- symmetrical valve voltage drops of the inverter Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
pens. IGBT’s. Gating unit
Max: 25,0
347 The parameter value is pre-set during automatic Drive setting
parameterization (P115 = 1) or measured dur- Unit: V
ing motor data identification (P115 = 2, 3). Indices: - Upread/free access

Drive setting
Drive setting
Ready
P348 Function parameter for selection of the dead Init: 1 Menus:

Dead Time time compensation in the gating unit Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Comp. The dead time compensation eliminates the Max: 2 Gating unit
348 voltage error which is obtained as a result of the Upread/free access
interlock times in the gating unit. Unit: -
Compensation is enabled/disabled during auto-
matic parameterization (P115 = 1). Type: O2 Drive setting
Parameter values: Drive setting
• 0: no dead time compensation in the gat- Ready

ing unit
• 1: dead time compensation in the gating
unit enabled
Setting instructions:
For high pulse frequencies, for motors with low
stator time constant (r125) (positioning drives)
and for long cables, it may be practical to dis-
able the compensation in order to improve the
smooth running characteristics at low speeds.
2. For future use.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P349 Function parameter for the compensation time Init: 0,00 Menus:
T(DeadTime- of the gating unit interlock. Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
Comp.) In the case of induction motors, the value is Max: 25,55 Gating unit
349 pre-set during motor data identification (P115 = Upread/free access
2, 3). Unit: µs
Setting instructions:
1. For positioning drives or for the improvement
of the smooth running characteristics at low Drive setting
frequencies, it may be practical to disable Ready
the compensation (P348 = 0). In this case, it
is not permissible to reset P349, in order that
the missing compensation voltage can be
calculated.internally from it. (Only for
P100=3,4,5)
2. To improve the smooth running characteris-
tics for the v/f control (P100=0,1,2) the
compensation of the interlock time can be
changed.
3. At high pulse frequencies (abov approx. 6
kHz), it is not recommended to disable the
compensation as the torque ripple would
then increase again due to voltage areas in
the range of the zero passages of the phase
currents.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.6.6 Functions 1
P350* Function parameter for entering the reference current. Init: 0,0 Menus:
Ref Amps The value entered is for normalizing all current variables Min: 0,0 Parameter
and corresponds to a connector value of 4000 H (100%). menu +
350 The closed-loop control system can process up to twice Max: 6553,5
Motor/encoder
the value entered. The set value 0 A is not allowed. Unit: A + Motor data
The reference quantity for current (P350) or torque Indices: - Drive setting
(P354) should just be changed with the same integer
Type: O2 Upread/free
multiple number. The effective n-regulation will be
changed by the same factor. access
Changeable
in:
CAUTION
Drive setting
By changing the set value, the current
limitations are changed as well.
P351* Function parameter for entering the reference voltage. Init: 500 Menus:
Ref Volts The value entered is for normalizing all the voltage vari- Min: 100 Parameter
351 ables and corresponds to a connector value of 4000 H Max: 1000 menu + Func-
(100%). The closed-loop control system can process up tions
to twice the value entered. Unit: V
Drive setting
Indices: -
Upread/free
Type: O2 access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
P352* Function parameter for entering the reference frequency. Init: 50 Menus:
Ref Frequency The value entered is for normalizing all the frequency Min: 0 Parameter
352 variables and corresponds to a connector value of 4000 H Max: 500 menu + Func-
(100%). The closed-loop control system can process up tions
to twice the value entered. A value 0 Hz is not allowed. Unit: Hz
Drive setting
The reference quantity for frequency (P352) or speed Indices: -
Upread/free
(P354) should just be changed with the same integer Type: O2 access
changed by the same factor. The position control ampli- Changeable
fier will be increased by the reverse of this factor. The in:
rated speed for position control P205 has to be changed Drive setting
by this factor to enable the effective position control gain
to remain.
Table 5-14: Functions 1

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P353* Parameter for entering the reference speed. The value index1: 3000 Menus:
Ref Speed entered is for normalizing all the speed variables and cor- Min: 0 Parameter
responds to a connector value of 4000 H (100%). The menu + Func-
353 closed-loop control system can process up to twice the Max: 10000
tions
value entered. Unit: 1/min
Drive setting
That part of the reference speed value before the decimal Indices: 2
point is entered in Index 1. Upread/free
Type: O2 access
If the reference speed value is required in higher resolu-
tion, the digits after the decimal point can be entered in Changeable
Index 2. There are four decimal places. Zeroes must in:
always be added if applicable. A value of 0 RPM is not Drive setting
allowed.
Examples:
Reference Speed - 1234 P353.01 - 1234 P353.02 - 0
Reference Speed - 1234.5 P353.01 - 1234 P353.02 -
5000
Reference Speed - 1234.123 P353.01 - 1234 P353.02
- 1230
Reference Speed - 1234.0120 P353.01 - 1234
P353.02 - 120
The reference variable for frequency (P352) or speed
changed by the same factor. The position control ampli-
fier will be increased by the reverse of this factor. The
rated speed for position control P205 has to be changed
by this factor to enable the effective position control gain
to remain
CAUTION
By changing the set value, the speed lim-
its are changed as well.
P354* Function parameter for entering the reference torque. Init: 10,0 Menus:
Ref Torque The value entered is for normalizing all the torque vari- Min: 0,0 Parameter
ables and corresponds to a connector value of 4000 H menu + Func-
354 (100%). Max: 6535,0
tions
The closed-loop control system can process up to twice Unit: Nm
Drive setting
the value entered. A value 0 Nm is not allowed. Indices: -
Upread/free
The reference variable for current (P350) or torque Type: O2 access
multiple number. The effective n-regulation will be Changeable
changed by the same factor. in:
Drive setting
CAUTION
By changing the set value, the torque
limits are changed as well.
Table 5-14: Functions 1 (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P355* Function parameter for entering the reference speed for index1: 3000 Menus:
MachRefSpeed the machine encoder. The entered value is for normaliza- Min: 0 Parameter
tion of all speed variables of the machine encoder and menu + Func-
355 corresponds to a connector value of 4000 H (100%). Val- Max: 10000
tions
ues up to twice the input value can be processed by the Unit: 1/min
control system. Drive setting
Indices: 2
In Index 1 the decimal places of the reference speed Upread/free
Type: O2 access
before the comma is entered. If a higher resolution of the
reference speed is required, decimal place after the Changeable
comma can be entered in Index 2. Index 2 is only effec- in:
tive for speed mixing. Compare parameter P353.
Drive setting
P356* The parameter defines the filter characteristic for the index1: 0 Menus:
n(act) Filter- speed actual value filter. Min: 0 Parameter
cha For future use! Max: 7 menu + Con-
356 trol/gating
Unit: - unit + Speed
Indices: 2 control
Type: O2 Upread/free
access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Drive setting
P358* Function parameter for entering the key. If the values in index1: 0 Menus:
Key both indices tally with the values entered in Lock parame- Unit: - User parame-
ter P359, other menus can also be selected in P060 as ters
358 well as the menu “User Parameters” and the menu “Fixed Indices: 2
settings”. Type: L2 Parameter
menu + Func-
tions
Upread/free
access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
P359* Function parameter for entering the password. If the index1: 0 Menus:
Lock same value is entered in both indices in the Key parame- Unit: - Parameter
ter, other menus can also be selected in P060 as well as menu + Func-
359 the menu “User Parameters” and the menu “Fixed set- Indices: 2
tions
tings”. Type: L2
Upread/free
access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P360* Function parameter for selecting the parameters which index1: 60 Menus:
Select User- are to be visible in the “User Parameters” menu. After Min: 0 Parameter
Param selection of the “User Parameters” menu (P60 = 0), apart menu + Func-
from parameters P53 and P60, only those parameters are Max: 2999
360 tions
visible whose numbers have been entered in indices 3 to Unit: -
100. Upread/free
Indices: 100 access
Type: O2 Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready
P361* Backlight for the optional operation panel OP Init: 1 Menus:

OP Backlight Parameter values: Min: 0 Parameter
361 Max: 1 menu + Func-
• 0 = Backlight always ON
tions
• 1 = Backlight only ON during operation Unit: -
Upread/free
Indices: - access
Type: O2 Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready
P363* Function parameter for starting the “Copy BICO Data Set” Init: 0 Menus:
Copy BICO function. With this function, the settings of one BICO data Unit: - Parameter
DSet set (Index 1 or 2) are transferred to the other data set. menu + Func-
Indices: -
363 Starting takes place with a parameter setting not equal to tions
0. The last two digits of the parameter value indicate Type: L2
Upread/free
which source data set (penultimate digit) is to be copied access
to which target data set (last digit). After the function has
been performed, the parameter is automatically reset to Changeable
0. in:
• 0 = No activity Drive setting

• 12 = Copies Index 1 of the BDS parameters to
Index 2
• 21 = Copies Index 2 of the BDS parameters to
Index 1

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P364* Function call for “Copy Function Data Set”. The last two Init: 0 Menus:
Copy FuncD- digits of the parameter value indicate which source data Unit: - Parameter
Set set (penultimate digit, value range 1 to 4) is to be copied menu + Func-
to which target data set (last digit, value range 1 to 4). Indices: -
364 tions
After the function has been performed, the parameter is Type: L2
Upread/free
automatically reset to “0”. access
Function parameter for starting the “Copy Function Data Changeable
Set” function. With this function, the settings of a function in:
data set (Index 1, 2, 3 or 4) are transferred to another
data set. Starting takes places with a parameter setting Drive setting
not equal to 0. The last two digits of the parameter value
indicate which source data set (penultimate digit) is to be
copied to which target data set (last digit). After the func-
tion has been performed, the parameter is automatically
reset to 0.
Examples:
• 0 = No activity
• 12 = Copies Index 1 of the FDS parameters to
Index 2
Index 1
Index 4
P366* Reserved for future use Init: 0 Menus:

Select FactSet Min: 0 Parameter
366 Max: 10 menu
Unit: - Upread/free
access
Indices: -
Changeable
Type: O2 in:
Drive setting
P367* Function parameter for selecting a control configuration Init: 0 Menus:

Select Reg which is to be parameterized when a quick parameteriza- Min: 0 Parameter
Type tion (P370) is carried out. menu
Max: 3
367 • 0 = V/f control Quick parame-
Unit: -
• 1 = - not used - terization
• 2 = Torque control Indices: -
Upread/free
• 3 = Speed control Type: O2 access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P368* Function parameter for selecting a setpoint/command Init: 1 Menus:

Select Setp source which is to be parameterized when a quick param- Min: 0 Parameter
Src eterization (P370) is carried out. menu
Max: 8
368 0 = - not used - Quick parame-
Unit: -
1 = Analog input and terminal strip terization
Indices: -
2 = Fixed setpoints and terminal strip Upread/free
Type: O2 access
3 = Motor operated potentiometer and terminal strip
4 = USS Changeable
in:
5 = not used
Drive setting
6 = PROFIBUS (CBP required)
7 = OP1S and fixed setpoints
8 = OP1S and motor operated potentiometer
P370* Function parameter for starting quick parameterization. Init: 0 Menus:

Quick Param When quick parameterization is selected, the unit is Min: 0 Parameter
370 parameterized according to the selected parameter mod- Max: 1 menu + Func-
ules. tions
Unit: -
• 0 = No quick parameterization Quick parame-
Indices: - terization
• 1 = Start quick parameterization
After quick parameterization has been completed, the Type: O2 Upread/free
parameter is reset to 0. access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
P372* Function parameter for selecting simulated operation. Init: 0 Menus:

Simulation Simulated operation allows test operation of the drive Min: 0 Parameter
Mode without DC link voltage. The unit must, therefore, have Max: 1 menu + Func-
372 an external 24 V supply. tions
Unit: -
Simulated operation can not be selected if the DC link Upread/free
voltage is more than 5% of the rated DC link voltage. Indices: - access
• 0 = Simulated operation not active Type: O2 Changeable
• 1 = Simulated operation active in:
Drive setting
P379 Motor temperature at the time of motor identification. Init: 25,00 Menus:
MotID.Temp During motor identification, the temperature sensor in Min: -50,00 Parameter
379 the motor is read out and stored in this parameter. Max: 210,00 menu + Func-
A value of 210°C stands for an invalid temperature. tions
Unit: °C
Upread/free
Indices: - access
Type: I2 Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P380 Function parameter for entering the temperature thresh- Init: 100 Menus:
Mot Tmp old at which the warning “Motor Over Temperature” Min: 0 Parameter
Warning (A023) is to be tripped. menu + Diag-
Max: 200
380 Example: nostics +
Unit: °C Faults/warn-
• for temperature class B: <= 110°C (60 K value for
Indices: - ings
1FK6/1FT6)
• for temperature class F: <= 145°C (100 K value Type: I2 Upread/free
for 1FK6/1FT6) access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready
P381 Function parameter for entering the temperature thresh- Init: 120 Menus:
Mot Tmp Fault old at which the alarm message “Motor Over Tempera- Min: 0 Parameter
ture” (F020) is to be tripped. menu + Diag-
381 Max: 200
Example: nostics +
Unit: °C Faults/warn-
• for temperature class B: <= 120°C (60 K value for
Indices: - ings
1FK6/1FT6)
• for temperature class F: <= 155°C (100 K value Type: I2 Upread/free
for 1FK6/1FT6) access
If a temperature > 220 °C is entered, the I2t monitoring Changeable
is automatically activated for the motor. Precondition for in:
this is that the thermal motor time constant P383 is Drive setting
>=100s (factory setting).
Ready
P382* The type of motor cooling has an influence on the calcula- Init: 1 Menus:
Motor Cooling tion of the permissible load cycle during the I2t monitor- Min: 0 Parameter
ing for the motor. The parameter value 1 (= factory menu + Diag-
382 setting) has to be selected for all 1FT6 and 1FK6 motors. Max: 1
nostics +
Parameter values: Unit: - Faults/warn-
Indices: - ings + Func-
• 0: self-cooled
tions
• 1: force-cooled Type: O2
Quick parame-
terization
Drive setting
Upread/free
access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P383 Thermal time constant of motor Init: 100 Menus:

Mot ThermT- Setting instructions: Min: 0 Parameter
Const The i²t calculation is activated by a parameter value >= Max: 16000 menu + Diag-
383 100 seconds. nostics +
Unit: s Faults/warn-
Example: Indices: - ings + Func-
For a 2-pole 1LA5063 motor, the value should be set to 8 tions
Type: O2
min (from the table) *60s/min = 480s. Quick parame-
The thermal time constants for standard motors are indi- terization
cated in the following table (in minutes). Drive setting
Type 2- 4- 6- 8- 10- 12- Upread/free
pole pole pole pole pole pole access
1LA5063 8 13 Changeable
in:
1LA5070 8 10 12
Drive setting
1LA5073 8 10 12
Drive setting
1LA5080 8 10 12
Ready
1LA5083 10 10 12
1LA5090 5 9 12 12
1LA5096 6 11 12 14
1LA5106 8 12 12 16
1LA5107 12 16
1LA5113 14 11 13 12
1LA5130 11 10 13 10
1LA5131 11 10
1LA5133 10 14 10
1LA5134 16
1LA5163 15 19 20 12
1LA5164 15
1LA5166 15 19 20 14
1LA5183 25 30
1LA5186 30 40 45
1LA5206 30 45
1LA5207 30 35 45 50
1LA6220 40 55
1LA6223 35 40 50 55
1LA6253 40 45 50 60
1LA6280 40 50 55 65
1LA6283 40 50 55 65
1LA6310 45 55 60 75
1LA6313 55 60 75
1LA6316 48 58 63 78
1LA6317 58 63 78

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P383 Type 2- 4- 6- 8- 10- 12-

(Continued) pole pole pole pole pole pole
1LA6318 63 78
1LA831. 35 40 45 45 50 50
1LA835. 40 45 50 50 55 55
1LA840. 45 50 55 55 60 60
1LA845. 55 55 60 60 70 70
1LL831. 25 25 30 30 35 35
1LL835. 30 30 35 35 40 40
1LL840. 35 35 35 35 40 40
1LL845. 40 35 40 40 45 45
1LA135. 30 35 40
1LA140. 35 40 45 45
1LA145. 40 45 50 50 55 55
1LA150. 50 50 55 55 65 65
1LA156. 60 55 60 60 70 70
1LL135. 20 20 25
1LL140. 25 25 30 30
1LL145. 30 30 30 30 35 35
1LL150. 35 30 35 35 40 40
1LL156. 40 35 35 35 40 40
1LA7 motors: and 1LA5 motors
Type:1PH610 1PH613 1PH616 1PH618 1PH620 1PH622
25 30 35 40 40 40
Exceptions:
1PH610 with n=1150 1/min T1 = 20 min
1PH7(=1PA6):
Shaft height: 100 132 160 180 225
T1 in min 25 30 35 40 40
1PL6:
Shaft height: 180 225
T1 in min 30 30
1PH4:
Shaft height: 100 132 160
T1 in min 25 30 35
If the utilization limit parameterized in P384 is exceeded,
the diagnostic signal F021 is set.
Precondition: P95 >=10 or P97=0

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P384* Function parameter for the messages of the motor load index1: 100 Menus:
Mot Load Lim- cycle monitor. The parameter is valid for all motor data Min: 0 Parameter
its sets. menu + Diag-
Max: 300
384 Reference value is the rated motor power. nostics +
Unit:% Faults/warn-
Indices:
Indices: 2 ings + Func-
• i001: WARN When the entered load value is tions
Type: O2
reached, a warning message is edited via B0150/
Drive setting
B0151
• i002: STOE When the entered load value is Upread/free
reached, a fault message is edited via B0152/ access
B0153 Changeable
Visualization parameter: in:
• r008 (Motor utilization) Drive setting
Setting instructions: Drive setting
• 0: no evaluation Ready
P399* Function parameter for special access Init: 0 Menus:

Special Access Min: 0 Parameter
399 Max: 65535 menu + Func-
tions
Unit: -
Upread/free
Indices: - access
Type: O2 Power section
definition
Changeable
in:
Power section
definition
Board configu-
ration
Drive setting
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.6.7 Setpoint Channel
P401* Function parameter for entering fixed setpoint index1: 0,000 Menus:
Fixed setpoint 1. The fixed setpoint is activated by means of Min: -200,000 Parameter menu +
1 the source specified by P580 and P581 by set- Setpoint channel
ting the relevant control word bits (see r551). Max: 200,000
401 Unit:% Upread/free access
Indices: 4 Changeable in:
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I4 Ready
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I4 Ready
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I4 Ready
Fixed setpoint 4. Min: -200,000 Parameter menu +
4 The fixed setpoint is activated by means of the Max: 200,000 Setpoint channel
404 source specified by P580 and P581 by setting Upread/free access
the relevant control word bits (see r551). Unit:%
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I4 Ready
Fixed Setp 5 5. Min: -200,000 Parameter menu +
405 Max: 200,000 Setpoint channel
Unit:% Upread/free access
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I4 Ready
Table 5-15: Setpoint Channel

"Uncontrolled Copy"
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I4 Ready
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I4 Ready
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I4 Ready
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I4 Ready
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I4 Ready
Table 5-15: Setpoint Channel (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I4 Ready
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I4 Ready
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I4 Ready
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I4 Ready
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I4 Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I4 Ready
Src FSetp Bit2 which bit 2 for selecting a fixed setpoint is to be Unit: - Parameter menu +
read in. For selecting a fixed setpoint, the states Setpoint channel
417 of bit 0 (P580), bit 1 (P581) and bit 3 (P418) Indices: 2
are important. ,BDS Upread/free access
Type: L2,B Changeable in:

Drive setting
Ready
Src FSetp Bit3 which bit 3 for selecting a fixed setpoint is to be Unit: - Parameter menu +
read in. For selecting a fixed setpoint, the states Setpoint channel
418 of bit 0 (P580), bit 1 (P581) and bit 2 (P417) Indices: 2
are important. ,BDS Upread/free access

Drive setting
Ready
r419 Visualization parameter for displaying the num- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

# Active FSetp ber of the fixed setpoint currently active. Unit: - Parameter menu +
419 Indices: - Setpoint channel
r420 Visualization parameter for displaying the value Dec.Plc.: 3 Menus:

Active FSetp of the fixed setpoint currently active. Unit:% Parameter menu +
Type: I4 Upread/free access
P421* Function parameter for entering the upper limit Init: 100,0 Menus:
MOP (max) for the internal motor operated potentiometer. Min: -200,0 Parameter menu +
The value output by the motor operated poten- Setpoint channel
421 tiometer is limited to the entered limit in a posi- Max: 200,0
tive direction. Unit:% Upread/free access

Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P422* Function parameter for entering the lower limit Init: 0,0 Menus:
MOP (min) for the internal motor operated potentiometer. Min: -200,0 Parameter menu +
The value output by the motor operated poten- Setpoint channel
422 tiometer is limited to the entered limit in a neg- Max: 200,0
ative direction. Unit:% Upread/free access

Ready
Src MOP inv. which the signal for inverting the motor oper- Unit: - Parameter menu +
ated potentiometer is to be read in. If a change Setpoint channel
423 is made from inversion to non- inversion or vice Indices: -
versa, the output signal of the motor operated Type: L2,B Upread/free access
potentiometer does not alter abruptly but in the Changeable in:
form of a ramp with the acceleration times and
Drive setting
deceleration times entered in P431 and P432.
r424 Visualization parameter for displaying the out- Dec.Plc.: 2 Menus:

MOP (Out) put value provided by the motor operated Unit: 1/min Parameter menu +
potentiometer for further processing. Setpoint channel
424 Indices: -
P425* Function parameter for configuring the motor Init: 110 Menus:
Conf MOP operated potentiometer. Unit: - Parameter menu +
425 • xxx0 = MOP output is not stored during Indices: - Setpoint channel
OFF Starting point is stipulated by P426 Upread/free access
Type: L2
after ON.
Changeable in:
• xxx1 = MOP output is stored after OFF.
After ON, the MOP is set to this value. Drive setting
• xx0x = Ramp generator is not effective in
automatic mode.
• xx1x = Ramp generator is always effec-
tive.
• x0xx = Acceleration without initial round-
ing
• x1xx = Acceleration with initial rounding
P426* Function parameter for entering the starting Init: 0,0 Menus:
StartValue value for the motor operated potentiometer. Min: -200,0 Parameter menu +
MOP With appropriate parameterization in P425, the Setpoint channel
output value of the motor operated potentiome- Max: 200,0
426 ter is set to this value after ON command. Unit:% Upread/free access

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src Set MOP which the command for setting the motor oper- Unit: - Parameter menu +
ated potentiometer is to be read in. When the Setpoint channel
427 edge of the signal rises, the set value is Indices: -
adopted. Type: L2,B Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting

Src SetV MOP from which the set value for the motor operated Unit: - Parameter menu +
potentiometer is to be read in. Setpoint channel
428 Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting

Src Auto Setp from which the automatic setpoint for the motor Unit: - Parameter menu +
operated potentiometer is to be read in. Setpoint channel
429 Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src Manual/ which the command for switching the motor Unit: - Parameter menu +
Auto oper. potentiometer between manual and auto- Setpoint channel
matic is to be read in. In automatic operation Indices: -
430 (signal logical 1), an external setpoint is Type: L2,B Upread/free access
adopted by the ramp generator of the motor Changeable in:
operated potentiometer. After switch over to
Drive setting
manual operation (signal logical 0), the motor
operated potentiometer can be moved, begin-
ning from the last setpoint for automatic opera-
tion.
P431* Function parameter for entering the accelera- Init: 10,0 Menus:
MOP Accel tion time for the motor oper. potentiometer. Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
Time The time is to be entered which the motor oper. Setpoint channel
potentiometer is to need for accelerating from Max: 1000,0
431 zero to +/- 100%. In the event of acceleration Unit: s Upread/free access
with initial rounding, the acceleration time Changeable in:
Indices: -
increases. Rounding can be activated in P425.
P432* Function parameter for entering the decelera- Init: 10,0 Menus:
MOP Decel tion time for the motor oper. potentiometer. Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
Time The time is to be entered which the motor oper. Setpoint channel
potentiometer is to need for decelerating from Max: 1000,0
432 +/- 100% to zero. In the event of deceleration Unit: s Upread/free access
with initial rounding, the deceleration time Changeable in:
Indices: -
increases. Rounding can be activated in P425.

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Src from which additional setpoint 1 is to be read in. Unit: - Parameter menu +
AddSetpoint1 Additional setpoint 1 is added to the main set- Setpoint channel
point in front of the ramp-function generator. Indices: 2
433 ,BDS Upread/free access

Drive setting
P434 Function parameter for entering the scaling fac- index1: 100,0 Menus:
Scale Add tor for additional setpoint 1. Min: -300,0 Parameter menu +
Setp1 Max: 300,0 Setpoint channel
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I2 Ready
P435* This parameter can be used to input the motor index1: Menus:
Motpot Limit potentiometer limits in finer steps than with 100,000 Parameter menu
parameters P421, P422. P425=1xxx switches
435 over to the high resolution limits. Min: -200,000 Upread/free access
Max: 200,000 Changeable in:
Unit:% Drive setting
Indices: 2
Type: I4

Src from which additional setpoint 2 is to be read in. Unit: - Parameter menu +
AddSetpoint2 Additional setpoint 2 is added to the main set- Setpoint channel
point after the ramp function generator. Abrupt Indices: 2
438 changes are directly passed on to the speed ,BDS Upread/free access
control. Changeable in:
Type: L2,K,K
Drive setting
Scale Add tor for additional setpoint 2. Min: -300,0 Parameter menu +
Setp2 Max: 300,0 Setpoint channel
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I2 Ready
r441 Parameter is only necessary for the parameter Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Actual speed model of PROFIdrive V3 standard. Parameter is Unit: - Parameter menu
only visible if PROFIdrive V3 is set.
Type: N4

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Src MainSet- from which the main setpoint is to be read in. Unit: - Parameter menu +
point Indices: 2 Setpoint channel

Drive setting
Scale Main tor for the main setpoint. Min: -300,0 Parameter menu +
Setp Max: 300,0 Setpoint channel
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I2 Ready
r446 Parameter is only necessary for the parameter Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Main Setp model of PROFIdrive V3 standard. Parameter is Unit: - Parameter menu
(act) only visible if PROFIdrive V3 is set.
446 Type: N4
P448 Function parameter for entering jogging set- index1: 0,0 Menus:
Jog Setp 1 point 1. Selection of the jogging setpoints and Min: -200,0 Parameter menu +
the transition to Jogging mode take place by Setpoint channel
448 means of the control word bits, Jogging bit 0 Max: 200,0
and Jogging bit 1 (P568, P569). Unit:% Upread/free access
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I2 Ready
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I2 Ready
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I2 Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P452* Function parameter for entering the maximum index1: 100,0 Menus:
n(max,FWD- speed in a positive direction of rotation. The Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
Speed) value entered is for limiting the speed setpoint Setpoint channel
in a positive direction. If the actual speed Max: 200,0
452 exceeds the value entered, the speed limitation Unit:% Drive setting
controller reduces the permissible torque during Upread/free access
Indices: 4
operation with vectorial current control until the
,FDS Changeable in:
actual speed reaches the permissible maximum
speed again. During operation with V/f control, Type: I2 Drive setting
the output frequency in the positive direction is
limited to the value entered.
NOTICE
Induction motors, when operating
in the field weakening range, must
not be allowed to run at a speed
higher than twice the field weak-
ening frequency (P293).
P453* Function parameter for entering the maximum index1: - Menus:
n(max,REVSp speed in a negative direction of rotation. The 100,0 Parameter menu +
eed) value entered is for limiting the speed setpoint Setpoint channel
in a negative direction. Min: -200,0
453 Max: 0,0 Drive setting
If the actual speed exceeds the value entered,
the speed limitation controller reduces the per- Unit:% Upread/free access
missible torque during operation with vectorial Changeable in:
Indices: 4
current control until the actual speed reaches
,FDS Drive setting
the permissible maximum speed again.
During operation with V/f control, the output Type: I2
frequency in the negative direction is limited to
the value entered.
NOTICE
Induction motors, when operating
in the in the field weakening
range, must not be allowed to run
at a speed higher than twice the
field weakening frequency (P293).
n(set,speed setpoint after selection of the direction of rota- Unit: 1/min Parameter menu +
sel) tion. Setpoint channel
Indices: -
461 Type: I4 Upread/free access

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P462* Function parameter for entering the accelera- index1: 0,50 Menus:
Accel. Time tion time. The acceleration time relates to an Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
acceleration of 0 to +/- 100%. Entering a Setpoint channel
462 smoothing time constant not equal to 0 in P469 Max: 600,00
leads to rounding of the ramp generator output Unit: s Upread/free access
and to an increase of the set acceleration time. Changeable in:
Indices: 4
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready
P464* Function parameter for entering the decelera- index1: 0,50 Menus:
Decel. Time tion time. The deceleration time relates to a Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
deceleration from +/- 100% to 0. Entering a Setpoint channel
464 smoothing time constant not equal to 0 in P469 Max: 600,00
leads to rounding of the ramp generator output Unit: s Upread/free access
and to an increase of the set deceleration time. Changeable in:
Indices: 4
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready
SmoothRGe- time constant for the ramp generator output. Min: 0,000 Parameter menu +
nOut Entering a value not equal to 0 leads to round- Setpoint channel
ing of the ramp generator output and to an Max: 6,000
469 increase in the acceleration and deceleration Unit: s Upread/free access
times entered in P462 and P464. Changeable in:
Indices: 4
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready
Scale tor for the pre-control torque. The scaling is to Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
Torq(PRE) be selected so that, during acceleration and Setpoint channel
deceleration and active pre-control, the torque Max:
471 setpoint formed by the speed controller is mini- 200000,0 Upread/free access
mal. Changeable in:
Unit:%
,FDS Ready
Type: O4

n (set, lim) setpoint after limitation. Unit: 1/min Parameter menu +

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.6.8 Functions 2
r541 Visualization parameter for individual measurement results Dec.Plc.: 2 Menus:

Mot ID of the motor identification at standstill for the stator resistor Unit:% Parameter menu +
R(Stator) + feeder resistances. Functions
Indices: 6
541 Reference value is the rated motor impedance. Upread/free access
Type: O2
Indices:
• i001 = Me U: result of measurement in phase direc-
tion U
• i002 = Me V: result of measurement in phase direc-
tion V
• i003 = Me W: result of measurement in phase direc-
tion W
For future use with induction machines.
r546 Visualization parameter for individual measurement results Dec.Plc.: 2 Menus:

MotId of the motor identification at standstill for referred total leak- Unit:% Parameter menu +
X(leakage) age reactance. Functions
Indices: 3
546 Type: O2 Upread/free access
r548 For future use with induction machines. Parameter is only Dec.Plc.: 1 Menus:
Reference necessary for the parameter model of PROFIdrive V3 stan- Unit: ° (alt) Parameter menu
Angle dard. Parameter is only visible if PROFIdrive V3 is set.
P549* Alternatively to P115=8, the position test can also be Init: 0 Menus:
Q.PosTest selected by means of this binector. Unit: - Parameter menu
549 On power up in position test mode, a stator current with U(- Indices: - Upread/free access
), V and W(+) is impressed, the absolute value of which is
set via Isq (P270, P271). Type: L2,B Changeable in:
If the rotor is free to align itself, incorrect orientation of the Drive setting
motor encoder can be read at r286.
Correction is made by rotating the encoder or by a suitable
entry in P132.
Test of direction of rotation, number of encoder increments
and number of poles:
• If during the position test the “Enable positive direc-
tion of rotation” bit (in control word 1) is changed
from 0 to 1, the impressed current indicator will slowly
make one electrical revolution in the clockwise direc-
tion. KK186 must then make one complete revolution
precisely in the positive direction (0% > +100% >
+199%/-200% > -100% > 0%).
• If KK186 makes more or less than one full revolution,
then the number of pole pairs (P109) or number of
encoder increments must be checked.
• If KK186 rotates in the wrong direction, then two
phases must be swapped over and the encoder must
be realigned.
Table 5-16: Functions 2

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.6.9 Sequence Control
r550 Visualization parameter for displaying control Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Control Word word 1. Bits 0 to 15 are displayed. Unit: - Parameter menu +
1 Indices: - Control and status
550 words
Type: V2
Upread/free access

Control Word word 2. Bits 16 to 31 are displayed. Unit: - Parameter menu +
551 words
Type: V2
Upread/free access
r552 Visualization parameter for displaying status Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Status Word 1 word 1. Bits 0 to 15 are displayed. Unit: - Parameter menu +
words
Type: V2
Upread/free access

Status Word 2 word 2 Bits 16 to 31 are displayed. Unit: - Parameter menu +
words
Type: V2
Upread/free access
Src ON/OFF1 which the ON/OFF command (control word 1, bit Unit: - Parameter menu +
0) is to be read in. Control and status
554 Indices: 2
words
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
P555* BICO parameter for selecting the 1st binector index1: 1 Menus:
Src1 from which the OFF2 command (control word 1, Unit: - Parameter menu +
OFF2(coast) bit 1) is to be read in. Further sources for the Control and status
OFF2 command are selected in P556 and P557. Indices: 2
555 words
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Table 5-17: Sequence Control

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P556* BICO parameter for selecting the 2nd binector index1: 1 Menus:
556 words
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
P557* BICO parameter for selecting the 3rd binector index1: 1 Menus:
557 words
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
OFF3(QStop) bit 2) is to be read in. Further sources for the Control and status
558 words
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
OFF3(QStop bit 2) is to be read in. Further sources for the Control and status
559 words
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
OFF3(QStop) bit 2) is to be read in. Further sources for the Control and status
560 words
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Table 5-17: Sequence Control (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src InvRelease which the command for releasing the inverter Unit: - Parameter menu +
(control word 1, bit 3) is to be read in. Control and status
561 Indices: 2
words
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Src RampGen which the command for releasing the ramp gen- Unit: - Parameter menu +
Rel erator (control word 1, bit 4) is to be read in. Control and status
Indices: 2
562 words
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Src RampGen which the command for starting the ramp gen- Unit: - Parameter menu +
Stop erator (control word 1, bit 5) is to be read in. Control and status
Indices: 2
563 words
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Src Setp which the command for releasing the setpoint Unit: - Parameter menu +
Release (control word 1, bit 6) is to be read in. Control and status
Indices: 2
564 words
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Src1 Fault from which the command for acknowledging a Unit: - Parameter menu +
Reset fault (control word 1, bit 7) is to be read in. Fur- Control and status
ther sources for the fault acknowledgement are Indices: 2
565 words
selected in P566 and P567. ,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
566 words
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
567 words
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Src Jog Bit0 which bit 0 for selecting a jogging setpoint and Unit: - Parameter menu +
the command for starting jogging operation Control and status
568 (control word 1, bit 8) are to be read in. For Indices: 2
words
selecting a jogging setpoint, the status of bit 1 ,BDS
(P569) is also important. Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Src Jog Bit1 which bit 0 for selecting a jogging setpoint and Unit: - Parameter menu +
the command for starting jogging operation Control and status
569 (control word 1, bit 9) are to be read in. For Indices: 2
words
selecting a jogging setpoint, the status of bit 0 ,BDS
(P568) is also important. Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Src FWD which the command for releasing the positive Unit: - Parameter menu +
Speed direction of rotation (control word 1, bit 11) is Control and status
to be read in. Indices: 2
571 words
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src REV Speed which the command for releasing the negative Unit: - Parameter menu +
direction of rotation (control word 1, bit 12) is Control and status
572 to be read in. Indices: 2
words
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Src MOP UP which the command for increasing the motor Unit: - Parameter menu +
operated potentiometer (control word 1, bit 13) Control and status
573 is to be read in. Indices: 2
words
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Src MOP Down which the command for lowering the motor Unit: - Parameter menu +
operated potentiometer (control word 1, bit 14) Control and status
574 is to be read in. Indices: 2
words
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Src No which the command for tripping an external Unit: - Parameter menu +
ExtFault1 fault 1 (control word 1, bit 15) is to be read in. Control and status
Indices: 2
575 words
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Src which bit 0 for selecting a function data set Unit: - Parameter menu +
FuncDSetBit0 (control word 2, bit 16) is to be read in. For the Control and status
selection of a function data set, the status of bit Indices: 2
576 words
1 (P577) is important. ,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src which bit 1 for selecting a function data set Unit: - Parameter menu +
FuncDSetBit1 (control word 2, bit 17) is to be read in. For the Control and status
selection of a function data set, the status of bit Indices: 2
577 words
0(P576) is important. ,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Src FixSetp which bit 0 for selecting a fixed setpoint (control Unit: - Parameter menu +
Bit0 word 2, bit 20) is to be read in. For the selection Control and status
of a fixed setpoint, the statuses of bit 1 (P581), Indices: 2
580 words
bit 2 (P417) and bit 3 (P418) are important. ,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Src FixSetp which bit 1 for selecting a fixed setpoint (control Unit: - Parameter menu +
Bit1 word 2, bit 21) is to be read in. For the selection Control and status
of a fixed setpoint, the statuses of bit 0 (P580), Indices: 2
581 words
bit 2 (P417) and bit 3 (P418) are important. ,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Src Fly which the command for releasing the “Flying Unit: - Parameter menu +
Release Restart” function (control word 2, bit 23) is to Control and status
583 words
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Src Droop Rel which the command for releasing the droop Unit: - Parameter menu +
(control word 2, bit 24) is to be read in. Control and status
584 Indices: 2
words
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src n-Reg Rel which the command for releasing the speed Unit: - Parameter menu +
controller (control word 2, bit 25) is to be read Control and status
585 in. Indices: 2
words
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Src No which the command for tripping an external Unit: - Parameter menu +
ExtFault2 fault 2 (control word 2, bit 26) is to be read in. Control and status
A signal, logical 0, causes a shutdown of the Indices: 2
586 words
unit on faults after a waiting time of 200ms ,BDS
after completion of pre-charging (converter sta- Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
tus in r001 is larger than 10). With external Changeable in:
fault 2, an external braking unit, for example,
Drive setting
can be monitored.
Ready
Src Master/ which the command for switching between mas- Unit: - Parameter menu +
Slave ter and slave drive (control word 2, bit 27) is to Control and status
587 words
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Src No Ext which the command for tripping an external Unit: - Parameter menu +
Warn1 warning 1 (control word 2, bit 28) is to be read Control and status
in. Indices: 2
588 words
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Src No Ext which the command for tripping an external Unit: - Parameter menu +
Warn2 warning 2 (control word 2, bit 29) is to be read Control and status
in. Indices: 2
589 words
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src BICO DSet which the bit for selecting a BICO data set (con- Unit: - Parameter menu +
trol word 2, bit 30) is to be read in. Control and status
590 Indices: -
words
Type: L2,B
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Src Contac- which the check-back message of a main con- Unit: - Parameter menu +
torMsg tactor (control word 2, bit 31) is to be read in. If Control and status
a source for the check-back message of the Indices: 2
591 words
main contactor is not parameterized (input ,BDS
value = 0), the check-back time parameterized Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
in P600 is waited out after the ON command Changeable in:
and then pre-charging is started. If a source for
Drive setting
the check-back message of the main contactor
is parameterized (input value not equal to 0), a Ready
transition to pre-charging only takes place when
the check-back message is logical 1.
P595* The parameter defines the direction of rotation Init: 0 Menus:

Cl/AntiClRot of the motor. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
595 P595=0: At positive setpoint setting, the drive Max: 1 Setpoint channel
rotates to the right. Drive setting
Unit: -
P595=1: At positive setpoint setting, the drive Upread/free access
rotates to the left. Indices: -
The following quantities are influenced:
Drive setting
• Speed actual value
• Current setpoint
• Position actual value
• Absolute-value of multi-turn encoder
The practical application lies, for example, in
continuous webs, so that all drives rotate in the
direction of the material with positive setpoint
setting.
In the case of positioning tasks, the direction of
motion and the zero position can be defined
irrespective of the motor’s direction of rotation.
It is possible to imagine the function as follows:
two phases are reversed on the drive (change in
the rotating field direction) and the speed actual
value is inverted (restoring the sense of control)
The pulse encoder outputs of SBM and SBR2
show the real shaft speed. P595 has no influ-
ence on these output signals!

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P596* Some speed combinations may make it neces- Init: 0 Menus:

R/L- sary to switch over the direction of rotation of Min: 0 Parameter menu +
ext.Encoder the external encoder so that the direction of Motor/encoder +
rotation coincides with that of the motor Max: 1
596 Encoder data
encoder. Unit: -
Drive setting
0: Clockwise rotation, positive Indices: -
Upread/free access
1: Anti-clockwise rotation, positive Type: O2
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Drive setting
P599* As an alternative to the motor encoder, the Init: 0,00 Menus:

SpeedCombi- external encoder can also be used as actual Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
nation speed value source (setting value 100%). Cur- Motor/encoder +
rent control continues to be based on the motor Max: 100,00
599 Encoder data
encoder. Unit:%
Drive setting
It is also possible to combine the actual speed Indices: -
value of the motor encoder and external Upread/free access
Type: O2
encoder. Changeable in:
0% Motor encoder only Drive setting
100% External encoder only Ready
P600* Function parameter for entering the checkback Init: 0 Menus:

ContactorMsg- time for a main contactor. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Time If no source has been parameterized for the Max: 6000 Sequence control
600 main contactor checkback (P591 > 0), the Upread/free access
parameterized checkback time has to elapse Unit: ms
after the ON command and then pre-charging is Indices: - Changeable in:
commenced. If no checkback signal is given, Drive setting
Type: O2
error F001 is triggered.
If no source has been parameterized for the
main contactor checkback (P591 = 0), the
parameterized checkback time has to elapse
after the ON command and then pre-charging is
commenced. During this time, the main contac-
tor has to close. If a main contactor is available,
a checkback time of at least 120 ms is recom-
mended.
The checkback time is applicable both for ener-
gizing and de-energizing the contactor.
If the line contactor is controlled from the con-
verter (via X9.7 and X9.9), the main contactor
checkback time should be set to at least 120ms.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P602* BICO parameter for selecting the binector from Init: 0,00 Menus:
Excitation which the command for actuating the main con- Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
Time tactor (terminal -X9) is to be read out. Sequence control
Max: 10,00
602 Unit: s Drive setting

Drive setting
Drive setting
P603* Function parameter for entering the excitation Init: 0,00 Menus:
De-Magnetize- time of a connected induction motor. The exci- Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
Time tation time is the time which is to pass between Sequence control
pulse release and release of the ramp genera- Max: 10,00
603 tor. In this time, the induction motor is magne- Unit: s Drive setting
tized to the flux setpoint and can then produce Upread/free access
Indices: -
the required torque.
During the excitation time, the bit “Flying Start
Drive setting
active” (status word 2, bit 16) is set to logical 1.
Drive setting
P605 Function parameter for selecting a brake control Init: 0 Menus:

BrakeCtrl unit. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
605 0 = Without brake Max: 2 Sequence control
1 = Brake without check-back message Unit: - Upread/free access
2 = Brake with check-back message Indices: - Changeable in:
P606 Function parameter for entering the brake Init: 0,20 Menus:
BrakeOpen- opening time. If there is a brake present Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
Time (P605), the setpoint release is delayed by the Sequence control +
set time. The brake can thus open safely before Max: 10,00
606 Diagnostics + Mes-
starting of the motor. Unit: s sages/displays
Drive setting
P607 Function parameter for entering the brake clos- Init: 0,10 Menus:
BrakeClose- ing time. If there is a brake present (P605), Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
Time blocking of the firing pulses is additionally Sequence control +
delayed by the set time after an OFF command. Max: 10,00
The brake can thus safely close before the Unit: s sages/displays
motor is de-energized. In addition, the turn-off
time set in P0801 must be greater than the sum
of the set times in P617 and P607. Type: O2 Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src Brake- which the command for opening the brake is to Unit: - Parameter menu +
Open be read in. Sequence control
Indices: 2
608 Type: L2,B Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src Brake- which the command for closing the brake is to Unit: - Parameter menu +
Close be read in. Sequence control
Indices: 4
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src from which the actual value for comparison with Unit: - Parameter menu +
BrakeThresh1 brake threshold 1 is to be read in. If the current Sequence control
component (K0242) is used, magnetizing in the Indices: -
610 case of induction motors and voltage boost in Type: L2,K Upread/free access
the case of v/f control can be monitored. Changeable in:
A torque-generating current component Drive setting
(K0184) only results after setpoint enable.
P611 Function parameter for entering brake threshold Init: 0,0 Menus:
Brake Thresh 1, whereby, if this threshold is exceeded, the Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
brake is to open. Sequence control
611 Max: 200,0

Ready
Src Sig- which the check-back message “Brake opened” Unit: - Parameter menu +
BrakeOp is to be read in. Sequence control
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src SigBrake- which the check-back message “Brake closed” is Unit: - Parameter menu +
Clos to be read in. Sequence control
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src PBrakeC- which the command for closing a holding brake Unit: - Parameter menu +
los is to be read in. Sequence control
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting

Src from which the actual value for comparison with Unit: - Parameter menu +
BrakeThresh2 brake threshold 2 is to be read in. Preferably, Sequence control
the actual speed (KK0091) is selected as the Indices: -
615 actual value. Type: L2,K Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
P616 Function parameter for entering brake threshold Init: 0,5 Menus:
BrakeThresh2 2. If the actual value falls below this threshold Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
after an OFF command, the brake is closed and Sequence control
616 a firing-pulse block is initiated by the brake con- Max: 200,0
trol unit (B278). The value entered here should Unit:% Upread/free access
not be smaller than the turn-off value parame- Changeable in:
Indices: -
terized in P800.
Ready
P617 Function parameter for entering the time by Init: 0,00 Menus:
BrakeThresh2 which closing of the brakes is to be delayed Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
Time after an OFF command. If the threshold value Sequence control +
falls below brake threshold 2 after an OFF com- Max: 100,00
mand, closing of the brake is delayed by the Unit: s sages/displays
time entered.
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.6.10 Terminals
P630* Function parameter for scaling the analog input Init: 1,00 Menus:
AnaIn Scale on the terminal strip of the basic unit. Incoming Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
signals are multiplied by the parameter value Terminals
630 entered. Max: 100,00
Unit: - Upread/free access

Ready
P631* Function parameters for entering the offset for Init: 0,00 Menus:
AnaIn Offset the analog input on the terminal strip of the Min: -100,00 Parameter menu +
basic unit. The offset is added to the analog Terminals
631 input signal. Max: 100,00
Indices:
i001 = CU-1: Offset of the analog input 1
i002 = CU-2: offset of the analog input 2
P632* Function parameter for configuring the analog Init: 0 Menus:

AnaIn Conf input on the terminal strip of the basic unit.The Min: 0 Parameter menu +
plus or minus sign is selected for the read-in Terminals
632 analog value which is to be provided. Max: 3
• 0 = Do not change sign
• 1 = Always pass on value with a plus sign
• 2 = Invert sign Type: O2 Drive setting
• 3 = Always pass on value with a minus
sign
The sign can be altered again by means of the
“Invert Analog Input” command (P633).
Src AnaIn which the command for inverting the analog Unit: - Parameter menu +
Invert input signal on the terminals strip of the basic Terminals
unit is to be read in. Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting
P634 Function parameter for entering the smoothing Init: 0,0 Menus:
AnaIn Smooth time constant for the analog inputs on the ter- Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
minal strip of the basic unit. Terminals
634 Max: 100,0
Indices: Upread/free access
Unit: ms
• i001 = CU-1: Smoothing time constant of Changeable in:
Indices: -
analog input 1
• i002 = CU-2: smoothing time constant of
analog input 2 Ready
Table 5-18: Terminals

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P635* Function parameter for entering the window for Init: 0,00 Menus:
AnaIn Window the analog input on the terminal strip of the Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
basic unit. Only when the analog input signal Terminals
635 has been changed by the set parameter value in Max: 100,00
relation to its old comparison value is this Unit:% Upread/free access
change passed on. The new signal value is Changeable in:
Indices: -
stored and serves as the comparison value in
the next processing cycle. Entry of a parameter
value not equal to 0 suppresses signal noise. Ready
Abrupt setpoint changes, in contrast, are passed
on without any delay.
Src AnaIn Rel which the command for releasing the analog Unit: - Parameter menu +
inputs on the terminal strip of the basic unit is Terminals
636 to be read in. Without a release, the setpoints Indices: -
provided by the analog inputs is at 0. Type: L2,B Upread/free access
Indices: Changeable in:
i001 = CU-1: Release of the analog input 1 Drive setting
i002 = CU-2: Release of the analog input 2

Analn Setp point provided by the analog input. Unit:% Parameter menu +
637 i001 = CU-1: Setpoint of the analog input 1 Indices: - Terminals
i002 = CU-2: Setpoint of the analog input 2 Type: I2 Upread/free access
P640* BICO parameter for selecting the connectors index1: 0 Menus:

Src AnaOut whose values are to be output at the analog Unit: - Parameter menu +
outputs of the terminal strip for the basic unit. Terminals
640 Indices: 2
Indices: Upread/free access
,BDS
i001 = CU-1: Connector number to analog out- Changeable in:
put 1 Type: L2,K
Drive setting
i002 = CU-2: connector number to analog out-
put 2 Ready
P641* Function parameter for configuring the analog index1: 0 Menus:

AnaOut Conf output on the terminal strip of the basic unit. A Min: 0 Parameter menu +
selection is made as to the sign (plus or minus) Terminals
641 with which the value of the connector selected Max: 3
in P640 is to be output at the analog output. Unit: - Upread/free access
0 = Do not change sign Indices: 4 Changeable in:
1 = Always output value with a plus sign ,FDS Drive setting
2 = Invert the sign Type: O2
3 = Always output the value with a minus sign
Table 5-18: Terminals (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P642 Function parameter for entering the smoothing index1: 0 Menus:

AnaOut time constant for the analog output on the ter- Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Smooth minal strip of the basic unit. Terminals
Max: 100
642 Unit: ms Upread/free access
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready
P643 Function parameter for scaling the analog out- index1: 10,0 Menus:
CU AnalogOut- put on the terminal strip of the basic unit. With Min: -200,0 Parameter menu +
Gain the help of the parameter value entered, the Terminals
analog voltage is determined to which an inter- Max: 200,0
643 nal signal value of 100% (4000 H) is to corre- Unit: V Upread/free access
spond. Changeable in:
Indices: 4
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I2 Ready
P644 Function parameter for entering the offset for index1: 0,0 Menus:
AnaOut Offset the analog input on the terminal strip of the Min: -10,0 Parameter menu +
basic unit. The offset is added to the analog out- Terminals
644 put signal which has already been scaled Max: 10,0
(P643). Unit: V Upread/free access
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I2 Ready
P645* If parameter value 5 is set in parameter P647/ index1: 1 Menus:

Src Conf 648, then this binector is used to change the Unit: - Parameter menu +
DigIn4 transfer of the position measurement between Terminals
rising and falling edge. Indices: 2
Index 1: enable/disable position measurement
recording Changeable in:
Index 2: selection of edge Drive setting
If the binector has the value 0, the position Ready
measurement is taken on a rising edge.
If the binector has the value 1, the position
measurement is taken on a falling edge.
r646 Visualization parameter for displaying the signal Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Status DigIn level at the digital inputs and outputs of the ter- Unit: - Parameter menu +
minal strip for the basic unit. Terminals
646 Indices: -
Type: V2 Upread/free access

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P647* Function parameter for configuring digital input index1: 0 Menus:

Conf DigIn4 4. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
647 • 0 = Use as a normal digital input Max: 5 Terminals
• 1 = OFF2 with rising edge
• 2 = OFF2 with falling edge Changeable in:
Indices: 2
• 3 = Adopt measured value of the position
Drive setting
with rising edge ,BDS
• 4 = Adopt measured value of the position Type: O2
with falling edge
• 5 = Adopt measured value of the position
depending on the binector
In order to use terminal -X101/6 as a digital
input, P654 must be set to 0 in both indices.
P648* Function parameter for configuring digital input index1: 0 Menus:

Conf DigIn5 5. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
648 0 = Use as a normal digital input Max: 5 Terminals
1 = OFF2 with rising edge Unit: - Upread/free access
2 = OFF2 with falling edge Indices: 2 Changeable in:
3 = Adopt measured value of the position with ,BDS Drive setting
rising edge
Type: O2
4 = Adopt measured value of the position with
falling edge
5 = Adopt measured value depending on binec-
tor
P649* If parameter value 5 is set in parameter P647/ index1: 1 Menus:

Src Conf 648, then this binector is used to change the Unit: - Parameter menu +
DigIn5 transfer of the position measurement between Terminals
rising and falling edge. Indices: 2
Index 1: enable/disable position measurement
recording Changeable in:
Index 2: selection of edge Drive setting
If the binector has the value 0, the position Ready
measurement is taken on a rising edge.
If the binector has the value 1, the position
measurement is taken on a falling edge.
P651* BICO parameter for selecting the binector index1: 0 Menus:

Src DigOut1 whose value is to be output at terminal -X101/3 Unit: - Parameter menu +
of the terminal strip for the basic unit. In order Terminals
651 to use terminal -X101/3 as a digital input, both Indices: 2
indices must be set to 0. ,BDS Upread/free access

Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"


Drive setting
Ready


Drive setting
Ready


Drive setting
Ready
P655* Parameter for selection of the signal type for index1: 0 Menus:
EB1 Signal analog input Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Type 1 on EB1. Max: 1 Terminals
655 0 = +/- 10 V Unit: - Upread/free access
1 = 0... 20 mA Indices: 6 Changeable in:
Index 1: AI1 of the first inserted EB1 Type: O2 Drive setting
Index 4: AI1 of the second inserted EB1
Index 2, 3, 5 and 6: no significance
P656* Parameter for normalization of the analog index1: 1,00 Menus:

EB1 AnaIn- inputs on EB1. Incoming signals are multiplied Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
Norm by the entered parameter value. Terminals
Max: 100,00
656 Index 1 to 3: AI1 to AI3 of the first inserted EB1 Upread/free access
Unit: -
Index 4 to 6: AI1 to AI3 of the second inserted Changeable in:
EB1 Indices: 6
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P657 Parameter for entering the offset for the analog index1: 0,00 Menus:
EB1 AnaIn inputs on EB1. The offset is added to the Min: -100,00 Parameter menu +
Offset already scaled analog input signal. Terminals
Max: 100,00
Unit: -
EB1 Indices: 6
Ready
P658* Parameter for configuring the analog inputs on index1: 0 Menus:

EB1 AnaIn EB1. Selection is made here of the sign with Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Conf which the read-in analog value has to be pro- Terminals
vided. Max: 3
658 Unit: - Upread/free access
• 1 = Always pass on value with positive
sign Type: O2 Drive setting
• 2 = Invert sign
• 3 = Always pass on value with negative
sign
Index 1 to 3: AI1 to AI3 of the first inserted EB1
Index 4 to 6: AI1 to AI3 of the second inserted
EB1
The sign can be changed again by the “Invert
analog input” command (P659)
P659* Parameter for selecting the binector from which index1: 0 Menus:
EB1SrcAnaIn the command to invert the analog input signal Unit: - Parameter menu +
inv. on EB1 has to be read in. Terminals
Indices: 6
Type: L2,B
EB1
Drive setting
P660* Parameter for entering the smoothing time con- index1: 0 Menus:
EB1 stants for the analog inputs on EB1. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
AnaInSmooth Index 1 to 3: AI1 to AI3 of the first inserted EB1 Max: 1000 Terminals
2 Index 4 to 6: AI1 to AI3 of the second inserted Upread/free access
Unit: ms
660 EB1 Changeable in:
Indices: 6
Ready
P661* Parameter for selecting the binectors from index1: 1 Menus:

EB1 SrcAnaIn- which the commands to enable the analog Unit: - Parameter menu +
Rel inputs on EB1 have to be read in. Without an Terminals
enable, the setpoint provided by the analog Indices: 6
661 input is at 0. Type: L2,B Upread/free access
Index 1 to 3: AI1 to AI3 of the first inserted EB1 Changeable in:
Index 4 to 6: AI1 to AI3 of the second inserted Drive setting
EB1

"Uncontrolled Copy"

EB1 AnaIn- points which are provided by the analog inputs Unit:% Parameter menu +
Setp of EB1. Terminals
Indices: 6
Type: I2
Index 4 to 6: AI1 to AI3 of the second inserted
EB1
P663* Parameter for selecting the connectors whose index1: 0 Menus:

EB1 values have to be output at the analog outputs Unit: - Parameter menu +
SrcAnaOut on EB1. Terminals
Indices: 4
663 Index 1 and 2: AO1 and AO2 of the first Upread/free access
inserted EB1 Type: L2,K
Changeable in:
Index 3 and 4: AO1 and AO2 of the second
inserted EB1 Drive setting
Ready
P664* Parameter for configuring the analog outputs on index1: 0 Menus:

EB1 AnaOut EB1. Selection of the sign is made here with Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Conf which the value of the connector selected in Terminals
P663 has to be output at the analog output. Max: 3
• 1 = Always output value with positive
• 2 = Invert sign Ready
• 3 = Always output value with negative
sign
Index 1 and 2: AO1 and AO2 of the first
inserted EB1
inserted EB1
EB1 AnaOut- stants for the analog outputs on EB1. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Smooth Index 1 and 2: AO1 and AO2 of the first Max: 10000 Terminals
665 inserted EB1 Upread/free access
Unit: -
Index 3 and 4: AO1 and AO2 of the second Changeable in:
inserted EB1 Indices: 4
Ready
P666* Parameter for scaling the analog outputs on index1: 10,00 Menus:
EB1AnaOutNor EB1. With the help of the entered parameter Min: -200,00 Parameter menu +
m value, the analog output voltage to which an Terminals
internal signal value of 100% (4000 H) should Max: 200,00
666 correspond is determined. Unit: V Upread/free access
Index 1 and 2: AO1 and AO2 of the first Indices: 4 Changeable in:
inserted EB1 Drive setting
Type: I2
Index 3 and 4: AO1 and AO2 of the second Ready
inserted EB1

"Uncontrolled Copy"
EB1 AnaOut- outputs on EB1. The offset is added to the Min: -200,00 Parameter menu +
Offset already scaled analog output signal. Terminals
Max: 200,00
inserted EB1 Unit: V
inserted EB1 Type: I2 Drive setting
Ready

EB1 AnaOut values which are connected to the analog out- Unit:% Parameter menu +
Value puts of EB1. Terminals
Indices: 4
inserted EB1 Type: I2
inserted EB1
P669* Parameter for selecting the binectors whose val- index1: 0 Menus:
EB1 Src ues have to be output at terminal -X480/43 to Unit: - Parameter menu +
DigOut 46 of EB1. The relevant index of the binector Terminals
has to be set to 0 in order to use terminal - Indices: 8
669 X480/43 to 48 as digital inputs. Type: L2,B Upread/free access
Index 1 to 4: DO1 to DO4 of the first inserted Changeable in:
EB1 Drive setting
Index 5 to 8: DO1 to DO4 of the second inserted Ready
EB1

EB1 Termi- level of the digital inputs and outputs of EB1. Unit: - Parameter menu +
nalDisp Index 1: First inserted EB1 Indices: 2 Terminals
670 Index 2: Second inserted EB1 Type: V2 Upread/free access

EB2 Termin level of the digital inputs and outputs of EB2 Unit: - Parameter menu +
Disp Index 1: First inserted EB2 Indices: 2 Terminals
673 Index 2: Second inserted EB2 Type: V2 Upread/free access
P674* Parameter for selecting the binectors for activa- index1: 0 Menus:
EB2 Src Relay- tion of the relay outputs on EB2. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Out Index 1 to 4: Relay outputs of the first inserted Indices: 8 Terminals
674 EB2 Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Index 5 to 8: Relay outputs of the second Changeable in:
inserted EB2
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P675* Parameter for selecting the signal type for the index1: 0 Menus:
EB2 Signal analog input on EB2. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Type 0 = +/- 10 V Max: 1 Terminals
675 1 = 0... 20 mA Unit: - Upread/free access
Index 1: First inserted EB2 Indices: 2 Changeable in:
Index 2: Second inserted EB2 Type: O2 Drive setting
P676* Parameter for normalizing the analog input on index1: 1,00 Menus:
EB2 AnaIn- EB2. Incoming signals are multiplied by the Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
Norm entered parameter value. Terminals
Max: 100,00
676 Index 1: First inserted EB2 Upread/free access
Unit: -
Index 2: Second inserted EB2 Changeable in:
Indices: 2
Ready
EB2 AnaInOff- input on EB2. The offset is added to the already Min: -100,00 Parameter menu +
set scaled analog input signal. Terminals
Max: 100,00
Unit: -
Indices: 2
P678* Function parameter for configuring the analog index1: 0 Menus:

EB2 AnaIn- input on EB2. Selection is made here of the sign Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Conf with which the read-in analog value has to be Terminals
provided. Max: 3
• 1 = Always pass on value with positive
• 2 = Invert sign
• 3 = Always pass on value with negative
sign
Index 1: First inserted EB2
Index 2: Second inserted EB2
The sign can be changed again by the “Invert
analog input” command (P681).
EB2 Src the command to invert the analog input signal Unit: - Parameter menu +
AnaInInv on EB2 has to be read in. Terminals
Indices: 2
Type: L2,B
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
EB2 stant for the analog input on EB2. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
AnaInSmooth Index 1: First inserted EB2 Max: 1000 Terminals
2 Index 2: Second inserted EB2 Upread/free access
Unit: ms
680 Changeable in:
Indices: 2
Ready
EB2 Src the command to enable the analog input on EB2 Unit: - Parameter menu +
AnaInRel has to be read in. Without an enable, the set- Terminals
point provided by the analog input is at 0. Indices: 2
Changeable in:
Drive setting

EB2 AnaIn point which is provided by the analog input of Unit:% Parameter menu +
Setp EB2. Terminals
Indices: 2
Type: I2
P683* Parameter for selecting the connector whose index1: 0 Menus:

EB2 Src value has to be output at the analog output on Unit: - Parameter menu +
AnaOut EB2. Terminals
Indices: 2
Type: L2,K
Drive setting
Ready
P684* Parameter for configuring the analog output on index1: 0 Menus:

EB2 AnaOut- EB2. The sign with which the value of the con- Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Conf nector selected in P683 has to be output at the Terminals
analog output is selected here. Max: 3
• 1 = Always output value with positive
• 2 = Invert sign Ready
• 3 = Always output value with negative
sign

"Uncontrolled Copy"
EB2AnaOutSm stant for the analog output on EB2. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
ooth Index 1: First inserted EB2 Max: 10000 Terminals
685 Index 2: Second inserted EB2 Unit: - Upread/free access

Ready
P686* Parameter for scaling the analog output on EB2. index1: 10,00 Menus:
EB2 AnaOut- With the help of the entered parameter value, it Min: -200,00 Parameter menu +
Norm is determined which analog output voltage an Terminals
internal signal value of 100% (4000 H) should Max: 200,00
686 correspond to. Unit: V Upread/free access
Index 1: First inserted EB2 Indices: 2 Changeable in:
Index 2: Second inserted EB2 Type: I2 Drive setting
Ready
EB2 AnaOut- output on EB2. The offset is added to the Min: -200,00 Parameter menu +
Offset already scaled analog output signal. Terminals
Max: 200,00
Unit: V
Indices: 2
Ready

EB2 AnaOut value which is connected to the analog output of Unit:% Parameter menu +
Value EB2. Terminals
Indices: 2
Type: I2

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.6.11 Communications
P700* Bus address of the serial interfaces (see section index1: 0 Menus:
SCom BusAddr “Serial interfaces” in operating instructions, Part Min: 0 Parameter menu +
2) Communication +
700 Max: 31
Indices: SCom1/SCom2 +
Unit: - SCB/SCI
• i001 = SCom1: bus address of the ser.
Indices: 3 Quick parameter-
interface 1(CU)
• i002 = SCom2: bus address of the ser. Type: O2 ization
interface 2 (CU), Drive setting
• i003 = SCB: bus address of the SCB, if Upread/free access
P696 = 1, 2
Changeable in:
In the case of a factory setting via SCom1,
SCom2 or SCB2, this parameter is not reset. Drive setting
Drive setting
Ready
P701* Function parameter for entering the baud rates index1: 6 Menus:
SCom Baud for the serial interfaces with USS protocol Min: 0 Parameter menu +
701 Index 1: serial interface 1 (Scom/SCom1) Max: 13 Communication +
Index 2: serial interface 2 (SCom2) SCom1/SCom2 +
Unit: - SCB/SCI
Index 3: SCB Indices: 3 Drive setting
1 = 300 Baud Type: O2 Upread/free access
2 = 600 Baud
Changeable in:
3 = 1200 Baud
Drive setting
4 = 2400 Baud
Drive setting
5 = 4800 Baud
Ready
6 = 9600 Baud
7 = 19200 Baud
8 = 38400 Baud
9 = 57600 Baud only SCB 1/2
10 = 76800 Baud only SCB 1/2
11 = 93750 Baud only SCB 1/2
12 = 115200 Baud only SCB 1/2
13 = 187500 Baud only SCB 2
The settings in indices 2 and 3 have no signifi-
cance for TripRite units. In the case of a factory
setting via SCom1, SCom2 or SCB2, this param-
eter is not reset.
Table 5-19: Communications

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P702* Function parameter for entering the number of index1: 127 Menus:
SCom PKW # PKW’s for the serial interfaces with USS proto- Min: 0 Parameter menu +
col. The number of PKW’s defines the number of Communication +
702 words in the telegram which are to be used for Max: 127
SCom1/SCom2 +
transmitting parameter values. Unit: - SCB/SCI
Index 1: Serial interface 1 (SCom(/SCom1) Indices: 3 Upread/free access
Index 2: Serial interface 2 (SCom2) Type: O2 Changeable in:
Index 3: SCB Drive setting
0 = No transmission of parameters Ready
3 = 3 words for PKE, index and PWE
4 = 4 words for PKE, index, PWE1 and PWE2
127 = Variable length for transmitting parame-
ter descriptions, texts and values of indicated
parameters with one request.
eter is not reset.
P703* Function parameter for entering the number of index1: 2 Menus:

SCom PcD # PcD’s for the serial interfaces with USS protocol. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
The number of PcDs defines the number of Communication +
703 words in the telegram which are to be used for Max: 16
SCom1/SCom2 +
transmitting control words and setpoints or sta- Unit: - SCB/SCI
tus words and actual values.
Index 1: Serial interface 1 (SCom(/SCom1)
Index 2: Serial interface 2 (SCom2)
Drive setting
Index 3: SCB
Ready
eter is not reset.
Table 5-19: Communications (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P704* Function parameter for entering the telegram index1: 0 Menus:

SCom TlgOFF failure time for the serial interfaces with USS Min: 0 Parameter menu +
protocol.The telegram failure time defines the Communication +
704 time within which a valid telegram has to be Max: 6500
SCom1/SCom2 +
received. If no valid telegram is received within Unit: ms SCB/SCI
the specified time, the unit trips a fault. With
the help of P781, tripping of the fault can be
delayed and the drive shut down if necessary. If Type: O2 Changeable in:
a parameter value of 0 is entered, there is no
Drive setting
monitoring. This setting is to be selected for
non-cyclical telegram transmission (e.g. for Ready
OP1S).
Index 1: Serial interface 1 (SCom(/SCom1)
Index 2: Serial interface 2 (SCom2)
Index 3: SCB
eter is not reset.

SrcSCom1Trns which are to be transmitted by serial interface 1 Unit: - Parameter menu +
Data (SCom1). In addition to the connectors them- Communication +
selves, their place in the telegram is also Indices: 16
707 SCom1/SCom2
defined. Type: L2,K
Upread/free access
Index 1: Word 1 in the PZD part of the telegram
Changeable in:
Index 2: Word 2 in the PZD part of the tele-
gram... Drive setting
Index 16: Word 16 in the PZD part of the tele- Ready
gram
Word 1 should be assigned status word 1
(K0032). With double-word connectors, the
associated connector number must be entered
in 2 successive indices because, otherwise, only
the higher-value word is transmitted.
The number of words transmitted in the PZD
part of the telegram is set in P703, Index i001.
r709 Display of the process data received via inter- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
SCom1 Recv- face SCom1 Unit: - Parameter menu +
Data Index 1 - 16: SCom1 process data Indices: 16 Communication +
709 SCom1/SCom2
Type: L2
Upread/free access
r710 Display of the process data transmitted via Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

SCom1 Trns- interface SCom1 Unit: - Parameter menu +
Data Indices: 16 Communication +
710 SCom1/SCom2
Type: L2
Upread/free access

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P711* Function parameter for entering the CB-specific index1: 0 Menus:

CB Parameter parameter. The parameter is only relevant if Min: 0 Parameter menu +
1 there is a communication board (CBx). Its sig- Communication +
nificance depends on the type of Cbx built in. If Max: 65535
711 Field bus interfaces
a set parameter value is outside the value range Unit: -
accepted by the built-in Cbx, the unit trips a Board configuration
Indices: 2
fault. Drive setting
Type: O2
Index 1: 1st CB Upread/free access
Index 2: 2nd CB Changeable in:
In the case of a factory setting via 1st CB or 2nd Board configuration
CB, this parameter is not reset.
Drive setting
P712* See P711 for description index1: 0 Menus:

CB Parameter Min: 0 Parameter menu +
2 Max: 65535 Communication +
Unit: -
Board configuration
Indices: 2
Drive setting
Type: O2
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Board configuration
Drive setting

Unit: -
Board configuration
Indices: 2
Drive setting
Type: O2
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Board configuration
Drive setting

Unit: -
Board configuration
Indices: 2
Drive setting
Type: O2
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Board configuration
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Unit: -
Board configuration
Indices: 2
Drive setting
Type: O2
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Board configuration
Drive setting

Unit: -
Board configuration
Indices: 2
Drive setting
Type: O2
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Board configuration
Drive setting

Unit: -
Board configuration
Indices: 2
Drive setting
Type: O2
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Board configuration
Drive setting

Unit: -
Board configuration
Indices: 2
Drive setting
Type: O2
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Board configuration
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Unit: -
Board configuration
Indices: 2
Drive setting
Type: O2
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Board configuration
Drive setting

Unit: -
Board configuration
Indices: 2
Drive setting
Type: O2
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Board configuration
Drive setting
P721* Function parameter for entering the 11th CB- index1: 0 Menus:
CB Parameter specific parameter. The parameter is only rele- Min: 0 Parameter menu +
11 vant if there is a communication board (CBx). Communication +
Its meaning depends on the type of Cbx built in. Max: 65535
If a set parameter value is outside the value Unit: -
range accepted by the built-in Cbx, the unit Board configuration
Indices: 10
trips a fault. Drive setting
Type: O2
Index 1-5: 1st CB Upread/free access
Index 6-10: 2nd CB Changeable in:
In the case of a factory setting via 1st CB or 2nd Board configuration
Drive setting
P722* Function parameter for entering the telegram index1: 10 Menus:

CB/TB TlgOFF failure time for a built-in communication board Min: 0 Parameter menu +
(CBx) or technology board (TB). The telegram Communication +
722 failure time defines the time within which a valid Max: 6500
Field bus interfaces
telegram has to be received. If no valid tele- Unit: ms
gram is received the unit trips a fault. With the Upread/free access
Indices: 2
help of P781, fault tripping can be delayed and Changeable in:
the drive shut down if necessary. Type: O2
Drive setting
If a parameter value of 0 is entered, there is no
Ready
monitoring. In the case of a factory setting via
1st CB or 2nd CB, this parameter is not reset.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P723 Activates cycle monitoring with clocked Profi- Init: 0 Menus:

CBP2_CycleÜ bus. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
W Function: If a clocked telegram is received out- Max: 1 Communication +
723 side the bus cycle time grid, the telegram is Field bus interfaces
ignored. Unit: -
Upread/free access
0 Cycle monitoring deactivated Indices: -
Changeable in:
1 Cycle monitoring activated Type: O2
Drive setting
P724* Selection of the CB board (1st or 2nd) which is Init: Menus:

Select CB synchronized to reading basic unit setpoints Min: 0 Parameter menu
synch (only one board can be synchronized in this
way). Max: 1 Upread/free access
724 Unit: - Changeable in:
0 = 1st CB
1 = 2nd CB Indices: - Drive setting
Important: Modification is required for special Type: O2
applications only (customer-specific CBC)
r732 Visualization parameter for displaying diagnostic Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

CB Diagnosis information for a built-in communication board Unit: - Parameter menu +
(CBx) or technology board (TB). The meaning of Communication +
732 the displayed values is specific to each particu- Indices: 64
lar board. Type: L2
Upread/free access

CB/TB Recv- words and setpoints (process data) which are Unit: - Parameter menu +
Data received by a communication board (CBx) or a Communication +
technology board (TB) and passed on to the Indices: 32
basic unit. Type: L2
Upread/free access

SrcCB/TBTrns- are to be transmitted by a communication board Unit: - Parameter menu +
Data (CBx) or a technology board (TB). In addition to Communication +
the connectors themselves, their place in the Indices: 16
transmitted telegram is also defined. Type: L2,K
Upread/free access
Index 1: Word 1 in the PZD part of the telegram
Changeable in:
Index 2: Word 2 in the PZD part of the tele-
gram... Drive setting
Index 16: Word 16 in the PZD part of the tele- Ready
gram
Word 1 should be assigned status word 1
(K0032). For double-word connectors, the asso-
ciated connector number must be entered in
two successive indices because, otherwise, only
the higher-value word is transmitted.
r735 Display of the process data sent to the TB or the Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
CB/TB Trns- CB in hexadecimal form Unit: - Parameter menu +
Data Index 1…16 : Transmit data for TB/CB Indices: 32 Communication +
735 Index 17…32: Transmit data for 2nd CB Field bus interfaces
Type: L2
Upread/free access

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Src CB2 Trns- which are to be transmitted by the 2nd commu- Unit: - Parameter menu +
Data nication board (2nd CBX). Both the connectors Communication +
themselves and their position in the transmit Indices: 16
telegram are defined. Type: L2,K
Upread/free access
Index 1: Word 1 in PcD part of telegram
Changeable in:
Index 2: Word 2 in PcD part of telegram...
Drive setting
Index 16: Word 16 in PcD part of telegram
Ready
Word 1 should be assigned with status word 1
(K0032). In the case of double word connectors
the relevant connector number must be entered
at 2 consecutive indices, otherwise only the
higher-value word is transferred.

PKW Order parameter task (PKW) which is received by a Unit: - Parameter menu +
communication board (CBx) or a technology Communication +
738 board (TB) and passed on to the basic unit. Indices: 20
SCom1/SCom2 +
Index 1: Task code and parameter number Type: L2 Field bus inter-
Index 2: Parameter index faces + SCB/SCI
Index 3: 1st parameter value Upread/free access
Index 4: 2nd parameter value

Index 1 to 4: SCom1
Index 5 to 8: 1st CB
Index 9 to 12: SCB
Index 13 to 16: SCom2
Index 17 to 20: 2nd CB
All values are shown as hexadecimals.

PKW Reply parameter reply (PKW) which is passed on from Unit: - Parameter menu +
the basic unit to a communication board (CBx) Communication +
739 or a technology board (TB) and, from there, is Indices: 20
SCom1/SCom2 +
transmitted to the communication partner. Type: L2 Field bus inter-
Index 1: Task number and parameter number faces + SCB/SCI
Index 2: Parameter index Upread/free access
Index 3: 1st parameter value
Index 4: 2nd parameter value
Index 1 to 4: SCom1
Index 5 to 8: 1st CB
Index 9 to 12: SCB
Index 13 to 16: SCom2
Index 17 to 20: 2nd CB
All values are shown as hexadecimals.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P740* Function parameter for entering the node index1: 1 Menus:

SLB NodeAddr address for a built-in SIMOLINK board (SLB). Min: 0 Parameter menu +
The node address defines the telegrams to SIMOLINK
740 which the relevant unit is allowed writing Max: 200
access. Reading access is set in P749. Unit: - Quick parameter-
ization
The node address also defines whether a node Indices: 2
also acts as the dispatcher. Board configuration
Type: O2
0 = Dispatcher (generates telegram circulation) Upread/free access
Not equal to 0 = Transceiver Changeable in:
In the SIMOLINK ring, only one node is allowed Board configuration
to perform the dispatcher function. It is not per- Drive setting
mitted to allocate node address 0 if a higher-
level automation unit (automation master) per-
forms the dispatcher function.
P741* Function parameter for entering the telegram Init: 0 Menus:

SLB TlgOFF failure time for a built-in SIMOLINK board Min: 0 Parameter menu +
(SLB). The telegram failure time defines the SIMOLINK
741 time within which a valid synchronizing tele- Max: 6500
gram must be received. If no valid synchroniz- Unit: ms Board configuration
ing telegram is received within the specified Upread/free access
Indices: -
time, the unit trips a fault. With the help of
P781, tripping of the fault can be delayed and
the drive can be shut down if necessary. Board configuration
Drive setting
P742* Function parameter for setting the transmission Init: 3 Menus:

SLB Trns power for a built-in SIMOLINK board (SLB). Min: 1 Parameter menu +
Power Operation with reduced transmission power SIMOLINK
increases the life of the transmitter and receiver Max: 3
742 components. Unit: - Board configuration
• 1 = 0 m to 15 m cable length Indices: - Upread/free access

• 2 = 15 m to 25 m cable length Type: O2 Changeable in:
• 3 = 25 m to 40 m cable length Board configuration
Drive setting
P743 Function parameter for entering the number of index1: 0 Menus:

SLB # Nodes nodes in the SIMOLINK ring. The entered value Min: 0 Parameter menu +
enables a built-in SIMOLINK board (SLB) to SIMOLINK
743 determine its position in the ring and to com- Max: 255
pensate for the bus transfer time. The total of Unit: - Board configuration
all nodes (e.g. SLB’s etc.) in the SIMOLINK ring Upread/free access
Indices: 2
is to be entered.
Board configuration
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P744* Function parameter for selecting the module index1: 0 Menus:

Src SYNC Sel that supplies the SYNC pulse. Unit: - Parameter menu +
744 i02 i01 Indices: 2 SIMOLINK
0 0 = SLB in lower slot Type: L2,B Upread/free access
0 1 = SLB in higher slot Changeable in:
1 0 = CBP2 in lower slot Drive setting
1 1 = CBP2 in higher slot
The slots in rising order are as follows: A, B, C,
D, E, F, G.
P745* Function parameter for entering the channels index1: 2 Menus:

SLB Channel # which the dispatcher is to provide to each trans- Min: 1 Parameter menu +
ceiver. The number of channels together with SIMOLINK
745 P746 determines the number of nodes which Max: 8
can be addressed. This parameter is only rele- Unit: - Board configuration
vant for the dispatcher (P740=0). Upread/free access
Indices: 2
Board configuration
Drive setting
P746* Function parameter for entering the cycle time index1: 3,20 Menus:
SLB Cycle for SIMOLINK. The cycle time is the time which Min: 0,20 Parameter menu +
Time is needed for complete circulation of all tele- SIMOLINK
grams in the SIMOLINK ring. It also determines Max: 6,50
746 the time reference in which the transceivers Unit: ms Board configuration
receive synchronizing telegrams. For synchroni- Upread/free access
Indices: 2
zation of the transceivers to take place, the
cycle time must amount to several times that of
time slot T2 of the transceivers. The length of Board configuration
time slot T2 (T2 = 4/P340) is defined by the Drive setting
pulse frequency (P340).
Together with P745, the time cycle determines
the number of addressable nodes. The parame-
ter is only relevant for the dispatcher (P740=0).
P747* BICO parameter for selecting the binectors index1: 0 Menus:

SrcSL- which are to be sent as application flags by the Unit: - Parameter menu +
BAppl.Flags SIMOLINK board (SLB). In addition to the binec- SIMOLINK
tors themselves, their place in the application Indices: 4
747 part of the transmitted telegram is defined. Type: L2,B Upread/free access
• Index 1: 1st binector Changeable in:

• Index 2: 2nd binector Drive setting
• Index 3: 3rd binector
• Index 4: 4th binector

"Uncontrolled Copy"
r748 Visualization parameter for displaying the diag- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

SLB Diagnosis nostic information for a built-in SIMOLINK board Unit: - Parameter menu +
(SLB). SIMOLINK
748 Indices: 17
• Index 1: Number of error-free synchro- Upread/free access
Type: O2
nizing telegrams
• Index 2: Number of CRC errors
• Index 3: Number of time-out errors
• Index 4: Last address actuated
• Index 5: Address of the node which
transmits the special telegram, “Time
out”.
• Index 6: Active SYNC interrupt delay 1 =
273 ns
• Index 7: Position of the node in the ring
• Index 8: Number of nodes in the ring
• Index 9: Synchronism deviation (65535
synchronization not active) should fluctu-
ate between 65515 and 20
• Index 10: Corrected pulse period in units
of 100 ns (65535 synchronization not
active)
• Index 11: T0 counter (0 with active syn-
chronization)
• Index 12: internal
• Index 14: Time counter (0 with active
synchronization)
• Index 15: implemented bus cycle time
P749* Function parameter for entering the node index1: 0,0 Menus:
SLB Read Addr addresses and channels from which a built-in Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
SIMOLINK board (SLB) is to read out data. The SIMOLINK
749 places before the comma in the input value Max: 200,7
define the node address and the places after the Unit: - Board configuration
comma define the channel. Upread/free access
Indices: 8
Example: Changeable in:
Type: O2
2.0 = node address 2, Channel 0 Board configuration
Writing access is set in P740. Drive setting
r750 Visualization parameter for the data received Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

SLB Rcv Data via SIMOLINK. Unit: - Parameter menu +
750 Indices: 16 SIMOLINK
Type: L2 Upread/free access

"Uncontrolled Copy"

SrcSLBTrns- which are to be transmitted by a SIMOLINK Unit: - Parameter menu +
Data board (SLB). In addition to the connectors SIMOLINK
themselves, their place in the transmitted tele- Indices: 16
751 gram is also defined. Type: L2,K Upread/free access
• Index 1: Channel 1, low-word Changeable in:

• Index 2: Channel 1, high-word Drive setting
• Index 3: Channel 2, low-word Ready
• Index 4: Channel 2, high-word...
• Index 15: Channel 8, low-word
• Index 16: Channel 8, high-word
For double-word connectors, the relevant con-
nector number must be entered in 2 successive
indices because, otherwise, only the higher-
value word is transmitted.
r752 Process data transmitted via SIMOLINK in hexa- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

SLB TrnsData decimal display Unit: - Parameter menu +
752 Indices: 16 SIMOLINK
P753* Input for synchronizing counter. This enables Init: 0 Menus:

SrcSyncTime- time slots to be synchronized above the bus Unit: - Parameter menu +
Count cycle time. SIMOLINK
Indices: -
753 Type: L2,K Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
P754* Maximum time slot which is to be synchronized. Init: 0 Menus:

Max Sync- 0: Synchronized time slot corresponds to bus Min: 0 Parameter menu +
TimeSlot cycle time. Max: 10 SIMOLINK

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P755* Function parameter for configuring various Init: 0 Menus:

SIMOLINK properties of SIMOLINK transfer. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Conf • xxx0 No dead time compensation Indices: - SIMOLINK
755 • xxx1: Compensation of the different dead Type: L2 Upread/free access
times between transceiver-transceiver Changeable in:
and transceiver-dispatchertranceiver.
• xx0x: Switch over between 2 SLB’s in Board configuration
operation disabled Drive setting
• xx1x: Switch over between 2 SLB’s in
operation enabled
• x0xx: Bus cycle time is internally cor-
rected to whole telegram number
• x1xx: Bus cycle time is implemented pre-
cisely
P756* BICO parameter for selecting the parameters index1: 0 Menus:

SrSLB_Special that are to be sent from a SIMOLINK board Unit: - Parameter menu +
dat (SLB) as special data. SIMOLINK
Indices: 8
756 Special data can be sent from an SLB master or Upread/free access
dispatcher only. Type: L2,K
Changeable in:
• Index 1: Special telegram 1, low-word
Drive setting
• Index 2: Special telegram 1, high-word
• Index 3: Special telegram 2, low-word... Ready
• Index 7: Special telegram 4, low-word
• Index 8: Special telegram 4, high-word
In the case of double word connectors the rele-
vant connector number must be entered at 2
successive indices as otherwise only the higher-
value word will be transmitted.
P770* The time slot interpolation generates a fine Init: 1 Menus:

PosRegIntpRa- ramp for the position controller from the rough Min: -8 Parameter menu +
tio jump of the position setpoint. For this, the Control/gating unit
transmission ratio of the time slots of the posi- Max: 8
tion controller or position sensing and the posi- Unit: -
tion setpoint setting have to be specified. The Upread/free access
Indices: -
transmission ratio is specified in grading 2^n. Changeable in:
Type: I2
Example: Drive setting
• Sampling time of position setpoint gener- Ready
ation T5
• Sampling time of position controller T3
• Transmission ratio = 2 (2^2=4)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P771* The time slot interpolation only operates effi- Init: 1024 Menus:
PosRegIntpD- ciently if the setpoint is changed in the context Min: 0 Parameter menu +
max of technological setpoint setting. A setpoint Control/gating unit
jump such as occurs upon reset of the position Max:
setpoint after axis overflow of synchronous 2147483647
operation, should not be interpolated. The Upread/free access
Unit: -
parameter defines the limit of interpolation: If Changeable in:
the setpoint change since the last sampling Indices: -
Drive setting
cycle is below this limit, interpolation is carried Type: O4
out; if the setpoint change exceeds this limit, Ready
the position setpoint is adopted immediately,
and no interpolation is carried out.
If a parameter value of zero is entered, the
maximum jump height is calculated automati-
cally.
P772* Init: 1 Menus:

SrcEnRGen- Unit: - Parameter menu
Byp Indices: - Upread/free access
772 Type: L2,B Changeable in:
Drive setting
P773* Differential time constant for torque pre-control Init: 0,000 Menus:
Diff.TimePre of the position controller. The integral-action Min: 0,000 Parameter menu +
time of the speed control path has to be entered Control/gating unit
773 as the differential time, i.e. the time which the Max: 100,000
+ Position control
drive needs to run up from zero to rated speed Unit: s
(100%) at rated torque (100%). Upread/free access
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Type: O4
Drive setting
Ready
P775* With this parameter position fixed values in [LU] index1: 0 Menus:
PosFixV can be specified for the position control and Min: - Parameter menu +
sensing. Control/gating unit
775 2147483647
+ Position control
Max:
Upread/free access
2147483647
Changeable in:
Unit: -
Drive setting
Indices: 4
Ready
Type: I4
P776* This parameter can be used to input % fixed index1: 0,000 Menus:
FixedSet- setpoints for Min: -200,000 Parameter menu
points % position, speed and torque control without over- Max: 199,990 Upread/free access
776 loading the
Unit:% Changeable in:
processor link. (Only for advanced users familiar
with the Indices: 4 Drive setting
internal structure.) Type: I4 Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P777* index1: 0 Menus:

Q.Diagnos- Unit: - Parameter menu
ticVals Indices: 2 Upread/free access
777 Type: L2,K,K Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
P778* Gain factor for the diagnostics values. The effec- index1: 0 Menus:
Gain Diag tive gain Min: 0 Parameter menu +
778 is 2^P778. Max: 31 Control/gating unit
+ Position control
Unit: -
Upread/free access
Indices: 2
Changeable in:
Type: O2
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.6.12 Diagnostics/Monitoring
P781* Function parameter for setting a delay time for index1: 0,0 Menus:
Fault Delay various faults. Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
781 Special case: Value 101.0 means that the fault Max: 101,0 Diagnostics +
is never triggered. Faults/warnings
Unit: s
Index 1: Ext. fault 1 Upread/free access
Indices: 20
Index 2: Ext. fault 2 Changeable in:
Type: O2
Index 4: Drive setting
Index 5: Ready
Index 6:
Index 7:
Index 8:
Index 9:
Index 10:
Index 11: SCom1 telegram failure
Index 12: SCom2 telegram failure
Index 13: CB/TB telegram failure
Index 14: 2nd CB telegram failure
Index 15: SCB telegram failure
Index 16: SLB telegram failure
Index 17:
Index 18:
Index 19:
Index 20:
r782 Visualization parameter for displaying the times Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Trip Time at which the last 8 faults occurred. The current Unit: - Parameter menu +
status of the operating-hours counter (r825) is Diagnostics +
782 displayed. Indices: 24
Faults/warnings
Index 1: Day of the 1st (last) fault trip Type: O2
Upread/free access
Index 2: Hour of the 1st fault trip
Index 3: Second of the 1st fault trip
Indices 4 to 6: 2nd fault trip
Indices 7 to 9: 3rd fault trip
Indices 10 to 12: 4th fault trip
Indices 22 to 24: 8th (oldest) fault trip
Further details for describing the fault trips are
contained in r947, r949, P952. The fault mem-
ory is deleted with the help of P952.
Table 5-20: Diagnostics/Monitoring

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P788 Function parameter for entering the comparison Init: 800 Menus:
V value for the DC link voltage. If the DC link volt- Min: 0 Parameter menu +
DCLink(Thresh age drops due to voltage dips in the power sys- Diagnostics +
tem, the drive can still be brought to a guided Max: 1000
) Faults/warnings
standstill if the voltage falls below the set Unit: V
788 threshold. A turn-off due to under-voltage is Upread/free access
Indices: -
prevented. Changeable in:
Type: O2
Drive setting
Ready
Src Setp from which the setpoint is to be read in for Unit: - Parameter menu +
detecting deviation of the actual value from the Diagnostics + Mes-
790 setpoint. A deviation is indicated in status word Indices: -
sages/displays
1, bit 8. Type: L2,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting

Src ActV from which the actual value is to be read in for Unit: - Parameter menu +
detecting a deviation of the actual value from Diagnostics + Mes-
791 the setpoint. A deviation is indicated in status Indices: -
sages/displays
word 1, bit 8. Type: L2,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
P792 Function parameter for entering the permissible index1: 3,0 Menus:
Perm Devia- deviation of the actual value from the setpoint. Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
tion A deviation is indicated in status word 1, bit 8. Diagnostics +
Max: 200,0
792 Faults/warnings
Unit:%
Upread/free access
Indices: 4
Changeable in:
,FDS
Drive setting
Type: O2
Ready
P793 Function parameter for entering the hysteresis index1: 2,0 Menus:
Set/Act Hyst which is to be taken into account during deter- Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
mination of the actual value/ setpoint deviation. Diagnostics + Mes-
793 A deviation is indicated in status word 1, bit 8. Max: 200,0
sages/displays
Unit: %
Upread/free access
Indices: 4
Changeable in:
,FDS
Drive setting
Type: O2
Ready
Table 5-20: Diagnostics/Monitoring (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P794 Function parameter for entering the time by index1: 3,0 Menus:
Deviation which the message indicating an actual-value/ Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
Time setpoint deviation is to be delayed. A deviation Diagnostics + Mes-
is indicated in status word 1, bit 8. Max: 100,0
794 sages/displays
Unit: s
Upread/free access
Indices: 4
Changeable in:
,FDS
Drive setting
Type: O2
Ready
P795* BICO parameter for selecting a connector from Init: 91 Menus:

Src Comp ActV which the actual value for generating the mes- Unit: - Parameter menu +
sage “Comparison value reached” is to be read Diagnostics + Mes-
795 in. If the actual value reaches the comparison Indices: -
sages/displays
value (P796), this is indicated in status word 1, Type: L2,K
bit 10. Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
P796 Function parameter for entering the comparison index1: 100,0 Menus:
Compare value. If the actual value reaches the compari- Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
Value son value entered, this is indicated in status Diagnostics + Mes-
word 1, bit 10. Max: 200,0
796 sages/displays
Unit:%
Upread/free access
Indices: 4
Changeable in:
,FDS
Drive setting
Type: O2
Ready
P797 Function parameter for entering the hysteresis index1: 3,0 Menus:
Compare Hyst which is to be taken into account during genera- Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
tion of the message “Comparison value Diagnostics + Mes-
797 reached”. If the actual value reaches the com- Max: 200,0
sages/displays
parison value, this is indicated in status word 1, Unit:%
bit 10. Upread/free access
Indices: 4
Changeable in:
,FDS
Drive setting
Type: O2
Ready
Compare Time which the message “Comparison value reached” Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
is to be lengthened if the actual value falls Diagnostics + Mes-
798 below the comparison value. If the actual value Max: 100,0
sages/displays
reaches the comparison value, this is indicated Unit: s
in status word 1, bit 10. Upread/free access
Indices: 4
Changeable in:
,FDS
Drive setting
Type: O2
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Src OFF ActV from which the actual value for generating the Unit: - Parameter menu +
firing-pulse block is to be read in. If the actual Diagnostics + Mes-
799 value falls below the shut-down value (P800) Indices: -
sages/displays
after an OFF command, the firing pulse is Type: L2,K
blocked. Preferably, the actual speed (KK0091) Upread/free access
is selected as the actual value. Changeable in:
Drive setting
P800 Function parameter for entering the turn-off index1: 0,5 Menus:
OFF Value value below which the firing-pulse block is to be Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
generated. If the actual value falls below the Diagnostics + Mes-
800 turn-off value after an OFF command, the firing Max: 200,0
sages/displays
pulses are blocked. The firing-pulse block can Unit:%
be delayed by the time entered in P801. Upread/free access
Indices: 4
Changeable in:
,FDS
Drive setting
Type: O2
Ready
OFF Time which the firing-pulse block is to be delayed. If Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
the actual value falls below the turn-off value Diagnostics + Mes-
801 after an OFF command, blocking of the firing Max: 100,00
sages/displays
pulses is delayed by the time entered. Unit: s
Upread/free access
Indices: 4
Changeable in:
,FDS
Drive setting
Type: O2
Ready
Src Speed from which the speed setpoint is to be read in Unit: - Parameter menu +
Setp for detecting the direction of rotation. Prefera- Functions
bly, the speed setpoint KK0150) is used. The Indices: -
802 message “Positive speed setpoint” is indicated Type: L2,K Upread/free access
in status word 1, bit 14. Changeable in:
Drive setting

Src Speed from which the actual speed is to be read in for Unit: - Parameter menu +
ActV detecting overspeed. Preferably, the actual Diagnostics + Mes-
speed (KK0091) is used. The message “Over- Indices: -
803 sages/displays
speed” is indicated in status word 2, bit 18. Type: L2,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P805 Waiting time after “Setpoint/actual deviation” Init: 50,00 Menus:

PullOut/Blck- message (status word 1, bit 8) during blocking Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
Time up to output of a fault message (r553 bit28). Diagnostics + Mes-
Max: 100,00
805 Dependent parameters: sages/displays
Unit: s
• P790 (Source setpoint of the setpoint/ Upread/free access
Indices: -
actual deviation) Changeable in:
• P791 (Source actual value of setpoint/ Type: O2
Drive setting
actual deviation)
• P792 (Frequency of setpoint/actual devi- Ready
ation),
• P794 (Duration of setpoint/actual devia-
tion)
P806 Setting the stall or blocking diagnosis Init: 0 Menus:

Fct BlockOverl n-control Min: 0 Parameter menu +
806 0 Complete blocking diagnosis (incl. overload Max: 2 Diagnostics + Mes-
diagnosis at n=0) sages/displays
Unit: -
1 Only blocking diagnosis (at n=0) Upread/free access
Indices: -
2 Function completely deselected v/f character- Changeable in:
Type: O2
istic Drive setting
0 Stall diagnosis selected
1 Stall diagnosis selected
2 Function deselected
P807* Source for lifetime counter of the receive block. Init: 0 Menus:
Q.LZ.Receive. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Val Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
P808* Source for reset of the LC receive block. Init: 0 Menus:

Q.LZ.Receive. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Res Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
r809 Display of the transformation ratio between Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

LZ.Rec.NAPC generated and evaluated ready signal at the Unit: - Parameter menu +
ready signal receiver module. Free blocks
809 Indices: -
r810 Status of the sign-of-life receive block Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

LZ.ReceiveSta Unit: - Parameter menu +
tus Indices: - Free blocks
810 Type: L2 Upread/free access

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P811* Allow source for output of fault F152 in the Init: 1 Menus:
Q.LZRec.F152 event of communication disturbance. Unit: - Parameter menu +
EN Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
r812 Parameter for output of the current fault value Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
LZ.RecActFail of the LC receive block: Unit: - Parameter menu +
812 In the event of a ready signal failure, the fault Indices: - Free blocks
value is incremented by 10. When a value ready Upread/free access
signal is received, the fault value is decre- Type: O2
mented by 1.
r813 Parameter for output of the LC receive block Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

LZ.Rec.AbsFail ready signal that has failed since power up. Unit: - Parameter menu +
813 Indices: - Free blocks
P814* This parameter determines the bit position of Init: 0 Menus:

LZ Bit Position the sign of life word. (P807, K0255, K0256) Min: 0 Parameter menu
814 Value: Max: 1 Upread/free access
0: sign of life begins with bit 0 Unit: - Changeable in:
1: sign of life begins with bit12 Indices: - Drive setting
Type: O2
P823* Service parameter, only for MinePro Service Init: 0 Menus:

Time Slot No personnel Min: 0 Parameter menu
823 Parameter for entry of serial time slot number Max: 1023 Upread/free access
for the time slot wait block
Unit: - Changeable in:
Type: O2 Ready
r824 Service parameter, only for MinePro Service Dec.Plc.: 2 Menus:

Time waited personnel Unit: ms Parameter menu +
824 Calculation time of time slot wait block. Indices: - Diagnostics + Mes-
sages/displays
Type: O2
Upread/free access
r825 Visualization parameter for displaying the oper- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Operat. Hours ating- hours counter. Only that time is counted Unit: - Parameter menu +
during which the unit is operated with released Diagnostics + Mes-
825 firing pulses (inverter release). Indices: 3
sages/displays
Index 1: Days Type: O2
Upread/free access
Index 2: Hours
Index 3: Seconds

"Uncontrolled Copy"
r826 Visualization parameter for displaying the board Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

PCB Code codes. Unit: - Parameter menu +
826 With the help of these codes the type of the Indices: 4 Diagnostics + Mes-
built-in electronics boards can be determined. sages/displays
Type: O2
•Index 1: Basic board Fixed settings
•Index 2: Optional board in slot A Quick parameter-
•Index 3: Optional board in slot B ization
•Index 4: Optional board in slot C Board configuration
Board codes: Drive setting
90 to 109 = Main board or Control Unit (CUx) Download
92 = Main board VC Upread/free access
93 = Main board MC compact Power section defi-
94 = Main board MC TripRite nition
106 = Main board AFE
110 to 119 = Sensor Board (SBx)
111 = SBP Sensor Board Pulse Encoder
112 = SBM Sensor Board Encoder/Multi-turn 1
113 = SBM2 Sensor Board Encoder/Multi-turn 2
114 = SBR1 Sensor Board Resolver 1
115 = SBR2 Sensor Board Resolver 2
120 to 129 = Serial Communication Board
(SCB)
121 = SCB1 Serial Communication by optical
fibre
122 = SCB2 Serial Communication by wire
130 to 139 = Technology Board
131 = T100 Technology Board
140 to 149 = Communication Board (CBx)
143 = CBP Communication Board PROFIBUS
145 = CBD Communication Board DeviceNet
146 = CBC Communication Board CAN
147 = Communication Board CC-Link
148 = CBP2 Communication Board PROFIBUS 2
150 to 169 = Special boards (EBx, SLB)
151 = EB1 Extension Board 1
152 = EB2 Extension Board 2
161 = SLB SIMOLINK-Board

"Uncontrolled Copy"
r827 Visualization parameter for displaying the date Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Generat. Date on which the firmware of the basic unit was Unit: - Parameter menu +
generated. Diagnostics + Mes-
827 Indices: 3
• Index 1: Year sages/displays
Type: O2
• Index 2: Month Drive setting
• Index 3: Day Upread/free access
Power section defi-
nition
r828 Visualization parameter for displaying the soft- Dec.Plc.: 1 Menus:

SW ID ware codes. With the help of these codes, the Unit: - Parameter menu +
compatibility of the individual software versions Diagnostics + Mes-
828 can be checked. Indices: 5
sages/displays
• Index 1: Basic board Type: O2
Fixed settings
• Index 2: Optional board in slot A
Quick parameter-
• Index 3: Optional board in slot B ization
• Index 4: Optional board in slot C
Board configuration
• Index 5: Basic board add-on
Drive setting
For boards without software (e.g. SBR, SLB),
0.0 is always shown in the corresponding index. Download
Upread/free access
Power section defi-
nition
r829 Visualization parameter for displaying the free Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

CalcTimeHd- calculating time. The reserve of the micropro- Unit: - Parameter menu +
room cessor system in the basic unit is shown in rela- Diagnostics + Mes-
tion to its total calculating capacity in index 1. Indices: 19
829 sages/displays
The free calculating time is influenced by the set Type: O2
pulse frequency (P340) as well as the number Upread/free access
and processing frequency of the activated func-
tion blocks.
The failed time slots from T2 to T10 are counted
in Index 2 to Index 10.
Index 11 displays the minimum free number of
words of the DSP stack. Caution! A value of 1
means that the stack has an overflow!
Index 12 to Index 19 display the remaining cal-
culating time of the 8 DSP residual time slots.
The values refer to an empirical value of an
empty residual time slot.
P830* The faults entered in this parameter are sup- index1: 0 Menus:
Fault Mask pressed. Min: 0 Parameter menu
830 Max: 255 Upread/free access
NOTICE
Despite suppression, a pulse dis- Indices: 5 Drive setting
able occurs with some faults (UCE,
overcurrent, over-voltage, etc.) Type: O2 Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.6.13 Special Parameters
r831 Service parameter, only for MinePro service person- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
Assignmt- nel Unit: - Parameter menu
CoupCh The visualization parameter shows the assignments Indices: 43 Board configura-
831 made to coupling channels C167<->DSP. The tion
parameter value indicates the connector number. Type: O2
Drive setting
Parameter values:
Upread/free
• 0: Coupling channel free access
• 9999: Coupling channel occupied (by internal Power section
datum) definition
Indices:
• Index=channel number
• Channels 01-24: Coupling to T2(= 4TO)
• Index 41 to Index 43 show the number of free
coupling channels (DSP<->C167 of time slots
T2 to T4.
r832 Service parameter, only for MinePro Service person- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
Phase Flow nel “NL value” of the phase currents of the A/D con- Unit: - Parameter menu
verter. The hexadecimal values range from 8000h
832 (max. shown negative current) to 7FF0h (max. Indices: 2 Upread/free
shown positive current). Type: I2 access
• Index 1: Phase L1 (U)

• Index 2: Phase L3 (W)
r833 Index 1: Inverter temperature Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
Drive Temp Index 2: Rectifier temperature (for AC units with rec- Unit: °C Parameter menu
833 tifier temperature sensor - depending on design) Indices: 4 Upread/free
Type: I2 access
P834* Parameter for entering faults where the drive reacts index1: 0 Menus:
OFF1 on Fault with a ramp-function generator ramp-down (OFF1) Min: 0 Parameter menu
prior to a fault trip in the “Operation” status.
834 Max: 65535 Upread/free
Only faults which do not necessitate an immediate access
trip can be entered here. The following faults are not Unit: -
permitted: Indices: 5 Changeable in:
F006, F008, F010, F011, F015, F017, F023, F025, Type: O2 Drive setting
F026, Ready
F027
Table 5-21: Special Parameters

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P835* Service parameter, only for MinePro Service person- index1: 0 Menus:
CtrlBootOpt- nel Min: 0 Parameter menu
PCB Max: 2 Upread/free
835 Unit: - access
DataOptPCB- nel Min: 0 Parameter menu
Boot Max: 65535 Upread/free
836 Unit: - access
state TEST nel Min: 0 Parameter menu
837 Selection of trial operation, only for manufacturer Max: 65535 + Functions
Unit: - Upread/free
access
Indices: 3
Changeable in:
Type: O2
Drive setting
r838 Service parameter, only for MinePro Service person- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
UCE/ nel Unit: - Parameter menu
OvTestResult The result of the UCE and Imax test can be read out Indices: - + Functions
838 in this parameter. The result is coded bit-wise. Upread/free
Type: V2
• Bit 7 Over-fatigue access
• Bit 6 Overcurrent phase W
• Bit 5 Overcurrent phase V
• Bit 4 Overcurrent phase U
• Bit 3 Not used
• Bit 2 UCE phase W
• Bit 1 UCE phase V
• Bit 0 UCE phase U
Table 5-21: Special Parameters (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
AdrConnector nel Unit: - Parameter menu
839 Copies the contents of an address into a connector Indices: 8 Upread/free
value, thus enabling any random C16x variable access
(near, 16 bit address) to be interconnected. This Type: L2
means that any random (internal) variables can be Changeable in:
traced. The address of the variables can be deter- Drive setting
mined from the M66 file.
The address (16 bit address) has to be entered in the
index.
• Index 1-4 for near addresses
• Index 5-8 for DPR addresses (input of the 16-
bit offset)
Function number 258
P2952.58 Enter time slot
Index 1 - connector number K434
RAM Addr nel Unit: - Parameter menu
840 Address for direct Random Access Memory (RAM) on Indices: 2 Download
board CU.
Type: L2 Upread/free
Indices: access
i001: CS: Code Segment (64kbyte-segment) Power section
i002: Off: Offset definition
The contents of the memory cell is displayed in Changeable in:
P841. Power section
Setting instructions for P840: definition
• In access stage 3, the parameter can only be Board configura-
read, whereas in access stage 4, it can also be tion
written. Drive setting
• Access stage 3 prevents the indicated value in
Drive setting
the background from always being written to
the visualized address. Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P841* Service parameter, only for MinePro Service person- Init: 0 Menus:
RAM Value nel Unit: - Parameter menu
841 Contents of a memory cell on the CU board. Indices: - Download
Type: L2 Upread/free
access
Power section
definition
Changeable in:
Power section
definition
Board configura-
tion
Drive setting
Drive setting
Ready
DSP RAM nel Unit: - Parameter menu
Address Indices: 2 Upread/free
842 Type: L2 access
Changeable in:
Power section
definition
Board configura-
tion
Drive setting
Drive setting
Ready
P843* Service parameter, only for MinePro Service person- Init: 0 Menus:
DSP RAM nel Min: 0 Parameter menu
Value Max: 65535 Upread/free
843 Unit: - access
Type: O4 Power section

definition
Board configura-
tion
Drive setting
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
SEB AnaOut nel Unit: - Parameter menu
844 Parameterization of the SEB board Indices: 16 Upread/free
Index 1 to 4: Type: L2 access
Extract level address SEB analog output 1 to 4. For Changeable in:
this, no connector should be indicated in P845 for the Drive setting
analog output (value=0)
Ready
Index 5 to 8:
Reinforcement SEB analog output 1 to 4 in gradua-
tion 2^n, e.g. value 5: reinforcement = 2^5 = 32.
NOTICE
Hexadecimal input 10=A
Index 9 to 12:
Offset SEB analog output 1 to 4. The value is speci-
fied as hexadecimal. 4000h=100%=5V.
Index 13 to 16:
Segment for address in Index 1 to 4 for SEB analog
output 1 to 4.
SEB AnaOut nel Unit: - Parameter menu
845 Output of connectors to the analog outputs of the Indices: 4 Upread/free
SEB access
Type: L2,K
Indices 1 - 4 correspond to analog outputs 1 - 4 on Changeable in:
the SEB
Drive setting
NOTICE Ready
If an address is to be output, the

parameter value must be zero before
the address is entered in P844.
P846 Service parameter, only for MinePro Service person- Init: 0 Menus:
D channels T0 nel Min: 0 Parameter menu
846 Max: 4 Upread/free
Unit: - access

Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P847* Mode in which the fault counter (in r849) should be Init: 1 Menus:
Diagnostics used. Min: 0 Parameter menu
847 • 0 Delete all counters and then change over to Max: 3 Upread/free
1. access
Unit: -
• 1 Counters to count up an down. That applies Changeable in:
to normal operation. In the event of a fault, Indices: -
the count is incremented by 10, and in the Type: O2 Drive setting
event of a valid value the counted is decre- Ready
mented by 1.
• 2 Counters to count up only. These can be
used to detect sporadic faults that would oth-
erwise remain undetected.
• 3 For future use
If a fault counter counts beyond 100, F51 is tripped
provided that fault tripping is implemented in the
counter in question (see r849) and the fault trip is
not suppressed in P848.
P848* Parameter for suppressing the fault causes given in index1: 3 Menus:
Config_Diagno r849 and alarm A28. The new alarm A28 and fault Min: 0 Parameter menu
s counter r849 are used for early recognition of latent
encoder problems. Max: 3 Upread/free
848 Unit: - access
Each index in P 848 belongs to the corresponding
index in r849. Indices: 30 Changeable in:
Setting values: Type: O2 Drive setting

Ready
! DANGER
This value may be set only under
exceptional circumstances. This
causes the fault sources to be sup-
pressed. Consult with P&H MinePro
Services before setting this value.
0: No evaluation!
1: If the fault count exceeds 100, the appropriate
fault is tripped.
2: Alarm A28 is always set whenever the fault count
is greater than 0.
3: Whenever the fault count exceeds 0, alarm A28 is
set.
If the fault count reaches 100, the associated fault is
tripped, in so far as provision for a fault is made in
the software.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
r849 Each index contains a counter for fault diagnostics. Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
Diag- The index used depends on the type of encoder in Unit: - Parameter menu
nosCounter question. In the event of a fault, the value in the
fault counter is incremented by 10. A correct value Indices: 30 Upread/free
849 causes the value in the fault counter to be decre- Type: O2 access
mented by 1. If a value of 100 is exceeded, the reac-
tion described below occurs. The parameter is used
for early recognition of latent encoder problems. The
type of fault handling described above does not lead
to a fault message until more than 10% or all values
are incorrect!
Alarm A28 is set whenever one of the counts is
greater than 0, and it is cyclically reset when all
counts are at 0 again. Display of this alarm and the
faults listed below can be suppressed with P848.
Indices Key:
Index 1:
ALARM_ANZAHL motor encoders:
SSI-Alarmbit or Endat Alarmbit
F51:49 in operation, otherwise A19
Index 2:
ALARM_ANZAHL external encoders:
SSI-Alarmbit or Endat Alarmbit
Index 3:
COMM_ERROR_ANZAHL motor encoders:
Protocol error or CRC error
Index 4:
COMM_ERROR_ANZAHL external encoders:
Protocol error or CRC error
Index 5:
RUHEPEGELFEHLER_ANZAHL motor encoders:
Data line SSI or Endat has the wrong level
Index 6:
RUHEPEGELFEHLER_ANZAHL external encoders:
Data line SSI or Endat has the wrong level
Index 7:
ADRESSFEHLER_ANZAHL motor encoders
F51:34

"Uncontrolled Copy"
r849 Index 8:
(Continued) ADRESSFEHLER_ANZAHL external encoders
F51:134
Index 9:
SPANNUNG_FEHLER_ANZAHL motor encoders:
Operating voltage overloaded
F51:28 and A18
Index 10:
SPANNUNG_FEHLER_ANZAHL external encoders
Operating voltage overloaded
F51:128 and A20
Index 11:
AMPL_FEHLER_ANZAHL motor encoders
A/B-track: On zero passage of one track, the level of
the other was too low.
Index 12:
AMPL_FEHLER_ANZAHL ext. Geber
A/B-track: On zero passage of one track, the level of
the other was too low.
Index 13:
NULLSPUR_FEHLER_ANZAHL motor encoders
More than 1.5 revolutions since the last zero pulse.
F51:27 in operation
Index 14:
NULLSPUR_FEHLER_ANZAHL external encoders
F51:127 in operation
Index 15:
NULLPUNKTABWEICHUNG_FEHLER_ANZAHL motor
encoders: A zero point deviation was detected. Cor-
rection of the value if necessary, no error.
Index 16:
NULLPUNKTABWEICHUNG_FEHLER_ANZAHL exter-
nal encoders
Correction of the value if necessary, no error.
Index 17:
ORIENTIERUNG_FEHLER_ANZAHL motor encoders:
Position deviation of more than 90°el. of occurrence
of a zero pulse (encoder) bzw. or on telegram read-
out (Endat-
Multi-turn P149.1=101; U950.19=5).
F51:26 and A18 in operation, nothing else.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
r849 Index 18:

(Continued) ORIENTIERUNG_FEHLER_ANZAHL external encoders
No evaluation!
Index 19:
DELTA_PROTOKOLL_FEHLER_ANZAHL motor encod-
ers
No evaluation!
Index 20:
DELTA_PROTOKOLL_FEHLER_ANZAHL external
encoders: The change of position in the last sample
time was greater than the parameterized maximum
value.
Index 21 to 30:
Reserved.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.6.14 Special Parameters OP1S
r850 Service parameter, only for MinePro service per- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
OP Special 1 sonnel. Unit: - Parameter menu
850 Parameter is not visible via the OP1S. Indices: 20 Upread/free access
Type: O2
851 Parameter is not visible via the OP1S. Indices: 24 Upread/free access
Type: O2
P852* Service parameter, only for MinePro service per- Init: 0 Menus:
OP Special 3 sonnel. Min: - Parameter menu
852 Parameter is not visible via the OP1S. 2147483647 Upread/free access
Max:
2147483647
Unit: -
Indices: -
Type: I4
853 Parameter is not visible via the OP1S. Indices: - Upread/free access
Type: O2
Type: O2
P855 Service parameter, only for MinePro service per- index1: 0 Menus:
OP Special 6 sonnel. Min: 0 Parameter menu
855 Parameter is not visible via the OP1S. Max: Upread/free access
4294967293
Unit: -
Indices: 8
Type: O4
Type: O2
Table 5-22: Special Parameters OP1S

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Type: O2
Type: O2
Quick Param sonnel. Min: 0 Parameter menu
888 Parameter is not visible via the OP1S. Max: 10 Upread/free access
Unit: -
Indices: -
Type: O2
Fixed Settings sonnel. Min: 0 Parameter menu
Unit: -
Indices: -
Type: O2
Technology sonnel. Min: 0 Parameter menu
Unit: -
Indices: -
Type: O2
Diagnostics sonnel. Min: 0 Parameter menu
Unit: -
Indices: -
Type: O2
Reg/GateUnit sonnel. Min: 0 Parameter menu
Unit: -
Indices: -
Type: O2
Table 5-22: Special Parameters OP1S (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Mot/Encod- sonnel. Min: 0 Parameter menu
Data Parameter is not visible via the OP1S. Max: 1 Upread/free access
894 Unit: -
Indices: -
Type: O2
Communica- sonnel. Min: 0 Parameter menu
tion Parameter is not visible via the OP1S. Max: 3 Upread/free access
895 Unit: -
Indices: -
Type: O2
P896 Service parameter, only for MinePro service per- Init: 0 Menus:
Parameter sonnel. Min: 0 Parameter menu
Menu Parameter is not visible via the OP1S. Max: 12 Upread/free access
896 Unit: -
Indices: -
Type: O2
Menu Select sonnel. Min: 0 Parameter menu
Unit: -
Indices: -
Type: O2
MotionControl sonnel. Min: 0 Parameter menu
Unit: -
Indices: -
Type: O2
Table 5-22: Special Parameters OP1S (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.6.15 Technology Parameters
P918* Function parameter for entering the bus index1: 3 Menus:

CB Bus addresses for a built-in communications board Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Address (CBx). The significance of the bus address Communication +
depends on the protocol. If a set value is not Max: 200
accepted by the communication board, the unit Unit: -
trips a fault. Quick parameter-
Indices: 2 ization
Type: O2 Board configuration
NOTICE
Drive setting
This parameter is not overwritten
on downloading via Profibus. Upread/free access
Index 1: 1st CB Changeable in:
Index 2: 2nd CB Board configuration
In the case of a factory setting via 1st CB or 2nd Drive setting

P922* The parameter value shows the set telegram to Init: 0 Menus:
Telegram PROFIdrive V3. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Select Only visible if the unit is parameterized acc. to Max: 65535 Communication +
922 PROFIdrive 3 V3. Field bus interfaces
Unit: -
Quick parameter-
Indices: - ization
Drive setting
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Board configuration
Drive setting
Drive setting
r923 List of all parameters for standard signals. Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Profibus Std- Specific parameter for PROFIdrive V3. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Sig Indices: 100 Communication +
923 Field bus inter-
Type: O2 faces + Motor/
encoder + Encoder
data
Upread/free access
P925* Fault level of the sign-of-life receive block Init: 4 Menus:

Max. faults A fault will be set, if (K0257 / 10) >= (P809 + Min: 1 Parameter menu +
925 1) Max: 10 Releases

Ready
Table 5-23: Technology Parameters

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P927* Function parameter to enable interfaces for Init: 7 Menus:

Parameter parameterization. Min: 0 User parameters-
Access Only visible if the unit is parameterized acc. to Max: 65535 Parameter menu +
927 PROFIdrive V3. General parame-
Unit: -
ters
Indices: -
Fixed settings
Type: V2
Quick parameter-
ization
Board configuration
Drive setting
Download
Upread/free access
Power section defi-
nition
Changeable in:
Power section defi-
nition
Board configuration
Drive setting
Drive setting
Ready
r930 Profibus-specific parameter Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Operating The parameter indicates the mode of operation Unit: - Parameter menu
Mode to PROFIdrive V3. Indices: - Upread/free access
930 Type: O2
r944 The fault counter is incremented each time Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Fault Counter there is a change in the fault buffer (P947, Unit: - Parameter menu
P948, P782). This allows a check to be per-
944 formed on whether data in the fault buffer is Indices: - Drive setting
being extracted consistently. Type: O2 Upread/free access
Table 5-23: Technology Parameters (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
r947 Visualization parameter for displaying the last 8 Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Fault Memory fault trips. Unit: - Parameter menu +
947 For each fault trip, up to 8 faults occurring at Indices: 64 Diagnostics +
the same time can be stored. Only those faults Faults/warnings
are stored to which a fault number is assigned. Type: O2
Drive setting
• Index 1 to 8: 1st (last) fault trip, faults 1 Upread/free access
to 8
• Index 9 to 16: 2nd fault trip, faults 1 to 8
• Index 17 to 24: 3rd fault trip, faults 1 to
8
• Index 25 to 32: 4th fault trip, faults 1 to
8
8
8
8
• Index 57 to 64: 8th (oldest) fault trip,
faults 1 to 8
The value 0 in index 1 means that no fault is
active at the present time. Further information
for describing fault trips is contained in r782,
r949, P952. The fault memory is deleted with
the help of P952.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
r949 Visualization parameter for displaying fault val- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Fault Value ues. Fault values contain additional information Unit: - Parameter menu +
on the faults which have occurred and allow Diagnostics +
949 more exact diagnosis. The fault values are Indices: 64
Faults/warnings
assigned to the faults and are stored in the Type: O2
same indices as the associated fault numbers in Drive setting
• Indices 1 to 8: 1st (last) fault trip, fault
values 1 to 8
• Indices 9 to 16: 2nd fault trip, fault val-
ues 1 to 8
• Indices 17 to 24: 3rd fault trip, fault val-
ues 1 to 8
• Indices 25 to 32: 4th fault trip, fault val-
ues 1 to 8
ues 1 to 8
ues 1 to 8
ues 1 to 8
• Indices 57 to 64: 8th (oldest) fault trip,
fault values 1 to 8
Further information on describing fault trips is
contained in r782, r947, P952. The fault mem-
ory is deleted with the help of P952.
r951 List of fault texts. Each fault text is stored under Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
FaultTextList the index corresponding to its fault. Unit: - Parameter menu +
951 Indices: 254 Diagnostics +
Faults/warnings
Type: O2
Upread/free access
P952* Function parameters for displaying the stored Init: 0 Menus:

# of Faults fault trips and for deletion of the fault memory. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
If 0 is entered, the whole fault memory consist- Diagnostics +
952 ing of r782, r947, r949 is deleted. Max: 8
Faults/warnings
Unit: -
Upread/free access
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Type: O2
Drive setting
r953 Visualization parameter for displaying which of Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Warning warnings 1 to 16 are active. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Param 1 Indices: - Diagnostics +
953 Faults/warnings
Type: V2
Upread/free access

"Uncontrolled Copy"

954 Faults/warnings
Type: V2
Upread/free access

955 Faults/warnings
Type: V2
Upread/free access

956 Faults/warnings
Type: V2
Upread/free access

957 Faults/warnings
Type: V2
Upread/free access

Warning warnings 81 to 96 are active. Warnings 81 to 96 Unit: - Parameter menu +
Param 6 are tripped by a built-in communication board Diagnostics +
(CBx). Indices: -
958 Faults/warnings
Type: V2
Upread/free access

Warning warnings 97 to 112 are active. Warnings 97 to Unit: - Parameter menu +
Param 7 112 are tripped by a built in technology board. Diagnostics +
Indices: -
959 Faults/warnings
Type: V2
Upread/free access

Warning warnings 113 to 128 are active. Warnings 113 Unit: - Parameter menu +
Param 8 to 128 are tripped by a built-in technology Diagnostics +
board. Indices: -
960 Faults/warnings
Type: V2
Upread/free access

"Uncontrolled Copy"
r964 Function parameter for unit data identification. Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Drive ID (see also PROFIDrive Profile Version 3). Unit: - Parameter menu
964 • Index 1: Manufacturer value=42 Indices: 5 Fixed settings
• Index 2: Unit type
Type: O2 Quick parameter-
• Index 3: Version (format xxyy) ization
• Index 4: Date of firmware (year)
Board configuration
• Index 5: Date of firmware (day/month)
Drive setting
The value of the unit type is:
Download
• 3080 on MASTERDRIVES VC,
• 3085 on MASTERDRIVES VC, Upread/free access
• 3090 on MASTERDRIVES MC, Power section defi-
• 3100 on MASTERDRIVES MC TripRite. nition
Only visible if the unit has been parameterized
according to PROFIdrive V3
r965 Profibus-specific parameter Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Profile # Value depends on whether the unit has been Unit: - Parameter menu
965 parameterized according to PROFIdrive V3. Indices: - Upread/free access
Type: OS

Control Word word 1. Bits 0 to 15 are displayed. Unit: - Parameter menu
967 Type: V2

Status Word 1 word 1. Bits 0 to 15 are displayed. Unit: - Parameter menu
Type: V2
P971* Function parameter for starting saving of the Init: 0 Menus:

EEPROM Sav- parameters from the RAM to the EEPROM. Vola- Min: 0 Parameter menu +
ing tile stored parameters can be transferred to the General parame-
EEPROM by overwriting a parameter value of 0 Max: 1
971 ters
with 1. The parameter values are then stored Unit: -
non-volatile and are secured against mains fail- Upread/free access
Indices: -
ure. Changeable in:
Type: O2
• 0 = No saving Drive setting
• 1 = One-time saving Ready
The parameter must be reset manually to 0.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
P972* Power-On reset Init: Menus:

Power On The Power-On reset works in the same way as Min: 0 Parameter menu
Reset Electronic voltage Off -> On. This initializes the Max: 1 Board configuration
972 control board and leads to a loss of communica-
tion. This value should therefore not normally Unit: - Drive setting
be included in a download file. Indices: - Upread/free access
Type: O2 Power section defi-
nition
Changeable in:
Power section defi-
nition
Board configuration
Drive setting
Drive setting
r980 Visualization parameter for displaying the first Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Par # List pt1 100 parameter numbers in the range 0 to 999. Unit: - Parameter menu
The parameter numbers are arranged in
980 ascending order. The first 0 occurring in the Indices: 101 Upread/free access
index signals that there are no further parame- Type: O2
ter numbers. If the number of indices is not suf-
ficient to display all parameter numbers, index
101 contains the parameter numbers in which
the list is continued.
r981 Visualization parameter for displaying the sec- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Par # List pt2 ond 100 parameter numbers in the range 0 to Unit: - Parameter menu
999. The parameter numbers are arranged in
r982 Visualization parameter for displaying the third Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:


"Uncontrolled Copy"
r983 Visualization parameter for displaying the fourth Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

r984 Visualization parameter for displaying the fifth Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

r985 Visualization parameter for displaying the sixth Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

r986 Visualization parameter for displaying the sev- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Par # List pt7 enth 100 parameter numbers in the range 0 to Unit: - Parameter menu

Par # List pt8 eighth 100 parameter numbers in the range 0 to Unit: - Parameter menu
ters. If the number of indices is not sufficient to
display all parameter numbers, index 101 con-
tains the parameter numbers in which the list is
continued.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
r988 Visualization parameter for displaying the ninth Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

The. parameter numbers are arranged in
r989 Visualization parameter for displaying the tenth Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

ter numbers.
r990 Visualization parameters for displaying the first Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Par # List 100 changed parameter numbers in the range 0 Unit: - Parameter menu
chg1 to 999. The parameter numbers are arranged in
ascending order. The first 0 occurring in the Indices: 101 Upread/free access
990 index signals that there are no further parame- Type: O2
ters. If the number of indices is not sufficient to
display all parameter numbers, index 101 con-
tains the parameter numbers in which the list is
continued.
r991 Visualization parameters for displaying the sec- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Par # List ond 100 changed parameter numbers in the Unit: - Parameter menu
chg2 range 0 to 999. The parameter numbers are
arranged in ascending order. The first 0 occur- Indices: 101 Upread/free access
991 ring in the index signals that there are no fur- Type: O2
ther parameters. If the number of indices is not
sufficient to display all parameter numbers,
index 101 contains the parameter numbers in
which the list is continued.
r992 Visualization parameters for displaying the third Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Par # List 100 changed parameter numbers in the range 0 Unit: - Parameter menu
chg3 to 999. The. parameter numbers are arranged
in ascending order. The first 0 occurring in the Indices: 101 Upread/free access
992 index signals that there are no further parame- Type: O2
ters.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.6.16 Free Function Blocks
U001 Function parameter for entering fixed setpoint index1: 0,00 Menus:
FixSetp 17 17. Min: -200,00 Parameter menu +
2001 Max: 200,00 Free blocks
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I2 Ready
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I2 Ready
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I2 Ready
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I2 Ready
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I2 Ready
Table 5-24: Free Function Blocks

"Uncontrolled Copy"
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I2 Ready
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I2 Ready
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I2 Ready
U009 Function parameter for entering fixed setpoint index1: 0 Menus:

FixSetp 25 25. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
2009 Max: 65535 Free blocks
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I4 Ready
Table 5-24: Free Function Blocks (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I4 Ready
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I4 Ready
,FDS Drive setting
Type: I4 Ready

FixSetp 30 30. Min: - Parameter menu +
2015 2147483647 Free blocks
Max: Upread/free access
2147483647 Changeable in:
Indices: 4 Ready
,FDS
Type: I4

2016 2147483647 Free blocks
Indices: 4 Ready
,FDS
Type: I4

"Uncontrolled Copy"

2017 2147483647 Free blocks
Indices: 4 Ready
,FDS
Type: I4

2018 2147483647 Free blocks
Indices: 4 Ready
,FDS
Type: I4
U019* Sample&Hold element index1: 0 Menus:

Src SH1 KK Input parameter for the double word connectors Unit: - Parameter menu +
2019 Indices: 4 Free blocks

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Src SH1 K Input parameter for connectors Unit: - Parameter menu +
Type: L2,K Upread/free access

Changeable in:
Drive setting
U021 Function parameter for entering fixed bit 1. index1: 0 Menus:

Fixed Bit 1 Min: 0 Parameter menu +
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"

,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready

,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready

,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready

,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready

,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"

,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready

,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready


Changeable in:
Drive setting


Changeable in:
Drive setting
U031* BICO parameter for selecting the connector for Init: 0 Menus:
Src Conn Disp connector display 1. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
n032 Visualization parameter for connector display 1. Dec.Plc.: 1 Menus:

Conn Disp 1 Unit:% Parameter menu +

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

Src DConn double connector display 1. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Disp 1 Indices: - Free blocks
2037 Type: L2,K,K Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
n038 Visualization parameter for double-connector Dec.Plc.: 3 Menus:

DConn Disp 1 display 1. Unit:% Parameter menu +
Src DConn double connector display 2. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"

DConn Disp 2 display 2 Unit:% Parameter menu +
Src DConn double connector display 3 Unit: - Parameter menu +
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

DConn Disp 3 display 3 Unit: - Parameter menu +
Src DConn double connector display 4 Unit: - Parameter menu +
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

DConn Disp 4 display 4 Unit: - Parameter menu +
U045* BICO parameter for selecting the binector for Init: 0 Menus:
Src Bin Disp 1 binector display 1. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Type: L2,B Upread/free access

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
n046 Visualization parameter for binector display 1. Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Bin Disp 1 Unit: - Parameter menu +

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src Bin Disp 2 binector display 2. Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
n048 Visualization parameter of binector display 2 Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Src Bin Disp 3 binector display 3 Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

Src Bin Disp 4 binector display 4 Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

SrcCo- connector display with smoothing. Unit: - Parameter menu +
nnDispSmth Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
n054 Visualization parameter of connector display Dec.Plc.: 2 Menus:

Conn Disp with smoothing Unit:% Parameter menu +
Smooth Indices: - Free blocks
SrcD- double connector display with smoothing. Unit: - Parameter menu +
ConnDispSmth Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
n056 Visualization parameter of the double-connector Dec.Plc.: 3 Menus:

DConnDisp display with smoothing. Unit:% Parameter menu +
Smooth Indices: - Free blocks
U057* BICO parameter for selecting the binectors for index1: 0 Menus:
SrcBin/Con binector/connector converter 1. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Conv4 Indices: 16 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
n058 Visualization parameter of binector/connector Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

IndBin/Con converter 1. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Conv4 Indices: - Free blocks
2058 Type: V2 Upread/free access
U059* Sample&Hold module index1: 0 Menus:

Src SH1 B Input parameter for binectors Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
U060* Sample&Hold element Init: 2 Menus:

SH1 Time Slot Parameter for entering the slower time slot Min: 2 Parameter menu +

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src Fault F148 fault trip 1 (F148). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Src Warning warning trip 1 (A061). Unit: - Parameter menu +
A061 Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
n069 Parameter is only necessary for the parameter Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

XERR PROFId- model of PROFIdrive V3 standard. Parameter is Unit: - Parameter menu
rive only visible if PROFIdrive V3 is set.
2069 Type: X4 Drive setting
U070* BICO parameter for selecting the connectors for index1: 0 Menus:
Src Conn/ the 3 connector/double-connector converter. Unit: - Parameter menu +
DConnC Indices: 6 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src DConn/ the 3 double-connector/connector converters. Unit: - Parameter menu +
ConnC Indices: 3 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src Conn/BinC the 3 connector/binector converters. Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
n073 Visualization parameter of connector/binector Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

# Conn/BinC1 converter 1. Unit: - Parameter menu +

# Conn/BinC2 converter 2 Unit: - Parameter menu +

# Conn/BinC3 converter 3 Unit: - Parameter menu +
Src Bin/ binector/connector converter 1. Unit: - Parameter menu +
ConnC1 Indices: 16 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting

#Bin/ConnC1 converter 1. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Changeable in:
Drive setting

# Bin/ConnC2 converter 2. Unit: - Parameter menu +

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Changeable in:
Drive setting

# Bin/ConnC3 converter 3. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Src Conn Add adder 1 (1 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src Conn Add adder 5 with four inputs (1 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src ConnSub1 subtracter 1 (1 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src DCon- adder 1 (2 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +
nAdd 1 Indices: 2 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src subtracter 1 (2 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +
DConnSub1 Indices: 2 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src subtracter 2 (2 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +
DConnSub2 Indices: 2 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src ConnM A/ modulo 2^16 adder / subtracter. Unit: - Parameter menu +
S Indices: 3 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src DConnM modulo 2^32 adder / subtracter. Unit: - Parameter menu +
A/S Indices: 3 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src Conn Inv1 sign inverter 1 (1 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src DConn Inv sign inverter 1 (2 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src DConn Inv sign inverter 2 (2 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src1 Conn the switchable sign inverter (1 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +
SwInv Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src2 Conn the switchable sign inverter (1 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +
SwInv Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src1 the switchable sign inverter (2 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +
DConnSwInv Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src2 the switchable sign inverter (2 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +
DConnSwInv Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src Conn multiplier 1 (1 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +
Mult1 Indices: 2 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src DConn multiplier 1 (2 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +
Mult Indices: 2 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src Conn Div1 divider 1 (1 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src Conn Div2 divider 2 (1 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
SrcDConn Div divider 1 (2 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
SrcConnMult/ high resolution multiplier/divider 1 (1 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +
Div1 Indices: 3 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src the 1st absolute-value generator with smooth- Unit: - Parameter menu +
ConnAbsV1 ing (1 word). Free blocks
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U118* Function parameter for selecting the mode of Init: 0 Menus:

Mode the 1st absolute-value generator with smooth- Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Max: 3
U119 Function parameter for entering the smoothing Init: 0 Menus:

SmoothConAb time constant of the 1st absolute-value genera- Min: 0 Parameter menu +
sV1 tor with smoothing (1 word). Free blocks
Max: 10000

Ready
Src the 2nd absolute-value generator with smooth- Unit: - Parameter menu +
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting

Mode the 2nd absolute-value generator with smooth- Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Max: 3

SmoothConAb time constants of the 2nd absolute-value gener- Min: 0 Parameter menu +
sV2 ator with smoothing (1 word). Free blocks
Max: 10000

Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src the 3rd absolute-value generator with smooth- Unit: - Parameter menu +
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting

Mode the 3rd absolute-value generator (1 word). Min: 0 Parameter menu +
ConnAbsV3 Max: 3 Free blocks
U125 Function parameter for entering the time con- Init: 0 Menus:
SmoothConAb stants of the 3rd absolute-value generator with Min: 0 Parameter menu +
sV3 smoothing (1 word). Free blocks
Max: 10000

Ready
SrcDCon- the 1st absolute-value generator with smooth- Unit: - Parameter menu +
nAbsV ing (2 word). Free blocks
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting

Mode DCon- the 1st absolute-value generator with smooth- Min: 0 Parameter menu +
nAbsV ing (2 word). Free blocks
Max: 3

SmoothDCon- time constants of the 1st absolute-value gener- Min: 0 Parameter menu +
nAbsV ator with smoothing (2 word). Free blocks
Max: 10000

Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U129 Function parameter for entering the fixed set- index1: Menus:
FSetpConnLim point for limiter 1 (1 word). 100,00 Parameter menu +
itr1 Min: -200,00 Free blocks
2129 Max: 200,00 Upread/free access
,FDS Ready
Type: I2
U130* BICO parameter for selecting the connector for index1: 503 Menus:
Src limiter 1 (1 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +
ConnLimitr1 Indices: 3 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
FSetpConnLim point for limiter 2 (1 word). 100,00 Parameter menu +
itr2 Min: -200,00 Free blocks
,FDS Ready
Type: I2
Src limiter 2 (1 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +
ConnLimitr2 Indices: 3 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
FSetp point for limiter 1 (2 word). 100,00 Parameter menu +
DConnLmt Min: -200,00 Free blocks
,FDS Ready
Type: I4

"Uncontrolled Copy"
SrcDConnLim- limiter 1 (2 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +
itr Indices: 3 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U135 Function parameter for entering the fixed set- Init: 0,00 Menus:
FSetpConnLmt point for the 1st limit-value monitor with Min: -200,00 Parameter menu +
Mon1 smoothing (1 word). Free blocks
Max: 200,00

Ready
SrcConnLmtM the 1st limit-value monitor with smoothing (1 Unit: - Parameter menu +
on1 word). Free blocks
Indices: 2
Changeable in:
Drive setting

SmConnLmtM time constants of the 1st limit-value monitor Min: 0 Parameter menu +
on1 with smoothing (1 word). Free blocks
Max: 10000

Ready
U138 Function parameter for entering the hysteresis Init: 0,00 Menus:
HysConnLmtM of the 1st limit-value monitor with smoothing (1 Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
Max: 199,99

Ready
U139* Function parameters for entering the mode of Init: 0 Menus:

ModeConnLmt the 1st limit value monitors with smoothing (1 Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Mon1 word). Free blocks
Max: 2

"Uncontrolled Copy"
FSetpConnLmt point for the 2nd limit-value monitor with Min: -200,00 Parameter menu +
Mon1 smoothing (1 word). Free blocks
Max: 200,00

Ready
SrcConnLmtM the 2nd limit-value monitor with smoothing (1 Unit: - Parameter menu +
Indices: 2
Changeable in:
Drive setting

SmConnLmt- time constants of the 2nd limit-value monitors Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Mon 2 with smoothing (1 word). Free blocks
Max: 10000

Ready
HysConnLmtM of the 2nd limit-value monitors with smoothing Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
on2 (1 word). Free blocks
Max: 199,99

Ready
U144* Function parameter for entering the mode of the Init: 0 Menus:
ModeConnLmt 2nd limit value monitors with smoothing (1 Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Max: 2
FSDConnLmtM point for the 1st limit-value monitor with Min: -200,00 Parameter menu +
on1 smoothing (2 word). Free blocks
Max: 200,00

Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
SrcDConnLmt the 1st limit-value monitor with smoothing (2 Unit: - Parameter menu +
Indices: 2
Changeable in:
Drive setting

HysLmtMon3 time constants of the 1st limit-value monitor Min: 0 Parameter menu +
with smoothing (2 word). Free blocks
2147 Max: 10000
Unit: ms Upread/free access

Ready
HysDConnLmt of the 1st limit-value monitor with smoothing (2 Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
Max: 199,99

Ready
U149* Function parameter for entering the mode of the Init: 0 Menus:
ModeD- 1st limit value monitors with smoothing (2 Min: 0 Parameter menu +
ConnLmtMon word). Free blocks
Max: 2
2149 Indices: - Changeable in:
FSDConnLmtM point for the 2nd limit-value monitor without Min: -200,00 Parameter menu +
on2 smoothing (2 word). Free blocks
Max: 200,00

Ready
SrcDConnLmt the 2nd limit-value monitor without smoothing Unit: - Parameter menu +
Mon2 (2 word). Free blocks
Indices: 2
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
HysDConnLmt of the 2nd limit-value monitor without smooth- Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
Mon2 ing (2 word). Free blocks
Max: 199,99

Ready
U153* Function parameters for entering the mode of Init: 0 Menus:

ModeD- the 2nd limit value monitor without smoothing Min: 0 Parameter menu +
ConnLmtMon (2 word). Free blocks
Max: 2
Src Cam 1/2 the cam controller with cam 1 and cam 2. Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
U155 Function parameter for entering the hysteresis Init: 0 Menus:

Hys Cam 1/2 of the cam controller with cam 1 and cam 2. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
2155 Max: Free blocks
2147483647 Upread/free access
Type: O4 Ready
U156 Function parameter for entering the ON-position index1: 0 Menus:

ON-Pos Cam1 of cam 1. Min: - Parameter menu +
2156 The value of the ON position must be smaller 2147483647 Free blocks
than that of the OFF position. Upread/free access
Max:
Indices: 4 Ready
,FDS
Type: I4

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U157 Function parameter for entering the OFF-posi- index1: 0 Menus:

OFF-Pos Cam1 tion of cam 1. Min: - Parameter menu +
2157 2147483647 Free blocks
Indices: 4 Ready
,FDS
Type: I4
U158 Function parameter for entering the ON-Position index1: 0 Menus:

2158 2147483647 Free blocks
Indices: 4 Ready
,FDS
Type: I4

2159 2147483647 Free blocks
Indices: 4 Ready
,FDS
Type: I4
Src Cam 3/4 the cam controller with cam 3 and cam 4. Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U161 Function parameter for entering the hysteresis Init: 0 Menus:

Hys Cam 3/4 of the cam controller with cam 3 and cam 4. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
2147483647 Upread/free access
Type: O4 Ready
U162 Function parameter for entering the ON-position index1: 0 Menus:

2162 2147483647 Free blocks
Indices: 4 Ready
,FDS
Type: I4

2163 2147483647 Free blocks
Indices: 4 Ready
,FDS
Type: I4
U164 Function parameters for entering the ON-posi- index1: 0 Menus:

ON-Pos Cam4 tion of cam 4. Min: - Parameter menu +
2164 2147483647 Free blocks
Indices: 4 Ready
,FDS
Type: I4

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U165 Function parameters for entering the OFF-posi- index1: 0 Menus:

2165 2147483647 Free blocks
Indices: 4 Ready
,FDS
Type: I4
Src1 ConnCh1 the analog signal changeover switch 1 (1 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
U167* BICO parameter for selecting the binector for index1: 0 Menus:
Src2 ConnCh1 the analog signal changeover switch 1 (1 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src1 ConnCh2 analog signal changeover switch 2 (1 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src1DconnCh1 analog signal changeover switch 1 (2 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src2DConnCh analog signal changeover switch 1 (2 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +
1 Indices: 2 Free blocks +
2177 Technology + Posi-
Type: L2,K,K tioning
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U182* BICO parameter for selecting the binector for Init: Menus:
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U186* Source for the binectors of the multiplexer with index1: 0 Menus:
Src1 Multiplex 8 channels: Unit: - Parameter menu +
2186 Index 1: Signal selection Bit 0 Indices: 4 Free blocks
Index 2: Signal selection Bit 1 Type: L2,B Upread/free access
Index 3: Signal selection Bit 2 Changeable in:
Index 4: Enable signal selection Drive setting
U187* The parameter defines the connector inputs of index1: 0 Menus:

Src 2 Multiplex the multiplexer with 8 channels: Unit: - Parameter menu +
2187 Index 1: Input 1 Indices: 8 Free blocks
to Type: L2,K,K Upread/free access
Index 8: Input 8 Changeable in:
Drive setting
U188* BICO for selecting the binectors for the demulti- index1: 0 Menus:
Src1 Demulti- plexer with 8 channels (2 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +
plex Indices: 5 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U189* BICO parameter for selecting the connectors for Init: 0 Menus:
Src2 Demulti- the demultiplexer with 8 channels (2 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +
plex Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src Char1 characteristic block 1 (1 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
U191 Function parameters for entering the X-values index1: 0,00 Menus:
X-Vals Char1 for characteristic block 1 (1 word). Min: -200,00 Parameter menu +

Ready
U192 Function parameters for entering the Y-values index1: 0,00 Menus:
Y-Vals Char1 for characteristic block 1 (1 word). Min: -200,00 Parameter menu +

Ready
Src Char2 characteristic block 2 (1 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Ready
Src Char3 the characteristic block 3 (1 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Ready

Ready
Src DeadZone the dead zone (1 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
U200 Function parameter for entering the neutral Init: 0,00 Menus:
Neutral Zone zone for the dead zone (1 word). Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +

Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
SrcMaxSel maximum selection (2 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
SrcMinSel minimum selection (2 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src1 Tra/Stor1 the control inputs of the tracking/storage ele- Unit: - Parameter menu +
ment. Free blocks
2203 Indices: 3
Index 1: Track Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Index 2: Store Changeable in:
Index 3: Reset Drive setting
Src2 Tra/Stor1 tracking/storage element 1 (2 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Mode Tra/ the tracking/storage element (2 word). Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Stor1 Parameter value: Max: 1 Free blocks
2205 0 = non-volatile memory off Unit: - Upread/free access
1 = non-volatile memory on Indices: - Changeable in:
Src1 Tra/Stor2 the control inputs of the tracking/storage ele- Unit: - Parameter menu +
ment. Free blocks
2206 Indices: 3
Index 1: Track Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Index 2: Store Changeable in:
Index 3: Reset Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src2 Tra/Stor2 tracking/storage element 2 (2 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Mode Tra/ the tracking/storage element (2 word). Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Stor2 Parameter value Max: 1 Free blocks
2208 0 = non-volatile memory off Unit: - Upread/free access
1 = non-volatile memory on Indices: - Changeable in:
Src1 Store 1 analog signal storage 1 (2 word). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U214* BICO parameter for selecting the connector index1: 0 Menus:

Src n(Frict- from which the speed actual-value for the fric- Unit: - Parameter menu +
Char) tion characteristic is to be read in. Functions
Indices: 2

Drive setting
U215* Parameter for indicating the speed support index1: 1,000 Menus:
n-FrictChar points (in%) of the friction characteristic. Only Min: 0,000 Parameter menu +
positive values are acceptable. Functions
2215 Max: 200,000
U216* Function parameter for entering the supplemen- index1: 0,0 Menus:
T FrictChar tary torque values of the friction characteristic. Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
Are automatically set upon recording of the fric- Functions
2216 tion characteristic. Max: 200,0
U217* Weighting factor (in%) for the torque supple- index1: 100,0 Menus:
Weight T Char mentary value determined by the friction char- Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
acteristic. Functions
2217 Max: 200,0
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2
U218* BICO parameter for selecting a binector for acti- index1: 0 Menus:
Src FricCha- vating the friction characteristic. Unit: - Parameter menu +
rON Indices: 2 Functions

Drive setting
U219* BICO parameter for selecting a binector with index1: 0 Menus:

SrcPlotFric- which recording of the friction characteristic can Unit: - Parameter menu
Char be triggered.
2219 ,BDS Changeable in:
Type: L2,B Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src AND1 AND element 1 (Output = B601). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src OR1 OR element 1 (Output = B619). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src BinInv1 inverter 1 (Output = B641). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src NAND1 NAND element 1 (Output = B681). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"


Changeable in:
Drive setting

Src BinCh1 binary signal changeover switch 1 (Output= Unit: - Parameter menu +
B661). Free blocks
2271 Indices: 3
Changeable in:
Drive setting
B662). Free blocks
2272 Indices: 3
Changeable in:
Drive setting
B663). Free blocks
2273 Indices: 3
Changeable in:
Drive setting
B664). Free blocks
2274 Indices: 3
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
B665). Free blocks
2275 Indices: 3
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src EXOR1 EXOR (exclusive or) element 1 (Output = Unit: - Parameter menu +
B666). Free blocks
2276 Indices: 2
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src EXOR2 EXOR element 2 (Output = B667). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src EXOR3 EXOR element 3 (Output = B668). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
U279* BICO parameter for selecting the binectors for D index1: 0 Menus:
Src D- flip-flop element 1 (Outputs: Q = B525, ¯Q = Unit: - Parameter menu +
FlipFlop1 B526). Free blocks
Indices: 4
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U280* BICO parameter for selecting the binectors for D index1: 0 Menus:
Src D- flip-flop 2 (Outputs: Q = B527, ¯Q = B528). Unit: - Parameter menu +
FlipFlop2 Indices: 4 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src RS- RS flip-flop 1 (Outputs: Q = B501, ¯Q = B502). Unit: - Parameter menu +
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Changeable in:
Drive setting
SrcRS- RS flip-flop 10 (Outputs: Q = B519, ¯Q = Unit: - Parameter menu +
Indices: 2
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Indices: 2
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Indices: 2
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src Timer1 the 1st timer (0 to 60,000 s). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
U294 Function parameter for entering the time for the index1: 0,000 Menus:
Time Timer1 1st timer (1 to 60,000 s). Min: 0,000 Parameter menu +
Unit: s Upread/free access
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready
U295* Function parameter for entering the mode for Init: 0 Menus:
Mode Timer1 the 1st timer (1 to 60,000 s). Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Src Timer2 the 2nd timer (1 to 60,000 s). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Time Timer2 2nd timer (1 to 60,000 s). FDS Min: 0,000 Parameter menu +
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready
Mode Timer2 the 2nd timer(1 to 60,000 s). Min: 0 Parameter menu +

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src Timer3 the 3rd timer (1 to 60,000 s). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Time Timer3 3rd timer 1 to 60,000 s). FDS Min: 0,000 Parameter menu +
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready
Mode Timer3 the 3rd timer (1 to 60,000 s). Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Src Timer4 the 4th timer (1 to 60,000 s). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Time Timer4 4th timer (1 to 60,000 s). FDS Min: 0,000 Parameter menu +
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready
Mode Timer4 the 4th timer (1 to 600,000 s). Min: 0 Parameter menu +

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src Timer5 the 5th timer (0 to 600,000 s). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Time Timer5 5th timer (0 to 600,000s). FDS Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready
Mode Timer5 the 5th timer(0 to 600,000s). Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Src Timer6 the 6th timer (0 to 600,000s). Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Time Timer6 6th timer (0 to 600,000s). FDS Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready
Mode Timer6 the 6th timer (0 to 600,00s). Min: 0 Parameter menu +

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src1 Timer7 the 7th timer (1 to 60 000 s) with adaptation. Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src2 Timer7 the 7th timer (1 to 60 000 s) with adaptation. Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Time Timer7 7th timer (1 to 60 000 s) with adaptation. Min: 0,000 Parameter menu +
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready
Mode Timer7 the 7th timer (1 to 60 000 s) with adaptation. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
U315 Function parameter for entering the fixed set- index1: 0 Menus:
Param points for the 16 bit software counter. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Counter Max: 65535 Free blocks

Ready
Src Param- the 16 bit software counter. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Counter Indices: 4 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src Bin the 16 bit software counter. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Counter Indices: 5 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
n318 Visualization parameter for counter output of Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Counter Out- the 16 bit software counter. Unit: - Parameter menu +
put Indices: - Free blocks
SrcComfRGen the input of the comfort ramp-function genera- Unit: - Parameter menu +
In tor. Free blocks
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting
SrcComfRGen stopping of the comfort ramp-function genera- Unit: - Parameter menu +
Stop tor. Free blocks
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting
SrcComfRGen shutdown of the comfort ramp-function genera- Unit: - Parameter menu +
SD tor. Free blocks
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting
SrcComfR- the setting value of the comfort ramp-function Unit: - Parameter menu +
GenSetV generator. Free blocks
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src Set Com- setting the comfort ramp-function generator. Unit: - Parameter menu +
fRGen Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src Rel Com- releasing the comfort ramp-function generator. Unit: - Parameter menu +
fRGen Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
n326 Visualization parameter input of comfort ramp- Dec.Plc.: 2 Menus:

ComfRGen function generator. Unit:% Parameter menu +
Input Indices: - Free blocks
U327 Operating mode for rounding of the comfort Init: 0 Menus:

ComfRGen ramp-function generator. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Round 0 = Rounding does not act upon sudden reduc- Max: 1 Free blocks
2327 tion of input value during acceleration process Upread/free access
Unit: -
1 = Rounding acts at all times. At a sudden Changeable in:
reduction of the input value, overshoot can Indices: -
occur. Type: O2 Drive setting
Ready
SrcComfRGen- bridging the comfort ramp-function generator. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Bridg Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
SrcComfRGen- adaptation of the comfort ramp-function gener- Unit: - Parameter menu +
Adap ator. Free blocks
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U330 Function parameter for input of the acceleration index1: 10,0 Menus:
ComfRGenAc- time of the comfort ramp-function generator. Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
celT The unit of the acceleration time is set in U331. Free blocks
Max: 999,9
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U331 Function parameter for entering the unit of the index1: 0 Menus:
ComfRGenUni- acceleration time of the comfort ramp-function Min: 0 Parameter menu +
tAT generator. Free blocks
Max: 2
2331 • 0 = seconds Upread/free access
Unit: -
• 1 = minutes Changeable in:
• 2 = hours Indices: 4
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready
U332 Function parameter for entering the decelera- index1: 10,0 Menus:
ComfRGenDe- tion time of the comfort ramp-function genera- Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
celT tor. The unit of the deceleration time is set in Free blocks
U333. Max: 999,9
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready
U333 Function parameter for entering the unit of the index1: 0 Menus:
ComfRGe- deceleration time of the comfort ramp-function Min: 0 Parameter menu +
nUnitDT generator. Free blocks
Max: 2
2333 • 0 = seconds Upread/free access
Unit: -
• 1 = minutes Changeable in:
• 2 = hours Indices: 4
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready
U334 Function parameter for input of the initial index1: 0,00 Menus:
ComfRGenIni- rounding time of the comfort ramp-function Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
tRd generator. Free blocks
Max: 10,00
2334 Unit: s Upread/free access
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready
U335 Function parameter for input of the final round- index1: 0,00 Menus:
ComfRGenEn- ing time of the comfort ramp-function genera- Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
dRd tor. Free blocks
Max: 10,00
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U336 Parameter for entering the rated acceleration Init: 0,01 Menus:
ComfRGenRt- time of the comfort ramp-function generator. Min: 0,01 Parameter menu +
dAT The following applies: Max: 300,00 Free blocks
2336 Acceleration time = rated acceleration time -> Unit: s Upread/free access
dy/dt = 100% Changeable in:
Indices: -
Ready
U337 Parameter for entering the quick stop time of Init: 10,0 Menus:
ComfRGenQS- the comfort ramp-function generator. Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
Time Max: 999,9 Free blocks

Ready
SrcComfRGen quick stop of the comfort ramp-function genera- Unit: - Parameter menu +
QS tor. Free blocks
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting
n339 Visualization parameter for the effective accel- Dec.Plc.: 1 Menus:

ComfRGen Eff- eration/deceleration time of the comfort ramp Unit: s Parameter menu +
Time function generator: Free blocks
Indices: 2
2339 Index 0: effective acceleration time Upread/free access
Type: O4
Index 1: effective deceleration time
n340 Visualization parameter for output of the com- Dec.Plc.: 2 Menus:

ComfRGen fort ramp function generator. Unit:% Parameter menu +
Output Indices: - Free blocks
n341 Visualization parameter dy/dt of the comfort Dec.Plc.: 2 Menus:

ComfRGen dy/ ramp-function generator. Unit:% Parameter menu +
dt Indices: - Free blocks
U342 Parameter for input of the internal limitation of Init: 100,00 Menus:
ComfRGen the comfort ramp-function generator. Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
IntLmt Max: 200,00 Free blocks

Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
SrcComfRGen- the positive internal limitation of the comfort Unit: - Parameter menu +
PosL ramp-function generator. Free blocks
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting
SrcComfRGen- the negative internal limitation of the comfort Unit: - Parameter menu +
NegL ramp-function generator. Free blocks
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U345* The parameter makes it possible to disconnect index1: 92 Menus:

Src function dataset switch over for the comfort Unit: - Parameter menu +
FDS.CoRFG ramp function generator. This permits indepen- Free blocks
dent changeover of the ramp generator param- Indices: 2
2345 eter. Type: L2,B Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting


Changeable in:
Drive setting


Changeable in:
Drive setting


Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Src TeCntr Rel enabling the technology controller. Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
U351 Parameter for entering the controller type of the Init: 1 Menus:
TeCntr Reg- technology controller. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Type 0 = Normal PID controller Max: 1 Free blocks
2351 1 = PI controller with D component in actual- Unit: - Upread/free access
value channel Changeable in:
Indices: -
Src TeCntr the setpoint of the technology controller. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Setp Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U353 Parameter for entering the setpoint smoothing Init: 0,00 Menus:
TeCntr time constants of the technology controller. Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
SetpSmth Max: 60,00 Free blocks

Ready
n354 Visualization parameter, smoothed setpoint of Dec.Plc.: 1 Menus:

TeCntr Setp the technology controller. Unit:% Parameter menu +

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src TeCntr the actual value of the technology controller. Unit: - Parameter menu +
ActV Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
n356 Visualization parameter, actual-value of the Dec.Plc.: 1 Menus:

TeCntr ActV technology controller. Unit:% Parameter menu +
n357 Visualization parameter, set/actual value devia- Dec.Plc.: 1 Menus:

TeCntr Devia- tion of the technology controller with the “PID Unit:% Parameter menu +
tion controller” type. The inverted actual value is Free blocks
displayed on the PI controller with D component Indices: -
2357 in actual-value channel” controller type. Type: I2 Upread/free access
U358 Parameter for entering the actual-value Init: 0,00 Menus:

TeCntr smoothing time constants of the technology Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
ActVSmth controller. Free blocks
Max: 60,00

Ready
n359 Visualization parameter, input of the technology Dec.Plc.: 1 Menus:

TeCntr Input controller. Unit:% Parameter menu +
SrcTeCntr I setting the I component of the technology con- Unit: - Parameter menu +
Set troller. Free blocks
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src TeCntr the setting value of the technology controller’s I Unit: - Parameter menu +
ISetV component. Free blocks
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src TeCntr the droop of the technology controller. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Droop Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src TeCntrGai- the gain adaption of the technology controller. Unit: - Parameter menu +
nAd Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U364 Function parameter for entering the basic gain index1: 3,00 Menus:
TeCntr Basic- of the technology controller. Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
Gain Max: 125,00 Free blocks
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready
n365 Visualization parameter, effective gain of the Dec.Plc.: 2 Menus:

TeCntr technology controller. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Eff.Gain Indices: - Free blocks
U366 Function parameter for entering the integral index1: 3,00 Menus:
TeCntr Time time of the technology controller. Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready
U367 Function parameter for entering the derivative index1: 0,00 Menus:
TeCntrDeriva- time of the technology controller. Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
tion Max: 60,00 Free blocks
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src TeCntr the pre-control signal of the technology control- Unit: - Parameter menu +
PRE ler. Free blocks
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U369 Parameter for entering a fixed setpoint value for Init: 100,0 Menus:
TeCntrFSt- the output limitation ramp-function generator of Min: 0,0 Parameter menu +
pOutLim the technology controller. Free blocks
Max: 200,0
Src TeCn- the output limitation of the technology control- Unit: - Parameter menu +
trOutLim ler. Free blocks
Indices: 2
2370 • Index 1: Connector for upper output limi- Upread/free access
Type: L2,K
tation (B+)
Changeable in:
• Index 2: Connector for lower output limi-
tation (B-) Drive setting
U371 Parameter for entering the acceleration/deceler- Init: 0,00 Menus:

TeCntrOutLim- ation time for the output limitation of the tech- Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
Time nology controller. Free blocks
Max: 100,00

Ready
n372 Visualization parameter, output of the technol- Dec.Plc.: 1 Menus:

TeCntr Output ogy controller after output limitation. Unit:% Parameter menu +

SrcJ_Ext from which the moment of inertia for torque Unit: - Parameter menu +
pre-control is read in. Control/gating unit
2373 Indices: 2
+ Speed control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U374 BICO parameter for selecting an connector from index1: 0 Menus:

SrcAccPre which the acceleration for torque pre-control is Unit: - Parameter menu +
2374 Indices: 2
+ Speed control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U375* BICO parameter for selecting a connector from index1: 0 Menus:

Src T FixVal which a fixed torque pre-control value is read Unit: - Parameter menu +
in. Control/gating unit
2375 Indices: 2
+ Speed control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U376* BICO parameter for selecting a binector from index1: 0 Menus:

Src Select J which the command to select a fixed (U378) or Unit: - Parameter menu +
a variable moment of inertia (U373) for torque Control/gating unit
2376 pre-control is read in. Indices: 2
+ Speed control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U377* BICO parameter for selecting a binector from index1: 0 Menus:

Src Sel Acc T which the command to select a fixed (U375) is Unit: - Parameter menu +
read in or from the pre-control torque calculated Control/gating unit
2377 from acceleration. Indices: 2
+ Speed control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U378* Parameter for indicating a fixed moment of iner- Init: 0,00 Menus:
J FixVal tia for the torque pre-control. Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
2378 Normalization Max: 600,00 Control/gating unit
n_ref (P353) + Speed control
Unit: s
--------------------- Upread/free access
Indices: -
m_ref (P354) Changeable in:
Type: O2
Thus the rated starting time is given in seconds. Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U379* Parameter for indicating the scaling of the Init: 100,00 Menus:
J / Scaling external moments of inertia (U373) Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
+ Speed control
Unit:%
Upread/free access
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Type: O2
Drive setting
Ready
Src Sim- the input of the simple ramp-function genera- Unit: - Parameter menu +
pRGen In tor. Free blocks
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src Set Sim- setting the simple ramp-function generator. Unit: - Parameter menu +
pRGen Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src SetVSim- the setting value of the simple ramp-function Unit: - Parameter menu +
pRGen generator. Free blocks
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U383 Parameter for entering the acceleration and index1: 10,00 Menus:
SimpRG Ac/ deceleration time of the simple ramp-function Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
DcTime generator. Free blocks
Max: 100,00
2383 • Index 1: Acceleration time Upread/free access
Unit: s
• Index 2: Deceleration time Changeable in:
Indices: 2
Ready

KPC PROFId- model of PROFIdrive V3 standard. Parameter is Unit: 1/s Parameter menu
riveV only visible if PROFIdrive V3 is set.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U385* BICO parameter for selecting a parameter from index1: 0 Menus:

Src T (total1) which a torque value for the torque addition Unit: - Parameter menu +
block is to be read in. Control/gating unit
2385 Indices: 2
+ Current control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting

2386 Indices: 2
+ Current control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting

2387 Indices: 2
+ Current control
,BDS
Upread/free access
Type: L2,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U388* Moment of inertia in% (for calculating the accel- index1: Menus:
Mom_Inertia.J eration torque) 100,00 Parameter menu +
2388 Min: 0,00 Control/gating unit
+ Current control
Max: 200,00
Upread/free access
Unit:%
Changeable in:
Indices: 2
Drive setting
Type: O2
Ready
U389* Selection of calculation of the acceleration Init: 0 Menus:

Ber.M(accel) torque: Min: 0 Parameter menu +
2389 0: with scaled moment of inertia Max: 1 Control/gating unit
1: with moment of inertia in% + Current control
Unit: -
Upread/free access
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Type: O2
Drive setting
SrcWobbSetp the input of the wobble generator Unit: - Parameter menu +
Unwo Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Src Wobb the master synchronizing signal of the wobble Unit: - Parameter menu +
SyncInp generator Free blocks
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Src Wobb Rel wobble release Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
U393 Function parameter for entering the wobble index1: 0,00 Menus:
Wobb Ampli- amplitude as a relation to the input signal Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
tude amount (setpoint) Free blocks
Max: 20,00
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready
U394 Function parameter for entering the frequency index1: 60,0 Menus:
Wobb Freq of the wobble signal Min: 0,1 Parameter menu +
Unit: 1/min Upread/free access
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready
U395 Function parameter for entering the phase shift index1: 360 Menus:
Wobb Phase of the wobble signal compared to the master Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Shift synchronizing signal. At a value of 360°, the Free blocks
synchronizing signal is not observed; coasting Max: 360
2395 wobbling takes place. Unit: ° (alt) Upread/free access
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U396 Function parameter for entering the amount of index1: 0,00 Menus:
Wobb P-Step the negative P step as a percentage of the wob- Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
ble amplitude Free blocks
2396 Max: 100,00
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready
U397 Function parameter for entering the amount of index1: 0,00 Menus:
Wobb P-Step the positive P step as a percentage of the wob- Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
ble amplitude. Free blocks
2397 Max: 100,00
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready
U398 Function parameter for entering the time por- index1: 50 Menus:
Wobb Sampl tion of the increasing edge of the wobble signal Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Ratio Max: 100 Free blocks
,FDS Drive setting
Type: O2 Ready
n399 Visualization parameter for displaying the wob- Dec.Plc.: 1 Menus:

Wobb Gen ble signal. Unit:% Parameter menu +
Outp Indices: - Free blocks
U400* Parameter for selecting the double word con- Init: 0 Menus:
SrcConnAnaD nector for the 1st analog delay element. Unit: - Parameter menu +
el_1 Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
U401* Parameter for entering the delay cycles of the Init: 0 Menus:
AnaDelayEl_1 1st analog delay element Min: 0 Parameter menu +
_T Max: 32 Free blocks

Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U402* Parameter for selecting the double word con- Init: 0 Menus:
SrcConnAnaD nector for the 2nd analog delay element Unit: - Parameter menu +
E_2 Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
U403* Parameter for entering the delay cycles of the Init: 0 Menus:
AnaDE_2_T 2nd analog delay element Min: 0 Parameter menu +

Ready
U404* Parameter array for selecting the binectors for index1: 0 Menus:
Src- the 6 sampling time changeover contacts Unit: - Parameter menu +
SampTChange Indices: 6 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
U405* Parameter for selecting the 32-bit connector for Init: 0 Menus:
SrcMulDiv32_ the high resolution multiplier/divider 1 (2-word) Unit: - Parameter menu +
1_32 Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
U406* Parameter for selecting the 16-bit connectors index1: 0 Menus:

SrcMulDiv32_ for the high resolution multiplier/divider 1 (2- Unit: - Parameter menu +
1_16 word) Free blocks
Indices: 2
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U407* Parameter for selecting a connector as input for Init: 613 Menus:
SrcPulsGen Tp determination of the period of the 1st pulse Unit: - Parameter menu +
generator Free blocks
2407 Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
U408* Parameter array for selecting the double-word index1: 0 Menus:

Src connectors for the 1st 32-bit integrator: Unit: - Parameter menu +
Integr32_1 • Index 1: Current input value Indices: 4 Free blocks
2408 • Index 2: Upper limit
• Index 3: Lower limit Changeable in:
• Index 4: Set value
Drive setting
Ready
U409* Parameter for selecting the integral time con- Init: 611 Menus:
Src stant for the 1st 32-bit integrator. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Integr32_1_t Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
U410* Parameter for selecting a binector as setting Init: 0 Menus:

Src command for the 1st 32-bit integrator. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Integr32_1_s Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

Src connectors for the 2nd 32-bit integrator. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Integr32_2 • Index 1: Current input value Indices: 4 Free blocks
2411 • Index 2: Upper limit
• Index 3: Lower limit Changeable in:
• Index 4: Set value
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U412* Parameter for selecting the integral time con- Init: 612 Menus:
Src stant for the 2nd 32-bit integrator Unit: - Parameter menu +
Integr32_2_t Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

Src command for the 2nd 32-bit integrator. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Integr32_2_s Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
U414* Parameter for selecting a double-word connec- Init: 0 Menus:

Src PT1Gl32_1 tor as input value for the 1st 32-bit PT1 ele- Unit: - Parameter menu +
ment. Free blocks
2414 Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
U415* Parameter for entering the filtering time for the Init: 0 Menus:
PT1Element32 1st 32-bit PT1 element. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
_1_t Max: 10000 Free blocks

Ready

SrcPT1Elem32 command for the 1st 32-bit PT1 element. Unit: - Parameter menu +
_1_s Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Src tor as input value for the 2nd 32-bit PT1 ele- Unit: - Parameter menu +
PT1Elem32_2 ment Free blocks
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
U418* Parameter for entering the filtering time for the Init: 0 Menus:
PT1Elem32_2 2nd 32-bit PT1 element. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
_t Max: 10000 Free blocks

Ready
U419* Parameter for selecting a binector as the setting Init: 0 Menus:

Src command for the 2nd 32-bit PT1 element. Unit: - Parameter menu +
PT1El32_2_s Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

Src tor as input value for the 1st 32-bit D element. Unit: - Parameter menu +
DElem32_1 Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
U421* Parameter for entering the time constant for the Init: 0,01 Menus:
Src 1st 32-bit D element Min: 0,01 Parameter menu +
DElem32_1_t Max: 300,00 Free blocks

Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Src Inputs RM connectors for the real master. Unit: - Parameter menu +
2422 • Index 1: Current input value Indices: 3 Free blocks
• Index 2: Setting value Type: L2,K,K Upread/free access
• Index 3: Speed actual-value Changeable in:
Drive setting
U423* Parameter for entering the smoothing time con- Init: 0 Menus:
Smooth. Input stant for the input signal of the Real Master. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
RM Max: 100 Free blocks

Ready
U424* Parameter for entering the time constant for the Init: 0,00 Menus:
Deadtime- dead time compensation of the real master. Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
CompRM Max: 100,00 Free blocks

Ready
U425* Parameter for entering the axis cycle length for index1: 0 Menus:
ACL RealMas- the real master. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
ter • Index 1: Axis cycle length for integrator Max: Free blocks
2425 • Index 2: Axis cycle length of input value. 2147483647 Upread/free access
Type: O4 Ready

Src Set RM command for the real master Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U427* Parameter for entering the smoothing time con- Init: 0 Menus:
SmthDeadT- stant for the dead time compensation of the real Min: 0 Parameter menu +
CompR master. Free blocks
Max: 100
M Unit: ms Upread/free access

Ready
U428* Parameter for entering the rated speed in [1000 Init: 0,00 Menus:
V-Rated RM LU/min] for the real master Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
20000000,00 Upread/free access
Type: O4 Ready
U429* The parameter defines the input values for the index1: 0 Menus:
Src Inputs VM integrator of the virtual master axis. Unit: - Parameter menu +
2429 • Index 1: Input value [%] Indices: 2 Free blocks
• Index 2: Set value [LU] Type: L2,K,K Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
U430 Parameter for entering the axis cycle length for Init: 0 Menus:
Axis Cycle the integrator of the virtual master axis. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
VMAx Max: Free blocks
2430 2147483647 Upread/free access
Type: O4 Ready
U431* Parameter for entering the rated speed [1000 Init: 0,00 Menus:
V-Rated VM LU/min] for the 1st 32-bit integrator virtual Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
master axis. Free blocks
2431 Max:
Type: O4 Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Src Set VM command for the integrator of the virtual mas- Unit: - Parameter menu +
ter axis. Free blocks
2432 Indices: -
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
U433* Parameter for entering the integral time con- Init: 0,000 Menus:
Integr32_1_Ti stant of the 1st 32-bit integrator. Min: 0,000 Parameter menu +

Ready
U434* Parameter for entering the integral time con- Init: 0,000 Menus:
Integr32_2_Ti stant of the 2nd 32-bit integrator. Min: 0,000 Parameter menu +

Ready
U435* Parameter for entering the period of the 1st Init: 0 Menus:
ImpGen_1_Tp pulse generator. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Unit: ms Upread/free access

Ready
Src ConnTo- whose value supplies the parameter number for Unit: - Parameter menu +
Par # the connector to parameter converter. Free blocks
Indices: 5
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
SrcConnToPar whose value supplies the parameter index for Unit: - Parameter menu +
Ind the connector to parameter converter. Free blocks
Indices: 5
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
U440* Kp for the P amplifier/multiplier (2-word) index1: 1,00 Menus:

P-Ampf Gain Figure range: -999.99 bis 999.99 Min: -1000,00 Parameter menu +
• Index 1: for 1st P amplifier/multiplier
• Index 2: for 2nd P amplifier/multiplier Unit: - Upread/free access

Ready
U441* Parameter for selecting 32-bit connectors for index1: 0 Menus:

Src P-Ampli- the P amplifier/multiplier (2-word) Unit: - Parameter menu +
fier • Index 1: 1st P amplifier/multiplier Indices: 2 Free blocks
2441 • Index 2: 2nd P amplifier/multiplier Type: L2,K,K Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
U442* Number of shift steps for the shift multiplier/ index1: 0 Menus:
Shift divider. Min: -31 Parameter menu +
32_number Figure range: -31 to 31 Max: 31 Free blocks
2442 • Index 1: for 1st shift multiplier/divider Unit: - Upread/free access
• Index 2: for 2nd shift multiplier/divider
• Index 3: for 3rd shift multiplier/divider Drive setting
Type: I2
• Index 4: for 4th shift multiplier/divider
Ready
U443* Parameter for selecting 32-bit connectors for index1: 0 Menus:

Src Shift32 the shift multipliers/dividers (2-word) Unit: - Parameter menu +
2443 • Index 1: 1st shift multiplier/divider Indices: 4 Free blocks
• Index 2: 2nd shift multiplier/divider
• Index 3: 3rd shift multiplier/divider Changeable in:
• Index 4: 4th shift multiplier/divider
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Src ConnTo- whose value is to be stored on the parameter. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Par V Indices: 5 Free blocks
2444 CAUTION Upread/free access
Type: L2,K,K
If there is a change of soft wiring Changeable in:
during the “Operation” drive sta- Drive setting
tus, the trigger condition must
Ready
always be soft wired and be at 0,
as otherwise unintentional
parameter changes may occur.
U445* Function parameter whose value contains the index1: 0 Menus:
ConnToPar parameter number for the connector-to- param- Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Par# eter converter. Free blocks
Max: 2999
2445 0 = no parameter selected. Upread/free access
Unit: -

Ready
U446* Function parameter whose value contains the index1: 0 Menus:

ConnToPar index of the parameter for the connector-to- Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Index parameter converter. Free blocks
Max: 255
2446 0 = no index parameter. Upread/free access
Unit: -

Ready
U447* BICO parameter for selecting the binector for index1: 0 Menus:
SrcConnToPar the trigger signal which results in storage of the Unit: - Parameter menu +
Trg connector value on the parameter. Free blocks
Indices: 5
CAUTION
Changeable in:
If the soft wiring is changed dur- Drive setting
ing the “Operation” drive status,
the trigger condition must always Ready
be soft wired and be at 0, as oth-
erwise unintentional parameter
changes may occur.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U448* BICO parameter for selecting the binector which index1: 0 Menus:
SrcConnToPa- determines the memory area for the connector Unit: - Parameter menu +
rEEPR to parameter conversion. Free blocks
Indices: 5
2448 0 = RAM Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
1 = EEPROM Changeable in:
Drive setting
CAUTION
Ready
If the EEPROM is continually writ-
ten with different values, this will
reduce the service life of the
component.
U449* BICO parameter for selecting the binector which index1: 0 Menus:
SrcParToCon- determines the type of access for the connector Unit: - Parameter menu +
nRd to parameter conversion. Free blocks
Indices: 5
2449 0 = write Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
1 = read Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.6.17 Technology Synchronism (Master Setpoint Correction)
n450 The parameter shows the status of the synchro- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
CycleSetp.Syn nous running status signals Unit: - Parameter menu +
ch • Index 1: Low word of the synchronous Indices: 2 Technology + Syn-
2450 running status signal chronism
Type: V2
• Index 2: High word of the synchronous Upread/free access
running status signal
U451* Source for master setpoint correction: index1: 0 Menus:

Src MastV Corr Source switch over from master setpoint 1 to Unit: - Parameter menu +
2451 master setpoint 2 with binector U452.1. Indices: 5 Technology + Syn-
Master setpoint 2 can be influenced with a gear chronism
Type: L2,K,K
step (U457). Upread/free access
• Index 1: Master setpoint 1 [LU] Changeable in:
• Index 2: Master setpoint 2 with gear step Drive setting
[LU]
• Index 3: Setting value [LU] for integrator
and master setpoint KK830
• Index 4: Speed master setpoint [%]
• Index5: Speed master setpoint 2 [%]
U452* Control word for master setpoint correction: index1: 0 Menus:

CW MastVCorr • Index 1: Trigger master setpoint correc- Unit: - Parameter menu +
2452 tion. Start of correction and displacement Indices: 6 Technology + Syn-
ramp injection at U453. chronism
Type: L2,B
• Index 2: Master setpoint selection, Upread/free access
0=MS1, 1=MS2 Changeable in:
• Index 3: Release of direction reversal for
Drive setting
the shortest correction displacement
• Index 4: Set trigger output
• Index 5: Enable displacement correction
• Index 6: Enable synchronization
U453* Displacement value [LU] of master setpoint cor- Init: 826 Menus:
Offset Corr rection: This value is passed via the ramp to the Unit: - Parameter menu +
master setpoint as correction or adjustment Technology + Syn-
2453 value depending on the function. Indices: -
chronism
Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Table 5-25: Technology Synchronism (Master Setpoint Correction)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U454 Speed adjustment of the master setpoint cor- Init: 1 Menus:

SpeedAdj rection [%] The rate of correction can be Unit: - Parameter menu +
MastV matched on a per cent basis to the maximum Technology + Syn-
correction speed. Indices: -
2454 chronism
Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U455* Master setpoint displacement correction param- index1: 0,00 Menus:

Offs Corr eter: Min: 0,00 Parameter menu
Param • Index 1: Max. acceleration of the ramp in Max: Upread/free access
2455 1000 LU/s^2 with two decimal places.
20000000,00 Changeable in:
• Index 2: Max. rate of correction in 1000
LU/min with two decimal places. Adjust- Unit: - Drive setting
able via U454 [%] Indices: 4 Ready
• Index 3: Rated speed master setpoint 1 Type: I4
in 1000 LU/min with two decimal places.
• Index 4: Rated speed master setpoint 2
in 1000 LU/min with two decimal places.
U456* Axis cycle lengths of the master setpoint correc- index1: 4096 Menus:
MastV Corr tion Min: 0 Parameter menu +
ACL • Index 1: Axis cycle length Master Set- Max: Technology + Syn-
2456 point 1 [LU] chronism
2147483647
• Index 2: Axis cycle length Master Set- Upread/free access
point 2 [LU] Unit: -
Changeable in:
• Index 3: Axis cycle length Master Set- Indices: 3
Drive setting
point output KK830 [LU] Type: I4
U457* Gear factor adjustment MasterSetpoint2 index1: 1 Menus:

Factor MastV 2 • Index1: Numerator Min: -32767 Parameter menu +
2457 • Index2: Denominator (only positive val- Max: 32767 Technology + Syn-
ues not equal to zero) chronism
Unit: -
• Index3: Numerator gear 2 Upread/free access
Indices: 4
• Index4: Denominator gear 2 (only posi- Changeable in:
tive values not equal to zero) Type: I2
Drive setting.
Ready
Table 5-25: Technology Synchronism (Master Setpoint Correction) (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U458* Function selection of the master value correc- Init: 0 Menus:

FuncSelec tion Unit: - Parameter menu +
MastV ============================= Indices: - Technology + Syn-
2458 chronism
• 0 = master value correction Type: L2
• 1 = master value adjustment Upread/free access
Master value correction: Changeable in:
Setpoint jumps caused by referencing on the fly Drive setting.
are evened out by the compensatory motion. Ready
Master value adjustment:
A relative displacement can be injected onto the
setpoint similarly to the displacement angle
adjustment procedure during synchronizing.
The function is triggered by U452.1.
n459 Display parameter of the table position of: Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Synch TabPos • Index 1: (K824) Table position on the x- Unit: - Parameter menu +
2459 axis Indices: 2 Technology + Syn-
• Index 2: (K825) Table position on the y- chronism
Type: I4
axis Upread/free access
U460* Injectable additive displacement distance at index1: 0 Menus:

Src.AddDispl input of synchronous operation block [FD834.1] Unit: - Parameter menu +
M • Index 1: Displacement distance Indices: 2 Technology + Syn-
2460 • Index 2: Displacement speed chronism
Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U461* Injectable additive displacement distance at index1: 0 Menus:

Src AddDispl S output of synchronous operation block Unit: - Parameter menu +
[FD836.2] Technology + Syn-
2461 Indices: 2
• Index 1: Displacement distance chronism
Type: L2,K,K
• Index 2: Displacement speed Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U462* Index 1 index1: 0 Menus:

Sync Window Internal window [F1] Min: 0 Parameter menu +
2462 Index 2 Max: Technology + Syn-
chronism
External window [F2] 2147483647
Fixed settings
F1 < synchronizing difference < F2: Unit: -
Upread/free access
If the synchronizing difference lies within the Indices: 2
external window, synchronizing is effected in Changeable in:
Type: O4
the shortest way. Drive setting
Synchronizing difference > F2: Ready
If the synchronizing difference lies outside the
outer window, synchronizing is effected accord-
ing to the selected mode in a certain direction.
Synchronizing difference < F1:
If the synchronizing difference lies within the
inner window, no synchronizing movement
takes place, synchronous message is effected
immediately (B811) and the established syn-
chronizing difference is calculated with the dis-
placement. At window size 0, the internal
window is deselected (only external window still
active).
U463 Index 1: index1: 1 Menus:

Q.Gl.RLEnable Binector source for release speed positive Unit: - Parameter menu +
2463 Index 2: Indices: 2 Technology + Syn-
chronism
Binector source for release speed negative Type: L2,B
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U464* Index 1: index1: 1 Menus:

Q.Gl.EnableSe Binector source for release displacement angle Unit: - Parameter menu +
t setting Indices: 2 Technology + Syn-
2464 Index 2: chronism
Type: L2,B
Binector source for adding remaining distance Upread/free access
to current displacement Changeable in:
Drive setting
n465 Show current positioning speed in percent Dec.Plc.: 3 Menus:

DispSpeed referred to U697.2 Unit:% Parameter menu +
2465 Indices: - Technology + Syn-
chronism
Type: I4
Upread/free access

"Uncontrolled Copy"
n466 Visualization parameter for offset angle setting Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Displ_Act_Resi • Index 1: Remaining offset path (KK827) Unit: - Parameter menu +
d • Index 2: Current offset (KK812) Indices: 2 Technology + Syn-
2466 chronism
Type: O4
Upread/free access
U467* Parameter for position correction index1: 0,00 Menus:

PosCorrection • Index 1: Correction speed [1000LU/min] Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
2467 • Index 2: Acceleration [1000LU/sec^2] Max: Technology + Syn-
chronism
20000000,00
Upread/free access
Unit: -
Changeable in:
Indices: 2
Drive setting
Type: O4
Ready
U468* Speed adjustment in percent for U467.1 Init: 1 Menus:

PosCorrVFac- Unit: - Parameter menu +
tor Indices: - Technology + Syn-
2468 chronism
Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U469* Connector inputs of the 2nd single ramp gener- index1: 0 Menus:
Q.EHlEncoder ator (32Bit) Unit: - Parameter menu +
2 LU • Index 1: Source for 16 bit value Indices: 3 Free blocks
2469 • Index 2: Source for 32 bit value Type: L2,K,K Upread/free access
• Index 3: Source for setting value Changeable in:
Drive setting
U470* Binector sources of the 2nd single ramp genera- index1: 0 Menus:
Q.EHlEncoder tor (32Bit) Unit: - Parameter menu +
2S • Index 1: Selection DeltaLU Indices: 5 Free blocks
2470 • Index 2: MOP enable
• Index 3: MOP + Changeable in:
• Index 4: MOP -
Drive setting
• Index 5: Set output
U471* Parameter Delta LU for 2nd single ramp function index1: 0 Menus:
EHlEncod2 generator (32Bit) Min: 0 Parameter menu +
DeltaL • Index 1: Delta LU1 Max: Free blocks
2471 • Index 2: Delta LU2 2147483647 Upread/free access
Type: O4 Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U472* Parameter input LU for 2nd single ramp genera- index1: Menus:
EHlEncoder2 tor (32Bit) 2147483647 Parameter menu +
LU • Index 1: Upper limit Min: - Free blocks
2472 • Index 2: Lower limit 2147483647 Upread/free access
• Index 3: Fixed setpoint setting value Changeable in:
Max:
2147483647 Drive setting
Unit: - Ready
Indices: 3
Type: I4
U473 Window for actual value control (table). Permits Init: 0 Menus:
Actval.Wndow an overshoot of the master setpoint into the Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Tab negative range during actual value control. Technology + Syn-
Valid for cam mode: stop at end of table. Max:
2473 chronism
2147483647
Upread/free access
Unit: -
Changeable in:
Indices: -
Drive setting
Type: I4
Ready
U475* Configuration of the engaging/disengaging Init: 0 Menus:

Conf Eng/Dis- action Unit: - Parameter menu +
eng Standard configuration - value 0: Indices: - Technology + Syn-
2475 The position at which the constant travel phase chronism
Type: L2
of the engaging action is finished can be Upread/free access
obtained from the engaging position and the Changeable in:
engaging/disengaging length. The disengaging
position is not taken into account. Drive setting
Special configuration - value 1:
The position at which the constant travel phase
of the engaging action is finished is only deter-
mined by the disengaging position. The engag-
ing/disengaging length is not taken into
account, but it must be set greater than the
desired total length of the acceleration/deceler-
ation ramp.
U476 Shift division for weakening the signal ampli- index1: 0 Menus:
PRBS Shiftdiv. tude before summation Min: 0 Parameter menu
2476 • Index 1: channel 1 Max: 10 Upread/free access
• Index 2: channel 2 Unit: - Changeable in:
Type: O2

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U477* Function parameter for amplitude input for the Init: 1,00 Menus:
PRBS Ampl. white noise produced by the noise generator. Min: 0,00 Parameter menu
Type: O2 Ready
U478* Number of noise cycles Init: 20 Menus:

PRBS cycles Min: 0 Parameter menu
2478 Max: 200 Upread/free access
Type: O2 Ready
n479 Monitoring parameter for the number of noise Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

PRBS Cycles generator cycles still to be processed Unit: - Parameter menu
CntD Indices: - Upread/free access

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.6.18 Trace
U480* BICO parameter for selecting the connectors to index1: 0 Menus:

SrcTraceInput be recorded by the trace function. Unit: - Parameter menu +
2480 Indices: Indices: 8 Diagnostics +
Index = channel number Trace
Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
U481* Function parameter for entering the word length index1: 0 Menus:
Trace Double- of the connector indicated in U2480 to be Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Word recorded by the trace function. Diagnostics +
Max: 1
2481 It is only possible to change the parameter if Trace
the trace function is not active (U488 = 0). If Unit: -
Upread/free access
the parameter is changed, an output of previ- Indices: 8
ously recorded values for concerned channels is Changeable in:
Type: O2
no longer possible. Drive setting
Parameter values: Ready
• 0 = Word (16 bit)
• 1 = Double word (32 bit)
Indices:
Index = channel number
U482* Function parameter for entering the sampling index1: 1 Menus:

TraceSample- time with which the trace values are to be Min: 1 Parameter menu +
Time recorded in integral multiples of the basic sam- Diagnostics +
pling time of the trace function. Max: 200
2482 Trace
Indices: Unit: -
Upread/free access
Index = channel number Indices: 8
Changeable in:
Type: O2
Drive setting
Ready
U483* BICO parameter for selecting the connector to index1: 0 Menus:

SrcTriggerIn- be used by the trace function as a trigger Unit: - Parameter menu +
put Indices: Indices: 8 Diagnostics +
2483 Index = channel number Trace
Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
Table 5-26: Trace

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U484 Function parameter for entering the trigger index1: 0 Menus:

TriggerThresh threshold. The parameter value has to be Min: - Parameter menu +
entered in the format of a double-word connec- Diagnostics +
2484 tor. If bit trigger (U485 <> 16) is set, only the 2147483647
Trace
parameter values 0 and 1 are permissible. Max:
Upread/free access
Indices: 2147483647
Changeable in:
Index = channel number Unit: -
Drive setting
Indices: 8
Ready
Type: I4
U485* Function parameter for entering the position of index1: 16 Menus:

TriggerBitNo. the bit to be triggered (in the case of bit trig- Min: 0 Parameter menu +
ger). A bit trigger can only be set if the trigger Diagnostics +
2485 threshold (U484) has the values 0 or 1. If a bit Max: 16
Trace
trigger is set, the trigger condition (U486) is Unit: -
automatically adjusted to 1 (trigger if trigger Upread/free access
Indices: 8
input = trigger threshold). Changeable in:
Type: O2
Parameter values: Drive setting
• 0 to 15: Position of the bit (bit trigger) Ready
• 16: No bit trigger
Indices:
U486* Function parameter for entering the trigger con- index1: 0 Menus:
TriggerCondi- dition. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
tion If a bit trigger (U485) is set, only parameter Max: 6 Diagnostics +
2486 value 1 is permissible. If parameter values 3, 5 Trace
and 6 are set, parameters U483, U484 are not Unit: -
Upread/free access
significant. In the case of parameter values 5 Indices: 8
and 6, parameter U489 is used for the trigger Changeable in:
Type: O2
condition. Drive setting
Parameter value Ready
• 0 = Trigger if trigger input < trigger
threshold
• 1 = Trigger if trigger input = trigger
threshold
• 2 = Trigger if trigger input > trigger
threshold
• 3 = Trigger if fault
• 4 = Trigger if trigger input <> trigger
threshold
• 5 = Trigger if binector trigger input = 1
• 6 = Trigger if binector trigger input = 0
Indices:
Table 5-26: Trace (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U487* Function parameter for entering the size of the index1: 0 Menus:
PreTrigger pretrigger. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
2487 Parameter value: Max: 100 Diagnostics +
Relation of the number of data recorded before Trace
Unit:%
the trigger event to the total number as a per- Upread/free access
centage. Example: 40% means that 40% of the Indices: 8
Changeable in:
data in the trace buffer were recorded before Type: O2
the trigger event and 60% after the trigger Drive setting
event. Drive setting
Indices: Ready
U488* Function/visualization parameter of the trace index1: 0 Menus:

TraceSta- status. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
tusStart The trace consists of a maximum of 8 channels Max: 2 Diagnostics +
2488 corresponding to Indices 1 to 8.The trace mem- Trace
ory is dynamically distributed according to the Unit: -
Upread/free access
number of channels activated. Indices: 8
Changeable in:
Only parameter values 0 and 1 can be set. Type: O2
Drive setting
If the parameter value is set from 0 to 1, all
recorded data of all channels are lost (because Ready
the whole trace memory is erased) and the
trace is activated for this channel. If the trigger
condition is satisfied and another channel is in
the process of recording (parameter value 2),
no further channel can be activated (parameter
value 1).
Parameter values:
• 0 = Trace not active/recording finished
• 1 = Trace active/trace is waiting for trig-
ger event
• 2 = Trace is recording
Indices:
U489* BICO parameter for selection of trace as trigger index1: 0 Menus:

SrcBTriggerIn- to binectors used. Unit: - Parameter menu +
put Indices: Indices: 8 Diagnostics +
2489 Index = channel number Trace
Type: L2,B
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U490 Function parameter for entering the number of index1: 0 Menus:

Trace D-Bloc- the trace data block for each trace channel. The Min: 0 Parameter menu +
kNo. trace data block can be read out via visualiza- Diagnostics +
tion parameters n491 to n498. Max: 255
2490 Trace
Parameter value: Unit: -
Upread/free access
• 0 - 254: Output of corresponding data Indices: 8
Changeable in:
block Type: O2
Drive setting
• 255: Output of trigger index
Indices: Ready
n491 Visualization parameter for displaying a data Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

TraceData Ch1 block of the trace data of channel 1. The block Unit: - Parameter menu +
number of the trace data is set in parameter Diagnostics +
2491 U490.01. If all values of the array are requested Indices: 100
Trace
with one task via an automation interface Type: O2
(SCom1, SCom2, SCP, DPR), the parameter Upread/free access
U490.01 is automatically increased by 1 when
output in order to enable optimum read-out of
the trace data.
Indices:
1: Block ID
High byte: Data block number (U490)
Low byte: Number of trace data in data block
2-.100: Trace data
When recording double-word connectors first
the high word appears and then the low word.
n492 Description see n491 Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

TraceData Ch2 Unit: - Parameter menu +
Trace
Type: O2
Upread/free access

Trace
Type: O2
Upread/free access

Trace
Type: O2
Upread/free access

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Trace
Type: O2
Upread/free access

Trace
Type: O2
Upread/free access

Trace
Type: O2
Upread/free access

Trace
Type: O2
Upread/free access

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.6.19 Technology Positioning
n500 If an error is detected during transfer of the machine data, Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
Diag.Mach- the lower-value 3 decimal places of the error number are Unit: - Parameter
Data displayed at this parameter. menu + Tech-
Indices: -
2500 Error number = 2000 + value (n500) nology + Posi-
Type: O2 tioning
The explanations relating to the error numbers can be
found in the Technology Manual F01 in Section 4, Annex A2 Upread/free
“Error Messages of the Technology for Task Management”. access
The Technology Manual can be found on the CD enclosed
with the converter (under\GMC\GMCDokumentation\
English\P7MC17CA.pdf).
If the data is transferred without any error, the value zero
is displayed.
U501* The number of the machine data corresponds to the index index1: 1 Menus:
Mach Data number, e.g. MD30 = U501.30. Activation of machine data Min: - Parameter
is effected in U502 and when the electronic power supply is menu + Tech-
2501 energized. 2147483647
nology + Posi-
MD1: Position encoder type /axis type Max: tioning
•0=Axis does not exist 2147483647 Upread/free
•1=Axis with incremental position encoder Unit: - access
•2=Axis with absolute position encoder Indices: 50 Changeable
•3=Roll feeding in:
Type: I4
MD2: Axis assignment Drive setting
• 1=X-axis 2=Y-axis Ready
• 3=Z-axis 4=A-axis
• 5=B-axis 6=C-axis
MD3: Reference point coordinates
• -999 999.999... 999 999.999 [LU]
MD4: Reference point shift
• -999 999.999... 999 999.999 [LU]
MD5: Home position direction of approach
• 1=Home position to the right of the proximity switch
• 2=Home position to the left of the proximity switch
• 3=Set home position
MD6: Home position reducing speed
• 1... 1000 [1000*LU/min]
MD7: Home position starting speed
• 1... 1000 000 [1000*LU/min]
MD8: 0= Homing with Bero and zero mark
• 1= Homing with Bero only
• 2= Homing with zero mark only
MD9: Reserved
MD10: Position encoder adjustment
• -999 999 999... 999 999 999 [LU]
Table 5-27: Technology Positioning

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U501* MD11: Linear/rotary axis

(Continued) • 0 = linear axis
• Variable 0: Rotary axis length
MD12: Limit switch negative
• -999 999 999... 999 999 999 [LU]
MD13: Limit switch positive
• -999 999 999... 999 999 999 [LU]
MD14: Following error monitoring, standstill
• 1... 99 999 [LU]
MD15: Following error monitoring: traveling
• 1... 999 999 999 [LU]
MD16: Position reached, time monitoring
• 10... 999 999 [ms]
MD17: Position reached, exact hold window
• 1... 99 999 [LU]
MD18: Acceleration
• 1... 99 999 [1000*ILU/s^2]
MD19: Deceleration
• valid for BA setup, MDI,
• automatic, single set and slave
• 1... 99 999 [1000*ILU/s^2]
MD20: Deceleration during collision
• 1... 99 999 [1000*LU/s^2]
MD21: Jerk limiting positive for roll feeding
• 0=none, 1... 999 999 [1000*LU/s^3]
MD22: Reserved
MD23: Maximum traversing speed
• 1... 1 000 000 [1000*LU/min]
MD24: M-function type of output
•
1= During positioning, time-controlled
•
2= During positioning, acknowledgement-controlled
•
3= Before positioning, time-controlled
•
4= Before positioning, acknowledgement-controlled
•
5= After positioning, time-controlled
•
6= After positioning, acknowledgement-controlled
MD25: M-function output time
• 1... 99 999 [ms]
MD26: Time override
• 0=Time override active
• 1=Time override inactive
MD27: Reserved
MD28: Reserved
Table 5-27: Technology Positioning (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U501* MD29: Acceleration breakpoint, speed for roll feeding

(Continued) • 0=inactive, 1... 1 000 000[LU/min]
MD30: Deceleration breakpoint, speed for roll feed-
ing
• 0=inactive, 1... 1 000 000[1000*LU/min]
MD31: Acceleration breakpoint, acceleration for roll
feeding
• 0=inactive, 1... 99 999[1000*PFSF/min]
• PFSF = position-feedback scaling factor
MD32: Deceleration breakpoint, deceleration for roll
feeding
• 0=inactive, 1... 99 999[1000*PFSF/min]
• PFSF = position-feedback scaling factor
MD33: Constant traversing time for roll feeding
• 1... 99 999[ms]
MD34: Pre-position reached - derivative time for roll
feeding
• 1... 99 999[ms]
MD35: Pre-position reached - output time
• 1... 99 999[ms]
MD36: Acceleration overshoot during roll feeding
• 0... 100[%]
MD37: Performance after abort for roll feeding
• 0=Standard performance
• 1=Approach of the last target position without eval-
uation of the direction of movement
• 2=Approach of the last target position with evalua-
tion of the direction of movement
MD38: Dead travel on reversing compensation
• 0... 9 999[LU]
MD39: Dead travel on reversing compensation pref-
erable position (only for absolute position encoder)
• 1=Preferable position positive (during first positive
traversing movement, no dead travel on reversing
compensation is calculated)
• 2=Preferable position negative (during first negative
traversing movement, no dead travel on reversing
compensation is calculated)
MD40: Dead travel on reversing compensation -
speed limitation
• 0 (inactive)... 999(1000*LU/min]
MD41: Acceleration time operating mode “Control
and homing procedure”
• 0... 99 999[ms]
MD42: Deceleration time operating mode “Control
and homing and synchronizing procedure”
• 0... 99 999[ms]

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U501* MD43: Deceleration time during errors e.g. if follow-

(Continued) ing error > MD15
• 0... 99 999[ms]
MD44: External record change - setting
• 0=Alarm at end of positioning record
• 1=no alarm at end of positioning record
MD45: Digital inputs - function 1
•
0=without function
•
1=Start OR linked
•
2=Start AND linked
•
3=Position-feedback setting on the fly
•
4=External record change
•
5=Flying measurement
•
6=Collision
•
7=Proximity switch for homing procedure
•
9=Read-in enable, externally program-dependent
MD46: Digital inputs - function 2
•
0=without function
•
1=Inhibit actual-value
•
2=External read-in enable
•
3=External read-in enable AND linked
MD47: Digital outputs - function 1
•
0=without function
•
1=Destination reached and stationary (DRS)
•
2=Axis travels forwards (FWD)
•
3=Axis travels backwards (BWD)
•
4=M-change of M97
•
5=M-change of M98
•
6=Start enable
MD48: Digital outputs - function 2
• 0=without function
• 1=Constant travel
• 2=Acceleration
• 3=Deceleration
• 4=Acceleration or deceleration
• 5=Pre-position reached
MD49: Influence of speed pre-control 0... 150 [%]
The internally calculated speed setpoint is multiplied
by this factor before it is output at K312.
MD50: Influence of acceleration pre-control. The
internally calculated acceleration pre-control is
divided by this value before it is output at the con-
nector KK313 as a percentage quantity.
• 0= Acceleration pre-control disabled
• 1... 99 999 [1000*LU/s^2]

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U502* The machine data are adopted by parameter U501 with an Init: 0 Menus:
MD Activa- edge of 1 to 2 or after board run-up. After this, the param- Min: 0 Parameter
tion eter value is automatically reset to 0, or to 1 if the machine menu + Tech-
data are incorrect. If the machine data are incorrect, Max: 2
2502 nology + Posi-
acceptance of the data is refused and an alarm message is Unit: - tioning
tripped in n500.
• U502=0: Machine data O.K. Type: O2 access
• U502=1: Machine data were changed and net yet Changeable
transferred or the check revealed an error (error in:
status in n500)
• U502=2: Command for checking and transferring Drive setting
machine data; if the machine data are o.k. the value Ready
“0” is automatically entered in U502 as acknowl-
edgement.
If the machine data are not o.k. U502 automatically jumps
back to the value “1”
U503* With the aid of simulation, positioning can also be operated Init: 2 Menus:
Simulation- without the need for the drive to rotate. In this way, the Min: 1 Parameter
Oper interaction of the control signals and checkback signals can menu
be tested. Max: 2
2503 Unit: - Upread/free
access
Indices: -
Changeable
Type: O2 in:
Drive setting
Ready
U504* Function data: 1 to 10 index1: 0 Menus:

Function • FD 1: reserved Min: - Parameter
Param • FD 2: Window 1 (internal window) 2147483647 menu + Tech-
2504 nology + Posi-
• FD 3: Window 2 (external window) Max: tioning
• FD 4: Correction mode, setting reference point on
2147483647
the fly Upread/free
Unit: - access
• 0: Correction along shortest path
• 1: Positive correction only Indices: 10 Changeable
in:
• 2: Negative correction only Type: I4
• FD 5: reserved Drive setting
• FD 6: Limit value monitoring, encoder switch over Ready
• FD 7: reserved
• FD 8: reserved
• FD 9: reserved
• FD 10: reserved

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U505* The parameter determines the smoothing time constant for Init: 0 Menus:
Rounding- positioning. With increasing smoothness, the speed charac- Min: 0 Parameter
Time teristic is rounded off which thus protects the mechanical menu + Tech-
system. Max: 10000
2505 nology + Posi-
With the binary signal which can be assigned via parameter Unit: ms tioning
U512 (V1.50 and higher), rounding can be activated for the Indices: - Upread/free
set-up operating mode. access
Type: O2
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready
U507* Loop number for roll feeding in the MDI operating mode. Init: 0 Menus:
RollShift- With U507 it is possible to select how many roll feeding Min: 0 Parameter
Loop# movements are to be carried out after setting the start Max: menu + Tech-
2507 command [STA]. These roll feeding movements start each nology + Posi-
time with a read-in enable [RIE]. 999999999 tioning
A 0 ==>1 edge of the start command [STA] sets the loop Unit: - Upread/free
counter n540.36 to the value parameterized in U507. After Indices: - access
every feeding movement, the loop counter n540.36 is dec- Changeable
Type: O4
remented. The value in U507 is not decremented; it in:
remains as a setting value for the loop counter. U507=0:
The loop counter is not active. The start command (0 => 1 Drive setting
edge of [STA]) only has to be given once. Ready
Then any given number of feeding movements can be car-
ried out which are each started with a read-in enable [RIE].
The checkback signal “Function terminated” [FUT] is not
output. The end of a feeding movement is indicated in each
case by the bit “Destination reached and stationary” [DRS].
U507=1: The loop counter is active. Its setting value is 1.
After the start command (0 => 1 edge of [STA], the read-
in enable [RIE] is only interrogated once. [RIE] starts the
feeding movement.
The completion of the movement is signalled by the check-
back bits “Destination reached and stationary” [DRS] and
“Function terminated” [FUT]. When the start command
[STA] is reset, [FUT] also returns to “0”. A new start com-
mand is required for starting a new feeding movement.
U501>1: The loop counter is active. After the start com-
mand (0 ==> 1 edge of [STA], the number of feeding
movements parameterized in U507 is carried out, each
started by a read-in enable [RIE]. The checkback bit “Func-
tion terminated” [FUT] is not set until the loop counter has
been executed. When the start command [STA] is reset,
[FUT] also returns to “0”.
Such a succession of feeding movements can be started
again by a 0==>1 edge of the start command [STA]. The
remaining number of loops to be executed in each case can
be visualized at parameter n540.36.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U509* Parameter for selecting the binector from which Init: 0 Menus:
MDI Set changeover of the position for MDI is to be read in. If the Unit: - Parameter
Connect binector is 0, the position from the MDI record is used. If menu
the bit is 1, the position from the connector is used which is Indices: -
2509 selected in U534. Type: L2,B Upread/free
access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
U510* In Index 1, the set-up speed, stage 1 (control bit fast/slow index1: Menus:
FixStageSet- [F_S]=0), and in index 2 the set-up speed, stage 2 (control 1000,00 Parameter
ting bit fast/slow [F_S]=1) is displayed. menu
Min: 0,00
2510 The speed is in unit [1000*LU/min] Upread/free
Max:
Example: access
500000,00
normalization to 1 µm: Enter in [mm/min] Changeable
Unit: mm/ in:
min
Drive setting
Indices: 2
Ready
Type: O4
U511* The parameter defines the speed for the “Control and posi- index1: Menus:
Setp Control tioning” operating mode. The value is indicated in% of 10,00 Parameter
MD23. Min: 0,00 menu + Tech-
2511
• Index 1: Fixed stage 1 “Slow” (for control bit Max: 100,00 nology + Posi-
[F_S]=0) tioning
Unit:%
• Index 2: Fixed stage 2 “Fast” (bei Steuerbit Upread/free
[F_S]=1) Indices: 2 access
Type: O2 Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready
U512* This binary signal can be used for activating the rounding Init: 0 Menus:
Q.Rounding- time constant U505 in setup mode. Unit: - Parameter
Setup • 0: Inactive Indices: - menu
2512 • 1: Active Type: L2,B Upread/free
access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U521* Zero shifts can be activated in “Automatic” mode by pro- index1: Menus:
Zero Shift gramming G54 to 59 in traversing programs. 0,000 Parameter
2521 Min: - menu
999999,999 Upread/free
Max: access
999999,999 Changeable
in:
Unit: mm
Drive setting
Indices: 6
Ready
Type: I4
U522* The tool corrections “Length” and “Wear” can be selected/ index1: Menus:
Tool Corr’n deselected in Automatic mode by programming in a tra- 0,000 Parameter
versing program. A D-number and direction is pro- Min: - menu
2522 grammed.
999999,999 Upread/free
Max: access
999999,999 Changeable
in:
Unit: mm
Drive setting
Indices: 40
Ready
Type: I4
U525* Input of automatic records. index1: 0 Menus:

Set Input Min: 0 Parameter
2525 NOTICE Max: menu
U525... U527 used only for test purposes and 4294967295 Upread/free
for access by the “Menu prompted start up”. access
Unit: -
Changeable
Indices: 6 in:
! CAUTION
The input of automatic records via param-
Ready
eters U525... U527 is intended for test
purposes only and must only be carried
out by MinePro Service Technicians.
Use the record input via U571... U591, if you want to enter
automatic records via a parameter dialog.
The program or record is always entered by means of the
same record number. Sorting is carried out in the read/
write routines.
See parameter descriptions P2526 and P2527.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U526* This parameter enables a traversing data set to be entered index1: 0 Menus:
AutoSetInp for the “Automatic” operating mode. Min: - Parameter
2526 The parameter indices have the following significance here: 2147483647 menu + Tech-
nology + Posi-
• Index 1: Program number (1... 20) Max: tioning
• Index 2: Set number (1... 200)
2147483647 Upread/free
• Index 3: continuation (0... 19)
Unit: - access
• Index 4: 1st G-function
Indices: 15 Changeable
• Index 5: 2nd G-function
in:
• Index 6: 3rd G-function Type: I4
Drive setting
• Index 7: 4th G-function
• Index 8: Position setpoint (+/- 999 999 999) Ready
• Index 9: Traversing speed (0... MD Vmax)
• Index 10: 1. M-number (0... 255)
• Index 11: 2. M-number (0... 255)
• Index 12: 3. M-number (0... 255)
• Index 13: D-number (0... 20)
• Index 14: UP-number (1... 20)
• Index 15: Loop number (1... 65535)
All index values are zero in the presetting. Only the rele-
vant data have to be entered.
In connection with parameter U527, the following functions
can be executed:
• U527=1: Adoption of traversing data set from U526.
After adoption, all indices of U526 are deleted. With
U527=2 sets, programs and the entire program
memory can be deleted.
Deleting a traversing set:
U526.01=Program number, U526.02=set number, U527=2
Deleting a traversing program:
U526.01=program number, U526.02=255, U527=2
Deleting the entire program memory:
U526.01=255, U526.02=255, U527=2
• U527=3: Teach in:
The current position is stored in the set which is selected
with U526 and U527.
• U527=4: Acknowledgement of the positioning-spe-
cific fault messages.
See parameter descriptions of P2525, P2527.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U527* With value 1, the automatic set is adopted from parameter Init: 0 Menus:
AutoSetA- U526 is adopted. Min: 0 Parameter
dopt With parameter value = 2, this set is deleted. Max: 9 menu + Tech-
2527 With defined values, the following functions can also be nology + Posi-
Unit: - tioning
tripped:
• 1. Delete set list
Type: O2 access
• 2. Delete program
Changeable
• 3. Delete set.
in:
See parameter descriptions P2525 and P2526.
Drive setting
Ready
U528* Selection of the encoder for position control in the case of Init: 0 Menus:
Q.Encoder the encoder switch over roll feed function: Unit: - Parameter
Select • 0: Position control with external encoder Indices: - menu
2528 • 1: Position control with motor encoder Type: L2,B Upread/free
access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
U529* Parameter defines the source for the status bit “Position Init: 70 Menus:
Src PosActV actual value valid”. If the status bit is 1, the positioning Unit: - Parameter
ok function receives a signal that valid measured values have menu + Tech-
been supplied by the position sensing. Indices: -
2529 nology + Posi-
Type: L2,B tioning
Upread/free
access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
U530* Parameter which selects the source for the control signals Init: 860 Menus:
Src CtrlSig- of positioning. The control signals consist of a 32-bit dou- Unit: - Parameter
nals ble-word. menu + Tech-
Indices: -
2530 nology + Syn-
Type: L2,K,K chronism +
Positioning
Upread/free
access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U531* Parameter for selecting the connector from which the Init: 0 Menus:
Src GFunc- Gfunction for the MDI record 0 is to be read in. Unit: - Parameter
MDI For specifying the traversing data set via connectors, the Indices: - menu + Tech-
2531 same setting rules apply as in the case of traversing data nology + Posi-
sets via parameter U550 ff, with the exception that the G Type: L2,K tioning
functions are coded hexadecimal instead of decimally (e.g. Upread/free
absolute traversing with 100% acceleration access
• by U531 selected connector = 5A1E (hex) Changeable
• parameter U 550.2...U59.2= 9030 (dec). in:
Drive setting
U532* Parameter for selecting the connector from which the posi- Init: 0 Menus:
Src Position tion (F-function) for the MDI record 0 is to be read in. Unit: - Parameter
sets via parameter U550 ff. Type: L2,K,K tioning
Upread/free
access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
U533* Parameter for selecting the double connector from which Init: 0 Menus:
Src Speed the speed for the MDI record 0 is to be read in. Unit: - Parameter
sets via parameter U550 ff. Type: L2,K,K tioning
Upread/free
access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
U534* Parameter for selecting the double connector from which Init: 0 Menus:
Src Pos- the variable position for the MDI record is to be read in. Unit: - Parameter
VarMDI Changeover to the variable position is made via parameter Indices: - menu + Tech-
2534 U509. nology + Posi-
Type: L2,K,K tioning
Upread/free
access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U535* Parameter for selecting the connector from which the posi- index1: 0 Menus:
Src PosActV tion actual-value is to be read in. Unit: - Parameter
2535 • Index 1: Position actual-value from a motor encoder Indices: 2 menu + Tech-
(KK120) nology + Syn-
Type: L2,K,K chronism +
• Index 2: Position actual-value from a machine
encoder (KK125). Positioning
Upread/free
access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
U536* Parameter for selecting the binector from which the fast index1: 0 Menus:
SrcQuickInp digital input signals E1... E6 for positioning are to be read. Unit: - Parameter
6 fast signals can be defined. The function of these fast sig- menu
2536 nals is determined via MD45 (U501.45) and MD46 Indices: 6
(U501.46). Type: L2,B Upread/free
access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
U537* The parameter defines the source for the technological index1: 0 Menus:
Src TechIn- inputs for positioning. Checkback signals from the basic Unit: - Parameter
puts.P functions are soft wired to these inputs. The following soft menu
wiring is expected Indices: 3
2537 Type: L2,B Upread/free
• Index 01: Only used for test purposes. access
• Index 02: Checkback - “Homing position detected” Changeable
(Motor encoder: B210) (external machine encoder: in:
B215)
• Index 03: Only used for test purposes. Drive setting
U538* The parameter defines the source for the checkback of Init: 212 Menus:
SrcMVal position sensing that a valid position measured value is Unit: - Parameter
Valid available. menu
Indices: -
2538 The binector is set by position sensing if, e.g., a printing Upread/free
index is detected. The following sources are available: Type: L2,B
access
1. Position sensing with motor encoder: B212 Changeable
2. Position sensing with external machine encoder: B217 in:
Drive setting
U539* Parameter defines the source for the position measured Init: 0 Menus:
Src Mvalue value. The measured value is provided by the position Unit: - Parameter
sensing, e.g. menu
2539 Indices: -
• KK122 from motor encoder in slot c Upread/free
Type: L2,K,K
• KK127 from external machine encoder access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
n540 The parameter is used for diagnosis of positioning. The Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
Diagnose- individual indices contain the following information: Unit: - Parameter
Dat.P General diagnostic information Indices: 40 menu + Tech-
2540 01: Position setpoint 1 - The position setpoint to be nology + Posi-
Type: I4 tioning
approached (final value incl. correction values) [817.6]
02: Position setpoint 2 (final value without correction val- Upread/free
ues) access
03: Position actual value 1 (value from position sensing)

[815.4]
04: Position actual value 2 (correction values taken out of
the calculation)
05: Following error [818.5]
06: Following error limit. The currently permissible max.
following error is displayed here, i.e. during traversing
MD15 and in standstill
MD14
07: Following error
The following error is displayed here which occurs upon
response of the following error monitoring (A141, A142),
i.e. the sign-correct difference between position setpoint
and actual value
08: Remaining traversing distance
09: Position measured value from measured value memory
of position sensing
[815.4]
10: Speed
11: Current override [809.8]
12: Position setpoint for MDI (is only updated if the MDI
operating mode is active).
13: Number of selected MDI record [823.7]
14: Specified operating mode [MODE_IN]
15: Active (checked-back) operating mode [MODE_OUT]

"Uncontrolled Copy"
n540 Diagnostic information for automatic mode [826]

(Continued) 16: Program number level 0 (main program)
17: Record number level 0
18: Program number subprogram level 1
20: Remaining loop number level 1
21: Program number subprogram level 2
23: Remaining loop number level 2
24: Decoding error program
25: Decoding error record
Fault memory for positioning alarms A129...A255
The latest positioning alarm is in n540.26 [818]
26: Positioning fault memory 1
Various diagnostic information
34: M-function number 1 [811.4]
35: M-function number 2 [811.4]
36: Remaining loop number for roll feeding [830]
(Loop counter for roll feeding in MDI operating mode, set-
ting value: see U507)
37: Current acceleration pre-control value [817.5] (not yet
implemented in V1.2)
38: Current speed pre-control value [817.5] (from V1.4
onwards)
39 to 40: reserved
n541 The parameter shows the status of the control and check- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
CW SW Pos back signals of positioning. Unit: - Parameter
2541 • Index 1: Low word of the positioning control signals Indices: 4 menu + Tech-
[809.7] nology + Posi-
Type: V2 tioning
• Index 2: High word of the positioning control signals
[809.7] Upread/free
• Index 3: Low word of the positioning status word access
KK315 [811.7]
• Index 4: High word of the positioning status word
KK315 [811.7]

"Uncontrolled Copy"
n542 The parameter shows the status of the fast digital inputs Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
InpOutp Pos and outputs of positioning: Unit: - Parameter
2542 Index 1: Digital inputs E1... E6 for positioning [813.1] Indices: 2 menu + Tech-
Index2: Digital outputs A1... A6 for positioning [813.8] nology + Posi-
Type: V2 tioning
Upread/free
access
U545* The parameter represents the interface of the TripRite unit index1: 0 Menus:
OP Input for the operator control interface. Min: - Parameter
2545 2147483648 menu + Tech-
nology + Syn-
Max: chronism +
2147483647 Positioning
Unit: - Upread/free
access
Indices: 50
Changeable
Type: I4
in:
Drive setting
Ready
n546 The parameter is set by the software and must not be Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
OP Output altered manually. Unit: - Parameter
2546 The parameter represents the interface of the TripRite for Indices: 50 menu + Tech-
the operator control interface. nology + Syn-
Type: I4 chronism +
Positioning
Upread/free
access

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U550* Specification of the fixed MDI traversing data record No. index1: 9030 Menus:
MDI Set 1 1... 10 via parameters U550... 559. Min: - Parameter
2550 Specification of MDI traversing data record No. 1. 2147483647 menu + Tech-
This MDI record belongs to the 10 fixed positioning records nology + Posi-
Max: tioning +
stored as parameters which can be selected via the bits
8...11 of the positioning control word [809]. 2147483647 Setting up/
MDI
An MDI traversing data record is split up into 3 indices: Unit: -
Upread/free
Index 1: G-functions Indices: 3
access
The value consists of two G-functions: Type: I4
Changeable
1st G-function: positioning type in:
Value 90 - G90: Absolute measure (absolute positioning) Drive setting
G91: String measure (relative positioning) Ready
Value 91 - G91: incremental dimension
2nd G-function: Acceleration override
Weakening factor for the acceleration/deceleration values
specified in MD18 and MD19. This weakening factor can be
adjusted in 10% increments of 10% to 100%.
Value 30 - G30 = 100% Override
to
Example:
U511.1=9030
Positioning type = G90 = absolute measure
Acceleration override = G30 = 100%
Index 2: Position setpoint
The value is preset in the length unit LU which was defined
by the actual value weighting factor in position sensing.
(e.g. P169 and P170 for motor encoder)
Example:
• Position setpoint 123,5mm has to be set
• Length unit is LU=0.001mm
U550.2=123500
Index 3: Traversing speed
The traversing speed is specified in the unit [10*LU/min].
Example:
The speed 5000 mm/min has to be set
Length unit is 0.1 mm
U550.3=5000

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U551* Setting of MDI traversing data record 2, description see index1: 9030 Menus:
MDI Set 2 U550 Min: - Parameter
2551 2147483647 menu + Tech-
nology + Posi-
Max: tioning +
2147483647 Setting up/
MDI
Unit: -
Upread/free
Indices: 3
access
Type: I4
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready
MDI Set 3 U550. Min: - Parameter
2552 2147483647 menu + Tech-
nology + Posi-
Max: tioning +
MDI
Unit: -
Upread/free
Indices: 3
access
Type: I4
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready
U553* Setting of MDI traversing data record 4, description, see index1: 9030 Menus:
2553 2147483647 menu + Tech-
nology + Posi-
Max: tioning +
MDI
Unit: -
Upread/free
Indices: 3
access
Type: I4
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
2554 2147483647 menu + Tech-
nology + Posi-
Max: tioning +
MDI
Unit: -
Upread/free
Indices: 3
access
Type: I4
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready
2555 2147483647 menu + Tech-
nology + Posi-
Max: tioning +
MDI
Unit: -
Upread/free
Indices: 3
access
Type: I4
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready
2556 2147483647 menu + Tech-
nology + Posi-
Max: tioning +
MDI
Unit: -
Upread/free
Indices: 3
access
Type: I4
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
2557 2147483647 menu + Tech-
nology + Posi-
Max: tioning +
MDI
Unit: -
Upread/free
Indices: 3
access
Type: I4
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready
2558 2147483647 menu + Tech-
nology + Posi-
Max: tioning +
MDI
Unit: -
Upread/free
Indices: 3
access
Type: I4
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready
2559 2147483647 menu + Tech-
nology + Posi-
Max: tioning +
MDI
Unit: -
Upread/free
Indices: 3
access
Type: I4
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U571* Entering and editing of automatic traversing programs via Init: 0 Menus:
Program parameters U571... U591; Min: 0 Parameter
Number Proceed as follows to enter or edit an automatic record: Max: 65535 menu + Tech-
2571 nology + Posi-
Step 1: Enter program number. Unit: - tioning
Step 2: Enter record number. The selected record is now access
Type: O2
available in the editing buffer (RAM) to be
observed and changed via parameters Changeable
U574...U585. in:
Drive setting
Step 3: Via U574...U585 you can now look at the desired
Ready
record components and modify them.
Step 4: Select at U590 which program action you want to

carry out with the record in the editing buffer,
e.g. delete record, delete program, transfer
record from the editing buffer into the no-volatile
automatic program memory (EEPROM) or
Step 5: Carry out the error check at U591.

U571= Program number 1.... 21
Value 1... 20: Traversing program number
Value 21: Automatic individual record
Value 255: Delete program
See parameter description see U590
U572* Record number index1: 0 Menus:

Set Number Index 1: Mask out record yes/no Min: 0 Parameter
2572 Value 0: Do not mask out record (normal case) Max: 65535 menu + Tech-
nology + Posi-
Value 1: Mask out record (special case) Unit: - tioning
Index 2: Value 1...200: Record number (0... 200); the Indices: 2 Upread/free
quantity (but not the numbers) of the positioning records is Type: O2 access
limited to 50.
Changeable
Value 255: Delete program (description see U590) in:
When the program number and record number are Drive setting
entered, an existing record is transferred to parameters
U571 to U585 for editing. Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U573* Record continuation number Init: 0 Menus:

Set Cont No. 0: No record continuation Min: 0 Parameter
2573 1...19: Continuation number Max: 65535 menu + Tech-
nology + Posi-
The last record must always be concluded with continuation Unit: - tioning
number 0. Indices: - Upread/free
Type: O2 access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready
U574* Definition of the first G-function of the traversing data index1: 0 Menus:
G-Function 1 record: Min: 0 Parameter
2574 • Index 1: G-function 1 exists yes/no Max: 65535 menu + Tech-
• Value=0: G-function 1 does not exist nology + Posi-
Unit: - tioning
• Value=1: G-function 1 exists in Index 2
• Index 2: G-function 1
(e.g. value=90: G90 = Absolute positioning) Type: O2 access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready
U575* Definition of the second G-function of the traversing data index1: 0 Menus:
G-Function 2 record: Min: 0 Parameter
Unit: - tioning
• Value=1: G-function 2 exists in Index 2.
Type: O2 access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready
U576* Definition of the third G-function of the traversing data index1: 0 Menus:
G-Function 3 record Min: 0 Parameter
Unit: - tioning
Type: O2 access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U577* Definition of the fourth G-function of the traversing data index1: 0 Menus:
G-Function 4 record Min: 0 Parameter
Unit: - tioning
Type: O2 access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready
U578* Definition of the position setpoint or of the subprogram index1: 0 Menus:

Position number. Min: - Parameter
2578 • Index 1: Position or SP number exists yes/no 999999999 menu
• Value=0: no position or SP number exists
Max: Upread/free
• Value=1: Position setpoint in Index 2 exists access
999999999
• Value=2: Subprogram exists in Index 2 Changeable
• Index 2: Position setpoint in [LU] or subprogram Unit: - in:
number Indices: 2 Drive setting
Type: I4 Ready
U579* Definition of the traversing speed index1: 0 Menus:

Speed • Index 1: Traversing speed in Index 2 valid or exists Min: 0 Parameter
2579 yes/no Max: menu
• Value=0: Speed in Index 2 not valid
100000000 Upread/free
• Value=1: Speed in Index 2 valid access
Unit: -
• Index 2: Traversing speed (0... 100 000 000 Changeable
[100*LU/min]) see example under U550.03 Indices: 2 in:
Ready
U580* Definition of the first M-function of the traversing data index1: 0 Menus:
M-Function 1 record Min: 0 Parameter
2580 • Index 1: M-function 1 in Index 2 exists or is valid Max: 65535 menu + Tech-
yes/no nology + Posi-
Unit: - tioning
• Value=0: M-function 1 in Index 2 not valid
• Value=1: M-function in Index 2 valid Indices: 2 Upread/free
• Index 2: M-function 1 (0... 255) e.g. value 18= Type: O2 access
M18= endless loop Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U581* Definition of the second M-function of the traversing data index1: 0 Menus:
M-Function 2 record Min: 0 Parameter
2581 • Index 1: M-function 2 in Index 2 exists or is valid Max: 65535 menu + Tech-
yes/no nology + Posi-
Unit: - tioning
• Value=0: M-function 2 in Index 2 not valid
• Value=1: M-function 2 in Index 2 valid Indices: 2 Upread/free
• Index 2: M-function 2 (0... 255) Type: O2 access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready
U582* Definition of the third M-function index1: 0 Menus:

M-Function 3 • Index 1: M-function 3 in Index 2 exists or is valid Min: 0 Parameter
2582 yes/no Max: 65535 menu + Tech-
• Value=0: M-function 3 in Index 2 not valid nology + Posi-
Unit: - tioning
• Value=1: M-function 3 in Index 2 valid
• Index 2: M-function 3 (0... 255)
Type: O2 access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready
U583* Definition of the D number (tool correction memory) index1: 0 Menus:

D-Number • Index 1: D-number in Index 2 exists or is valid yes/ Min: 0 Parameter
2583 no Max: 65535 menu + Tech-
• Value=0: D-number in Index 2 not valid nology + Posi-
Unit: - tioning
• Value=1: D-number in Index 2 valid
• Index 2: D-number (tool memory) (0... 20)
The contents of the tool corrections (length and wear) Type: O2 access
assigned to the D-numbers are defined in U522. Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready
U584* Definition of the subprogram number index1: 0 Menus:

UP-Number • Index 1: SP number in Index 2 exists or is valid yes/ Min: 0 Parameter
2584 no Max: 65535 menu + Tech-
• Value=0: SP number in Index 2 not valid nology + Posi-
Unit: - tioning
• Value=1: SP number in Index 2 valid
• Index 2: SP number (1...20)
Type: O2 access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U585* Definition of the loop number index1: 0 Menus:

Loop Num- • Index 1: Loop number in Index 2 exists or is valid Min: 0 Parameter
ber yes/no Max: 65535 menu + Tech-
2585 • Value=0: Loop number in Index 2 not valid nology + Posi-
Unit: - tioning
• Value=1: Loop number in Index 2 valid
• Index 2: Loop number (0...65535)
Type: O2 access
Changeable
in:
Drive setting
Ready
U590* Carry out program action with the positioning record Init: 0 Menus:
AdoptSet entered in the editing buffer via U574...U585: Min: 0 Parameter
2590 • Value=0: Action terminated/ no action active Max: 65535 menu
• Value=1: Transfer record from editing buffer into Unit: - Upread/free
automatic program memory (in the EEPROM) access
• Value=2: Delete all records in all programs (Before Indices: -
Changeable
initiating this program action, the value 255 has to Type: O2 in:
be entered in parameters U571 and U572 Index 2
Drive setting
respectively)
• Value=3: Delete program (Before initiating this pro- Ready
gram action, the value 255 has to be entered in
parameters U571 and U572 Index 2 respectively)
• Value=4: Delete record
• Value=5: Teach-in (adopting the current position in
set-up mode [819]
n591 The visualization parameter displays the present fault mes- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
FaultMssg P sage of positioning. The value 2000 must be added to the Unit: - Parameter
displayed fault number. Please refer to Appendix A of the menu + Tech-
2591 manual “Motion Control for MASTERDRIVES MC and Indices: -
nology + Posi-
SIMATIC M7” for a description of the fault messages. Type: O2 tioning
U591 is also used for checking a positioning record entered Upread/free
via U571...U90: access
• U591=0 - No fault has occurred
• U591>0 - A fault has occurred with the fault number
2000+U591

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U599* Significance: index1: 3 Menus:

Dist Disp Index 1: Length Resolution: Position of decimal point in Min: 0 Parameter
2599 length unit: Max: 255 menu
0=1 Unit: - Upread/free
1 = 0.1 access
Indices: 10
2 = 0.01 Changeable
Type: O2 in:
3 = 0.001
Drive setting
4 = 0.0001
Ready
Index 2: Length Interpretation
Physical unit of length: 0 = user-defined, 8 ASCII charac-
ters of the customer unit are in the index 3... 10
1 = mm
2 = Inch
3 = Degree
Index 3: User-defined text for unit of length (only relevant
when Index 2 = 0):
1st ASCII character
Index 4: ditto, 2nd ASCII character
to
Index 10: ditto, 8th ASCII character

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.6.20 Technology Synchronism
U600* The parameter defines the connector from index1: 7031 Menus:
Src RecomV which the master setpoint for synchronism is to Unit: - Parameter menu +
Sync be read. Three sources can be indicated which Technology + Syn-
can be changed over via parameter U606. Indices: 6
2600 chronism
The following sources are practical as input con- Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
nectors:
Changeable in:
1. Use of the virtual master axis
The virtual master axis (output connector Drive setting
KK817) is connected to the synchronism via the
SIMOLINK receive buffer, e.g. connector
KK7031.
Thus no dead time differences occur between
the drives connected at the virtual master axis.
Example:
P751.01=817
P751.02=817
The output of the virtual master axis [832.8] is
connected to transmit word 1 and 2 of the
SIMOLINK [160].
U600.01=7031
This signal is collected from the receive double
word 1 of the SIMOLINK [150] and taken to the
input of synchronism [834]. This interconnec-
tion is also practical with the MASTERDRIVES
unit on which the virtual master axis is com-
puted in order to keep the dead time differences
between the drives at an optimal minimum.
2. Use of a real master externally
In this case, the position actual value of another
unit is transferred via SIMOLINK to synchro-
nism. During the transfer, a dead time occurs
which results in an angular error.
3. Use of a real master internally
With the internal master, the encoder of the
master drive is also applied with the slave drive
(without using SIMOLINK) and the master posi-
tion is determined via a dedicated encoder eval-
uation.
In this case, no dead time occurs between the
master and the slave drive.
Index 1-3 [LU] position setpoint
Index 4-6 [%] speed setpoints
Table 5-28: Technology Synchronism

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U601* The axis cycle length is entered here which the Init: 4096 Menus:
MasterAxisCy- synchronization block receives at the input. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
cle However, for a linear axis, zero is entered. Technology + Syn-
Max:
2601 chronism
2147483647
Upread/free access
Unit: -
Changeable in:
Indices: -
Drive setting
Type: I4
Ready
U602* If the operating mode [OPERATION] is to be Init: 0 Menus:

OpMode Sync firmly set, this fixed parameter is forwarded via Min: 0 Parameter menu +
binectors B804/B805.The following function can Technology + Syn-
2602 be selected via U602: Max: 3
chronism
• Value 0: Continuous operation Unit: -
Upread/free access
• Value 1. Engaging action Indices: -
Changeable in:
• Value 2: Disengaging action Type: O2
Drive setting
• Value 2: CatchUp
Ready
U603* The parameter determines the function [FUNC- Init: 0 Menus:

Function Sync TION] of the synchronism if this is required to Min: 0 Parameter menu +
be firmly set. Technology + Syn-
2603 Max: 2
• Value 0: Angular-locked synchronism 1:1 chronism
Unit: -
• Value 1:Electronic gearbox Upread/free access
• Value 2: Cam Indices: -
Changeable in:
Type: O2
Drive setting
Ready
U604* The parameter defines the gear factor for syn- index1: 1 Menus:
GearFactor chronism. The transmission ratio is indicated as Min: -32767 Parameter menu +
Fixed a quotient. Index 1 defines the numerator, Technology + Syn-
Index 2 the denominator. Max: 32767
2604 chronism
U604.01 Unit: -
Upread/free access
Gear factor = ----------------------- Indices: 2
Changeable in:
U604.02 Type: I2
Drive setting
Ready
U605* The parameter defines the source for the gear index1: 804 Menus:
Src GearFactor factor. The numerator is connected via Index 1, Unit: - Parameter menu +
the denominator via Index 2. Technology + Syn-
2605 Indices: 2
chronism
Type: L2,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Table 5-28: Technology Synchronism (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U606* Changeover for the master setpoint of the axis Init: 0 Menus:
SrcRecomVal for synchronism. The following master setpoint Min: 0 Parameter menu +
sources can, for example, be interconnected via Technology + Syn-
2606 U600: Max: 2
chronism
• 0 = external master Unit: -
Upread/free access
• 1 = internal master Indices: -
Changeable in:
• 2 = virtual master Type: I2
Drive setting
Ready
U607* Index 1: index1: 0,00 Menus:

Norm V-Max Rated master speed slave: [1000LU/min] Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
2607 As an alternative to MD 23, via this parameter Max: Technology + Syn-
greater values than the limited values of the chronism
20000000,00
machine data can also be entered (with two Upread/free access
places after the decimal point). Unit: -
Changeable in:
If a value greater than zero is entered here, the Indices: 2
Drive setting
MD23 is no longer used in synchronization. Type: O4
Ready
Index 2:
Rated master speed master [1000LU/min]
At the input of synchronization, the synchroniz-
ing speed from the position setpoint is used for
calculation if a percent input is not used. If a
value greater than zero is entered here, the
MD23 is no longer used as a rated master speed
master in synchronization.
Special feature: input with two places after the
decimal point.
U608* If the master setpoint exceeds the clutch posi- Init: 0 Menus:
CouplePosition tion, the engaging/disengaging cycle is started, Min: - Parameter menu +
prior to which the enable signal must be given. Technology + Syn-
2608 2147483648
chronism
Max:
Upread/free access
2147483647
Changeable in:
Unit: -
Drive setting
Indices: -
Ready
Type: I4

SrcOffset- Selection of the offset value for the engaging Unit: - Parameter menu +
ClutchP position during engaging/disengaging action. Indices: 2 Technology + Syn-
2609 This value is added to the engaging position in chronism
parameter U608. Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Index 2: Changeable in:
Selection of the disengaging position. Only Drive setting
effective if configuration of engaging/disengag-
ing U475 = 1. Parameter U608 has no influence
on the disengaging position

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U610* The parameter determines the number of LU Init: 1 Menus:

OnOff Ramp increments in which the engaging/disengaging Min: 0 Parameter menu +
action accelerates to master speed. Technology + Syn-
2610 Max:
Example: chronism
2147483647
engaging Upread/free access
Unit: -
Ramp = 10000 LU increments Changeable in:
Indices: -
Engaging length = 100000 LU increments Drive setting
Type: I4
After the start of engaging action, the drive Ready
accelerates in (ramp/2) =5000 inc. up to the
master speed, travels synchronously along the
(engaging length ramp) = (100000-10000) =
90000 inc. with the master setpoint and is then
shut down in 5000 increments.
U611* The parameter determines the number of incre- Init: 0 Menus:

OnOff Length ments for the master setpoint which are to be Min: 0 Parameter menu +
engaged/disengaged in total. Example see Technology + Syn-
2611 U610. Max:
chronism
2147483647
Upread/free access
Unit: -
Changeable in:
Indices: -
Drive setting
Type: I4
Ready
U612* The parameter defines the binectors for index1: 0 Menus:

SrcRelStart/ enabling the engaging/disengaging action. The Unit: - Parameter menu +
Stop engaging/disengaging action can either be per- Technology + Syn-
manently enabled via a steady state signal or Indices: 3
2612 chronism
started via an edge only for one engaging/dis- Type: L2,B
engaging cycle. Upread/free access
From V1.6 with a special engaging/disengaging Changeable in:

configuration (U475=1). Drive setting
If the “continuous” constant enable signal is
continuously output (at U612.3, where U612.1
has to be 0), the engaging/disengaging cycle is
started when the engaging position is over trav-
elled. If the “continuous” constant enable signal
is removed, the engaging/disengaging cycle is
finished when the disengaging position is over
travelled.
• U612.1: Source for constant enable
• U612.2: Source for the single enable
• U613.3: Source for “continuous” constant
enable

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U613* Parameter for offset of the clutch position in Init: 0 Menus:

ClutchPosOff- [LU]. As standard, it is connected to the input Min: - Parameter menu +
set connector offset clutch position (U609). Technology + Syn-
2147483648
2613 chronism
Max:
Upread/free access
2147483647
Changeable in:
Unit: -
Drive setting
Indices: -
Ready
Type: I4
U614* Operating mode for scaling of the table: Init: 0 Menus:

OperMode 0 = Scaling of the Y-axis is effective all the Unit: - Parameter menu +
TabSync time, a jump has to be reckoned with at the Indices: - Technology + Syn-
2614 output if scaling of the Y-axis is changed. chronism
Type: L2
1 = Scaling of the Y axis is only effective if Upread/free access
binector “Synchronize table” (U621) = 1. Changeable in:
If the binector “Synchronize table” selected via Drive setting
U621 = 0, scaling is adopted upon starting the
next axis cycle (this only applies if the “continu- Ready
ous output” operating mode has been activated
via U616=xx0x).
U615* Table configuration Init: 1 Menus:

TableConfig The parameter determines how the interpola- Unit: - Parameter menu +
2615 tion points are distributed to the tables, or how Indices: - Technology + Syn-
many tables are selectable. chronism
Type: L2
Use can be made of: Upread/free access
• one table with 400 interpolation points Changeable in:
(parameter value = 0) Drive setting
• two tables each with 200 interpolation Ready
points (parameter value = 1)
• four tables each with 100 interpolation
• eight tables each with 50 interpolation
• up to eight tables with as many interpola-
tion points of the possible 400 as desired
(parameter value = 4).
NOTICE
Parameter values 10 to 14 for spe-
cial applications; only after consul-
tation with the local P&H MinePro
Office. The parameter can be
changed only if the mode table is
not selected.
Changing the configuration sets the status
(U617) of the table to “untested” or “non-exis-
tent”

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U616* The four positions of the parameter value deter- Init: 0 Menus:
Mode Table mine the operating mode of the table. Unit: - Parameter menu +
2616 “One’s” digit: Indices: - Technology + Syn-
chronism
• Value=0: Output absolute Type: L2
• Value=1: Output relative Upread/free access
“Ten’s” digit: Changeable in:
• Value=0: continuous output Drive setting
• Value=1: Stop at table end Ready
“Hundred’s” digit:
• Value=0: without scaling of X-axis
• Value=1: with scaling of X-axis
“Thousand’s” digit:
• Value=0: without scaling of Y-axis
• Value=1: with scaling of Y-axis
U617* The parameter starts the table check. A table index1: 2 Menus:
Check Table can only be operated if it is checked before- Min: 0 Parameter menu +
hand. If table values are changed, U617 is auto- Technology + Syn-
2617 matically set to the value 1. The value 1 means Max: 99
chronism
that the table is not checked. If U617 is set to Unit: -
the value 2, table checking is carried out. If the Upread/free access
Indices: 8
check is successful, U617 is automatically set to Changeable in:
the value 0. Type: O2
Drive setting
If, on the other hand, an error was found during
Ready
the check, U617 is set to the value 1 again and,
parallel to this, the incorrect parameter number
is output at n642 - n668.8 (see description
U686).
• U617=0: Table has been successfully
checked
• U617=1: Unchecked or incorrect table
• U617=2: Triggering of table check
• U617=10: Table not present
• U617=99: Table should be deleted
The error status to GMC is output as 32-bit
value at connectors KK810, KK811and KK840 -
KK844.
CAUTION
Can be changed only if table is
not selected. Deleting a table
causes the status of parameter
value = 4 to be set to 10, or oth-
erwise to 1.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U618* Selection of the settable input value for the Init: 823 Menus:
X-SetV Tab table (X-axis) Unit: - Parameter menu +
chronism
Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U619 The parameter selects the binector for setting Init: 0 Menus:
Src Set Tab the table to the X-value defined via U618. Unit: - Parameter menu +
chronism
Type: L2,B
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U620* The parameter defines the width of the table in index1: 4096 Menus:
Table Width [LU]. The table width is the maximum value of Min: 0 Parameter menu +
the X coordinate. Technology + Syn-
2620 Max:
• Index 1: for table 1 chronism
2147483647
• Index 2: for table 2 Upread/free access
• Index 3: for table 3 Unit: -
Changeable in:
• Index 4: for table 4 Indices: 8
Drive setting
• Index 5: for table 5 Type: I4
Ready
• Index 6: for table 6
Changing this parameter sets the status of the
associated table to “untested”!
U621 Synchronizing table: Init: 0 Menus:

Src Tab Sync If the operating mode “scaling of Y-axis” (U614) Unit: - Parameter menu +
2621 is at 0, this binector is not effective. Indices: - Technology + Syn-
A jump at the output has to be expected for the chronism
Type: L2,B
“table” operating mode. Upread/free access
If the operating mode “scaling of the Y-axis” Changeable in:
(U614) is at 1, this binector is effective. Drive setting
• 0 = Scaling is adopted in the next axis
cycle
• 1 = Scaling is adopted immediately

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U622* Fixed setting value of X-axis for table. The set- Init: 0 Menus:
SetV Tab (X) ting procedure is carried out via the binector Min: - Parameter menu +
selected by U619. Technology + Syn-
2622 2147483648
chronism
Max:
Upread/free access
2147483647
Changeable in:
Unit: -
Drive setting
Indices: -
Ready
Type: I4
U623* Fixed values for scaling of the X-axis of the index1: 1 Menus:
FixScaleX-Axis table. Min: -32767 Parameter menu +
2623 Scaling of the X-axis means that the input value Max: 32767 Technology + Syn-
of the table (x-axis) is multiplied by a factor. chronism
The factor is made up of a numerator (U623.1) Unit: -
Upread/free access
and a denominator (U623.2). Indices: 2
Changeable in:
Scaling of the X-axis acts in the same way as a Type: I2
gearbox connected ahead of a cam. Drive setting
Ready
U624* The parameter defines the connectors from index1: 806 Menus:
Src Scale X- which the scaling factor for the X-axis of the Unit: - Parameter menu +
Axis table is to be read in. Technology + Syn-
Indices: 2
2624 The scaling factor consists of a fraction with chronism
numerator and denominator. Type: L2,K
Upread/free access
• Index 1: Selects the numerator Changeable in:
• Index 2: Selects the denominator Drive setting
U625* Src Control Word Catch-up Function: index1: 0 Menus:

Src CW Index 1: Unit: - Parameter menu +
2625 [AS_SET] catch-up on/off Indices: 4 Technology + Syn-
chronism
• 1 = halt Type: L2,B
Upread/free access
• 0 = catch up
Index 2: Changeable in:
[EN_POS] Enable positioning Drive setting
• 1 = enable positioning/halt S=S_Pos

• 0 = Travel at positioning speed V=V_Pos
Index 3:
[AS_MOD] Mode for setpoint speed
• 1 = Internal ramp-function generator
• 0 = External or internal ramp-function
generator
Index 4:
CU_TR] Trigger take over halt position
• 1 = Trigger takeover of halt position
• 0 = No takeover

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U626* Setpoints index1: 802 Menus:

Src Setp Catch-up/halt Unit: - Parameter menu +
2626 Index 1: Indices: 3 Technology + Syn-
chronism
Setpoint catch-up speed [10LU/Min] Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Index 2:
Changeable in:
Setpoint catch-up speed [%/VMax(MD23)]
Drive setting
Index 3:
Halt position of catch-up function [LU]
U627* Index 1: Deceleration time during acceleration index1: 1000 Menus:

HLZ-RLZ- 0-60 sec. [ms] Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Round Index 2: Acceleration time of catch-up 0-60 Max: 60000 Technology + Syn-
2627 Sec. [ms] chronism
Unit: ms
Upread/free access
NOTICE Indices: 2
Changeable in:
Type: O2
If acceleration = 0 (U628.1.2 = Drive setting
0), no smoothing is performed Ready
because A = 0 is interpreted as A
= infinity.
U628* Index 1: DECEL1 = halt deceleration index1: Menus:
CatchUpPosi- Index 2: ACCEL1 = catch-up acceleration 204,00 Parameter menu +
Par Index 3: DECEL2 = positioning deceleration Min: -1,00 Technology + Syn-
2628 chronism
Index 4: ACCEL2 = positioning acceleration Max:
Upread/free access
DECEL1: Deceleration used after halting to 20000000,00
catch-up setpoint velocity Changeable in:
Unit: -
ACCEL1: Acceleration used after halting to Drive setting
Indices: 4
catch-up synchronous velocity Ready
Type: I4
DECEL2: Deceleration used after halting to
catch up the halt position
ACCEL2: Acceleration used after halting to
catch up setpoint velocity
Exception:
If CU_TR is used for trigger input positioning
acceleration = positioning deceleration.
Special feature:
For reasons of compatibility, the same accelera-
tions as for DECEL1 and ACCEL1 also apply for
DECEL2 and ACCEL2 for the value 0.01 (factory
setting).

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U629* The parameter defines the number of relevant index1: 0 Menus:

#InterpolPoint interpolation points in the table. If more pairs of Min: 0 Parameter menu +
variables are defined than the number of inter- Technology + Syn-
2629 polation points, these are ignored. Max: 800
chronism
Changing this parameter sets the status of the Unit: -
Upread/free access
associated table to “untested”. Indices: 8
Changeable in:
Exception: Type: O2
Drive setting
In the case of configuration 4 and parameter
value = 0, the status of the associated table is Ready
set to “table does not exist”
U630* This parameter is used to input x-coordinates 1 index1: 0 Menus:

Tab X1-X50 to 50 of the table Min: 0 Parameter menu +
2630 Max: Technology + Syn-
chronism
2147483647
Upread/free access
Unit: -
Changeable in:
Indices: 50
Drive setting
Type: I4
Ready
U631* This parameter is used to input x-coordinates index1: 0 Menus:

Tab X51-X100 51 to 100 of the table Min: 0 Parameter menu +
2631 Max: Technology + Syn-
chronism
2147483647
Upread/free access
Unit: -
Changeable in:
Indices: 50
Drive setting
Type: I4
Ready

Tab X201- 201 to 250 of the table Min: 0 Parameter menu +
X250 Max: Technology + Syn-
2632 chronism
2147483647
Upread/free access
Unit: -
Changeable in:
Indices: 50
Drive setting
Type: I4
Ready

2633 chronism
2147483647
Upread/free access
Unit: -
Changeable in:
Indices: 50
Drive setting
Type: I4
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
n634 This parameter shows the free intermediate Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

FreeInter- points still available in the variable configuration Unit: - Parameter menu +
polPts [(U615 = 0) of the table Technology + Syn-
Indices: -
2634 • Max. value = 400 chronism
Type: O2
• Min. value = 0 Upread/free access
U635* This parameter is used to input y-coordinates 1 index1: 0 Menus:

Tab Y1-Y50 to 50 of the table Min: - Parameter menu +
2635 2147483648 Technology + Syn-
chronism
Max:
Upread/free access
2147483647
Changeable in:
Unit: -
Drive setting
Indices: 50
Ready
Type: I4
U636* This parameter is used to input y-coordinates index1: 0 Menus:

Tab Y51-Y100 51 to 100 of the table Min: - Parameter menu +
2636 2147483648 Technology + Syn-
chronism
Max:
Upread/free access
2147483647
Changeable in:
Unit: -
Drive setting
Indices: 50
Ready
Type: I4

Tab Y201- 201 to 250 of the table Min: - Parameter menu +
Y250 2147483648 Technology + Syn-
2637 chronism
Max:
Upread/free access
2147483647
Changeable in:
Unit: -
Drive setting
Indices: 50
Ready
Type: I4

2638 chronism
Max:
Upread/free access
2147483647
Changeable in:
Unit: -
Drive setting
Indices: 50
Ready
Type: I4

"Uncontrolled Copy"
n639 This parameter passes on the table distribution Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Table Info to the parameter ranges. Unit: - Parameter menu +
2639 In the table configuration (U615 = 4), there are Indices: 16 Technology + Syn-
max. 8 tables with a total of 400 points covering chronism
the areas from parameter XXXX in the odd- Type: O2
Upread/free access
numbered indices to parameter XXXX in the
even-numbered indices in the format:
PMU display: X X X X
THZE
H: 1 = U630
: 2 = U631
: 3 = U632
: 4 = U633
: 5 = U640
: 6 = U641
: 7 = U642
: 8 = U643
Z/E: 1...50 Index of the interpolation point
INDEX 1:
Table 1
The table begins....in Parameter(H), Index (Z/
E)
INDEX 2:
Table 1
The table ends....in Parameter(H), Index (Z/E)
INDEX 3:
Table 2
E)
INDEX 4:
Table 2
INDEX 5:
Table 3
E)
INDEX 6:
Table 3
etc.

"Uncontrolled Copy"

2640 chronism
2147483647
Upread/free access
Unit: -
Changeable in:
Indices: 50
Drive setting
Type: I4
Ready

2641 chronism
2147483647
Upread/free access
Unit: -
Changeable in:
Indices: 50
Drive setting
Type: I4
Ready

2642 chronism
2147483647
Upread/free access
Unit: -
Changeable in:
Indices: 50
Drive setting
Type: I4
Ready

2643 chronism
2147483647
Upread/free access
Unit: -
Changeable in:
Indices: 50
Drive setting
Type: I4
Ready
n644 The parameter shows the table number cur- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
Vis Act TabNo rently selected. Possible display values 1...8 Unit: - Parameter menu +
2644 Constituted by the binary status of U650.1…3 Indices: - Technology + Syn-
table selection switch chronism
Type: O2
Upread/free access

"Uncontrolled Copy"

2645 chronism
Max:
Upread/free access
2147483647
Changeable in:
Unit: -
Drive setting
Indices: 50
Ready
Type: I4

2646 chronism
Max:
Upread/free access
2147483647
Changeable in:
Unit: -
Drive setting
Indices: 50
Ready
Type: I4

2647 chronism
Max:
Upread/free access
2147483647
Changeable in:
Unit: -
Drive setting
Indices: 50
Ready
Type: I4

2648 chronism
Max:
Upread/free access
2147483647
Changeable in:
Unit: -
Drive setting
Indices: 50
Ready
Type: I4
U649* Mode for rounding the Catch Up Init: 0 Menus:

Round Mode 0 = Rounding not active on sudden reduction of Min: 0 Parameter menu +
CU the input value during ramp up. Max: 1 Technology + Syn-
2649 1 = Rounding always active. Harmonics may chronism
Unit: -
occur in the event of sudden reduction of the Upread/free access
input value. Indices: -
Changeable in:
Type: O2
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U650* [TABLE_NO] index1: 0 Menus:

SrcSelTable The parameter defines the binector for selecting Unit: - Parameter menu +
2650 the table. Indices: 3 Technology + Syn-
chronism
• Table configuration 0 => 1 Type: L2,B
• Table configuration 1 => 1...2 Upread/free access
• Table configuration 2 => 1...4 Changeable in:
• Table configuration 3 => 1...8 Drive setting
• Table configuration 4 => 1...8
Depending on the configuration, only the appro-
priate bits (according to the binary code) are
evaluated.
Exception:
In the case of configuration 0, table 1 is always
active.
U651* Parameterizable fixed values for scaling the Y- index1: 1 Menus:

Scale Y-Axis axis of the table. Min: -32767 Parameter menu +
Fix The scaling of the Y-axis means that the output Max: 32767 Technology + Syn-
2651 value of the table (Y-axis) is multiplied by a fac- chronism
tor. The factor is made up of a numerator Unit: -
Upread/free access
(U651.1) and a denominator (U652.2). Indices: 2
Changeable in:
Type: I2
Drive setting
Ready
U652* The parameter defines the connectors from index1: 808 Menus:
Src Scale Y- which the numerator and denominator of the Unit: - Parameter menu +
Axis scaling factor for the Y axis of the table are to Technology + Syn-
be read. Indices: 2
2652 chronism
• Index 1: Numerator Type: L2,K
Upread/free access
• Index 2: Denominator Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
n653 This parameter shows the speed setpoints of Dec.Plc.: 3 Menus:

TG Speed- synchronism in [%]. Unit:% Parameter menu +
Setpt Index 1: Indices: 5 Technology + Syn-
2653 Speed setpoint at output. chronism
Type: I4
Index 2: Upread/free access
Speed setpoint according to displacement angle

and catch-up.
Index 3:
Speed setpoint according to 1:1 function, gear
or cam.
Index 4:
Speed setpoint according to continuous mode,
start mode, stop mode, or catch-up.
Index 5:
Speed setpoint from master setpoint source.
n654 Display parameter for current gear factor Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

BoeGl_Gear.F Unit: - Parameter menu +
act. Indices: 2 Technology + Syn-
2654 chronism
Type: I2
Upread/free access
n655 This parameter shows the position setpoints of Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

TG Pos Set- synchronism in [LU]. Unit: - Parameter menu +
point Index 1: Indices: 5 Technology + Syn-
2655 Position setpoints at output; chronism
Type: I4
Index 2: Upread/free access
Position setpoints according to displacement

angle and catch-up.
Index 3:
Position setpoints according to 1:1 function,
gear, or cam.
Index 4:
Position setpoints according to continuous
mode, start mode, stop mode, or catch-up.
Index 5:
Position setpoints from master setpoint source.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U656* The parameter defines the source of the binec- index1: 804 Menus:
SrcOperMode- tors for changeover of the operating mode Unit: - Parameter menu +
Sync [OPERATION] of synchronism. The mode is Technology + Syn-
selected by two binectors which are coded as Indices: 2
2656 chronism
follows: Type: L2,B
Upread/free access
U656.02 | U656.01
Changeable in:
0 0 = Continuous operation
Drive setting
0 1 = Engaging action
1 0 = Disengaging action
1 1 = Disengaging action
U657* The parameter defines the source for index1: 806 Menus:
SrcFuncSync changeover of the synchronism function [FUNC- Unit: - Parameter menu +
TION]. The function is selected by two binectors Technology + Syn-
2657 which are coded as follows: Indices: 2
chronism
U657.02 | U657.01 Type: L2,B
Upread/free access
0 0 = Angular synchronism function Changeable in:
0 1 = Electronic gearbox function Drive setting
1 0 = Cam function
1 1 = Cam function
n658 The parameter shows the active operating mode Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
Curr Mode [OPERATION] of synchronism. This is coded as Unit: - Parameter menu +
Sync follows: Technology + Syn-
Indices: -
2658 O = Continuous operation chronism
Type: O2
1 = Engaging action Upread/free access
2 = Disengaging action
n659 The parameter shows the active function Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Curr Func [FUNCTION] of synchronism. This is coded as Unit: - Parameter menu +
Sync follows: Technology + Syn-
Indices: -
2659 0 = Synchronism 1:1 chronism
Type: O2
1 = Gear function Upread/free access
2 = Table function
U660* INDEX 1: index1: 0 Menus:

Rel Correct 1 = Enable of position correction Min: 0 Parameter menu +
2660 INDEX 2: Max: 1 Technology + Syn-
chronism
1 = Enable of referencing Unit: -
Upread/free access
Indices: 2
Changeable in:
Type: O2
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U661* The parameter determines the effective direc- Init: 0 Menus:

Mode PosCorr tion of position correction. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
2661 Value 0: Means that the axis is not the one Max: 1 Technology + Syn-
which is transporting the material with the chronism
printing index. Position correction is made in Unit: -
Upread/free access
positive direction. Indices: -
Changeable in:
Value 1: Means that the axis is the one which is Type: O2
transporting the material with the printing index Drive setting
Position correction is made in the negative Ready
direction.
This parameter makes allowance for the fact
that depending on whether the printing index
scanning takes place in front of or behind the
drive, it is necessary to brake briefly and decel-
erate briefly, to compensate for positive dis-
placement.
U662 If the parameter U664 is set to the value zero, Init: 0 Menus:
SetPos parameter U662 is used as the reference posi- Min: - Parameter menu +
PosCorr tion. Technology + Syn-
2147483648
2662 Position correction operates as follows: chronism
Max:
With a positive edge at control bit “Start posi- Upread/free access
tion correction” (U666), the difference between 2147483647
Changeable in:
reference position and the measured actual Unit: -
position is determined upon occurrence of the Drive setting
Indices: -
printing index. This difference is conveyed to Ready
the position correction and reduced with the Type: I4
correction speed indicated at U667. U661
defines whether the correction direction is posi-
tive or negative.
U663* The parameter defines the source for the refer- Init: 0 Menus:
Src SetPos ence position of position correction if this is Unit: - Parameter menu +
var. specified by a connector. Technology + Syn-
Indices: -
2663 chronism
Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U664* Correction type for specification of the reference Init: 0 Menus:

Corr’n Type position of position correction. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
2664 Value 0 = means that the reference position for Max: 1 Technology + Syn-
position correction is specified via U662 as a chronism
fixed value. Unit: -
Upread/free access
Value 1 = means that the reference position for Indices: -
Changeable in:
position correction is specified via a connector. Type: O2
The source for the connector is defined in U663. Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U665* The parameter defines the source for the actual Init: 0 Menus:
SrcActPos position for position correction. Description see Unit: - Parameter menu +
PosCo U662. Technology + Syn-
Indices: -
2665 chronism
Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U666* The parameter defines the source binector for Init: 0 Menus:
SrcStart- starting position correction. Position correction Unit: - Parameter menu +
PosCorr is started with a positive edge. Technology + Syn-
Indices: -
2666 chronism
Type: L2,B
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U667* The measured position difference is reduced at Init: 0 Menus:

PosCorrSpd this speed after position correction has started. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
The correction speed is indicated in 1000 LU Technology + Syn-
2667 increments/minute. Max:
chronism
2147483647
Upread/free access
Unit: -
Changeable in:
Indices: -
Drive setting
Type: I4
Ready
n668 Status of the last checked table: Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Status Table PMU display: X X X X Unit: - Parameter menu
2668 THZE Indices: 8 Upread/free access
Z/E: 1...50 Index of the last error-free support Type: O2
value
H: 1 = U630 error
: 2 = U631 error
: 3 = U640 error
: 4 = U641 error
: 5 = U632 error
: 6 = U633 error
: 7 = U642 error
: 8 = U643 error
T: 0 = no error
1 = Number of support points = 0
2 = Support value > table width
3 = Ascending order of support values (x-axis)
violated

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U669 Reserved for future functions index1: 0 Menus:

TG Unit: - Parameter menu +
ReserveCon1 Indices: 2 Technology + Syn-
2669 chronism
Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U670* 0 = Displacement is processed as absolute Init: 0 Menus:

Mod rel. Offset 1 = Displacement is processed with residual- Min: 0 Parameter menu +
2670 displacement evaluation. Max: 1 Technology + Syn-
chronism
Unit: -
Upread/free access
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Type: O2
Drive setting
Ready
U671* The parameter defines the source for the setting Init: 120 Menus:
Src SetV Outp value of synchronism. The setting value is Unit: - Parameter menu +
transferred to the output with a positive edge at Technology + Syn-
2671 the binector “Set position setpoint”. Indices: -
chronism
It is practical, for example, to set the position Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
setpoint to the current position actual value
before start of synchronism in order to avoid Changeable in:
jumps. Drive setting
U672* With rising edge at the input, the current dis- Init: 0 Menus:
Set_DispAngle placement is set to the setting value of the con- Unit: - Parameter menu +
nector U678.2 (setting input). Technology + Syn-
2672 Indices: -
chronism
Type: L2,B
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U673* Selection of input binector for setting the output Init: 0 Menus:
Src Set Outp position setpoint or synchronism function. Unit: - Parameter menu +
2673 If there is a positive edge at this input, the out- Indices: - Technology + Syn-
put of the block is set to “Setting value output” chronism
U671. Type: L2,B
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U674* Selection of the binector “Enable synchronism”. Init: 220 Menus:

Src Rel Sync The parameter defines the source for enabling Unit: - Parameter menu +
2674 the synchronism. If synchronism is not enabled, Indices: - Technology + Syn-
the output of the synchronism (KK310) is per- chronism
manently tracked to the input of “setting value Type: L2,B
Upread/free access
position setpoint output” (U671). If the position
actual value of the slave axis (e.g. KK120) is Changeable in:
soft wired as setting value, jolt-free changeover Drive setting
to synchronism can be effected at any time.
U675* INDEX 1: index1: 824 Menus:

Rel_Correction Binector source for the enable of referencing of Unit: - Parameter menu +
2675 U660.1 -> B824 Fixed binectors Indices: 3 Technology + Syn-
INDEX 2: chronism
Type: L2,B
Binector source for the enable of position cor- Upread/free access
rection of U660.2 -> B825 Fixed binectors Changeable in:
INDEX 3: Drive setting
Binector source for deleting the remaining dis-
tance during position correction.
U676* 0 - 1: Synchronization with positive edge Init: 0 Menus:

MastSetpSync Unit: - Parameter menu +
chronism
Type: L2,B
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U677* Displacement angle input [LU] index1: 0 Menus:

DispAngle_abs Index 1: Min: - Parameter menu +
2677 Displacement angle absolute 2147483648 Technology + Syn-
chronism
Index 2: Max:
Upread/free access
Displacement angle relative 2147483647
Changeable in:
Unit: -
Drive setting
Indices: 2
Ready
Type: I4
U678* Index 1: Displacement angle absolute index1: 813 Menus:

DisplaceAngle Index 2: Displacement angle setting value Unit: - Parameter menu +
2678 Index 3: Displacement angle relative Indices: 3 Technology + Syn-
chronism
Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U679 Fixed setpoint for the virtual master axis in 10 Init: 0 Menus:
VsetVirtMast- LU/min at KK818 -> U680 (default) Min: - Parameter menu +
Fix 2147483647 Technology + Syn-
2679 chronism
Max:
Upread/free access
2147483647
Changeable in:
Unit: -
Drive setting
Indices: -
Ready
Type: I4
U680* Source of the speed setpoint of the virtual mas- Init: 818 Menus:
Src SpdSetp ter axis if this is to be specified in [10*LU/min]. Unit: - Parameter menu +
VMAx Indices: - Technology + Syn-
2680 chronism
Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U681* Source of the speed setpoint of the virtual mas- Init: 0 Menus:
Src V set % ter axis if it is to be specified in %. For this, the Unit: - Parameter menu +
VMAx speed which should correspond to the 100% Technology + Syn-
value must be indicated in increments/sec in Indices: -
2681 chronism
U682. Type: L2,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U682* Rated master speed of the virtual master axis. Init: 1228800 Menus:
Vrated VmAxis The value indicates which speed in [10*LU/min] Min: 1 Parameter menu +
2682 should correspond to the 100% input value at Max: Technology + Syn-
U681. The value must only be indicated, the chronism
master speed be specified in %, i.e. if U683 = 0. 2147483647
Upread/free access
Unit: -
Changeable in:
Indices: -
Drive setting
Type: I4
Ready
U683* The parameter selects the source for the speed Init: 0 Menus:
Vset (inc/ setpoint of the virtual master axis from: Min: 0 Parameter menu +
s)(%) • 0 = Specified in [%] via U681 Max: 1 Technology + Syn-
2683 • 1 = Specified in [I10*LU/min] via U680 chronism
Unit: -
Upread/free access
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Type: O2
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U684* The parameter defines the source for the control index1: 0 Menus:
Src CtrlSig signals of the virtual master axis Unit: - Parameter menu +
VMAx • Index 1: [R:VM] Reset (V=0) Indices: 3 Technology + Syn-
2684 • Index 2: [ST_VM] Start/Stop (1= Start chronism
Type: L2,B
acceleration) Upread/free access
• Index 3: [S_VM] Set virtual master axis Changeable in:
to initial position
Drive setting
Ready
U685* Acceleration and deceleration of the ramp-func- Init: 204 Menus:

Accel VMAx tion generator in the virtual master axis. Accel- Min: 0 Parameter menu +
eration is specified in [100*LU/s^2]. Technology + Syn-
2685 Max:
chronism
2147483647
Upread/free access
Unit: -
Changeable in:
Indices: -
Drive setting
Type: I4
Ready
U686* Init: 819 Menus:

Src SetV VMAx Unit: - Parameter menu +
chronism
Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
U687* Axis cycle length of the virtual master axis [LU]. Init: 4096 Menus:
Axis Cycle Min: 0 Parameter menu +
VMAx Max: Technology + Syn-
2687 chronism
2147483647
Upread/free access
Unit: -
Changeable in:
Indices: -
Drive setting
Type: I4
Ready
U688* Setpoints of the loops over fixed connectors index1: 0 Menus:

SetpFix- Index 1: Stopping position of the loop Min: - Parameter menu
ConnCatch Index 2: Speed setpoint of the loop 2147483648 Upread/free access
2688 Max: Changeable in:
Unit: - Ready
Indices: 2
Type: I4

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U689* Parameter selects the binector for enabling the Init: 1 Menus:
Src Rel VMAx virtual master axis. If the enable signal is 0, the Unit: - Parameter menu
master axis is not calculated.
Drive setting
Ready
n690 Visualization parameter: Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

PosOutput Position setpoint at output of virtual master axis Unit: - Parameter menu
VMAx [LU]. Indices: - Upread/free access
2690 Type: I4
n691 Indication of speed setpoint of the virtual mas- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Speed OutpV- ter axis in [10*LU/min] Unit: - Parameter menu
MAx Indices: - Upread/free access
2691 Type: I4
n692 The visualization parameter displays the speed Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Speed Setp setpoint at the input of the virtual master axis in Unit: - Parameter menu
VMAx [10*LU/min]
2692 Type: I4
U693 Fixed setpoint for the set value of the virtual Init: 0 Menus:
SetV VMAx master (master axis). Min: - Parameter menu +
2693 With [S_VM] U684.03 set master axis to initial 2147483647 Technology + Syn-
position, the distance in the axis cycle is set via chronism
this fixed connector. Max:
Upread/free access
2147483647
Changeable in:
Unit: -
Drive setting
Indices: -
Ready
Type: I4
U694* Index 1: 0>1 increase displacement angle index1: 0 Menus:

Adjust_DispAn Index 2: 0>1 decrease displacement angle Unit: - Parameter menu +
gle Indices: 2 Technology + Syn-
2694 chronism
Type: L2,B
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U695* The adjusting speed for manual adjustment is index1: Menus:

Adj.Spd Para specified here via binectors U696.1 (+) and 60000,00 Parameter menu +
U696.2 (-). Technology + Syn-
2695 Min: 0,00
chronism
Max:
Upread/free access
20000000,00
Changeable in:
Unit: -
Drive setting
Indices: 3
Ready
Type: I4

DispAngle+ Displacement angle + Unit: - Parameter menu +
2696 0: no adjustment Indices: 2 Technology + Syn-
chronism
1: continuous displacement alteration Type: L2,B
Upread/free access
Index 2:
Changeable in:
Displacement angle -
Drive setting
0: no adjustment
1: continuous displacement alteration

Offset Corr Par Acceleration of the displacement angle correc- Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
2697 tion [1000*LU/s^2] Max: Technology + Syn-
Index 2: chronism
20000000,00
Speed of the displacement angle correction Upread/free access
Unit: -
[1000*LU/min] Changeable in:
Indices: 2
Drive setting
Type: O4
Ready

OffstCorrVFac- Speed adjustment in percent for U697.2 Unit: - Parameter menu +
tor Index 2: Indices: 2 Technology + Syn-
2698 chronism
Speed adjustment in percent for U695.1 Type: L2,K,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Mode Correct Master value synchronization Min: 0 Parameter menu +
2699 0 = shortest distance Max: 4 Technology + Syn-
chronism
1 = only positive direction Unit: -
Upread/free access
2 = only negative direction Indices: 2
Changeable in:
3 = only positive direction with window Type: O2
Drive setting
4 = only negative direction with window
Ready
Index 2:
Displacement angle absolute
0 = shortest distance
1 = prescribed direction
2 = prescribed direction
5.6.21 Technology Positioning
U708 Init: 100 Menus:

Override.Fixed Min: 0 Parameter menu +
2708 Max: 255 Technology + Posi-
tioning
Unit: -
Upread/free access
Indices: -
Changeable in:
Type: O2
Drive setting
Ready
U709* The parameter defines the source for override Init: 859 Menus:
SrcOverride P for positioning. Override influences the travers- Unit: - Parameter menu +
ing speed during positioning. If the parameter Technology + Posi-
2709 value is 0, the override is used by binectors Indices: -
tioning
U710.16 to U710.23. Type: L2,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Table 5-29: Technology Positioning

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U710* Source for the control bits of positioning index1: 0 Menus:

Src PosCntrSig Index1: [TGL_ I] Toggle bit input (MDI block Unit: - Parameter menu +
2710 change on the fly) Indices: 32 Technology + Posi-
Index2:[RIE] Read-in Enable tioning
Type: L2,B
Index3:[STA] Start (Start / Stop positioning Upread/free access
motion) Changeable in:
Index4:[CRD] Clear Remaining Distance Drive setting
Index5: [ACK_ M] Acknowledge M function
Index6: [RST] Reset Technology
Index7:[SIST] Single Step
Index9-16:MDI/Prog No. BitNo. (MDI number
for MDI) (Program number for automatic mode)
Index9:MDI/Prog No. Bit0
Index 17-24: OVERRIDE BitNo. Speed Over-
ride 0...255
Index17:Override Bit0
Index25:[BLSK] Skip block:
Index25:[J_ BWD] Job backwards
Index26:[F_ S] Fast / Slow for setup/referenc-
ing
Index27:[J_ FWD] Jog forward
Index28-31:MODE_ IN MODE_ IN BitNo.:
Operating mode pre-selection (can only be
changed at standstill)
Index28:Mode Bit0
Index29:Mode Bit1
Index30:Mode Bit2
Index31:Mode Bit3

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U720 The automatic record stored in the EEPROM is index1: 0 Menus:

Automati- displayed on parameters. Min: - Parameter menu +
cRecord The automatic record consists of the following 2147483647 Technology + Posi-
2720 data: tioning
Max:
1. Program number / continuation number / Upread/free access
record number 2147483647
Changeable in:
2. Validity bits of functions or values Unit: -
Drive setting
3. 1...4 G-function Indices: 6
Ready
4. Position Type: I4
5. Speed
6. 1...3 M-function / D-number

2721 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2722 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

"Uncontrolled Copy"

2723 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2724 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2725 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

"Uncontrolled Copy"

2726 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2727 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2728 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

"Uncontrolled Copy"

2729 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2730 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2731 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

"Uncontrolled Copy"

2732 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2733 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2734 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

"Uncontrolled Copy"

2735 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2736 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2737 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

"Uncontrolled Copy"

2738 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2739 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2740 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

"Uncontrolled Copy"

2741 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2742 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2743 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

"Uncontrolled Copy"

2744 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2745 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2746 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

"Uncontrolled Copy"

2747 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2748 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2749 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

"Uncontrolled Copy"

2750 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2751 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2752 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

"Uncontrolled Copy"

2753 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2754 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2755 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

"Uncontrolled Copy"

2756 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2757 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2758 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

"Uncontrolled Copy"

2759 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2760 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2761 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

"Uncontrolled Copy"

2762 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2763 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2764 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

"Uncontrolled Copy"

2765 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2766 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2767 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

"Uncontrolled Copy"

2768 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed

2769 data: tioning
Max:
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready
5. Speed
Q.Multiplexer 8 channels: Unit: - Parameter menu +
2 • Index 1: Signal selection Bit 0 Indices: 4 Free blocks
2789 • Index 2: Signal selection Bit 1
• Index 3: Signal selection Bit 2 Changeable in:
• Index 4: Enable signal selection
Drive setting

Q.Multiplexer the multiplexer with 8 channels: Unit: - Parameter menu +
2790 to Type: L2,K,K Upread/free access
Drive setting
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Drive setting
Drive setting

Drive setting
U795* The parameter defines the mechanical trans- index1: 1 Menus:

MechGearEx- mission ratio between the load side and the Min: 1 Parameter menu +
Encod encoder side. Free blocks
Max:
2795 • Index 1: Numerator = Load rotations Upread/free access
1048575
• Index 2: Denominator = Encoder rota- Changeable in:
tions Unit: -
Type: O4
U796* Input signals for the free block “Start position of index1: 0 Menus:
Q.CoPos- external encoder” Unit: - Parameter menu +
TrackEx • Index 1: Source for the double word in Indices: 2 Free blocks
2796 which the revolutions and overflow Upread/free access
Type: L2,K,K
counters are stored in nonvolatile mem-
Changeable in:
ory.
• Index 2: Reserved Drive setting
U797* Definition of the input binectors for the free index1: 0 Menus:
Q.BiPos- block “Start position of external encoder” Unit: - Parameter menu +
TrackEx • Index 1: Reset overflow counter Indices: 2 Free blocks
2797 • Index 2: Reserve Type: L2,B Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U798* Configuration of position tracking (motor index1: 0 Menus:

ConfLTrackEx- encoder): Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Enco • Index 1: 0=rotary axis, 1=linear axis Max: 15 Free blocks
2798 • Index 2: Number of overflows to be Unit: - Upread/free access
tracked for the linear axis. Changeable in:
A maximum of 15 encoder overflows can be Indices: 2
tracked. Type: O2 Drive setting
n799 The parameter shows the status of the position Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
StatLTrackEx- tracking for the external encoder. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Enco • Index 1: Current status of the revolution Indices: 4 Free blocks
2799 counter Upread/free access
Type: I4
• Index 2: Current status of the overflow
counter
• Index 3: Value transferred to the position
control from the motor encoder during
acceleration
5.6.22 Printing Functions
U800* Extrapolator input index1: 0 Menus:

Q.Setpt.Extrap Index 1: Position setpoint input [LU] Unit: - Parameter menu +
ol Index 2: Speed setpoint input [%] Indices: 2 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U801* Input signal for execution of extrapolation, in Init: 0 Menus:

Q.Expol.Error the event of disturbance of communications. Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
U802* Axis cycle length of the position setpoint extrap- Init: 4096 Menus:
AxisCy- olator in [LU] Min: 0 Parameter menu +
cle.Expol Max: Free blocks
Type: I4
Table 5-30: Printing Functions

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U803* Semolina encoder index1: 0 Menus:

Q.SL-Encoder • Index 1: Setpoint Unit: - Parameter menu +
2803 • Index 2: Offset Indices: 4 Free blocks
• Index 3: Actual value Type: L2,K,K Upread/free access
• Index 4: Actual speed Changeable in:
Drive setting
U804* Activate Simulink encoder Init: 0 Menus:

Q.SL Encoder Unit: - Parameter menu +
act Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U805* Axis cycle length for Simulink encoder Init: 32768 Menus:
SL Encoder Min: 1 Parameter menu +
AZL Max: Free blocks
Type: I4 Ready
U806* Parameter for rated speed input in [1000 LU/ Init: 0,00 Menus:
SLE V Rtd min] for the encoder. Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
Type: I4 Ready
U807 Parameter for input of the time constant for the Init: 0,00 Menus:
SLE Deadtime- dead time compensation of the encoder. Min: -100,00 Parameter menu +
Comp Max: 100,00 Free blocks

Ready
U810* The parameter defines the mechanical trans- index1: 1 Menus:

MechGearEn- mission ratio between the motor and the load Min: 1 Parameter menu +
coder side. Free blocks
Max:
2810 • Index 1 Numerator = Load revolutions Upread/free access
1048575
• Index 2 Denominator = Motor revolutions Changeable in:
Unit: -
Type: O4
Table 5-30: Printing Functions (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U811* Input signals for the free block “Starting posi- index1: 0 Menus:
Q.KoPos- tion of motor encoder” Unit: - Parameter menu +
TrackMo • Index 1: Source for the memory double Indices: 2 Free blocks
2811 word in which the speed and overflow Upread/free access
Type: L2,K,K
counters are secured against power sys-
Changeable in:
tem failure.
• Index 2: Reserved Drive setting
U812* Definition of the input binectors for the free index1: 0 Menus:
Q.BiPos- block “Starting position of motor encoder” Unit: - Parameter menu +
TrackMo • Index 1: Reset overflow counter Indices: 2 Free blocks
2812 • Index 2: Reserved Type: L2,B Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U813* Configuration of position tracking (motor index1: 0 Menus:

ConfLTrack- encoder): Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Encder • Index 1: 0=rotary axis, 1=linear axis Max: 15 Free blocks
2813 • Index 2: Number of overflows to be Unit: - Upread/free access
tracked for the linear axis. Changeable in:
A maximum of 15 encoder overflows can be Indices: 2
tracked. Type: O2 Drive setting
n814 The parameter displays the status of the posi- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
StatLTrack- tion tracking for the motor encoder. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Encder • Index 1: Current status of the revolution Indices: 4 Free blocks
2814 counter Upread/free access
Type: I4
• Index 2: Current status of the overflow
counter
• Index 3: Value transferred to the position
detection motor encoder on ramp up
U815* Connector inputs of the 1st single ramp genera- index1: 0 Menus:
Q.EHlEncoder tor (32 bit) Unit: - Parameter menu +
1 LU • Index 1: Source for 16 bit word Indices: 3 Free blocks
2815 • Index 2: Source for 32 bit word Type: L2,K,K Upread/free access
• Index 3: Source for setting value Changeable in:
Drive setting
U816* Connector inputs of the 1st single ramp genera- index1: 0 Menus:
Q.EHlEncoder tor (32 bit) Unit: - Parameter menu +
1S • Index 1: Selection DeltaLU Indices: 5 Free blocks
2816 • Index 2: MOP enable
• Index 3: MOP + Changeable in:
• Index 4: MOP -
Drive setting
• Index 5: Set output

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U817* Parameter Delta LU for 1st single ramp genera- index1: 0 Menus:
EHlEncod1 tor (32 bit) Min: 0 Parameter menu +
DeltaL Max: Free blocks
Type: O4 Ready
U818* Parameter input LU for 1st single ramp genera- index1: Menus:
EHlEncoder1 tor (32 bit) 2147483647 Parameter menu +
LU • Index 1: Upper limit Min: - Free blocks
2818 • Index 2: Lower limit 2147483647 Upread/free access
• Index 3: Fixed setpoint setting value Changeable in:
Max:
Unit: - Ready
Indices: 3
Type: I4
U819* Binector source for positioning enable Init: 1 Menus:

Q.AddDispEn- Unit: - Parameter menu +
able Indices: - Setpoint channel +
2819 Free blocks
Type: L2,B
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U820* The axis cycle length is entered here that the Init: 4096 Menus:
AddDispl ACL synchronization block receives at the input. For Min: 0 Parameter menu +
example, the axis cycle length of the virtual Free blocks
2820 master axis U687 or of the real master U425.1. Max:
In contrast, zero is entered for a linear axis. 2147483647 Upread/free access
Type: I4
U821* Source for displacement angle index1: 0 Menus:

Q.Add.Disp- Index 1: Input of additive relative displacement Unit: - Parameter menu +
lAngle angle Indices: 2 Free blocks
2821 Index 2: Set input of additive relative displace- Type: L2,K,K Upread/free access
ment angle Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U822* Index 1: 0>1 increase displacement angle index1: 0 Menus:

Src AddDispl- Index 2: 0>1 decrease displacement angle Unit: - Parameter menu +
Trig Indices: 2 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U823* 0 = Displacement is processed as absolute Init: 0 Menus:

AddDisplMode 1 = Displacement is processed with residual- Min: 0 Parameter menu +
2823 displacement evaluation. Max: 1 Free blocks
U824* Speed adjustment in percent for U825.2 Init: 1 Menus:

Src AddDispV- Unit: - Parameter menu +
fac Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Ready

Offset Corr Par Acceleration of displacement angle correction Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
2825 [1000*LU/s^2] Max: Free blocks
Index 2: 20000000,00 Upread/free access
Speed of displacement angle correction Unit: - Changeable in:
[1000*LU/min] Indices: 3 Drive setting
Index 3: Type: O4
Rated speed referred to by the output speed in
percent
(KK832)
[1000*LU/min]
n826 Visualization parameter additive offset angle Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

VisPar Displ • Index 1: Remaining offset to add Unit: - Parameter menu +
Act (KK833) Indices: 3 Free blocks +
2826 • Index 2: Current offset (KK834) Technology + Syn-
Type: I4 chronism
• Index 3: Output total offset (KK835)
Upread/free access

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U827* With rising edge at the input, the current dis- Init: 0 Menus:
Set_DispAngle placement is set to the setting value of the con- Unit: - Parameter menu
nector U678.2 (setting input).
Drive setting
Ready
U828* Input of the modulo displacement adder index1: 0 Menus:

Q.DisplAdd Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
n829 Visualization parameter (KK 836) Output of dis- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

VisPar DisAd- placement adder with limitation to ACL [LU] 32 Unit: - Parameter menu +
dMod bit Free blocks
Indices: -
U830* Axis cycle length for displacement adder Init: 4096 Menus:
AZL Dis- Min: 0 Parameter menu +
placeAdd Max: Free blocks
Type: O4 Ready
U831* Input of modulo displacement adder 2 index1: 0 Menus:

Q.DisplAdd_2 Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Vis.DispAd- placement adder 2 with limitation to ACL [LU] Unit: - Parameter menu +
dMod 2 32 bit Free blocks
Indices: -

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U833* Axis cycle length for displacement adder 2 Init: 4096 Menus:
ACL Min: 0 Parameter menu +
DisplAdd_2 Max: Free blocks
Type: O4 Ready
U834* Input of modulo displacement adder 3 index1: 0 Menus:

Q.DisplAdd_3 Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting

Vis.DispAddMo placement adder 3 with limitation to ACL [LU] Unit: - Parameter menu +
d_3 32 bit Free blocks
Indices: -
U836* Axis cycle length for displacement adder 3 Init: 4096 Menus:
ACL Min: 0 Parameter menu +
DisplAdd_3 Max: Free blocks
Type: O4 Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U837* Range for voltage Uzk with reduced DC link index1: 380 Menus:
Lower Uzk voltage. Error message F002 pre-charging is not Min: 10 Parameter menu +
triggered in this voltage range. If the DC link Functions
2837 voltage is lower than the value parameterized in Max: 510
Index 2, binector B856 goes high. Unit: V Drive setting
• Index 1: Minimum Uzk with reduced DC Indices: 2 Upread/free access

link voltage. Type: O2 Changeable in:
• Index 2: Maximum Uzk with reduced DC Drive setting
link voltage.
The value in Index 2 must always be greater
than or equal to the value in Index 1.
The function for operation with reduced DC link
voltages active only if U838 = 1.
In the case of operation with reduced DC link
voltage, the following is to be kept in mind.
Proper functioning of the braking chopper can-
not be guaranteed if the DC link voltage Uzk
rises from the reduced voltage range to the
braking chopper turn-on threshold in less than 3
s. Under such circumstances, the chopper can
fail to turn on and therefore trip out the con-
verter or inverter with fault F006 “Over-volt-
age”.
U838* Parameter for selection of a binector for reading Init: 0 Menus:

Q.Sel.abg. Uzk in the signal for releasing operation with Unit: - Parameter menu +
reduced DC link voltage. Functions
2838 Indices: -
Type: L2,B Drive setting
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Drive setting
U840* Axis cycle lengths of the 32-bit gear. index1: 4096 Menus:
32BGear 1 • Index 1: Axis cycle length input Min: 0 Parameter menu +
ACL • Index 2: Axis cycle length output Max: Free blocks
Type: O4 Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U841* Normalization of the 32-bit gear index1: 0,00 Menus:

32BGear 1 • Index 1: Normalization speed input Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
VNorm • Index 2: Normalization speed output Max: Technology + Syn-
2841 chronism
20000000,00
Upread/free access
Unit: -
Changeable in:
Indices: 2
Drive setting
Type: O4
Ready
U842* Setpoint sources of the 32-bit gear index1: 0 Menus:

Q.32BGear1 • Index 1: Distance setpoint input Unit: - Parameter menu +
Setp • Index 2: Speed setpoint input Indices: 3 Free blocks
2842 • Index 3: Setting value output Type: L2,K,K Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U843* Trigger input “Set output” of the 32-bit gear Init: 0 Menus:
Q.32BGear 1 Unit: - Parameter menu +
Trig Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U844* Factors of the 32-bit gear index1: 0 Menus:

Q.32BGear1 • Index 1: Numerator Unit: - Parameter menu +
Fact • Index 2: Denominator Indices: 2 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U845* Axis cycle lengths of the 32-bit gear. index1: 4096 Menus:
32BGear 2 • Index 1: Axis cycle length input Min: 0 Parameter menu +
ACL • Index 2: Axis cycle length output Max: Free blocks
Type: O4 Ready
U846* Normalization of the 32-bit gear index1: 0,00 Menus:

32BGear 2 • Index 1: Normalization speed input Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
VNorm • Index 2: Normalization speed output Max: Technology + Syn-
2846 chronism
20000000,00
Upread/free access
Unit: -
Changeable in:
Indices: 2
Drive setting
Type: O4
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U847* Setpoint sources of the 32-bit gear index1: 0 Menus:

Q.32BGear 2 • Index 1: Distance setpoint input Unit: - Parameter menu +
Setp • Index 2: Speed setpoint input Indices: 3 Free blocks
2847 • Index 3: Setting value output Type: L2,K,K Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U848* Trigger input “Set output” of the 32-bit gear Init: 0 Menus:
Q.32BGear 2 Unit: - Parameter menu +
Trig Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U849* Factors of the 32-bit gear index1: 0 Menus:

Q.32BGear 2 • Index 1: Numerator Unit: - Parameter menu +
Fact • Index 2: Denominator Indices: 2 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
5.6.23 Basic Positioning
U850* Source basic positioning position setpoints index1: 875 Menus:

Q.EPos POS • Index1: Position setpoint [LU] Unit: - Parameter menu +
2850 • Index2: Position actual value [LU] Indices: 5 Free blocks
• Index3: Position setting value [LU] Type: L2,K,K Upread/free access
• Index4: Position actual value [LU] Changeable in:
• Index5: Checkback signal INPUT [LU] Drive setting
U851* Source basic position V-Max [%] Init: 874 Menus:

Q.EPos V-Max Unit: - Parameter menu +

Changeable in:
Drive setting
U852* Source basic position A-Max [%] index1: 872 Menus:

Q.EPos A-Max • Index1: Acceleration adjustment Unit: - Parameter menu +
2852 • Index2: Deceleration adjustment Indices: 2 Free blocks

Changeable in:
Drive setting
Table 5-31: Basic Positioning

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U853* Source basic positioning SETUP index1: 875 Menus:

Q.EPos STW (Setup: position controlled jogging) Unit: - Parameter menu +
SETUP Indices: 3 Free blocks
• Index1: D_FWD_ACT
2853 • Index2: D_BWD_ACT Type: L2,B Upread/free access
• Index3: SETUP Changeable in:
Drive setting
U854* Source basic positioning POS index1: 872 Menus:

Q.EPos STW • Index1: POS enable (V<>0) Unit: - Parameter menu +
POS • Index2: Absolute/relative positioning Indices: 2 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U855* Source basic positioning SET index1: 0 Menus:

Q.EPos Set • Index1: Set trigger setting value Unit: - Parameter menu +
2855 (U850.3) Indices: 2 Free blocks
• Index2: ENABLE POS Type: L2,B Upread/free access
0 (setpoint = actual value) KK882=U850.3 Changeable in:
tracking mode
Drive setting
U856* Basic positioning normalization speed norm. Init: 12288,00 Menus:

EPos V-Norm maximum speed in [1000LU/min] Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
2856 Special feature: Max: Free blocks
Input with two decimal places 20000000,00 Upread/free access
Calculation: Unit: - Changeable in:
Maximum speed [n/min] (P205) * resolution Indices: - Drive setting
2^(P171) * PFSF (P169,P170 or P180,P181) Ready
Type: O4
U857* Basic position norm. maximum acceleration/ Init: 204,00 Menus:

EPos Norm.A- deceleration in [1000LU/s^2] Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
Max Special feature: Max: Free blocks
2857 Input with two decimal places 20000000,00 Upread/free access
Calculation: Unit: - Changeable in:
(Maximum speed [n/min] * resolution (P171) * Indices: - Drive setting
PFSF) / Time in which the maximum speed is to Ready
be attained [sec.] Type: O4
U858* The axis cycle length is entered here for pro- index1: 4096 Menus:
EPos Linear/ cessing by the block. Min: -1 Parameter menu +
Rnd On the other hand, zero is entered for a linear Max: Free blocks
2858 axis. Upread/free access
2147483647
Exception: Changeable in:
Unit: -
Index 2 applies to the value -1 for transfer from Drive setting
Index 1. (Index 2: -1 => Index 2 = Index 1). Indices: 2
Type: I4 Ready
Table 5-31: Basic Positioning (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U859* Basic positioning window: Init: 0 Menus:

EPos Window Indicates from what position + window width Min: 0 Parameter menu +
OK the signal POS_OK is given Max: Free blocks
Type: I4 Ready
n860 Visualization parameter single position speed Dec.Plc.: 3 Menus:

EPos V-Visual setpoints [%] Unit:% Parameter menu +
% • Index 1: Valid speed setpoints [FP788a] Indices: 3 Free blocks
2860 • Index 2: Active speed setpoints [FP788b] Type: I4 Upread/free access
• Index 3: Output speed setpoints pre-con-
trol value position control
n861 Visualization parameter single position Position Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

EPos S- setpoints [LU] Unit: - Parameter menu +
Vis[LU] • Index 1: Position setpoints set setpoint Indices: 4 Free blocks
2861 [FD788a] Upread/free access
Type: I4
• Index 2: Position setpoints of position
[FD788b]
• Index 3: Position setpoints output posi-
tion control [FD788c]

"Uncontrolled Copy"
n862 The parameter shows the basic position status Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
EPos RM-Sig- in the form of a status signal. Unit: - Parameter menu +
nal • Index 1: Low word of the basic position Indices: 2 Technology + Syn-
2862 status signal chronism
Type: V2
• Index 2: High word of the basic position Upread/free access
status signal
Index 1: Input EPos (K888)
BIT0 = ENABLE_POS
BIT1 = RESERVED
BIT2 = POS
BIT3 = SETUP
BIT4 = POS_TYP_ACT (old: ABS_REL)
BIT5 = D_FWD_ACT
BIT6 = D_BWD_ACT
BIT7 = EXT_REF_OK B888 or B210 = 1
BIT8 = EXT_POS_OK
BIT9 = SET_TRIG
BIT10 = Internal POS_OK (position reached)
Index 2: Output EPos and homing function
(K889)
BIT16 = B860 [POS_OK]
BIT17 = B861 [POS_RUN]
BIT18 = B862 [RFG_RUN]
BIT19 = B863 [RU_ACT]
BIT20 = B864 [RD_ACT]
BIT21 = B866 [FWD_RUN]
BIT22 = B867 [BWD_RUN]
BIT23 = B865 [POS_DELTA]
BIT24 = B868 [SW_E_PLUS]
BIT25 = B869 [SW_E_MINUS]
BIT26 = B888 [ARFD]
BIT27 = B892 [F_REF_WD]

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U863* Source for external POS OK signals index1: 1 Menus:

Q.EPos Ext- • Index 1: POS OK enable external (1) Unit: - Parameter menu +
POSOK • Index 2: Checkback ARFD (axis refer- Indices: 3 Free blocks
2863 enced) Type: L2,B Upread/free access
• Index 3: Checkback reference point Changeable in:
acquired [330.7] (B210)
Drive setting
NOTICE
Index 2 & 3 are ORed, and the
software limit switches are acti-
vated with parameter software
limit switch U865.1, 2 <> 0 and
U858 AZL = 0.
U864 Adjustable delay time of the signal [POS_OK] Init: 0,00 Menus:
EPos Displ (B860) derived from the window evaluation of Min: 0,00 Parameter menu +
POSOK U859.x and actual value. Free blocks
Max: 100,00

Ready
U865 Software limit switch POS/SETUP index1: 0 Menus:

EPos SWE • Index1: Software limit switch positive Min: - Parameter menu +
2865 • Index2: Software limit switch negative 2147483648 Free blocks
Indices: 2 Ready
Type: I4

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U866* Control word EP-SET: index1: 220 Menus:

Q.EPos STW • Index 1: ENABLE_POS_REF = Enable Unit: - Parameter menu +
SET Pos-/Ref.block Indices: 14 Free blocks
2866 • Index 2: REF_ON = Homing ON
• Index 3: POS_ON = Positioning ON Changeable in:
• Index 4: SETUP_ON = Setup ON
Drive setting
• Index 5: POS_TYP = Absolute/relative
positioning
• Index 6: D_FWD = Direction forward
(positive)
• Index 7: D_BWD = Direction backward
(negative)
• Index 8: SPV_RIE = Transfer trigger
• Index 9: SPV_RIE_TYP = Transfer type
setting values triggered/constant
• Index 10: REF_TYP = Flying/sequence
control homing
• Index 11: REF_STOP_FWD = Reverse
cam home fwd.(positive)
• Index 12: REF_STOP_BWD = Reverse
cam home bwd.(negative)
• Index 13: REF_STOP = Stop homing e.g.
axis home position ARFD
• Index 14: REF_D = Preferred direction
for home position acquisition (0=BWD/
1=FWD)
U867* Source basic positioning position setpoints Init: 879 Menus:

Q.EPos SET • Index1: Position setpoint [LU] Unit: - Parameter menu +
POS • Index2: Position actual value [LU] Indices: - Free blocks
2867 • Index3: Position setting value [LU] Type: L2,K,K Upread/free access
• Index4: Position actual value [LU] Changeable in:
• Index5: Checkback signal INPUT [LU] Drive setting
U868* Source basic position V-Max [%] Init: 876 Menus:

Q.EPosSET V- Unit: - Parameter menu +
Max Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U869* Source basic position A-Max [%] index1: 877 Menus:

Q.EPosSET A- • Index1: Acceleration adjustment Unit: - Parameter menu +
Max • Index2: Deceleration adjustment Indices: 2 Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
n870 The parameter shows the basic position status Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
EPos STW Sta- in the form of a status signal. [FD789a] Unit: - Parameter menu
tus Index 1: Input Setpoint / Mode (as K886) Indices: 2 Upread/free access
2870 BIT0 = ENABLE_POS/REF Type: V2
BIT1 = REF_ON
BIT2 = POS_ON
BIT3 = SETUP_ON
BIT4 = POS_TYP
BIT5 = D_FWD
BIT6 = D_BWD
BIT7 = SPV_RIE
BIT8 = SPV_RIE_TYP
BIT9 = REF_TYP
BIT10 = REF_BWD_STOP
BIT11 = REF_FWD_STOP
BIT12 = REF_STOP
BIT13 = REF_D
Index 2: Output Setpoint / Mode (as K887)
BIT 0 = B870 [ENABLE_POS_REF]
BIT 1 = B871 [REF]
BIT 2 = B872 [POS]
BIT 3 = B873 [SETUP]
BIT 4 = B874 [POS_TYPE_ACT]
BIT 5 = B875 [D_FWD_ACT]
BIT 6 = B876 [D_BWD_ACT]
BIT 7 = B877 [PSR]
BIT 8 = ---------------------------
BIT 9 = B893 [REF_DRIVE] (homing active)
BIT 10 = B894 [SPV_RIE_ACKN]
BIT 11 = B895 [REF_D]
n871 Visualization parameter acceleration [%] single Dec.Plc.: 3 Menus:

EPos A-Visual positioning Unit:% Parameter menu +
% • Index 1: UP (SET setpoint) Indices: 4 Free blocks
2871 • Index 1: DOWN (SET setpoint)
• Index 1: UP (position)
• Index 1: DOWN (position)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U872 Backlash compensation: Init: 0 Menus:

EPos Play- Parameter value <> 0: Min: - Parameter menu +
Comp. The backlash compensation serves to compen- 2147483648 Free blocks
2872 sate a mechanical backlash. In the case of an Max: Upread/free access
indirect measuring system (encoder on motor), Changeable in:
after every reversal of direction the backlash is 2147483647
first traversed before effective (real) axis Unit: - Drive setting
motion takes place. Positioning errors are the Ready
Indices: -
result.
Type: I4
A preferred position of the backlash compensa-
tion is input in the form of a sign.
That is:
Positive value = preferred position positive =>
No backlash is taken into account if the first
direction of travel after power up is positive.
Negative value = preferred position negative
=> No backlash is taken into account if the first
direction of travel after power up is negative.
Parameter value = 0:
There is no backlash compensation.
U873 Fixed connectors [%] for basic positioning: index1: Menus:

EPos FK Proc. • Index 1: Speed setpoint [%] 100,000 Parameter menu +
2873 • Index 2: Acceleration setpoint [%] Min: 0,000 Free blocks
• Index 3: Deceleration setpoint [%] Max: 200,000 Upread/free access
Type: I4 Ready
U874* Fixed connectors [LU] for basic positioning: index1: 0 Menus:

EPos FK POS • Index 1 Position setpoint [LU] Min: - Parameter menu +
2874 • Index 2 reference setpoint [LU] 2147483647 Free blocks
• Index 1 Max: Upread/free access
• Index 2
Indices: 2 Ready
Type: I4

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U875* Fixed binectors basic position: index1: 0 Menus:

EPos FBin STW • Index 1: REF_ON = Homing ON Unit: - Parameter menu +
2875 • Index 2: POS_ON = Positioning ONN Indices: 10 Free blocks
• Index 3: SETUP_ON = Setup ON Type: L2 Upread/free access
• Index 4: POS_TYP = Absolute/relative Changeable in:
positioning Drive setting
• Index 5: D_FWD = Direction forward
Ready
(positive)
• Index 6: D_BWD = Direction backward
(negative)
• Index 7: SPV_RIE = Transfer trigger
• Index 8: SPV_RIE_TYP = Transfer type
setting values triggered/constant
• Index 9: REF_TYP = Flying/sequence
control
• Index 10: REF_D = Preferred direction
for home position acquisition (0=BWD/
1=FWD)
U876* Source speed setpoint [%] for position correc- Init: 870 Menus:
Q.EPos REF V- tion/homing block Unit: - Parameter menu +
IN Indices: - Free blocks
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U877* Source basic positioning position setpoints for index1: 871 Menus:
Q.EPos REF position correction/homing block Unit: - Parameter menu +
POS • Index1: Position setpoint [LU] Indices: 4 Free blocks
2877 • Index2: Position setting value [LU] Type: L2,K,K Upread/free access
• Index3: Homing pos. value [LU] (refer- Changeable in:
ence position)
Drive setting
• Index4: Position actual value in the case
of IRQ measured value memory [LU]
(KK120)
U878* Source basic positioning correction value/hom- index1: 0 Menus:

Q.EPos STW ing (position setpoint/actual value conditioning) Unit: - Parameter menu +
REF • Index1: Set position setpoint Indices: 7 Free blocks
2878 • Index2: ENABLE_REF
• Index3: Start REF [measured value valid) Changeable in:
• Index4: Enable REF [REF]
Drive setting
• Index5: REF_ D[preferred direction REF]
• Index6: REF_D_EN [preferred direction
active]
• Index7: Measured value OK [measured
value valid motor encoder

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U879 Basic position home position acquisition, win- index1: 0 Menus:

EPos RefWin- dow widths. Min: - Parameter menu +
dow Window active when homing position acquired 2147483647 Free blocks
2879 for the first time (B888= HIGH) Upread/free access
Max:
• Index 1: Inner window Changeable in:
2147483647
• Index 2: Outer window Drive setting
Unit: -
Indices: 2 Ready
Type: I4
U880* Smoothing time for basic positioning. Init: 0,000 Menus:

EPos Smooth Acts on speed setpoint KK881 and position set- Min: 0,000 Parameter menu +
2880 point KK882 Max: 10,000 Free blocks

Ready
U881* Source for PT1 adaption of the rounding time of Init: 1 Menus:
Q.EPos Pt1 U880 0...10.000(s) in percent. Unit: - Parameter menu +
Adapt The input value of 0...200% is multiplied by the Indices: - Free blocks
2881 time 0...10.000(s). Upread/free access
Type: L2,K
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U882* RESET SET-SETPOINT Init: 1 Menus:

Reset SET- Input of the SET SETPOINT transfer block Unit: - Parameter menu +
SETP [788a]. This input is effective in addition to or Indices: - Free blocks
2882 linked to POWER ON. Upread/free access
Type: L2,B
The RESET has a static action. LOW => Changeable in:
RESET=> y=0 (all valid output values of the set
setpoint transfer are reset). Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U883 Basic position Init: 0 Menus:

EPos REL MOD Positioning mode for relative: Min: 0 Parameter menu +
2883 0: In the case of relative positioning Max: 1 Free blocks
POS_TYP_ACT=1), the content of the position Unit: - Upread/free access
value of source U850.2 is used. Changeable in:
Indices: -
Meaning: Drive setting
Type: I2
In the case of homing on the fly, the corrected
setpoint is calculated in with the travel distance
(SET=ACTUAL)
NOTICE
The correction is performed in the
most direct possible way. Mean-
ing: Direction reversal possible.
1: In the case of relative positioning
(POS_TYP_ACT=1), the internal position value
S_pos (KK871) is used.
Meaning:
In the case of homing on the fly, the corrected
setpoint is not calculated in with the travel dis-
tance (SET<>ACTUAL)
NOTICE
The software limit switches no
longer refer to the actual value of
the measuring system.
n884 Visualization parameter for diagnostics Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:
EPos DIAG Unit: - Parameter menu +

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.6.24 Reserved
U890* With this parameter, Y interpolation points 401 index1: 0 Menus:

Tab Y401- to 450 are entered in the table. The interpola- Min: - Parameter menu +
Y450 tion values are evaluated only for U615 = 10 to Technology + Syn-
14. (The X nterpolation points are then assumed 2147483648
2890 chronism
to be equidistant.) Max:
Upread/free access
2147483647
NOTICE Changeable in:
Unit: -
Drive setting
Only for special applications after Indices: 50
consultation with the P&H MinePro Ready
Type: I4
Office.
14. 2147483648
2891 chronism
Max:
Upread/free access
NOTICE 2147483647
Changeable in:
Only for special applications after Unit: -
Drive setting
consultation with the P&H MinePro Indices: 50
Office. Ready
Type: I4

14. 2147483648
2892 chronism
Max:
Upread/free access
NOTICE 2147483647
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Office. Ready
Type: I4

14. 2147483648
2893 chronism
Max:
Upread/free access
NOTICE 2147483647
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Office. Ready
Type: I4
Table 5-32: Reserved

"Uncontrolled Copy"

14. 2147483648
2894 chronism
Max:
Upread/free access
NOTICE 2147483647
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Office. Ready
Type: I4

14. 2147483648
2895 chronism
Max:
Upread/free access
NOTICE 2147483647
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Office. Ready
Type: I4

14. 2147483648
2896 chronism
Max:
Upread/free access
NOTICE 2147483647
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Office. Ready
Type: I4

14. 2147483648
2897 chronism
Max:
Upread/free access
NOTICE 2147483647
Changeable in:
Drive setting
Office. Ready
Type: I4
Table 5-32: Reserved (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
5.6.25 Basic Unit Management
n900 Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

! CAUTION
ObjectData Unit: - Parameter menu
Service parameter, only for
2900 Indices: 100 Upread/free access
MinePro Service Personnel.
Type: O2
Visualization parameter for interconnecting con-
nectors and binectors according to the setting in
P2905.
The connector and binector parameters and the
respective index are listed with which the con-
nector or binector is linked in P2905.2.
• Index 1 Function number of the first
interconnection
• Index 2 Parameter number
• Index 3 Index
• Index 4 Function number of the second
interconnection
• Index 5 Parameter number
• Index 6 Index
! CAUTION
ObjectData Unit: - Parameter menu
Service parameter, only for
Type: O2
U905* index1: 0 Menus:

! CAUTION
Object- Min: 0 Parameter menu
DataBeg Service parameter, only for
Max: 65535 Upread/free access
2905 Unit: - Changeable in:
Parameter for interrogating a connector or
binector interconnection. The result can be read Indices: 5 Drive setting
out in r2900. Type: O2 Ready
• Index 1 =2 (read connector); =3 (read
binector)
• Index 2 Connector/binector number
(decimal)
• Index 3 No meaning
NOTICE
All connector or binector numbers
are hexadecimal values. These
have to be converted into decimal
values for interrogation.
Table 5-33: Basic Unit Management

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U910* Parameter for deselecting the optional boards in index1: 0 Menus:

SlotDeselect the slots Min: 0 Parameter menu
2910 • Index 1: Basic board Max: 1 Board configuration
• Index 2: Deselection of slot A
• Index 3: Deselection of slot B
• Index 4: Deselection of slot C
n911 Visualization parameter for displaying the board Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Board ID ID. This ID enables various hardware statuses Unit: - Parameter menu +
of the installed electronic boards to be deter- Diagnostics + Mes-
2911 mined. Indices: 4
sages/displays
• Index 1: Basic board Type: O2
Upread/free access
• Index 2: Optional board on slot A
• Index 3: Optional board on slot B
• Index 4: Optional board on slot C
Table 5-33: Basic Unit Management (Continued)
5.6.26 Reserved
U921* DP V3 encoder control word [FD 172.1] index1: 0 Menus:

DP V3 • Index 1: G1_STW Bit0-Bit15 Unit: - Parameter menu +
Gx_STW • Index 2: G2_STW Bit0-Bit15 Indices: 2 Communication +
Type: L2,K
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Drive setting
U922* PROFIdrive V3 Actual encoder values: [FP index1: 0 Menus:

DP V3 Enc 172.1] Unit: - Parameter menu +
ActV • Index 1: actual position G1 (KK120) Indices: 6 Communication +
2922 • Index 2: actual position G2 (KK125) Field bus interfaces
Type: L2,K,K
• Index 3: position meas. value G1 Upread/free access
(KK122) Changeable in:
• Index 4: position meas. value G2 Drive setting
(KK127)
• Index 5: Ref. value G1 (KK124)
• Index 5: Ref. value G2 (Kxxx)
Table 5-34: Reserved

"Uncontrolled Copy"
U923* PROFIdrive V3 Encoder feedback signal: index1: 210 Menus:

DP V3 E Feed- [FP172.1] Unit: - Parameter menu
back • Index 1: Ack. Ref.point records motor Indices: 8 Upread/free access
2923 encoder (B210)
• Index 2: Ack. Ref.point records motor
encoder (B215) Drive setting
• Index 3: Ack. Ref.measuring value
records motor encoder (B212)
• Index 4: Ack. Ref.measuring value
records motor encoder (B217)
• Index 5: Source measuring probe 1
(B16)
• Index 6: Source measuring probe 2
(B18)
• Index 7: Source measuring value valid
motor encoder (B70)
• Index 8: Source measuring value valid
motor encoder (B70)
n924 PROFIdrive V3 Status of encoder interface Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

DP V3 Gx Sta- [FD172.4] Unit: - Parameter menu +
tus • Index 1: Status encoder 1 SD1 - SD12 Indices: 2 Communication +
2924 • Index 2: Status encoder 2 SD1 - SD12 Field bus interfaces
Type: O2
Upread/free access

G1_STW model of PROFIdrive V3 standard. Parameter is Unit: - Parameter menu +
only visible if PROFIdrive V3 is set. Communication +
2925 Indices: -
Type: V2
Upread/free access

G2_STW model of PROFIdrive V3 standard. Parameter is Unit: - Parameter menu +
2926 Indices: -
Type: V2
Upread/free access

G1_XIST2 model of PROFIdrive V3 standard. Parameter is Unit: - Parameter menu +
2927 Indices: -
Type: X4
Upread/free access

G2_XIST2 model of PROFIdrive V3 standard. Parameter is Unit: - Parameter menu
Type: X4 Drive setting

"Uncontrolled Copy"

G1_STW model of PROFIdrive V3 standard. Parameter is Unit: - Parameter menu
Type: V2

Type: X4

G2_STW model of PROFIdrive V3 standard. Parameter is Unit: - Parameter menu
Type: V2

Type: X4
5.6.27 Release and Management Parameters
U950* Parameter for setting the sampling time of the index1: 20 Menus:
Sampling functions with function numbers 1 to 100. Min: 2 Parameter menu +
Times1 Max: 20 Releases
Sampling function with function numbers 201 to 300. Min: 2 Parameter menu +
Table 5-35: Release and Management Parameters

"Uncontrolled Copy"
n957 Parameter for visualizing the sampling time of Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Sampling the internal functions with function numbers Unit: - Parameter menu +
Times 7 701... 800 Releases
Indices: 100
n958 Parameter for visualization of the sampling time Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Automati- of internal functions with function numbers Unit: - Parameter menu +
cRecord 801... 900 Releases
Indices: 100
n959 Parameter for visualization of the sampling time Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

SamplingTime of internal functions with function numbers Unit: - Parameter menu +
s9 901...1000 Releases
Indices: 100
U960* Parameterizing of the processing sequence for index1: 10 Menus:

Func functions 1 to 100. Min: 0 Parameter menu +
Sequence Max: 9999 Releases


Table 5-35: Release and Management Parameters (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"

n967 Parameter for visualizing the processing Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Function Seq 7 sequence of the internal functions with function Unit: - Parameter menu +
numbers 701... 800 Releases
2967 Indices: 100

numbers 801... 900 Releases
2968 Indices: 100

number 901… 1000 Releases
2969 Indices: 100
U976* Individual unit identification number, written index1: 0 Menus:

FID during production of the unit (cannot be Unit: - Parameter menu +
changed!) Releases
2976 Indices: 2
Power section defi-
nition
Changeable in:
Power section defi-
nition
U977* PIN = “Personal Identification Number”. The index1: 0 Menus:

PIN technology functions of MASTERDRIVES MC are Unit: - Parameter menu +
released by entering the correct (unit-specific) Releases + Tech-
2977 individual PIN. Indices: 2
nology + Synchro-
Type: L2 nism + Positioning
Board configuration
Upread/free access
Changeable in:
Board configuration
Drive setting
Ready

"Uncontrolled Copy"
n978 Release of the technology functions Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

Tech Release • 0 => Technology blocked Unit: - Parameter menu +
2978 • 1 => Technology released Indices: - Releases + Tech-
nology + Synchro-
• 2 => Technology released for 500h Type: O2 nism + Positioning
Upread/free access
n979 Checksum of the value of all setting parame- Dec.Plc.: 0 Menus:

PWE Check- ters. Unit: - Parameter menu
sum The following parameters are ignored: Indices: - Upread/free access
2979 U720 to U769, U976, U977 Type: O4

Par # List pt11 Unit: - Parameter menu
Type: O2

Type: O2

Type: O2

Type: O2

Type: O2
n985 Menus:
Par # List pt16 Dec.Plc.: 0 Parameter menu
Indices: 101
Type: O2

Type: O2

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Type: O2

Type: O2

Type: O2

Par # List Unit: - Parameter menu
chg4 Indices: 101 Upread/free access
2990 Type: O2

Par # List Unit: - Parameter menu
chg5 Indices: 101 Upread/free access
2991
n992 Type: O2 Menus:

Par # List Dec.Plc.: 0 Parameter menu
chg6 Unit: - Upread/free access
2992 Indices: 101
Type: O2

"Uncontrolled Copy"

"Uncontrolled Copy"
TripRite® Installation and Maintenance Manual Maintenance
Section 6
Maintenance
6.1 TripRite Drive Maintenance
! WARNING
TripRite Drive units are operated at high voltages. All work carried out on or with the
equipment must conform to local and international electrical codes.
! CAUTION
Maintenance and service should only be performed by qualified MinePro personnel. Use
only P&H recommended spare parts.
! CAUTION
The prescribed maintenance intervals and instructions for repair and replacement must
be complied with.
! DANGER
! DANGER
The power terminals and control terminals can still have hazardous voltage levels even
when the motor is stationary. Only work on a TripRite Drive with power applied when
absolutely necessary.
! DANGER
Never touch energized components within the TripRite drive. When required, follow all
minesite specific lockout-tagout procedures.

Section 6, Maintenance.fm -6.1- Section 6, Version 00 - 10/06
"Uncontrolled Copy"
Maintenance TripRite® Installation and Maintenance Manual
! CAUTION
Various components within the drive are Electrostatic sensitive. Follow all proper ESD
procedure when working on the TripRite Drive. Refer to Topic 2.8 for ESD information.
6.1.1 Replacing the Fans
Two fans are mounted on the lower side of the TripRite Drive, an internal fan for cooling the control electronics and
a unit fan for cooling the power section.
Both fans are fed by the 24VDC supply. The unit fan is switched on and off by electronic control according to the
heat sink temperature.
The fans are designed for a service life of L10 ≥ 35 000 hours at an ambient temperature of Tu = 45°C (113°F).
6.1.1.1 Internal Fan
! WARNING
Make sure that the TripRite Drive is disconnected from the power supply before remov-
ing the old fan and installing a new one. Follow all minesite specific lockout-tagout pro-
cedures.
Step 1: Loosen the 2 mounting screws in the front at the top of the unit. There is no need to remove the screws
because slots are provided in the housing to allow the front of the unit to be released when the screws
have been loosened.
Step 2: Carefully swing the front of the unit forwards (to an angle of about 30°) away from the housing.
Step 3: On the power section, open the locking lever on the ribbon cable connector to the control electronics.
Step 4: Move the cover forward and remove it.
Step 5: Remove the fan connection at connector X20 on the power section.
Step 6: Remove the four fan mounting screws and remove the fan.
Step 7: Install the new fan by reversing this sequence of operations. Make sure that the arrow indicating the
direction of rotation is pointing to the inside of the unit.
6.1.1.2 Unit Fan
! WARNING
Make sure that the TripRite Drive is disconnected from the power supply before remov-
ing the old fan and installing a new one. Follow all minesite specific lockout-tagout pro-
cedures.
Step 1: Remove the four fan mounting screws and remove the fan.

Section 6, Version 00 - 10/06 -6.2- Section 6, Maintenance.fm
"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 2: Disconnect the leads on the fan.
Step 3: Install the new fan in the reverse order.
Step 4: Make sure that the arrow indicating the direction of air flow points to the inside of the unit.
6.2 TripRite Motor
6.2.1 General
Before you install the motor, verify that the shaft is free to turn and all mechanical parts are in their proper position.
Turn the shaft by hand to check for damage to the rotor. Remove the rust preventative coating on the shafts with a
suitable solvent.
6.2.2 Operation
After you complete the mounting and alignment steps, you may make electrical connections. You must follow the
connection diagrams exactly or the motor will not operate.
Verify motor direction before connecting the load. Monitor motor current during the first operation of the motor.
Compare it to the motor nameplate value.
Check the motor cooling right after the start-up. Check it at fifteen-minute intervals until the motor gets to normal
temperature (about four hours at full load).
6.2.3 Permanent Magnet Rotor
Permanent magnets used in the Brushless DC motor are constructed of a highly stable material and will not
demagnetize under normal conditions.
The motors can be disassembled and re-assembled without affecting the strength of the magnets.
! CAUTION
Rare earth magnets generate extremely high mechanical forces. Handle the rotor with
great care. Avoid placing near iron or steel objects.
6.2.4 Maintenance
! WARNING
Frame operating temperatures may be high enough to cause burns. Keep all combusti-
ble materials away from the motor.
Make the first inspection within a few hours after placing the motor in service, to catch problems caused by the
installation.
Check the motor at least once per month after start-up. Preventive maintenance means checking the motor often.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Make frequent checks for excess vibration, loose mounting bolts, odd noises (a steady hum is normal), and high
heat output.
&
'
%

$

#
"
!
!
"

-5!#' =
LEGEND
01. Terminal Block 08. Double Finned Aluminum Frame
02. Stator Connection 09. NEMA Frame
03. TENV Construction 10. Over-temperature Protection
04. Optional Secondary Feedback Device 11. Neodymium Rare Earth Magnet
05. Rear Mounted Holding Brake 12. NEMA Mounting
06. Primary Feedback Device 13. High Capacity Ball Bearing
07. IGBT Class H Insulation 14. Shaft
Figure 6-1: Motor Features (Typical)
6.2.5 Resolver
6.2.5.1 General
The resolver supplied with the TripRite Dipper Trip Motors are a frameless, single speed, transmitter type, mounted
on the back of the motor. The rotor element is mounted on the shaft.
The resolver puts out two sinusoidal waves which are in quadrature, i.e., 90° out of phase with each other. The
leading wave is called the SIN output (S1 and S3) and the trailing wave is called the COS output (S2 and S4).
There is one electrical cycle of each signal for each revolution of the motor. The difference between the two waves
reveals the position of the motor. By looking at the period of the waveforms, the drive can determine the speed of
the motor and by looking at which waveform is leading, the drive knows in which direction the motor is turning.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
R1 + S1
R/W Red
Excitation Sine
Winding Output
(Primary) (Secondary)
R2 S3
BK/W Blk
Cosine
Output
(Secondary)
ES03387a01
S4 S2
Blu Yel
Figure 6-2: Positive Resolver Rotation is CW Facing the Resolver End of the Motor.
Encoder connections to the drive must be run in a shielded cable. There are seven connections to the encoder.
When the motor thermal is run in the 24VDC control circuit, it may also be run in the cable.
" LEGEND
01. Notch
02. Wheel Spacing Hole
! 0# 03. Speed Sensors
0 04. Cable Breakout
0"
0! 05. Position Sensors
0
#

-5!!&&=
Figure 6-3: Encoder
The shield should be connected at the drive end at TB1 terminal 1. The shield on the motor end should be con-
nected to the terminal strip in the motor at terminal 10.
CAUTION
Do not ground the shield at any point.
If there are junction boxes between the motor and the control, install a terminal to continue the shield through the
junction box.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
6.2.5.2 Encoder Alignment Procedure
If a motor has been disassembled, the encoder must be lined up again so that it is properly aligned with the mag-
nets on the rotor and the windings of the stator. Also, if the encoder has been replaced, adjustment of the assembly
is necessary.
Step 1: The encoder feedback assembly mounts in the back of the motor. The hole in the end bell on the junction
box side locates the cable breakout point from the feedback assembly. An end bell mark shows the notch
location.
Step 2: After the feedback assembly is mounted, but before the magnetic wheel is mounted on the shaft of the
rotor, it is necessary to align the rotor with the stator. The connections on the power leads must be made
according to the nameplate. Start with the keyway of the motor shaft in the 12 o'clock position (up) with
the motor standing on its feet.
Step 3: The alignment of the rotor may be done by attaching any battery (such as a 9 volt cell) to the power leads.
The positive terminal should be connected to the T1 lead of the motor, and the negative terminal of the
battery should be connected to the T2 lead of the motor. The rotor will move to the nearest pole. Do not
leave the battery connected or it will quickly be drained.

Figure 6-4: Rotor Alignment
Step 4: With an LED box or meter on the diode scale, put the encoder wheel on the shaft with the white mark
near the cable breakout and turn the wheel on the shaft to obtain the following results (on the meter, an
on sensor will have a low impedance):
• HS1 - ON
• HS2 - OFF
• HS3 - Changing

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Step 5: When the condition in Step 4 is obtained, fasten down the encoder magnetic wheel on the shaft with the
two set screws (90° apart) on the hub. The motor should now be aligned within 3° of its rotation to the sta-
tor.
6.2.5.3 Setting Motor Neutral
The preceding procedure is used at the factory to do the initial setting of the encoder alignment. Factory alignment
marks are placed on the end bell for the position of the notch on the feedback assembly, and on the motor shaft
and encoder magnetic wheel to show the alignment of the encoder parts. The previous procedure can be
bypassed if the factory marks are plainly evident and the motor has not been rewound.
Step 1: Connect a true RMS AC voltmeter to motor leads T1 and T2. Do not use a peak-reading meter.
Step 2: Run the motor with no load at rated RPM in the forward direction and note the AC voltage level on the
meter.
Step 3: Run the motor in the reverse direction at rated RPM and note the voltage on the meter.
Step 4: Adjust the feedback assembly (by loosening the two mounting screws) a few degrees left or right to
equalize the AC voltage in both directions.
Step 5: Or, adjust the shaft mounted coupling a few degrees to equalize the voltage in both directions.
6.2.6 Routine Motor Maintenance
Observe the motor during operation, checking for excess vibration, unusual noises and excess heat.
6.2.6.1 Vibration
1. Check for signs of excess vibration. It may be the result of poor alignment, worn or loose couplings or sheaves,
or damaged bearings. Excess vibration causes damage to the bearings, shaft, mounting feet and accessories.
2. Noise on the speed reference input to high performance drives have been known to cause vibration in motors.
3. When checking balance on an unloaded motor, install a half key in the shaft keyway.
6.2.6.2 Noise
1. Listen for noise in the area of the bearing housings. Rubbing noises may be a sign of internal damage.
2. A steady high pitched hum is normal in a motor, and there may be short interruptions of this hum under no load
conditions. If you hear growling or an erratic hum above 20 RPM, check the drive.
6.2.6.3 Temperature
! WARNING
Do not check motor temperature with your bare hand. High temperatures may cause
burns.
1. Motors may run at surface temperatures in excess of 85°C.

"Uncontrolled Copy"
2. Some motors may have surface readings as high as 100°C. Before checking the temperature of a motor,
check the load on the motor. Use a thermal probe for an objective reading
6.2.6.4 Feedback Device
The feedback device is located inside the motor. It requires no maintenance.
6.2.6.5 Brakes
Brakes supplied on TripRite motors are fail-safe, disk type brakes.
6.2.6.6 Bearings and Lubrication
Motors are supplied with permanently lubricated bearings.
6.2.7 Troubleshooting
When a motor does not operate as expected, there may be a valid reason other than that the motor is bad. Trou-
bleshooting involves looking at the entire system of motor, control and environment. Problems that occur when a
motor is first put into service are most likely caused by improper connection. Problems that occur after a motor has
been in service for some time period may be due to motor, control or environment.
These troubleshooting tips cover possible problems as well as problems which were seen in the past.
Problem Possible Cause
Shaft Rocks Back and Forth 1. Motor leads T1, T2, and T3 are not connected to the corresponding
terminals on the motor control. T1 must be connected to T1, T2 must
be connected to T2 and T3 must be connected to T3.
2. Encoder or resolver cable is connected to control improperly. Check
the connections per the card supplied with the control. The main
connections involved are the connections involving HS1, HS2, and
HS3.
Erratic Speed 1. Motor is going at or above base speed while cold. Allow motor to
warm up before adjusting maximum speed.
2. Feedback cable from motor to control is defective. Check the cable
and it’s connections per the card supplied with the control.
3. Feedback signals are improper or missing.
4. Loose lug connections. Loose or burned lug connections will result in
erratic current flow to the motor.
5. Severe load variations, such as a high inertia load changing speeds
quickly may result in speed being erratic. Consult with your local
MinePro office.
6. Drive is unstable. Adjust gain and/or stability.
Excess End Play of the Shaft 1. Check for excessive thrust loading on the shaft.
2. Check the tightness of the bearing retainer plate by checking the
bearing retainer plate screws on the non-drive end. (On some
motors, these screws may be partially or completely hidden by the
feedback assembly.)
3. The bearings may be excessively worn.
4. The shaft bearing journals may be worn.
Table 6-1: Troubleshooting

"Uncontrolled Copy"
Problem Possible Cause
Excess Radial Shaft Play 1. Make sure radial loading on shaft is not excessive.
2. The shaft may be loose in the bearing I.D.
3. There may be excessively worn bearings.
4. The bearing housing may be worn.
Excess Vibration 1. The load may be out of balance. Check the load balance.
2. The motor mounting bolts may be loose. Check for tightness.
3. The rotor may be unbalanced. Run the motor unloaded.
4. There may be excessive radial play. See Excess Radial Shaft Play.
5. The bearings may be worn. Listen for bearing noise.
6. Noise on drive speed reference.
Motor Runs Hot Loaded

! WARNING
Do not judge motor temperature by touch. Use a
temperature measuring device.
1. Check ambient temperature. It must be less than rated (40°C).
2. Check the load on the motor. Do not exceed rated current.
3. Check the duty cycle of the motor. It may not exceed 100% RMS.
4. The brake may not be releasing.
5. The bearings may be worn. Run motor unloaded.
6. The rotor may be rubbing the stator. Listen for noise.
Motor Runs Hot Unloaded 1. Check all items under Motor Runs Hot Loaded.
2. The motor control may be misadjusted. Check motor control.
3. The encode or resolver may be defective.
4. The motor may be demagnetized. Check terminal voltages.
Motor Runs too Fast 1. Check the maximum speed setting on the motor control.
2. HS4 and HS5 on the encoder signals may be swapped.
3. Resolver or encoder misaligned.
4. Motor may be demagnetized. Check terminal voltages.
Low Output Torque 1. Improper alignment of feedback device.

2. Open power connection.
3. Open or shorted stator windings.
4. Motor may be partially demagnetized.
Table 6-1: Troubleshooting (Continued)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
6.3 Transmission
6.3.1 General
Service to the dipper trip transmission consists of periodic checks of the lubrication level.
6.3.2 Inspection
Refer to Figure 6-5. Check the gear oil level in the transmission and inspect the transmission for leaks. The trans-
mission is equipped with two pipe plugs on the front of the transmission. Rotate the drum until the pipe plugs are
oriented as shown. Remove the lower plug to check the oil level; the oil should be at the bottom of the oil plug hole.
If the oil level is low, remove the top plug and fill until the gear oil just begins to run out of the level plug. The trans-
mission oil should be replaced with the oil recommended in Table 6-2 every 1000 hours of operation.
Figure 6-5: Dipper Trip Transmission (R53914)

"Uncontrolled Copy"
TripRite Transmission Recommended Lubricants
Ambient Temperature ISO Index AGMA Lubricant P&H Material

Number Specification
-40° to -21°C (-40° to -5°F)(1) VG100 3EP 497D
-21° to 4°C (-5° to 40°F) VG150 4EP 497E
4° to 41°C (40° to 105°F) VG220/VG320 5EP/6EP 497F/497G
41° to 66°C (105° to 150°F)(2) VG460 7EP 497H
Footnotes:
1. For operation in this ambient temperature range, a synthetic oil or multi-grade oil is recommended with a pour point of -
-12°C (10°F) lower than the minimum expected ambient temperature.
2. For operation in this ambient temperature range, a synthetic oil is recommended for proper lubricant life at elevated
temperatures.
Table 6-2: TripRite Transmission Lubricants

"Uncontrolled Copy"

"Uncontrolled Copy"
TripRite™ Installation and Maintenance Manual Index
Index
A
Alarm Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.56
C
Commissioning
Operational Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.19
Setting Hoist and Crowd Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.19
System Power-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
Communications Board Profibus (CBP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
Bus Access Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Bus Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
Diagnosis and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
Fault and Alarm Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
D
Dipper Trip Motor and Drum Assembly
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10
Dipper Trip Motor, Transmission and Drum, Existing, Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
E
Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12
Basic Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13
Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18
Common Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16
Controlling Static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15
Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.18, 1.19
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15
Handling Sensitive Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15
Hidden Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17
Safe Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13
Safe Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13
Sensitivity of Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17
Wrist Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14
Encoder Alignment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6
F
Fatal Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.80
Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.45

TripRiteIOM.fm -a- Index, Version 00 - 09/06
"Uncontrolled Copy"
Index TripRite™ Installation and Maintenance Manual
Index (Continued)
J
Jumper Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
L
Latch Bar Engagement Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Latch Bar Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
Lifted Lead Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
Lubrication, Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11
M
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Replacing the Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
Motor
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
Motor Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
Routine Motor Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7
Setting Motor Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7
O
Operation Guidelines and Suggestions
Operating Suggestions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
P
Parameter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.116
Explanation of Parameter Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.117
Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
Function Diagram Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.23
via the OP1S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15
via the PMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
Q
Qualifications for and Conduct of Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Operator Conduct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
Operator Functional Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
Operator Qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
P&H Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
R
Resolver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
S
Safety
Electrical Safety Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10

Index, Version 00 - 09/06 -b- TripRiteIOM.fm
"Uncontrolled Copy"
TripRite™ Installation and Maintenance Manual Index
Index (Continued)
Electrical Shock Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11
Maintenance Work Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
Operation Guidelines and Suggestions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
Planning the Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
Responsibilities of All Crew Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
Safety For Electrical And Electronic Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
Safety Hazard Indicators, Decals and Signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20
Hazard Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20
Safety Hazard Decals and Signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22
Safety Websites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Schematic Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Basic Electrical Inventory Prefix’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Electrical Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Ground Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Sensor Board Resolver (SBR)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
Software, DriveMonitor, Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21
T
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12
Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
Transmission Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11
TripRite Drive
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
24VDC Output, X100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
Bus Terminating Resistor, S1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
DC Link Bus Module, X3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
Dynamic Braking Resistor Connection, X6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
External 24VDC Supply, X9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
Mains Connection, X1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
Motor Connections, X2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
PMU, Parameterizing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
Precharging Capacitor Unit, X7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
RS232 Jack for OP1S or Drive Monitor, X103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
Safe Off, X533 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
Slot A, Profibus Option Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
Slot C, Resolver Feedback Option Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5

TripRiteIOM.fm -c- Index, Version 00 - 09/06
"Uncontrolled Copy"
Index TripRite™ Installation and Maintenance Manual
Index (Continued)
Terminal Strip, X101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6
TripRite Drive Enclosure Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
TripRite Drive System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
W
Wiring and Sealtite Conduit Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14

Index, Version 00 - 09/06 -d- TripRiteIOM.fm
"Uncontrolled Copy"

Trip Rite Inglés PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Trip Rite Inglés PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

"Uncontrolled Copy"

Copyright © 2006 P&H Mining Equipment, Inc. Peak Services

Peak Services Copyright © 2006 P&H Mining Equipment, Inc.

SECTION 1, Shovel Safety

Copyright © 2006 P&H Mining Equipment, Inc. Peak Services

Table of Contents (Continued)

SECTION 3, TripRite Drive

Peak Services Copyright © 2006 P&H Mining Equipment, Inc.

Table of Contents (Continued)

SECTION 5, Parameters and Fault Codes

Copyright © 2006 P&H Mining Equipment, Inc. Peak Services

Table of Contents (Continued)

Peak Services Copyright © 2006 P&H Mining Equipment, Inc.

SECTION 3, TripRite Drive

Copyright © 2006 P&H Mining Equipment, Inc. Peak Services

List of Figures (Continued)

SECTION 5, Parameters and Fault Codes

Peak Services Copyright © 2006 P&H Mining Equipment, Inc.

List of Figures (Continued)

Copyright © 2006 P&H Mining Equipment, Inc. Peak Services

List of Figures (Continued)

Peak Services Copyright © 2006 P&H Mining Equipment, Inc.

SECTION 3, TripRite Drive

Copyright © 2006 P&H Mining Equipment, Inc. Peak Services

List of Tables (Continued)

SECTION 5, Parameters and Fault Codes

Peak Services Copyright © 2006 P&H Mining Equipment, Inc.

1.1 General Information

1.1.1 Safety Websites

Copyright © 2006 P&H Mining Equipment, Inc. Peak Services

1.2 Safe Operating Practices for Users of P&H Electric Shovels

P&H Mining Equipment, Inc.

1.2.2 Qualifications for and Conduct of Operators

Peak Services Copyright © 2006 P&H Mining Equipment, Inc.

Figure 1-1: Improper Operating Practices Cause Accidents

1.2.2.1 Operators of P&H Electric Shovels

2. Trainees under the direct supervision of a qualified operator.

4. Inspectors qualified to operate the shovel.

1.2.2.2 Operator Qualifications

Copyright © 2006 P&H Mining Equipment, Inc. Peak Services

1.2.2.3 Operator’s Conduct

Peak Services Copyright © 2006 P&H Mining Equipment, Inc.

1.2.2.4 Operator’s Functional Checks

Copyright © 2006 P&H Mining Equipment, Inc. Peak Services

1.2.3 Operation Guidelines and Suggestions

Table 1-1: Do’s and Don’ts

1.2.3.1 Operating Suggestions

1. Plan shovel and truck locations for the shortest swing.

Peak Services Copyright © 2006 P&H Mining Equipment, Inc.

9. Keep dipper teeth sharp.

1.2.4 Responsibilities of All Crew Members

1.2.5 Planning the Job

• Is the surface strong enough to support the shovel and load?

• How and where will the removed materials be unloaded?

Copyright © 2006 P&H Mining Equipment, Inc. Peak Services

1.3 Safety For Electrical And Electronic Equipment

• Never work alone.

• Never receive an intentional shock.

• Only work on, operate, or adjust equipment if you are authorized.

• Don't work on energized equipment unless absolutely necessary.

• Never attempt to repair energized circuits except in an emergency.

• Use only one hand when operating circuit breakers or switches.

• Use proper tag-out/lockout procedures for regular and preventive maintenance.